HD CAMCORDER HDW-F900Rcar.france3.mars.free.fr/Formation INA HD... · Extending the DVP Board Assembly (When you want to check the B side or a part of A side of the SS-92G board).....1-41

HD CAMCORDER

HDW-F900R

MAINTENANCE MANUALVolume 1 1st EditionSerial No. 10001 and Higher : HDW-F900R (SY)

DOWN CONVERTER BOARDHKDW-702

PICTURE CACHE BOARDHKDW-703

HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

! WARNINGThis manual is intended for qualified service personnel only.To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire or injury, do not perform any servicing other than thatcontained in the operating instructions unless you are qualified to do so. Refer all servicing toqualified service personnel.

! WARNUNGDie Anleitung ist nur für qualifiziertes Fachpersonal bestimmt.Alle Wartungsarbeiten dürfen nur von qualifiziertem Fachpersonal ausgeführt werden. Um dieGefahr eines elektrischen Schlages, Feuergefahr und Verletzungen zu vermeiden, sind beiWartungsarbeiten strikt die Angaben in der Anleitung zu befolgen. Andere als die angegebenWartungsarbeiten dürfen nur von Personen ausgeführt werden, die eine spezielle Befähigungdazu besitzen.

! AVERTISSEMENTCe manual est destiné uniquement aux personnes compétentes en charge de l’entretien. Afinde réduire les risques de décharge électrique, d’incendie ou de blessure n’effectuer que lesréparations indiquées dans le mode d’emploi à moins d’être qualifié pour en effectuer d’autres.Pour toute réparation faire appel à une personne compétente uniquement.

HDW-F900R/V1 (E) 1 (P)

Vorsicht!

Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austauschder Batterie.

Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vomHersteller empfohlenen ähnlichen Typ. Entsorgung

gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben desHerstellers.

ATTENTION

Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacementincorrect de la batterie.

Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du mêmetype ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par le

constructeur.Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément

aux instructions du fabricant.

ADVARSEL!

Lithiumbatteri-Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtighåndtering.

Udskiftning må kun ske med batteriaf samme fabrikat og type.

Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.

ADVARSEL

Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosjonsfare.Ved utskifting benyttes kun batteri som

anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.Brukt batteri returneresapparatleverandøren.

VARNING

Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.Använd samma batterityp eller en likvärdig typsom rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.

Kassera använt batteri enligt gällandeföreskrifter.

VAROITUS

Paristo voi räjähtää jos se on virheellisestiasennettu.

Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajansuosittelemaan tyyppiin.

Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeidenmukaisesti.

CAUTION

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or equivalent typerecommended by the manufacturer.Dispose of used batteries according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

For the customers in the NetherlandsVoor de klanten in Nederland

Hoe u de batterijen moet verwijderen, leest u in de tekstvan deze handleiding.

Gooi de batterij niet weg maar lever deze in als kleinchemisch afval (KCA).

Für Kunden in Deutschland

Entsorgungshinweis: Bitte werfen Sie nur entladeneBatterien in die Sammelboxen beim Handel oder denKommunen. Entladen sind Batterien in der Regel dann,wenn das Gerät abschaltet und signalisiert “Batterieleer” oder nach längerer Gebrauchsdauer der Batterien“nicht mehr einwandfrei funktioniert”. Umsicherzugehen, kleben Sie die Batteriepole z.B. miteinem Klebestreifen ab oder geben Sie die Batterieneinzeln in einen Plastikbeutel.

For the customers in the U.S.A. and Canada

RECYCLING LITHIUM-ION BATTERIES

Lithium-Ion batteries are recyclable.You can help preserve our environmentby returning your used rechargeablebatteries to the collection and recyclinglocation nearest you.

For more information regarding recycling of re-chargeable batteries, call toll free1-800-822-8837, or visit http://www.rbrc.org/

Caution: Do not handle damaged or leaking Lithium-Ionbatteries.

2 (P)

1HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Table of Contents

Manual Structure

Purpose of this manual ................................................................. 6

Related manuals ........................................................................... 6

1. Service Overview

1-1. Locations of Main Parts and Circuit Configuration ....... 1-1

1-1-1. Circuit Configuration and Locations of

the Printed Wiring Boards ..................................... 1-1

1-1-2. Locations of Main Mechanical Parts ..................... 1-4

1-1-3. Functions and Locations of Sensors ...................... 1-6

1-2. Matching Connectors ...................................................... 1-8

1-3. Signal Inputs and Outputs ............................................... 1-8

1-4. Removing and Reinstalling the Outside Panel

Assembly ...................................................................... 1-11

1-5. Opening and Closing the Inside Panel Assembly ......... 1-12

1-6. Removing and Reinstalling the Connector Box ........... 1-13

1-7. Removing and Reinstalling the Plug-in Boards ............ 1-14

1-7-1. DCP Board Assembly ......................................... 1-14

1-7-2. DVP Board Assembly ......................................... 1-16

1-8. Removing and Reinstalling the Flexible

Card Wires .................................................................... 1-18

1-9. Removing and Reinstalling the Cassette

Compartment ................................................................ 1-19

1-10. On-Board Switch/Slit Land Description ....................... 1-22

1-10-1. AT-172 Board ..................................................... 1-22

1-10-2. EQ-88G Board ..................................................... 1-23

1-10-3. FP-152 Board ...................................................... 1-24

1-10-4. MDC-13G Board ................................................. 1-25

1-10-5. SS-92G Board ..................................................... 1-26

1-10-6. RP-131 Board ...................................................... 1-27

1-10-7. AXM-33 Board ................................................... 1-27

1-11. How to Eject a Cassette Tape Manually ....................... 1-28

1-12. How to Insert a Cassette Tape While the Outside

Panel Assembly is Being Removed .............................. 1-30

1-13. How to Clean the Heads When the Heads are

Clogged ......................................................................... 1-30

1-14. List of Tools and Measuring Equipment ...................... 1-31

1-14-1. Tools .................................................................... 1-31

1-14-2. Measuring Equipment ......................................... 1-34

1-14-3. Alignment Tapes ................................................. 1-35

1-15. How to Extend the Circuit Board ................................. 1-36

1-15-1. Extending the AT-172 Board .............................. 1-36

1-15-2. Extending the HKDW-702

(DC-110A Board) ................................................ 1-37

1-15-3. Extending the DCP Board Assembly .................. 1-38

1-15-4. Extending the DCP Board Assembly

(When you want to check the B side or a

part of A side of the DVP board assembly) ........ 1-39

1-15-5. Extending the DVP Board Assembly .................. 1-40

1-15-6. Extending the DVP Board Assembly

(When you want to check the B side or a

part of A side of the SS-92G board) .................... 1-41

1-15-7. Extending the EQ-88G Board ............................. 1-42

1-15-8. Extending the HKDW-703 (MY-99 Board) ........ 1-43

1-15-9. Extending the SS-92G Board .............................. 1-44

1-15-10. Extending the RP-131 Board

(When you want to check the B side or

the A side of the PA-340 board) .......................... 1-45

1-15-11. Extending the CCD Unit ..................................... 1-46

1-15-12. Extending the Mechanical Deck Assembly ........ 1-47

1-16. Description on Cassette Mechanism ............................. 1-49

1-17. Adjustments/Setting Items When Boards Are

Replaced ....................................................................... 1-51

1-17-1. DR-614 Board ..................................................... 1-51

1-17-2. CN-2871 Board ................................................... 1-51

1-17-3. PA-340 Board ...................................................... 1-51

1-17-4. RP-131 Board ...................................................... 1-51

1-17-5. TG-256 Board ..................................................... 1-52

1-17-6. CCD Unit ............................................................. 1-52

1-17-7. DCP-43 Board ..................................................... 1-52

1-17-8. MDC-13G Board ................................................. 1-52

1-17-9. MDR-14G Board ................................................. 1-52

1-17-10. FP-152 Board ...................................................... 1-53

1-17-11. EQ-88G Board ..................................................... 1-53

1-17-12. CCM-45G Board ................................................. 1-53

1-17-13. IFA-19G Board ................................................... 1-53

1-17-14. DC-110A Board (HKDW-702) ........................... 1-53

1-18. Contents of the EEPROM, NV-RAM and

FRAM Data .................................................................. 1-54

1-19. Description on the CCD Block Number ....................... 1-55

1-20. Filter Knob Position Adjustment .................................. 1-56

1-21. Memory Backup Battery ............................................... 1-57

1-22. Fuse and IC Link Replacement ..................................... 1-57

1-23. Circuit Protection Element ........................................... 1-58

2 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-24. Upgrading the ROM Version ........................................ 1-59

1-24-1. Confirming the ROM Version ............................. 1-59

1-24-2. When a Memory Stick is Used for Version

Upgrading (AT-172 Board, FP-152 Board,

SS-92G Board) .................................................... 1-59

1-24-3. When the ROM-28 Board is Used for Version

Upgrading (AT-172 Board) ................................. 1-61

1-24-4. When the FL-272 Board is Used for Version

Upgrading (SS-92G Board) ................................. 1-62

1-25. How to Replace the Photo Sensors on

the MDC-13G Board .................................................... 1-63

1-26. Circuit Description ........................................................ 1-64

1-26-1. CCD Block (TG-256 Board, DR-614 Board,

BI-199/200/201 Board, and PA-340 Board) ....... 1-64

1-26-2. Camera System (DCP-43 Board) ........................ 1-65

1-26-3. Video Signal System (DVP-41 Board) ............... 1-66

1-26-4. Audio System (FP-152 Board, IFA-19G

Board, APR-59AG Board, AL-43 Board,

and AXM-33 Board) ........................................... 1-67

1-26-5. System Control (FP-152 Board and

SS-92G Board) .................................................... 1-71

1-26-6. Servo Control System (SS-92G Board,

MDC-13G Board, MDR-14G Board,

and SE-613 Board) .............................................. 1-74

1-26-7. RF System (EQ-88G Board) ............................... 1-75

1-26-8. Power Supply Systems (CNB-23 Board,

RE-186 Board, and RE-187B Board) .................. 1-76

1-26-9. Option Board (DC-110A Board,

MY-99 Board) ..................................................... 1-77

1-27. Unleaded Solder ............................................................ 1-79

1-28. Notes on Repair Parts ................................................... 1-79

1-29. Precautions for use of Condensation Sensor ................ 1-79

2. Periodic Maintenance and Inspection

2-1. Cleaning .......................................................................... 2-1

2-1-1. General Information for Cleaning ......................... 2-1

2-1-2. Cleaning the Upper Drum Tape Running

Surface and Video Heads ...................................... 2-3

2-1-3. Cleaning the Lower Drum Tape Running

Surface and Rabbet Guide .....................................2-4

2-1-4. Cleaning the Stationary Heads .............................. 2-5

2-1-5. Cleaning the Tape Running Path and

Cleaning Blade ...................................................... 2-6

2-1-6. Cleaning the S/T Plate Assemblies and

S/T Slider Assemblies ........................................... 2-7

2-1-7. Cares after Using under Special Environment ...... 2-8

2-2. Periodic Inspection ......................................................... 2-9

2-2-1. Hours Meter ........................................................... 2-9

2-2-2. Periodic Inspection List ....................................... 2-10

2-2-3. Applying Oil to Reel Drive Gear Assembly ....... 2-11

2-2-4. Applying Grease to S Tension Regulator

Assembly .............................................................2-12

2-2-5. Notes on Repair Parts .......................................... 2-14

2-2-6. Recommended Periodic Replacement Parts ........ 2-15

2-2-7. Recommended Replacement Parts ...................... 2-17

3. Error Diagnostics

3-1. When Does the Error Code Appear? .............................. 3-1

3-1-1. Description of Error Codes ................................... 3-2

3-1-2. Details of Error Codes ........................................... 3-4

3-2. Device Check .................................................................. 3-8

4. Setup Menu

4-1. Setup Menus ................................................................... 4-1

4-1-1. Basic Operations of Setup Menus ......................... 4-1

4-1-2. How to Display the SERVICE Menu .................... 4-2

4-2. TOP Menu ...................................................................... 4-3

4-3. USER Menu .................................................................... 4-4

4-4. OPERATION Menu ....................................................... 4-5

4-5. PAINT Menu ................................................................ 4-23

4-6. MAINTENANCE Menu ............................................... 4-36

4-7. FILE Menu .................................................................... 4-51

4-8. DIAGNOSIS Menu ...................................................... 4-61

4-9. SERVICE Menu ........................................................... 4-65

4-10. Setup Menu List ............................................................ 4-77

5. File System

5-1. Structure of File System ................................................. 5-1

5-2. Data Structure ................................................................. 5-2

5-3. Operating the USER File ................................................ 5-3

5-4. Operating the ALL File .................................................. 5-6

5-5. Operating the SCENE File ............................................ 5-10

5-6. Operating the REFERENCE File .................................5-13

5-7. Operating the LENS File .............................................. 5-16

3HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

5-8. Special Saving Items ..................................................... 5-18

5-8-1. White Gain .......................................................... 5-18

5-8-2. Master Gain ......................................................... 5-19

5-8-3. Shutter ................................................................. 5-19

6. Parts Replacement

6-1. CCD Unit and its Components Parts Replacement

Procedure ........................................................................ 6-1

6-1-1. CCD Unit Replacement ......................................... 6-1

6-2. Filter Disk Unit Replacement ......................................... 6-5

6-3. Replacement of the Circuit Boards inside

the CCD Unit .................................................................. 6-6

6-4. Shutter, AUTO W/B BAL Switch and AUDIO

Volume Controls Replacement ....................................... 6-8

6-5. MIC IN Connector Replacement .................................. 6-10

6-6. Rotary Encoder Replacement ....................................... 6-11

6-7. Connector Box Board Replacement ............................. 6-13

6-7-1. Removing the Connector Box Assembly ............ 6-13

6-7-2. Removing the CNB-23 Board and

AL-43 Board ....................................................... 6-13

6-7-3. Removing the IO-202 Board ............................... 6-13

6-7-4. Removing the RM-201 Board ............................. 6-14

6-7-5. Removing the SW-1309 Board and

the AXM-33 Board .............................................. 6-14

6-7-6. Removing the DC IN Connector ......................... 6-15

6-7-7. Removing the DC OUT/HD SDI OUT

Connectors ........................................................... 6-15

6-8. DC-DC Converter Replacement ................................... 6-16

6-9. Fan Replacement .......................................................... 6-18

6-9-1. Replacing the Fan on the Inside Panel

Assembly ............................................................. 6-18

6-9-2. Replacing the Fan in the Unit .............................. 6-19

6-10. Camera SW Ornamental Plate (3) Replacement .......... 6-20

6-11. 50P Fitting Bracket Assembly Replacement ................ 6-21

6-12. MS Lid Assembly Replacement ................................... 6-22

6-13. VF Connector Replacement .......................................... 6-25

6-14. POWER Switch Replacement ...................................... 6-26

6-15. IFA-19G Board Replacement ....................................... 6-27

6-16. Battery Connector Assembly (DC-111 Board)

Replacement ................................................................. 6-28

6-17. CCM-45G Board Replacement ..................................... 6-29

6-18. PS-595 Board Replacement .......................................... 6-30

6-19. IF-794G Board, HN-277G Board and

RX-54G Board Replacement ........................................ 6-31

6-20. SS-92G Board Replacement ......................................... 6-34

6-21. LP-114 Board Replacement .......................................... 6-35

6-22. SW-1312 Board Replacement ...................................... 6-36

6-23. MB-1096 Board Replacement ...................................... 6-37

6-24. Mechanical Deck Assembly Boards Replacement ....... 6-38

6-24-1. MDR-13G Board Replacement ........................... 6-38

6-24-2. MDR-14G Board Replacement ........................... 6-38

6-24-3. SE-613 Board Replacement ................................ 6-39

7. Part Replacement of Mechanical DeckAssembly

7-1. General Information on Mechanical Part

Replacement ................................................................... 7-1

7-1-1. Index ...................................................................... 7-1

7-1-2. Notes ...................................................................... 7-2

7-1-3. Threading-End State and Unthreading-

End State ............................................................... 7-3

7-1-4. How To Eject a Cassette Tape Manually .............. 7-4

7-1-5. About Oil and Grease ............................................ 7-6

7-1-6. Screw Tightening Torque and Washer .................. 7-7

7-2. Upper Drum Assembly Replacement ............................. 7-8

7-3. Drum Assembly Replacement ...................................... 7-24

7-4. Replacement of Brush Assembly for Slip Ring ............ 7-31

7-5. Slip Ring Assembly Replacement ................................ 7-34

7-6. Replacement of AHC Roller Assembly for

Video Head ................................................................... 7-38

7-7. Pinch Roller Assembly Replacement ........................... 7-41

7-8. S-Tension Regulator Band Assembly Replacement ..... 7-44

7-9. T-Tension Regulator Band Assembly Replacement ..... 7-47

7-10. Timing Belt Replacement ............................................. 7-50

7-11. S Idler Assembly Replacement and T Idler

Assembly Replacement ................................................ 7-52

7-12. CTL Head Replacement ............................................... 7-54

7-13. FE Head Replacement .................................................. 7-57

7-14. Holder Assembly Sensor (REC) Replacement ............. 7-60

7-15. End Sensor Assembly Replacement ............................. 7-62

7-16. Full Top Sensor Assembly Replacement ...................... 7-63

7-17. S1, T1, T3 Tape Guide Replacement ............................ 7-64

7-18. (S) Soft Brake Assembly Replacement ........................ 7-66

7-19. T Soft Brake Replacement ............................................ 7-68

4 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-20. Manual Eject Assembly Replacement .......................... 7-70

7-21. S-Tension Regulator Assembly Replacement .............. 7-72

7-22. T-Tension Regulator Assembly Replacement .............. 7-75

7-23. Cassette Stopper Replacement ...................................... 7-78

7-24. Gear Block Assembly Replacement ............................. 7-80

7-25. S Reel Table Replacement and T Reel Table

Replacement ................................................................. 7-83

7-26. Reel Drive Gear Assembly Replacement ..................... 7-87

7-27. Holder Assembly Sensor (ID) Replacement ................. 7-90

7-28. Top Sensor Assembly Replacement ............................. 7-92

7-29. Pinch Arm Assembly Replacement .............................. 7-94

7-30. Threading Arm Assembly Replacement ....................... 7-97

7-31. CUE/TC Head Assembly Replacement ...................... 7-101

7-32. S Slider Assembly Replacement .................................7-106

7-33. T Slider Assembly Replacement ................................ 7-111

7-34. Cam Gear Assembly Replacement .............................7-116

7-35. Mechanical Deck Assembly Removal/

Installation .................................................................. 7-122

7-36. MDC-13G Board Replacement .................................. 7-126

7-37. Capstan Motor Replacement ....................................... 7-131

8. Mechanical Adjustment

8-1. Mechanical Adjustment .................................................. 8-1

8-1-1. Reel Table Height Adjustment .............................. 8-3

8-1-2. S Tension Regulator Operating Position

Adjustment ............................................................ 8-5

8-1-3. FWD Back Tension Adjustment ........................... 8-7

8-1-4. REV Back Tension Adjustment ............................ 8-9

8-1-5. Timing Belt Tension Adjustment ........................ 8-11

8-1-6. T Tension Regulator Operating Position

Adjustment .......................................................... 8-12

8-1-7. S3 Guide Height Adjustment .............................. 8-14

8-1-8. Gear Chain Phase Adjustment ............................. 8-16

8-2. Tape Run System Adjustment ...................................... 8-19

8-2-1. Tape Run Adjustment .......................................... 8-21

8-2-2. Video Tracking Adjustment ................................ 8-27

8-2-3. CTL Head Height Adjustment ............................ 8-32

8-2-4. CTL Head Position Adjustment .......................... 8-34

8-2-5. CUE/TC Head Height Adjustment ...................... 8-36

8-2-6. CUE/TC Head Azimuth Adjustment ................... 8-39

8-2-7. CUE/TC Head Tape-to-Head Contact

Adjustment .......................................................... 8-41

8-2-8. CUE/TC Head Position Adjustment ................... 8-43

8-2-9. CUE/TC Output Level Check ............................. 8-46

9. Electrical Alignment of Camera System

9-1. General Information on Electrical Alignment ................ 9-1

9-1-1. Notes on Electrical Alignment .............................. 9-1

9-1-2. Required Equipment, Fixtures and Tools .............. 9-1

9-1-3. Initial Position of Switches during Adjustment .... 9-1

9-1-4. Gray-Scale Chart and its Maintenance .................. 9-2

9-2. VCO Frequency Adjustment .......................................... 9-4

9-3. TEST OUT Level Adjustment ........................................ 9-4

9-4. VF DC Level Adjustment ............................................... 9-5

9-5. VA Gain Adjustment ...................................................... 9-6

9-6. Black Offset Adjustment ................................................ 9-7

9-7. VSUB Adjustment .......................................................... 9-9

9-8. PA Gain Adjustment .....................................................9-10

9-9. Pre Knee Adjustment .................................................... 9-11

9-10. DCC Pre Knee Adjustment ........................................... 9-12

9-11. Black Shading Adjustment ........................................... 9-13

9-12. White Shading Adjustment ........................................... 9-14

9-13. Flare Adjustment .......................................................... 9-16

9-14. Gamma Correction Adjustment .................................... 9-17

9-15. Knee and White Clip Adjustment .................................9-18

9-16. DCC Knee Adjustment .................................................9-19

9-17. Crispening Adjustment .................................................9-20

9-18. Level Depend Adjustment ............................................ 9-20

9-19. Detail Signal Frequency Adjustment ............................ 9-21

9-20. H/V Ratio Adjustment .................................................. 9-22

9-21. Detail Signal Level Adjustment .................................... 9-22

9-22. Knee Aperture Adjustment ........................................... 9-23

9-23. H. Detail Black Clip Adjustment .................................. 9-23

9-24. V. Detail Black Clip Adjustment .................................. 9-24

9-25. Skin Tone Adjustment .................................................. 9-25

9-26. Zebra Adjustment .........................................................9-26

9-27. Auto Iris Adjustment .................................................... 9-27

9-28. Adjustment upon Replacement of Filter Disc Unit ...... 9-27

9-29. SD VCO Adjustment .................................................... 9-28

9-30. SD Y Level Adjustment ................................................ 9-28

9-31. SD ZEBRA Clamp Level Adjustment .......................... 9-29

9-32. SD ZEBRA Y Level Adjustment .................................9-29

9-33. RPN Concealment ........................................................ 9-30

9-33-1. Manual RPN Concealment .................................. 9-30

9-33-2. When RPN Concealment Does Not Succeed ...... 9-31

9-33-3. Effectively Performing Auto RPN

Recognition .........................................................9-31

9-33-4. RPN Concealment Flowchart .............................. 9-32

5HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

10. Electrical Alignment of VTR System

10-1. Preparation .................................................................... 10-1

10-2. Audio System Alignment ............................................. 10-2

10-2-1. Audio A/D Error Adjustment .............................. 10-2

10-2-2. Audio D/A Error Adjustment .............................. 10-3

10-2-3. AUDIO LEVEL Volume Control

(Inside Panel) Adjustment ................................... 10-3

10-3. CUE Audio Alignment ................................................. 10-4

10-3-1. Bias Trap Adjustment .......................................... 10-4

10-3-2. CUE Playback Level Adjustment ....................... 10-4

10-3-3. CUE Recording Bias Preset Adjustment ............. 10-5

10-3-4. CUE Record Level Adjustment-1 ....................... 10-6

10-3-5. CUE Record Level Adjustment-2 ....................... 10-7

10-4. System Control Alignment ........................................... 10-8

10-4-1. Battery Voltage Correction Adjustment .............. 10-8

10-4-2. Antenna Tuning Frequency

Adjustment (Tele-File) ........................................ 10-8

10-5. Servo System Alignment .............................................. 10-9

10-5-1. Servo System Adjustment Data Initialization ..... 10-9

10-5-2. Capstan FG Duty Ratio Adjustment .................. 10-10

10-5-3. Capstan Add-On Recording Adjustment ........... 10-10

10-5-4. Drum Phase Adjustment .................................... 10-11

10-6. RF System Alignment ................................................. 10-11

10-6-1. RF System Continuous Automatic

Adjustment ........................................................ 10-11

10-6-2. Saving the RF System Adjustment Data ........... 10-12

10-6-3. PB Channel Condition Check ........................... 10-13

10-6-4. REC Channel Condition Check ......................... 10-13

11. VTR Maintenance Mode

11-1. Introduction ................................................................... 11-1

11-2. Operation Procedure ..................................................... 11-2

11-2-1. Identifying Switches ............................................ 11-2

11-2-2. How to Enter VTR Maintenance Mode .............. 11-2

11-2-3. How to Exit VTR Maintenance Mode ................ 11-3

11-2-4. Tips on Operations .............................................. 11-3

11-3. Contents of Menus ........................................................ 11-4

11-3-1. Servo System Self-Diagnosis Mode

(C0 : SERVO CHECK) ....................................... 11-4

11-3-2. RF System Self-Diagnosis Mode

(C1 : RF CHECK) ............................................. 11-14

11-3-3. Audio System Adjustment Value

Check Mode (C2 : AUDIO CHECK) ............... 11-18

11-3-4. SERVO System Adjustment Mode

(A0 : SERVO ADJUST) ................................... 11-19

11-3-5. RF System Adjustment Mode

(A1 : RF ADJUST) ........................................... 11-24

11-3-6. Audio System Adjustment Mode

(A2 : AUDIO ADJUST) ................................... 11-38

11-3-7. Mechanism Adjustment Mode

(A4 : MECHANISM ADJUST) ........................ 11-41

11-3-8. Other Adjustments

(A9 : OTHERS ADJUST) ................................. 11-42

6 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Purpose of this manualThis manual is the maintenance manual volume 1 of HD Camcorder HDW-F900R.This manual is intended for use by the trained system engineers and service engi-neers. The volume 1 describes the information (periodic inspection and mainte-nance, diagnosis, part replacements and adjustment procedures) on the premise ofcomponent level service.

Related manualsBeside this Maintenance Manual Volume 1, the following manuals are available forthe unit.

. Operation Manual (Supplied with this unit)This manual is necessary for application and operation of this unit.Part number: 3-991-852-0X

. Maintenance Manual Vol. 2 (Available on request)This manual intended for use by trained system and service engineers describes(the parts list, semiconductor model list, block diagrams and board layouts)required for parts-level service.For obtaining, contact your local Sony Sales Office/Service Center.Part number: 9-968-282-0X

. HDVF-20A Maintenance Manual (Available on request)This manual is the maintenance manual of the supplied viewfinder.This manual is intended for use by trained system and service engineers, anddescribes the information regarding the service overview, electrical alignment,parts list, semiconductor pin assignments, block diagrams, schematic diagramsand board layouts.For obtaining, contact your local Sony Sales Office/Service Center.Part number: 9-968-559-0X

..... “Semiconductor Pin Assignments” CD-ROM (Available on request)This “Semiconductor Pin Assignments” CD-ROM allows you to search forsemiconductors used in Broadcast and Professional equipment.This manual contains a complete list of semiconductors and their ID Nos., andthus should be used together with the CD-ROM.Part number: 9-968-546-0X

Manual Structure

1-1HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Section 1Service Overview

1-1. Locations of Main Parts and Circuit Configuration

1-1-1. Circuit Configuration and Locations of the Printed Wiring Boards

System Board Name Circuit No.Configuration Function

CCD Block BI-199, 200, 201 CCD Imager #[

CN-2871 Connector for $\DR-614

DR-614 CCD Driver $]

PA-340 Pre AMP #]

RP-131 Pulse Generator #=

TG-256 Timing #/Generator

Camera AT-172 System ![System Control

DCP-43 Camera Processor 2

Video Signal DVP-41 VTR Processor 3System

Audio System AL-43 Audio AMP 0

APR-59AG Audio Volume !,

AXM-33 Connector 9

FP-152 Audio Processor 1

IFA-19G Lens Control #;

System/Servo MDC-13G Mecha Deck @/Control Control

MDR-14G Drum Motor @-Drive

SE-613 Sensor @.

SS-92G Servo/System !.Control

RF System EQ-88G Equalizer @'

Power Supply CNB-23 Circuit Breaker 8

DC-111 Battery DC Filter 6

RE-186 Regulator $/

RE-187B Regulator #.

Connector IO-202 In/Out !-Box

LP-114 Rear Tally 4

RM-201 Connector (RM) @]

Mic MA-103 Mic AMP #'

System Board Name Circuit No.Configuration Function

Others BP-33 Battery !]

CCM-45G TELE-FILE @[

CI-32G 50pin adaptor $[Interface

ENC-61 Rotary Encoder !'

HN-277G Harness #,

HP-103 Headphone !;

HP-104 Headphone 5

IF-794G Interface $-

KY-475G Function Key @,

MB-1096 Motherboard 7

PS-595 Power Supply @=(Light)

RX-54G Wireless $=ReceiverInterface

SW-1312 Light Switch #-

SW-1031 Switch #\

SW-1038 Switch !\

SW-1309 MIC SWITCH $;

TX-78 HDSDI Driver @;

Option DC-110A Down Converter !=(HKDW-702)

MY-99 Picture Cache @\(HKDW-703)

1-2 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

<View of the inside panel assembly>

<Rear view>

1 2 3 4

5

67

$;

9

0

!.43@;

2

![

1

!]

@/

@-

@=

6

@]

9

!-

0@\8 $;

5

7

!-8!=![!]!\!;

!'

!,

@'

@[!=

1-3HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

<View of the outside panel assembly>

<Front view>

#\

!\

$]

$\

!'

#-

#;

!;

#]

#=

#'@-@/#,#.@]

$/

$-

$=

@[

$[

@=

!. @.@, #/ #-

#=

#[

#]

#\

#;

#[

#'

1-4 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-1-2. Locations of Main Mechanical Parts

1

2

3

4

5

6 #\

78

9

0

!-

!=

![

!]

!\

!;

!'

!, !.

@/

@- @=#]@[@]

@\

@;

@'

@,

@.#/

#-

#=

#[

1-5HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1 CCD block2 Fan motor3 Threading arm assembly4 S1 tape guide (on top of S-slider assembly)5 S2 tape guide (on top of S-slider assembly)6 S4 tape guide (on top of threading arm assembly)7 S5 tape guide (on top of S-tension regulator assembly)8 S3 tape guide (on top of threading arm assembly)9 Full erase head0 CTL head!- Brush assembly!= Slip ring assembly![ Cleaning assembly!] Upper drum!\ Lower drum!; T4 guide!' CUE/TC head!, Manual eject gear (A)!. Loading motor@/ Capstan motor@- T3 tape guide@= T5 guide (on top of T-tension regulator assembly)@[ Pinch roller assembly@] T2 tape guide (on top of T slider assembly)@\ T1 tape guide (on top of T slider assembly)@; (T) soft brake@' T reel table assembly@, Timing belt@. S-tension regulator band assembly#/ S reel table assembly#- T-tension regulator band assembly#= (S) soft brake assembly#[ Reel drive gear assembly#] T-tension regulator assembly#\ S-tension regulator assembly

1-6 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-1-3. Functions and Locations of Sensors

1 2 3 4 5

6

6

789

0

!-

!=

ID1

ID2

ID3

ID4

ID5

ID6

1-7HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1 Temperature sensorDetects temperature and drives the fan.

2 Cassette-in sensorDetects whether a cassette is inserted or not.

3 REC INHIBIT sensorDetects REC INHIBIT plug of a cassette tape.

4 Tape end sensorDetects the tape end of a tape that is running in the FWD direction.

5 Full top sensorDetects whether the inserted cassette tape is in the full top position or not.

6 Humid sensorDetects the dew condensation inside the unit.

7 Tape top sensorDetects the tape end of a tape that is running in the REV direction.

8 Function cam sensorDetects the rotary position of the function cam.

9 T-reel table assembly rotation sensorDetects rotation of the take-up reel table with the use of the T-reel table assembly rotation sensor. TheFG generator output of this sensor is input to the servo circuit where diameter of the remaining tape iscalculated.

0 Cassette lock sensor (switch)Detects whether the cassette compartment assembly is locked or not.

!- Cassette ID sensorID1 : Tape type

Detects the tape type (Oxide or Metal).ID2 : Tape thickness

Detects thickness of the tape that is wound in the cassette tape inserted in the set, with theuse of the tab on the rear of a cassette tape.

ID3 : Reel hub diameterThe reel hub diameter of a cassette tape is different depending on the length of a tape thatis wound in the cassette tape. The reel hub diameter sensor detects the reel hub diameterwith the use of a tab on the rear of a cassette tape.

ID4 to 6 : Tape formatDetects whether a cassette conforms to the HDCAM format or not.

!= S-reel table assembly rotation sensorDetects rotation of the supply reel table with the use of the S-reel table assembly rotation sensor. Theoutput of this sensor is input to the servo circuit where diameter of the remaining tape is calculated.

1-8 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-2. Matching Connectors

Use the following connectors at the ends of the cableswhen connecting the cables during installation and mainte-nance, or alternately use the following cables.

Panel indication Matching connectors/cables

GENLOCK IN (RETURN)TC IN 1-569-370-12TC OUT Plug, BNCTEST OUTVBS/SDI OUT*

HD SDI OUT 1-750-489-21 Plug, BNC orBELDEN 8281 or equivalent

AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 1-508-084-00 XLR 3-pin, male

AUDIO OUT Audio cable(XLR 5 pin-XLR 3-pin, 2 m)CCXA-53 made by Sony orequivalent

MIC IN +48 V 1-508-370-00 XLR 5-pin, male

DC IN 1-508-362-00 XLR 4-pin, female

DC OUT 12 V 1-566-425-11 round type 4-pin,male

REMOTE 1-766-848-11 round type 8-pin,male

EARPHONE Mini jack (commercially availableon market)

LIGHT Power tap (OE)Made by ANTONBAUER Inc.,33710 or equivalent

WIRELESS WRR-855A (by Sony) onlyRECEIVER IN connectable

nDo not connect with a connector/cable other than above.

* : Camcorder in which DC-110A board (HKDW-702) is installed.

DC IN : XLR, 4-pin (Male)

_____ EXT VIEW _____

No. Signal I/O Specifications

1 GND _ GND for BATT OUT (+)

2 _ No connection

3 _ No connection

4 BATT OUT (+) IN +11 to 17 V dc

AUDIO IN CH-1, CH-2 : XLR, 3-pin (Female)

_____ EXT VIEW _____

(0 dBu = 0.775 V rms)MIC/LINE INPUT


1 MIC/LINE (G) _ _60 dBu/+4 dBu, selectable

2 MIC/LINE (X) IN High impedance, Balanced

3 MIC/LINE (Y) IN

AES/EBU INPUT


1 AES/EBU (G) _ 1Vp-p, 110Z, Balanced

2 AES/EBU (X) IN

3 AES/EBU (Y) IN

1-3. Signal Inputs and Outputs

InputsGENLOCK IN (RETURN) : 1.0 V p-p, 75 ZTC IN : 0.5 V to 18 V p-p, 10 kZ

OutputsTEST OUT : 1.0 V p-p, 75 Z unbalancedVBS/SDI OUT*1, 2 : VBS 1.0 V p-p, 75 Z unbalanced,

or SDI 0.8 V p-p, 75 Z, 270 MbpsTC OUT : 1.0 V p-p, 75 ZHD SDI OUT : 0.8 V p-p, 75 Z, 1.485 GbpsEARPHONE : 8 Z or more, _∞ to _18 dBu variable

*1 : Camcorder in which DC-110A board (HKDW-702) is installed.*2 : Selectable by the SD REAR BNC OUT in the OUTPUT SEL page of the

menu.

1

2 3

4

12

3

1-9HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

DC OUT 12 V : DIN, 4-pin (Female)

_____ EXT VIEW _____


1 UNREG GND _ GND for POWER

2 _ No connection

3 _ No connection

4 UNREG +12 V OUT +11 to 17 V dc

AUDIO OUT : XLR, 5-pin (Male)

_____ EXT VIEW _____

(0 dBu = 0.775 V rms)


1 ANALOG GND _

2 AUDIO CH-1 (X) OUT 0 dBm (600 Z terminated)

3 AUDIO CH-1 (Y) OUT

4 AUDIO CH-2 (X) OUT

5 AUDIO CH-2 (Y) OUT

BATT IN : 5-pin (Male)

_____ EXT VIEW _____


1 BATT (_) IN

2 BATT ID IN

3 BATT REM IN

4 LIGHT CONT OUT

5 BATT (+) IN +11 to 17 V dc

LENS : 12-pin (Female)

_____ EXT VIEW _____


1 RET (SW) IN ON : 0 V, OFF : OPEN

2 VTR TRIG IN ON : 0 V, OFF : OPEN

3 LENS GND _

4 AUTO +5 V IN AUTO : +5 V,MANU : 0 V or OPEN

5 IRIS CONT OUT +3.4 V (F16) to +6.2 V (F2.8)

6 UNREG +12 V OUT +11 V to 17 V

7 IRIS PSTN IN +3.4 V (F16) to +6.2 V (F2.8)

8 REMOTE/LOCAL OUT AUTO IRIS : 0 VMANUAL IRIS : +5 V

9 EXTENDER IN EX 2 ON : 0 VEX 0.8 ON : +1.8 VOFF : +4.8 V

10 ZOOM PSTN IN WIDE : 2 V, TELE : 7 V

11 LENS RX

12 LENS TX

WIRELESS RECEIVER IN : D-sub, 15-pin (Female)

_____ EXT VIEW _____


1 GND _ GND for AUDIO IN

2 AUDIO IN IN WIRELESS RECEIVERAUDIO IN

3 _

4 DC +7V OUT OUT

5 GND _

6 _

7 _

8 GND _

9 WRR CLK IN WRR SERIAL CLOCK

10 CS OUT WRR SELECT

11 WRR DI OUT WRR SERIAL IN

12 WRR DO IN WRR SERIAL OUT

13 _

14 EXT OSC OUT _

15 OSC GND _

14

3 2

1

23

4

5

1 2 3 4 5

123

45678

90!-!=

18

915

1-10 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

VF : 20-pin (Female)

_____ EXT VIEW _____


1 SDA VF I/O TTL level

2 _ No connection

3 _ No connection

4 SCL VF OUT TTL level

5 COLOR/BW IN ON : Color, OFF : B/W

6 _ No connection

7 _ No connection

8 G TALLY OUT ON : 5 V, OFF : GND

9 VF PEAKING CTL OUT 1.0 V p-p, Zo = 75 Z

10 _ No connection

11 _ No connection

12 VF VIDEO (Y) OUT 1.0 V p-p, Zo = 75 Z

13 VF VIDEO GND _ GND for VIDEO

14 VF VIDEO (Pb) OUT ±0.35 V p-p, Zo = 75 Z

15 VF VIDEO (Pr) OUT ±0.35 V p-p, Zo = 75 Z

16 _ No connection

17 R TALLY (UP) OUT ON : 5 V, OFF : GND

18 _ No connection

19 VF GND _ GND for VF


REMOTE : 8-pin (Female)

_____ EXT VIEW _____


1 TX RCP DATA (X) OUT SERIAL DATA OUT

2 TX RCP DATA (Y) OUT SERIAL DATA OUT

3 RX RCP DATA (X) IN SERIAL DATA IN

4 RX RCP DATA (Y) IN SERIAL DATA IN

5 TX GND _ GND for TX


7 UNREG (GND) _ GND for UNREG

8 Y OUT 1.0 V p-p, Zo = 75 Z

CHASSIS GND _ CHASSIS GND

LIGHT : 2-pin (Female)

_____ EXT VIEW _____

No. Signal Specifications

1 LIGHT +12 V OUT 50 W MAX

2 GND

MIC IN +++++48 V : XLR, 5-pin (Female)

_____ EXT VIEW _____

(0 dBu = 0.775 V rms)


1 CAM MIC (G) _ _50 dBu

2 CAM MIC1 (X) IN High impedance, Balanced

3 CAM MIC1 (Y) IN

4 CAM MIC2 (X) IN

5 CAM MIC2 (Y) IN

18

2 73 645

12

15

4 23

1-11HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-4. Removing and Reinstalling theOutside Panel Assembly

Removal

nBe sure to set the POWER switch to OFF, unplug thepower cord or remove the battery before starting any of thefollowing procedure to protect inside of the unit fromdamage.

1. Loosen a screw (with drop-safe) in the left of the frontlid assembly.

2. Loosen the four screws (with drop-safe) and removethe outside panel assembly.

Reinstallation

1. Pass the connector of the RM board of the main unitthrough the hole of the outside panel assembly.While inserting the hook of the outside panel assemblyinto the guide shaft of the cassette compartmentassembly, install the outside panel assembly.

2. Reinstall it by reversing the steps of disassembling.nStandard tightening torque :

Screw (with drop-safe, B3 x 12)80 x 10-2 N.m (8 kgf.cm)

Outside panelassembly

Screws (with drop-safe)


Front lid assembly


RM boardconnector


Hook of outside panel assemblyGuide shaft ofcassette compartmentassembly

1-12 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-5. Opening and Closing the InsidePanel Assembly

Opening

m. Be sure to set the POWER switch to OFF, unplug the

power cord or remove the battery before starting any ofthe following procedure to protect inside of the unit fromdamage.

. Insert a piece of paper between the hinge and theconnector box.

1. Loosen the four screws (with drop-safe) and open theinside panel assembly in the direction of the arrow.m. The flexible card wires that is connected to the FP-

152 board, will be significantly shortened its life if itis folded. Be very careful not to fold the flexiblecard wires.

. Stand the unit in the posture that the POWER switchside faces upward when the inside panel assembly isopened.

Closing

1. Check that the hinges in the right and left are engagedsecurely with the hooks of the chassis.

2. Insert the inside panel assembly and tighten the fourscrews (with drop-safe).nStandard tightening torque :

Screw (with drop-safe, B3 x 12)80 x 10_2 N.m (8 kgf.cm)

nBe careful not to pinch the harness between the insidepanel assembly and the chassis.

Flexible card wires

Inside panelassembly

Screw(with drop-safe)

FP-152 board

Inside panelassembly

Hook

Place a sheet of paper here to protect the frame.

Hinge

POWER switch

Hinge

Hook

Screws(with drop-safe)


1-13HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-6. Removing and Reinstalling theConnector Box

Removal

1. Remove the outside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-4.)

2. Remove the inside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-5.)

3. Remove the DCP board assembly and the DVP boardassembly. (Refer to Sections 1-7-1 and 1-7-2.)

4. Slide the shoulder pad assembly in the direction of thearrow.

5. Remove the two screws (P2 x 4). While removing theVIDEO OUT assembly, remove the coaxial cable fromthe groove.

6. Disconnect the harness from connectors (CN101 andCN103) on CNB-23 board.

7. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN114)on the RM-201 board.

8. Remove the two precision screws (P2.6 x 5) fixingthe DC IN connector and separate it from the shieldfinger (BATT).

9. Remove the four screws (B3 x 8). Loosen the board-to-board connector that is connected to the MB-1096board. While removing the connector box assembly inthe direction of the arrow, remove the coaxial cableand harness from the groove.

10. Reinstall it by reversing the steps of disassembling.m. When attaching the VIDEO OUT assembly, route

the coaxial cable such that the coaxial cable passesthrough the groove.

. If the coaxial cable is pinched between the frameand the VIDEO OUT assembly or the CNBOX subpanel, the coaxial cable can have open-circuit.

nStandard tightening torque :P2 x 4 : 19 x 10_2 N.m (1.9 kgf.cm)B3 x 8 : 80 x 10_2 N.m (8 kgf.cm)

CNB-23 board

CN103

CN101

Coaxial cable(Orange)

Groove

Shoulder pad assembly

P2 x 4VIDEO OUT assembly

Coaxial cable (Brown)

B3 x 8

B3 x 8

Precision screwsP2.6 x 5

MB-1096 board

Connector box assembly

Groove

DC IN connector

Board-to-boardconnector

Board-to-boardconnector

Shield finger (BATT)

RM-201 board

CN114

Harness

1-14 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-7. Removing and Reinstalling thePlug-in Boards

When removing and reinstalling the plug-in boards, bevery careful not to damage the parts on the printed boardand also not to install them in the wrong direction or in thewrong slot.

1-7-1. DCP Board Assembly

Removal

1. Open the inside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-5.)

2. Remove the harness from the coating lead pin, thendisconnect the harnesses from the connectors (CN3and CN4) of the DCP-43 board.

3. Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector(CN105) of the DCP-43 board.n. Life of flexible card wire will be significantly

shortened if it is folded. Be very careful not to foldthe flexible card wire.

4. Remove the coaxial cable from the connector (CN1)when the DC-110A board is installed.

5. Remove the four screws. Open the board levers in thedirection of arrow A to release the board-to-boardconnector that is connected to the MB-1096 board.Pull the DCP board assembly in the direction of arrowB to disconnect, and remove the DCP board assembly.

DCP-43 board

DC-110A board

CN3

CN4

CN105

CN1

Flexible card wire

Coaxial cable (Orange)

Coating lead pin

Harnesses

DCP board assembly

MB-1096 board DCP-43 board

Board lever

Board lever

AB

Board-to-boardconnectors

PSW2 x 5

1-15HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Reinstallation

1. Close the board levers.2. Insert the DCP board assembly into the groove on the

board holder in the direction of arrow A, and raise theDCP board assembly in the direction of arrow B.

3. Connect the DCP board assembly and the MB-1096board with the board-to-board connector.

4. Reinstall it by reversing the steps of disassembling.m. When re-installing the harness that is disconnected

in step 2, the CN3 harness must be hooked on thetop edge of the AT-172 board.

. When re-installing the CN4 harness, twist it by 3turns and install it by pushing in the direction ofarrow A. The CN4 harness must be installed 20 mmmore far from the CN3 harness.

. Fix the harness with the coating lead pin.

Illustration when viewedfrom the top

Illustration when viewedfrom the front

Distance of20 mm or more

DCP-43 board

DCP-43 board

AT-172 board

AT-172 board

DCP-43 board

CN4

A

CN3CN4

CN3

Harness

Harness

Coating lead pin

DCP board assembly

DCP board assembly

B

A

ABoard holder (F)

Board lever

Board lever


MB-1096 board

1-16 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6. Open the board levers in the direction of arrow A andremove the board-to-board connector that is connectedto the MB-1096 board, and remove the DVP boardassembly in the direction of arrow B.

1-7-2. DVP Board Assembly

Removal


2. Remove the DCP board assembly.(Refer to Section 1-7-1.)

3. Remove the flexible card wire from the EQ-88G boardconnector (CN101).nLife of flexible card wire will be significantlyshortened if it is folded. Be very careful not to foldthe flexible card wire.

4. Remove the two coaxial cables from the connector(CN201, CN202) on the TX-78 board.

5. Remove the three screws (PSW 2 x 5) that fix theDVP board assembly.

EQ-88G board

TX-78 board

DVP board assembly

CN202CN201

Coaxial cable (Green)


CN101

Flexible card wire

PSW2 x 5

DVP board assembly

DVP board assembly

MB-1096 board

A

B

DVP board assembly

Board lever

Board lever


1-17HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Reinstallation

1. Close the board levers.2. Insert the DVP board assembly into the groove on the

board holder in the direction of arrow A, and raise theDVP board assembly in the direction of arrow B.

3. Connect the DVP board assembly and the MB-1096board with the board-to-board connector.

4. Reinstall it by reversing the steps of disassembling.nWhen routing the two coaxial cables, pass themthrough the three clamps and the groove on the SDIshield plate, and connect the coaxial cable (green) toCN201 on the TX-78 board, and the coaxial cable(brown) to CN202.

DVP board assembly

DVP board assembly

DVP board assembly

Boardholder (F)

MB-1096 board

B

A

A

A

Board lever



Coaxial cable (Green)

Groove on the SDI shield plate Insert a sheet of paper in the protected part.

TX-78 board

Clamps

CN201

CN202

1-18 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-8. Removing and Reinstalling theFlexible Card Wires

This unit uses two types of flexible card wire.m. Life of flexible card wire will be significantly shortened if it

is folded. Be very careful not to fold the flexible card wire.. When a flexible card wire is disconnected, check if it has

peeling-off or scratch on the tin plated contact of theconnector. If the copper plating of the base materialexposes due to wear of the tin plated contact of theconnector, replace it with the new flexible card wire.

Type-A

Removal1. Open the connector latch in the direction of arrow A to

release the lock.2. Remove the flexible card wire in the direction of arrow B.

Reinstallation1. Hold the flexible card wire with its blue surface to the

front, and insert it in the direction of arrow A.2. Close the connector latch in the direction of arrow B to

lock it.

Type-B

Removal1. Open the connector latch in the direction of arrow A to

release the lock.2 Remove the flexible card wire in the direction of arrow B.

Reinstallation1. Hold the flexible card wire with its blue surface to the

front, and insert it in the direction of arrow A.2. Close the connector latch in the direction of arrow B to

lock it.

Flexible card wire

Connector

Connector latch

A

B

Flexible card wire

Connector

Connector latchAB

Blue surface

Flexible card wireConnector

Connector latch

A

B

Flexible card wireConnector

Connector latch

A

B

Blue surface

1-19HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

4. Remove the three precision screws (P1.4 x 3.5) andmove the cassette compartment assembly by holdingthe specified position as shown in the illustration andremove the cassette compartment assembly in thedirection of the arrow.

Reinstallation

1. Adjust position of the joint arm so that the gap be-tween the outside circumference of the white roller ofthe joint arm and the end surface of the mechanicaldeck assembly is 0.5 mm.

1-9. Removing and Reinstalling theCassette Compartment

m. Be sure to set the POWER switch to OFF, unplug the

power cord or remove the battery before starting any ofthe following procedure to protect inside of the unit fromdamage.

. Only when the release plate is attached to the T-tensionregulator assembly, remove and reinstall the Cassettecompartment assembly at the thread position shown inthe illustration below. When the TC head is at the otherposition, T-tension regulator assembly interferes with thecassette compartment.

n. Cassette compartment can be removed when it is raised

up or when it pushed down.

Removal1. Remove the outside panel assembly.

(Refer to Section 1-4.)2. Remove the FL-283 printed wiring board from the

connector (CN1) on the CCM-45G board.3. Remove the FL-283 printed wiring board while

removing the cable retainer 2 from the notch.nLife of the FL-283 printed wiring board will besignificantly shortened if it is folded. Be very carefulnot to fold the FL-283 printed wiring board.

T slider (at the front of the TC head)

S slider TC head

CCM-45G board

CN1

FL-283 printed wiring board

Notch

Cable retainer 2

Cassette compartmentassembly

Mechanical deck assembly

Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5

Precision screwsP1.4 x 3.5

0.5 mm

Roller (WHT)

Joint arm

1-20 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

2. Raise the white locking roller of the cassette compart-ment assembly to set the cassette compartmentassembly to its up position.

3. Slide the cam plate (A) of the right side of the cassettecompartment assembly in the direction of the arrow asfar as it can go.

4. Hold the cassette compartment assembly at the positionshown in the illustration and insert the chassis so thatthe two cassette guide pins enter into the round hole ofthe stage.At this moment, confirm that the white roller at theother end of the joint arm that is adjusted of its positionat step 1, enters into the notch of the cam plate (A) onthe right side.

5. Press the lid arm (L) of the cassette compartmentassembly and check to see that the stage can move upand down smoothly. If the stage does not move up anddown smoothly, check above procedure starting fromstep 1.

6. Attach the cassette compartment assembly with threescrews.nStandard tightening torque :

10 x 10_2 N.m (1.0 kgf.cm)Locking roller (WHT)

Cam plate (A)

Notch ofcam plate (A)


Precision screwsP1.4 x 3.5Lever

Stage

Roller (WHT) at the other end

Roller (WHT) of step 1

Joint arms

Notch

Cassetteguide pin

Cassette guide pin

Round holeof stage

Round holeof stage

1-21HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7. Engage the recess of the FL-283 printed wiring boardwith the two claws of the cable retainer 2, and insertthe cable retainer 2 into the notch.

8. Insert the FL-283 printed wiring board into theconnector (CN1) on the CCM-45G board.


CCM-45G board

CN1

Recess

Claw

Cable retainer 2

Notch

1-22 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-10. On-Board Switch/Slit Land Description

For the function of the on-board switches on the APR-59AG board, KY-475G board and SW-1312/1031/1038/1039 board, refer to the Operation Manual.

m. Never change the settings of the switches that are specified as “Factory-use”.. The number in parenthesis ( ) indicates the address on the circuit board.

1-10-1. AT-172 Board

Ref. No. Address Name Description Factory setting

S1-1 (C-5/B side) SERVICE mode Selects to display or not to display the SERVICE OFFmenu.ON : To display the SERVICE menuOFF : Not to display the SERVICE menu

S1-2 to 7 (C-5/B side) _ Factory-use OFF

S1-8 (C-5/B side) FRAM reset ON : FRAM reset OFFOFF : Normal operationWhen the main power of the unit is turned onwhile the switch S1-8 is being set in ON, FRAM(IC51)/DCP-43 board is reset.Upon completion of resetting, be sure to return theswitch S1-8 to OFF.

m. Resetting the FRAM erases adjusted value

of the SERVICE menu and all of the users’unique values (such as the MENU settings andthe AUTOWHITE/BLACK data).

. Upon completion of resetting the FRAM,be sure to perform the automatic black balanceadjustment using the AUTO W/B BAL switch(on the front block).When the AUTO W/B BAL switch is kept pressed in the BLK position, the display changes as follows.[BLACK SET] → [BLACK BAL] → [BLACK SET].Keep pressing the switch until the second [BLACK SET] is displayed.

. After resetting, return the switch S1-8 to OFF.If not, the adjustment data is not saved in theFRAM hereafter.

C B A

1

2

3

4

5

S3

S2

S1

AT-172 board (B side)

1-23HDW-F900R/V1 (E)


S2-1, 2, 3, 4 (C-4/B side) _ Factory-use OFF

S3 (C-4/B side) TOP MENU Turns ON/OFF the function to display the OFFDISABLE TOP menu.

ON : Not to display the TOP menuOFF : To display the TOP menu

1-10-2. EQ-88G Board


S1101 (F-3/A side) _ Factory-use OFF

1

2

3

A B C D

E

F

S1101

EQ-88G board (A side)

1-24 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-10-3. FP-152 Board

nRefer to the Operation Manual for the function of the switches on A side.


S305 (F-5/B side) _ For the REAR EARPHON switching HP (default)

S501 (C-3/B side) AUDIO OUT Set this switch when the AUDIO OUT XLR5PXLR5P-XLR3P connector is changed to XLR3P

S502 (C-4/B side) CUE ON/OFF Selects to output or not to output the CUE OFF (EE)playback signal to the AUDIO OUT connector.(For the CUE adjustment)CUE : To output the CUE playbackEE : Not to output the CUE playback

S809-1 to 4 (G-5/B side) _ Factory-use OFF

FP-152 board (B side)

G F E D

C

1

2

3

4

5

6

B

A

S809 S305

S501

S502

1-25HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-10-4. MDC-13G Board


S401 (C-2/B side) _ Factory-use OFF

S402 (C-2/B side) TRACKING MODE Every pressing of this switch toggles the OFF (FIX)change TRACKING mode.

OFF: FIX (fixed) modeON: Variable mode

Tracking RV (RV401) is enabled.nD404 (C-2/B side) turns on when Variable isselected.

S403-1 to 4 (C-2/B side) _ Factory-use OFF

H GF E D

C

B

A1

2

3

4

5

6

S403

S401 S402

MDC-13G board (B side)

1-26 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-10-5. SS-92G Board


S101-1 to 2 (C-2/A side) _ Not used _

S101-3, 8 SIGNAL FORMAT Selects the signal format of the HDW unit. S101-3 : ONS101-3 S101-8 S101-8 : ONOFF OFF 59.94i/29.97POFF ON 50i/25PON OFF 24PON ON 23.98P

S101-4 Leaded/Unleaded Recognizes whether the SS-92G board is ONleaded or unleaded.OFF : LeadedON : Unleaded

S101-5 DIP SW SELECT Selects whether to follow the DIP switch setting. OFFOFF : Does not follow the DIP switch.ON : Follows the DIP switch.

S101-6 to 7 REC FORMAT Sets REC FORMAT. S101-6 : OFFS101-6 S101-7 S101-7 : OFFOFF OFF HDCAMOFF ON IMXON OFF D-BETAON ON _

A

B

C

1 2 3 4 5

S101

SS-92G board (A side)

1-27HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

A

1

2

3

B C

D E

S1

RP-131 board (A side)

1-10-6. RP-131 Board


S1-1 (C-3/A side) _ Factory-use OFF



S1-4 (C-3/A side) NV-RAM reset ON : NV-RAM reset OFFOFF : Normal operationnUpon completion of replacing theRP-131 board, be sure to perform theNV-RAM reset. (Refer to Section 1-17-4.)

1-10-7. AXM-33 Board

For the details of the functions of the switch S101 and S201 on the A side, refer to the operatin manual.

Ref No. Address Name Description Factory setting

S202 (A-2/A side) INPUT Sets the input reference level. +4 dBREFERENCE +4 dB : Sets the input reference level to +4 dB.

0 dB : Sets the input reference level to 0 dB._3 dB : Sets the input reference level to _3 dB.

AXM-33 board (A side)

BA

1

2S202

S101 S201

+4

0

_3

+4 dB0 dB

_3 dB

1-28 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-11. How to Eject a Cassette TapeManually

nBe sure to set the POWER switch to OFF, unplug thepower cord or remove the battery before starting any of thefollowing procedure to protect inside of the unit fromdamage.

1. Open the drop protection (ME) of the outside panelassembly in the direction of the arrow.

2. Align tip of a philips (+) screwdriver with the manualeject gear (A) tooth and push the manual eject gear (A)to rotate the manual eject gear (A) in the clockwisedirection.nWhen rotating the manual eject gear (A), check to seethat a tape is wound onto the cassette reel.

3. Rotate the manual eject gear (A) until the front lidassembly is opened. When the front lid assembly isopened, take out a cassette tape.

m. When the front lid assembly is opened, never rotate the

manual eject gear (A).. How to close the front lid assembly

The front lid assembly cannot be closed and locked if themanual eject gear (A) is completely rotated opening thefront lid assembly. Close the front lid assembly either byrotating the manual eject gear (A) by 2 or 3 turns in thecounter-clockwise direction while pushing in the manualeject gear (A), or by turning off the main power and thenback on.

If the front lid assembly cannot be opened eventhough the manual eject gear (A) is rotated


2. While raising up the cassette lid of a cassette tape,move up the cassette compartment assembly. (Refer to Section 1-9.)

3. Take out a cassette tape with care not to damage a tapeinside.

Outside panelassembly

Drop protection (ME)

Gear

Rotate it whilepushing in.(Clockwise direction)

Front lid assembly

Philips (+) screwdriver

1-29HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Manual Eject after Error

When an error has occurred, due to large slack on the tapeor mechanical trouble, the tape may not be wound onto thecassette reel correctly with the normal manual ejectprocedure.Perform manual eject after an error has occurred in thefollowing steps.

1. Remove the outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-4.)2. Check the condition of the tape.

If the tape has slack, make sure that the tape is nothooked onto the guide roller or other parts.

3. Press and hold the manual eject knob, and turn itclockwise.At this time, turn the knob while watching that the tapeis not hooked onto the pinch arm, threading arm, Sslider, T slider, or any other parts.

4. When all the guides are stored in the cassette, stopturning the knob. (See the figure.)If the knob is turned too much, the cassette compart-ment moves up.If the tape still has slack at this time, the tape isdamaged.

When the S slider and the T slider reach theindicated positions in this figure

5. If the tape still has slack, turn the capstan motorcounterclockwise until the tape has no slack. (Windthe tape with the T-side reel at this time.)If the tape still has slack even after this, turn thecapstan motor clockwise to eliminate the slack.(Wind the tape with the S-side reel at this time.)If the tape still has slack even after this, raise thecassette lid of the cassette tape, and perform step 6.

6. Press and hold the manual eject knob, and turn itclockwise until the cassette compartment moves up.

T slider

Cassette

S slider

1-30 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-12. How to Insert a Cassette TapeWhile the Outside Panel Assemblyis Being Removed

nDo not use nor press the lid arm (L) when the cassettecompartment assembly is moving down to the DOWNposition in step 4 below.If the lid arm (L) is pressed, the lid arm (L) may bedeformed. If the lid arm (L) is deformed, the front covermay not be locked any more after the outside panelassembly is reinstalled.


2. Move the cassette compartment assembly to the UPposition. (Refer to Section 1-9.). When the main power is turned on :

Press the EJECT button.. When the main power is turned off :

Raise the locking roller (WHT) in the direction ofthe arrow.

3. Insert a cassette tape to the cassette compartmentassembly.

4. Insert a screwdriver tip or the like into the hole of thecassette compartment assembly as shown and move thecassette compartment assembly in the direction of thearrow until the cassette compartment assembly islocked. Doing this, the cassette compartment assemblymoves to the DOWN position.

1-13. How to Clean the Heads When theHeads are Clogged

When the heads are clogged, clean them by the followingsteps below using a cleaning tape.If head clogging cannot be cleaning even though thefollowing “How to Use the Cleaning Tape” is implement-ed, clean the heads by referring to “2-1. Cleaning”.

How to Use the Cleaning Tape

Required tool. Cleaning tape BCT-HD12CL

nBe sure to use the cleaning tape that is specified above.If any cleaning tape other than the specified one is used, itcan result in abnormal abrasion or fatal damage of videoheads.

1. Insert the cleaning tape BCT-HD12CL in the unit.2. Head cleaning starts automatically. After about five

seconds of tape running, the cleaning tape is ejected.3. Confirm that the head clogging is removed.

If the heads remain clogged even after the above step 2is implemented, clean the heads with the cleaningcloth.(Refer to “2-1-2. Cleaning the Upper Drum TapeRunning Surface and Video Heads.”)

Hole of the cassette compartmentassembly

Cassette compartmentassembly

Locking roller (WHT)

Lid arm (L)

Screwdriver or the like

1-31HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-14. List of Tools and Measuring Equipment

1-14-1. Tools

Fig. No. Part No. Description Used for

1 A-8327-706-A DCP-DVP extension Extending the DCP/DVP board assembly/assembly extending the EQ-88G board/ extending the

HKDW-703 (MY-99 board)1-A 1-783-253-11 Coaxial cable assembly (Refer to Sections 1-15-3, 1-15-4, 1-15-5,

1-15-6, 1-15-7 and 1-15-8.)

2 1-831-116-11 Flexible card wire Extending the CCD unit (Refer to Section 1-15-11.)(30 core, 250 mm)

3 1-831-117-11 Flexible card wire Extending the SS-92G board/extending the(45 core, 250 mm) mechanical deck assembly

(Refer to Sections 1-15-9 and 1-15-12.)nThe four flexible card wires of this type arerequired to extend the SS-92G board. The sixflexible card wires of this type are required toextend the mechanical deck assembly.

4 A-8327-709-A RP extension assembly Extending the RP-131 board/checking the PA-340board (Refer to Section 1-15-10.)

5 A-8327-636-A 100P-EXT assembly Extending the EQ-88G board/extending theHKDW-703 (MY-99 board)(Refer to Sections 1-15-7 and 1-15-8.)

6 A-8327-457-A EX-764 board Extending the mechanical deck assembly.(Refer to Section 1-15-12.)nThe three EX-764 boards are required to extendthe mechanical deck assembly.

7 A-8327-708-A AT-DC extension assembly Extending the AT-172/HKDW-702 (DC-110A7-A 1-783-282-14 Flexible card wire (50 core) board) (Refer to Sections 1-15-1 and 1-15-2.)/

8 A-8327-707-A DR extension assembly Extending the CCD unit/extending the DCP boardassembly (Refer to Sections 1-15-4 and 1-15-11.)

9 A-8327-637-A SS-EXT assembly Extending the SS-92G board(Refer to Section 1-15-9.)

0 A-8327-453-A EX-784 board Extending the DCP board assembly/extendingthe DVP board assembly(Refer to Sections 1-15-4 and 1-15-6.)

!- A-8327-454-A EX-785 board Extending the DVP board assembly(Refer to Section 1-15-6.)

0

!-

7-A

1

1-A

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1-32 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)


!= J-6001-820-A Drum eccentricity adjustment (3) Upper drum eccentricity adjustment

![ J-6001-830-A Drum eccentricity adjustment (2)

!] J-6325-530-A Drum eccentricity adjustment (6)

!\ J-6026-110-A Multi burst chart Camera adjustment

J-6026-130-B Gray-scale chart (Transparent type) (4: 3)

Commercially Gray-scale chart (Reflective type) (4: 3)available on market

J-6394-080-A Gray-scale chart (Transparent type) (16: 9)

!; J-6029-140-B Pattern box PTB-500

!' J-6035-070-A IC extraction tool (CT-2101) Removing the PLCC IC

!, J-6080-840-A Mirror (small oval type) Video tracking adjustment

!. J-6152-450-A Wire clearance check gauge Clearance check

@/ J-6322-420-B Tape guide adjustment screwdriver (45) Tape path adjustment

J-6322-420-3 Tool, 0.89 bit (45)

@- J-6323-530-A Stop washer fastening tool Stop washer installation

@= J-6323-890-A Torque cassette (FWD back tension) FWD back tension adjustment

@[ J-6324-150-A Reel table height gauge Reel table height adjustment

@] J-7032-610-C Cassette reference plate

!; !' !, !.

!= ![ !] !\

@/ @- @= @[

10JB-OOOO

MW-389

@]

1-33HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

@. #/ #- #=

@\ @; @' @,

#[ #] #\ #;

d


@\ J-6325-110-A Torque screwdriver bit (For M1.4) Fastening screw

J-6325-380-A Torque screwdriver bit (For M2)

@; J-6326-120-A Hexagon bit (For torque screwdriver)(size 1.5)

@' J-6325-400-A Torque screwdriver (For 3 kg)

@, J-6325-360-B Flatness check tool Upper drum assembly replacement

@. J-6531-110-A Drum install plate DJH-27A

#/ A-8315-553-B HN-255 assembly Video tracking adjustment

#- 3-184-527-01 Cleaning cloth Cleaning

#= 7-432-950-03 Sealant TSE-392W Adhesive sealing agent to preventwater drop

#[ 7-661-018-18 Diamond oil NT-68 Lubricant(Mitsubishi diamond oil hydro-fluid) (50 ml)

#] 7-651-000-10 Sony (SGL-601) 50 g grease

7-651-000-11 Sony (SGL-801) 50 g grease

#\ 7-700-736-05 L-shaped HEX (1.5 mm) wrench Removing screw

7-700-736-06 L-shaped HEX (0.89 mm) wrench

#; 8-960-076-01 Alignment tape, HR5-1A Audio/video adjustment

8-960-076-11 Alignment tape, HR2-1A Video tracking adjustment

#' 9-919-573-01 Cleaning fluid TTP cleaning

#'

1-34 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

#, #. $/ $-

* : The component tool assembly (CN-2070 board) is the tool to output the HD analog component signal (Y/Pb/Pr). Use this tool to checkthe circuits without using the HD SDI. Insert the component tool assembly (CN-2070 board) to the slot that is assigned to wirelessreceiver, output the HD analog component signal (Y/Pb/Pr).

1-14-2. Measuring Equipment

Use the calibrated equipment or equivalent as listed below for the adjustments.

Required equipment Model name

Oscilloscope Tektronix 2465

Digital oscilloscope Tektronix TDS460A

HD analog waveform monitor Tektronix 1735HD

HD digital waveform monitor Tektronix WFM1125

Frequency counter Advantest TR 5821AK

Digital voltmeter Advantest TR 6845

B/W monitor Sony BVM-D20F1J

Audio analyzer Tektronix AA501A (OP.2)

Generator Tektronix SG-5010


#, J-6531-100-A Sensor MCB (DF-110) tool assembly Photo sensor replacement

#. A-8326-017-A ROM-28 board AT-172 board ROM version upgrading

$/ A-8328-404-A Component tool assembly Component tool assembly*

$- 7-700-751-01 Box screwdriver (size 4.5 mm)

$= J-6531-270-A S3 guide height adjustment tool adjustment of the S3 guide

$[ 3-703-358-04 Parallel pin (d = 2.0 mm) adjustment of the gear chain phase

$] J-6531-280-A FL-272 board For the Software download

$\ J-6531-320-A SYSCON/SERVO ROM For the Software download

__ 7-432-114-11 Screw lock

__ Commercially Blank tape, BCT-40HD For recording

available on market Cleaning tape, BCT-HD12CL Head cleaning

Memory label made by Sony, Adjustment after replacement of theMLB-1M-100 CCM-45G board

Memory Stick Saving the camera setup data

$= $[ $] $\

1-35HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-14-3. Alignment Tapes

The alignment tapes that are required for adjustment of this unit are listed below.1. Alignment tape HR2-1A (Part No. 8-960-076-11)

2. Alignment tape HR5-1A (Part No. 8-960-076-01)

TIME CODE

(00:00:00:00)CTL PULSE

(00:20:00:00)

(00:25:00:00)

(00:30:00:00)

(00:15:00:00)00:15:00:00

Ordinary time code here after TIME CODE

CTL CUE

1 kHz0 VU

12 kHz0 VU

8T A ch onlyMarker at the SAT IN point at the top of frame

A ch 8TC ch 8T

A/C ch, front half 8T, latter half 2TB/D ch, front half 2T, latter half 8T

2TMarker at the A ch SAT IN point at the top of frameAll ch

VIDEO / AUDIO

TIME CODE

00h00m00s1 kHz _20 dBFS

1 kHz 0 dBFS

20 Hz _20 dBFS

20 kHz _20 dBFS

_∞ dBFS

CTL VIDEO CUE

Color Bars (100%)

RAMP

Multi Burst

Above signals are repeated

See the table below.

D-AUDIO

00h02m00s

00h04m00s

00h06m00s

00h08m00s

00h10m00s

00h15m00s

00h20m00s

00h30m00s

TIME CODE

00: 00: 00: 00

00: 01: 25: 0000: 01: 30: 00

00: 02: 25: 0000: 02: 30: 00

00: 02: 55: 0000: 03: 00: 00

00: 03: 25: 0000: 03: 30: 00

00: 03: 55: 0000: 04: 00: 00

00: 04: 25: 0000: 04: 30: 00

00: 04: 55: 00

00: 05: 00: 00

00: 06: 25: 0000: 06: 30: 00

00: 07: 25: 0000: 07: 30: 00

00: 07: 55: 0000: 08: 00: 00

00: 08: 25: 0000: 08: 30: 00

00: 08: 55: 0000: 09: 00: 00

00: 09: 25: 0000: 09: 30: 00

00: 09: 55: 00

00: 10: 00: 00

00: 11: 25: 0000: 11: 30: 00

00: 12: 25: 0000: 12: 30: 00

00: 12: 55: 0000: 13: 00: 00

00: 13: 25: 0000: 13: 30: 00

00: 13: 55: 0000: 14: 00: 00

00: 14: 25: 0000: 14: 30: 00

00: 14: 55: 00

00: 15: 00: 00

00: 16: 25: 0000: 16: 30: 00

00: 17: 25: 0000: 17: 30: 00

00: 17: 55: 0000: 18: 00: 00

00: 18: 25: 0000: 18: 30: 00

00: 18: 55: 0000: 19: 00: 00

00: 19: 25: 0000: 19: 30: 00

00: 19: 55: 00

1 kHz 0 VU

1 kHz -20 VU

3 kHz -20 VU

7 kHz -20 VU

10 kHz -20 VU

12 kHz -20 VU

90 Hz -20 VU

CUE

1-36 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-15. How to Extend the Circuit Board

1-15-1. Extending the AT-172 Board

Required tool : AT-DC extension assembly

nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly shortened ifit is folded. Be very careful not to fold the flexible cardwire.


2. Remove the two screws and remove the AT-172 board

3. Connect the AT-DC extension assembly (EX-778board side) to the connector (CN5) on the DCP-43board.

4. Connect the AT-DC extension assembly (EX-777board side) to the connector (CN5) on the AT-172board.

AT-172 board

DCP-43 board


AT-172 board

DCP-43 board

EX-777 board

EX-778 board

CN5

CN5

AT-DCextension assembly

1-37HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-15-2. Extending the HKDW-702 (DC-110ABoard)

Required tool : AT-DC extension assembly

m. Life of flexible card wire will be significantly shortened

if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold the flexiblecard wire.

. Do not bend the coaxial cable strongly or do not damagethe coaxial cable by hooking it on the frame.

1. Open the inside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-5.)

2. Disconnect the coaxial cable from the connector(CN1) on the DC-110A board.

3. Remove the three screws and remove the DC-110Aboard.

4. Connect the AT-DC extension assembly (EX-778board side) to the connector (CN6) on the DCP-43board.

5. Connect the AT-DC extension assembly (EX-777board side) to the connector (CN6) on the DC-110Aboard.

6. Connect the coaxial cable that is disconnected in step 2to the connector (CN1) on the DC-110A board.

DC-110A board


DCP-43 board


CN1

DCP-43 board

EX-778 board

EX-777 board

AT-DC extension assemblyCN6

DC-110A board


CN6 CN1

1-38 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-15-3. Extending the DCP Board Assembly

Required tool : DCP-DVP extension assembly

m. Life of flexible card wire will be significantly shortened if it

is folded. Be very careful not to fold the flexible card wire.. Do not bend the coaxial cable strongly or do not damage

the coaxial cable by hooking it on the frame.


2. Remove the DCP board assembly. (Refer to Section 1-7-1.)3. Connect the connector (CN1) of the DCP-DVP

extension assembly to the connector (CN104) on theMB-1096 board.

4. Connect the removed DCP board assembly to theconnector (CN2) of the DCP-DVP extension assembly.

5. Connect the harness, coaxial cable and flexible cardwire of the connectors (CN1, CN3, CN4, CN105) thatare removed in step 2 to the connectors (CN3, CN5,CN7, CN11) on the DCP-DVP extension assembly.

6. Connect the harness and flexible card wire of theDCP-DVP extension assembly to the connectors(CN3, CN4, CN105) on the DCP board assembly.

7. Connect CN12 on the DCP-DVP extension assemblyto CN1 on the DC-110A board with the coaxial cablesupplied with the DCP-DVP extension assembly.

DCP-DVPextension assembly

DCP board assembly

CN1

CN2

CN104MB-1096 board

DCP board assembly

DC-110A board

DCP-DVP extension assembly

CN3

CN1

CN11

CN12CN5

CN7

CN3

CN4

CN105


Coaxial cable

Flexible card wire

CN8

CN4 CN6

1-39HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-15-4. Extending the DCP Board Assembly(When you want to check the B sideor a part of A side of the DVP boardassembly)

Required tools : EX-784 board, flexible card wire(30 core, 250 mm) (DCP-DVP extensionassembly), EX-776 board (DR extensionassembly)






3. Connect the EX-784 board to the connector (CN104)on the MB-1096 board.

4. Remove the flexible card wire from the connector(CN1) on the DR-614 board and connect the optionalflexible card wire (30 core, 250 mm) in stead of it.

5. Connect the connector (CN105) of the DCP-43 boardto the other end of the flexible card wire (30 core, 250mm).

6. Connect the coaxial cable to the connector (CN1) onthe DC-110A board.

7. Connect the harness that is removed from the connector(CN3) of the DCP-43 board to the connector (CN1) onthe EX-776 board. Connect the harness of the EX-776board to the connector (CN3) on the DCP-43 board.nThe harness may be left unconnected to the connector(CN4) of the DCP-43 board.

8. Slant the DCP board assembly in the direction ofarrow A and connect it to the connector (CN104) onthe EX-784 board.

CN1(DC-110A board)

CN1(DR-614 board)

EX-784 board

CN105(DCP-43 board)

CN3(DCP-43 board)

CN1(EX-776 board)

Coaxial cable(Orange)

Flexible card wire (30 core, 250 mm)

CN104(MB-1096 board)

DCP board assembly

CN104(EX-784 board)

A

1-40 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-15-5. Extending the DVP Board Assembly




Required tool : DCP-DVP extension assembly

1. Open the inside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-5.)2. Remove the DCP board assembly. (Refer to Section 1-7-1.)3. Remove the DVP board assembly. (Refer to Section 1-7-2.)4. Connect the connector (CN1) on the DCP-DVP extension as-

sembly to the connector (CN103) on the MB-1096 board.5. Connect the removed DVP board assembly to the con-

nector (CN2) on the DCP-DVP extension assembly.

6. Connect coaxial cable and flexible card wire of theconnectors (CN101 and CN202) that are removedfrom in step 3, to the connectors (CN9 and CN13) onthe DCP-DVP extension assembly.

7. Connect the flexible card wire of the DCP-DVPextension assembly to CN101 on the EQ-88G board ofthe DVP board assembly.

8. Connect CN14 on the DCP-DVP extension assemblyto CN201 on the TX-78 board of the DVP boardassembly with the coaxial cable supplied with theDCP-DVP extension assembly.

9. Attach the DCP board assembly that is removed instep 2, and connect the two harnesses, the flexible cardwire and the coaxial cable, respectively.(Refer to Section 1-7-1.)

CN2

DVP board assembly


CN103

CN1

MB-1096 board

CN101

CN13

CN9

CN14

CN201

EQ-88G board

TX-78 board


Flexible card wire

Coaxial cable

Coaxial cable(Brown)

1-41HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-15-6. Extending the DVP Board Assembly(When you want to check the B sideor a part of A side of the SS-92Gboard)

Required tools : EX-785 board, EX-784 board,flexible card wire (30 core, 250 mm/45 core,250 mm) (DCP-DVP extension assembly)




1. Open the inside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-5.)2. Remove the DCP board assembly.

(Refer to Section 1-7-1.)3. Remove the DVP board assembly.

(Refer to Section 1-7-2.)4. Remove the five screws and remove the dust protec-

tion cover.5. Remove the flexible card wire from the connector

(CN4) on the MDR-14G board and connect theoptional flexible card wire (45 core, 250 mm) to theconnector CN4) on the MDR-14G board.

6. Extend the DCP board assembly with the use of theEX-784 board, flexible card wire (30 core, 250 mm)and EX-776 board (DR extension assembly).(Refer to steps 3 to 8 of Section 1-15-4.)

7. Connect the EX-785 board to the connector (CN103)on the MB-1096 board.

8. Connect the coaxial cable to the connector (CN201) onthe TX-78 board.

9. Connect the other end of the flexible card wire (45P,250 mm) that is connected in step 5, to the connector(CN101) on the EQ-88G board.

10. Slant the DVP board assembly in the direction ofarrow A and connect it to the connector (CN103) onthe EX-785 board.

PSW2 x 5

Dust protection cover

CN4(MDR-14G board)

CN4(MDR-14G board)

Flexible card wire(45 core, 250 mm)

Flexible card wire

CN201(TX-78 board)EX-785 boardCN103

(MB-1096 board) CN101(EQ-88G board)

Flexible card wire(45 core, 250 mm)

Coaxial cable

DVP board assembly

CN103(EX-785 board)

DCP board assembly

A

1-42 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-15-7. Extending the EQ-88G Board

Required tools : DCP-DVP extension assembly,100P-EXT assembly




1. Perform steps 1 to 5 of “1-15-5. Extending the DVPBoard Assembly”.

2. Remove the two screws and remove the EQ-88Gboard.

3. Connect the connector (CN102) on the 100P-EXTassembly to the connector (CN100) on the EQ-88Gboard.

4. Connect the connector (CN100) of the 100P-EXTassembly to the connector (CN102) on the DVP-41board.

5. Connect the coaxial cable (CN201) that is removed, tothe connector (CN13) on the DCP-DVP extensionassembly.

6. Connect CN14 on the DCP-DVP extension assemblyto CN201 on the TX-78 board with the coaxial cablesupplied with DCP-DVP extension assembly.

7. Connect the DCP board assembly that is removed instep 1, and connect the two harnesses, the flexible cardwire and the coaxial cable respectively.(Refer to Section 1-7-1.)

EQ-88G board

P3 x 4

P3 x 4

DVP board assembly

EQ-88G board

100P-EXT assemblyCN100

CN102

100P-EXT assembly


DVP-41 board

TX-78 board

EQ-88G board

CN100

CN9

CN14

CN13

CN201

CN101

CN102

Flexible card wire

Flexible card wire

Coaxial cables

Coaxial cables (Brown)

1-43HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-15-8. Extending the HKDW-703(MY-99 Board)

Required tools : DCP-DVP extension assembly,100P-EXT assembly


2. Remove the two screws and remove the MY-99 board.

3. Connect the connector (CN102) on the 100P-EXTassembly to the connector (CN101) on the MY-99board.

4. Connect the connector (CN100) on the 100P-EXTassembly to the connector (CN101) on the DVP-41board.


MY-99 board

PWH1.4 x 3.5 PWH1.4 x 3.5

DVP board assembly

DVP-41 board

MY-99 board

100P-EXT assembly

100P-EXT assembly

CN101

CN102

CN101

CN100

Step 3

1-44 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-15-9. Extending the SS-92G Board

Required tools : SS-EXT assembly,Flexible card wire (45 core, 250 mm)(4 wires)

nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly shortened ifit is folded. Be very careful not to fold the flexible cardwire.



3. Remove the DVP board assembly.(Refer to Section 1-7-2.)

4. Remove the harness clamp.5. Remove the five screws and remove the dust protec-

tion cover.6. Remove the flexible card wires from the connectors

(CN201 and CN202) on the SS-92G board.

7. Remove the screw and remove the SS PC board retainer.8. Remove the SS-92G board from the MB-1096 board.9. Remove the flexible card wires from the connectors

(CN201 and CN202) on the MDC-13G board.

10. Connect the four optional flexible card wires (45 core)to the connectors (CN101, CN102, CN201, CN202) onthe SS-EXT assembly.

CN201

CN202

SS-92G board

Flexible card wires

PSW2 x 5

Dust protection cover

Harness clamp

SS-EXT assembly

CN101

CN102

CN202

CN201Flexible card wires(45 core)

Flexible card wires(45 core)

CN201

CN202

SS-92G board

MDC-13G board

Flexible card wires

MB-1096 board

SS PC board retainer

PSW2 x 5

1-45HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

11. Connect the connector (CN1) on the SS-EXT assem-bly to the connector (CN102) on the MB-1096 board.

12. Connect the flexible card wires (45 core) that comefrom the connectors (CN101 and CN102) on the SS-EXT assembly, to the connectors (CN201 and CN202)on the MDC-13G board.

13. Connect the connector (CN102) on the SS-92G boardto the connector (CN1) on the SS-EXT assembly.

14. Connect the flexible card wires (45 core) that comefrom the connectors (CN201 and CN202) on the SS-EXT assembly, to the connectors (CN201 and CN202)on the SS-92G board.

1-15-10. Extending the RP-131 Board(When you want to check the B sideor the A side of the PA-340 board)

Required tool : RP extension assembly


2. Remove the three screws and remove the RP-131board.

3. Connect the RP extension assembly to the RP-131board and to the PA-340 board as shown in theillustration.

CN202

CN102

CN1

CN101

CN102

CN201

SS-EXT assembly

MB-1096 board


MDC-13G board

CN201

CN201

CN202

CN202CN1

SS-92G board

SS-EXT assembly

SS-EXT assembly

CN102


RP-131 board


RP extension assembly

RP extension assembly

PA-340 board

RP-131 board

CN1

CN1

CN1

CN1

1-46 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-15-11. Extending the CCD Unit

Required tools : DR extension assembly(EX-776 board, EX-831 board,EX-832 board),Flexible card wire (30 core, 250 mm)

m. Use the flexible card wire (30 core) that is supplied with

the DCP-DVP extension assembly.. Life of flexible card wire will be significantly shortened


1. Remove the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)2. Open the inside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-5.)3. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN3) on

the DCP-43 board.4. Disconnect the harnesses and the flexible card wires

from the connectors (CN1, CN8, and CN9) on the DR-614 board.

5. Remove the screw (PSW2 x 5), and remove the CHBstay from the DCP holder (F).

6. Remove the four screws (B3 x 10) and remove theCCD unit in the direction of the arrow.

7. Disconnect the two harnesses from the connector(CN502, CN503) of the IFA-19G board.

8. Connect the harnesses that are removed the DR-614board, to the connectors (CN3 and CN5) on the EX-831 board and to the EX-832 board. Connect theharnesses on the EX-831 board and the EX-832 boardto the connectors (CN8 and CN9) of the DR-614 board.

CN8

CN1

CN9

CN3

CCD unit

Flexible cardwire

DR-614 board

DCP-43 board

B3 x 10

B3 x 10

PSW 2x5

PSW 2x5DCP holder (F)

CHB stay

CN503

CN502

IFA-19G board

DR-614 board

EX-831 board

EX-832 board

CN9

CN8

CN3

CN5

1-47HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9. Connect the harness that is removed the DCP-43board, to the connector (CN1) on the EX-776 board.Connect the harnesses of the EX-776 board to theconnector (CN3) on the DCP-43 board.

10. Connect the flexible card wire (30 core) to the connec-tor (CN1) on the DR-614 board and to the connector(CN105) on the DCP-43 board.

1-15-12. Extending the Mechanical DeckAssembly

Required tools : EX-764 board (3 boards),Flexible card wire (45 core, 250 mm) (6 wires)

nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly shortened if itis folded. Be very careful not to fold the flexible card wire.

1. Remove the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)2. Open the inside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-5.)3. Remove the DCP board assembly. (Refer to Section 1-7-1.)4. Remove the DVP board assembly. (Refer to Section 1-7-2.)5. Remove the harness clamp.6. Remove the five screws and remove the dust protec-

tion cover.7. Remove the flexible card wires from the connector

(CN101) on the MB-1096 board, the connectors(CN201 and CN202) on the SS-92G board and theconnector (CN4) on the MDR-14G board.

DR-614 board

EX-776 board

DCP-43 board

CN1

CN1

CN3

CN105


CN201CN202

SS-92G board

MB-1096 board

MDR-14G board

Flexible card wire

Flexible card wires

CN101

CN4

PSW2 x 5

Dust protectioncover

Harness clamp

1-48 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

8. Remove the FL-283 printed wiring board from theconnector (CN1) on the CCM-45G board.

9. While removing the cable retainer 2, remove the FL-283 printed wiring board.nLife of FL-283 printed wiring board will be signifi-cantly shortened if it is folded. Be very careful not tofold the FL-283 printed wiring board.

10. Loosen the five screws (with drop-safe) and move themechanical deck assembly as shown in the illustrationand remove it in the direction of the arrow.

11. Prepare the three EX-764 boards and the six flexiblecard wires (45 core). Assemble them as shown in theillustration.

12. Connect the flexible card wires (45 core) that comefrom the respective extension board, to the connector(CN101) on MDC-13G board and to the connectors(CN201 and CN202) on the MDC-13G board respec-tively.nWhen extending the mechanical deck assembly, placea protection sheet underneath the mechanical deckassembly beforehand and extend it.

CCM-45G board

CN1 Cable retainer 2

Notch






Mechanical deckassembly

MDC-13G board Protection sheet

EX-764 board

EX-764 boards

CN101

CN201

CN202

1-49HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

13. Connect the flexible card wires of the EX-764 board tothe connector (CN101) on the MB-1096 board and tothe connectors (CN201 and CN202) on the SS-92Gboard respectively.

1-16. Description on Cassette Mechanism

Cassette tape has the record inhibit plug and tabs fordetecting various settings on the rear surface.

HDCAM cassette

1 Tape thickness detecting hole234 Cassette type detecting tabs5 Cleaning cassette detecting tab6 S-cassette record inhibition plug

SS-92G board MB-1096 board

Flexible card wires of the EX-764 board

Flexible card wire on the EX-764 board

To CN202 onthe MDC-13G board

CN201

CN101

CN202

To CN201 onthe MDC-13Gboard

To CN101 onthe MDC-13G board

632 41 5

Small cassette (S cassette)

1-50 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

On the Record Inhibition Plug

On the Various Detecting Tabs

HDCAM cassette

No. Used for Equipped with tab (closed) Not equipped with tab (open)

1 For detecting tape thickness Tape thickness is 13.5 um

5 For detection of the cleaning Normal cassette tape Cleaning cassette tape|cassette tape

234 For detection of cassette On the HDCAM Cassette, only tab 4 is removed. (open)types The cassette tapes are indicated by the combination of the three tabs.

(See the table below.)

Tabs for detection of cassette types (OOOOO : Close, : Open)

Tab status 243 Type of cassette tape Remarks

HDCAM

Betacam/Betacam SP This type of cassette cannot be used in this unit.

Betacam SX This type of cassette cannot be used in this unit.

Digital Betacam This type of cassette cannot be used in this unit.

, , , Others than the above These types of cassette cannot be used in this unit.

<Recording possible> <Recording impossible>

Rear surface of cassette

Plug is raised to the same surface as the rear surface

Plug is pushed down

1-51HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-17. Adjustments/Setting Items WhenBoards Are Replaced

When the following boards are replaced, implement thespecified adjustments and checks referring to “8. Mechani-cal Alignment”, “9. Electrical Alignment of CameraSystem” and “10. Electrical Alignment of VTR System”.The boards that are specified below do not require adjust-ments and checks when they are replaced.Refer to “1-1-1. Circuit Configuration and Locations of thePrinted Wiring Boards” for the board used in each model.

Board name Section to be referred to

CCM-45G board 1-17-12. CCM-45G Board

CN-2871 board 1-17-2. CN-2871 Board

DC-110A board 1-17-14. DC-110A Board(HKDW-702)

DCP-43 board 1-17-7. DCP-43 Board

DR-614 board 1-17-1. DR-614 Board

EQ-88G board 1-17-11. EQ-88G Board

FP-152 board 1-17-10. FP-152 Board

IFA-19G board 1-17-13. IFA-19G Board

MDC-13G board 1-17-8. MDC-13G Board

MDR-14G board 1-17-9. MDR-14G Board

PA-340 board 1-17-3. PA-340 Board

RP-131 board 1-17-4. RP-131 Board

TG-256 board 1-17-5. TG-256 Board

CCD unit 1-17-6. CCD Unit

1-17-1. DR-614 Board

EEPROM replacement

The EEPROM (IC31) is installed in the DR-614 board.When the DR-614 board is replaced, remove IC31 fromthe former board and reinstall it to the new replacementDR-614 board.nThe initial data for this model cannot be written into thenew EEPROM (IC31) outside the factory.When IC31 needs to be replaced due to defective IC,contact your local Sony Sales Office/Service Center.

Adjustment Item when the Board is Replaced

9-6. Black Offset Adjustment9-7. VSUB Adjustment9-8. PA Gain Adjustment

1-17-2. CN-2871 Board


9-6. Black Offset Adjustment

1-17-3. PA-340 Board



1-17-4. RP-131 Board



NV-RAM Adjustment Item

NV-RAM (IC19) is installed in the RP-131 board.When the RP-131 board is replaced, perform the followingNV-RAM adjustments.

1. Set the switch S1-4/RP-131 board to ON and then setthe switch S1-2/AT-172 board to ON.

2. Turn on the power.3. Set the switch S1-4/RP-131 board to OFF. After 10

seconds have elapsed, set the switch S1-2/AT-172board to OFF.

4. Turn off the power once then back ON. Doing thisreset the data.

5. Keep pressing the AUTO W/B BAL switch (frontblock) in the BLK position for an extended time.nWhen the AUTO W/B BAL switch is kept pressed inthe BLK position, the display changes as follows.[BLACK SET] → [BLACK BAL] → [BLACK SET].Keep pressing the switch until the second [BLACKSET] is displayed.

1-52 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-17-5. TG-256 Board


9-2. VCO Frequency Adjustment9-6. Black Offset Adjustment9-7. VSUB Adjustment9-8. PA Gain Adjustment

1-17-6. CCD Unit

Adjustment Items when CCD Unit is Replaced

8-2-1. Tape Run Adjustment9-2. VCO Frequency Adjustment9-6. Black Offset Adjustment

1-17-7. DCP-43 Board

The EEPROM (IC611) and FRAM (IC51) are installed inthe DCP-43 board.When these ICs are replaced, implement the followingadjustments.

Adjustment Items when board or EEPROM orFRAM is Replaced

FRAM reset and black balance adjustment.(Refer to Section 1-10-1.)nAfter the board replacement or the FRAM replacement, besure to perform the FRAM reset and black balance adjust-ment before the adjustments as shown below.

9-2. VCO Frequency Adjustment9-3. TEST OUT Level Adjustment9-4. VF DC Level Adjustment9-5. VA Gain Adjustment9-6. Black Offset Adjustment9-9. Pre Knee Adjustment9-11. Black Shading Adjustment9-12. White Shading Adjustment9-13. Flare Adjustment

1-17-8. MDC-13G Board

The EEPROM (IC403) is installed in the MDC-13G board.Implement the following adjustments when this IC isreplaced, too.nBe sure to implement the setting which enables to save thecontents of the EEPROM to the backup RAM beforereplacing the MDC-13G board.(Refer to Section 11-3-8.)When this setting is performed, the contents of the backupRAM are restored into EEPROM at the first power-on afterthe MDC-13G board is replaced.

Setting Items before Staring to Replace the Boardor EEPROM

Saving the backup data of EEPROM contents11-3-8. MDC-13 Board Change

Adjustment Items when Board or EEPROM isReplaced

Initialization of servo adjustment data10-5-1. Servo System Adjustment Data Initialization

Servo system alignment10-5-2. Capstan FG Duty Ratio Adjustment10-5-3. Capstan Add-On Recording Adjustment10-5-4. Drum Phase Adjustment

CUE audio system alignment10-3-1. Bias Trap Adjustment10-3-2. CUE Playback Level Adjustment10-3-3. CUE Recording Bias Preset Adjustment10-3-4. CUE Record Level Adjustment-110-3-5. CUE Record Level Adjustment-2

1-17-9. MDR-14G Board


Servo system alignment10-5-4. Drum Phase Adjustment

1-53HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-17-10. FP-152 Board

Adjustment Items when Board is Replaced

System control adjustment and settingSetting the data and time of internal watch(For the setting procedure, refer to “ 4-8. TIME/DATEDisplay”.)10-4-1. Voltage Correction Adjustment

Audio system alignment10-2-1. Audio A/D Error Adjustment10-2-2. Audio D/A Error Adjustment10-2-3. AUDIO LEVEL Volume Control (Inside Panel)

Adjustment10-3-2. CUE Playback Level Adjustment10-3-4. CUE Record Level Adjustment-110-3-5. CUE Record Level Adjustment-2

1-17-11. EQ-88G Board

The EEPROM (IC1104) is installed in the EQ-88G board.Implement the following adjustments when this IC isreplaced.


RF System Adjustment10-6-1. RF System Continuous Automatic Adjustment10-6-2. Saving the RF System Adjustment Data10-6-3. PB Channel Condition Check10-6-4. REC Channel Condition Check

1-17-12. CCM-45G Board


10-4-2. Antenna Tuning Frequency Adjustment

1-17-13. IFA-19G Board

EEPROM replacement

The EEPROM (IC202) is installed in the IFA-19G board.When the IFA-19G board is replaced, remove IC202 fromthe former board and reinstall it to the new replacementIFA-19G board.nThe initial data for this model cannot be written into thenew EEPROM (IC202) outside the factory.When IC202 needs to be replaced due to defective IC,contact your local Sony Sales Office/Service Center.

1-17-14. DC-110A Board (HKDW-702)

Check if it performs correctly after replacing the DC-110Aboard. (Refer to Section 1 of the HKDW-702 InstallationManual.)

1-54 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-18. Contents of the EEPROM, NV-RAM and FRAM Data

The data that is stored in the EEPROM, NV-RAM and FRAM on the respective boards, is shown below.nPart numbers of the following ICs are shown in Vol. 2 Section “1. Spare Parts” of the separate Mainte-nance Manual are the ICs before saving the data contents.

Board Ref.No. EEPROM/ Contents of the saved data Adjustment/setup(address) NV-RAM/FRAM upon replacement of

EEPROM/NV-RAM/FRAM

DCP-43 IC611 EEPROM DCP board factory set value *1(D-3/B side) Black Set adjustment value

IC51 FRAM All of the setup data of the setup menu(A-2/B side) AWB/ABB data

DR-614 IC31 EEPROM CCD block factory set value *4(D-2/B side) Temperature measurement data

Mired value of filtersND offset factory set value

IFA-19G IC202 EEPROM Model name, Serial No., OEM code *2(A-2/A side) Model code, Device ID

DC-110A IC15 EEPROM Level adjustment value of the respective 9-29. SD VCO(HKDW-702) (C-2/B side) down-converter outputs Adjustment

9-30. SD Y LevelAdjustment

9-31. SD ZEBRAClamp LevelAdjustment

9-32. SD ZEBRA Y LevelAdjustment

MDC-13G IC403 EEPROM Servo system adjustment value, Refer to Section 1-17-8.(G-2/A side) Hours meter

FP-152 IC816 RAM inside CPU Hours meter *3(E-2/B side)

IC-819 EEPROM Audio adjustment data 10-2-1. Audio A/D Error(E-3/B side) Adjustment

10-2-2. Audio D/A ErrorAdjustment

10-2-3. AUDIO LEVELVolume Control(Inside Panel)Adjustment

EQ-88G IC1104 EEPROM RF system adjustment value Refer to Section(B-1/A side) 1-17-11.

RP-131 IC19 NV-RAM Unique data of CCD block Refer to Section(C-3/A side) 1-17-4.

*1 : Users’ unique data is saved in IC611 and IC51 of the DCP-43 board. When these ICs are replaced on the occasion of boardreplacement or IC replacement, the users’ unique data will be lost and the data is returned to the default data when the unit isshipped from the factory. For the menu setting, refer to Section 4 and re-set the data. For the adjustment items that are required inaccordance with the replacement, refer to Section 1-17-7.

*2 : Because data cannot be set again, IC202 of the IFA-19G board cannot be exchanged.When the IFA-19G board is replaced, remove IC202 from the former board and reinstall it to the new replacement IFA-19G board.When IC202 needs to be replaced due to defective IC, contact your local Sony Sales Office/Service Center.

*3 : Data cannot be saved in IC816 on the FP-152 board.When IC needs to be replaced due to defective IC, contact your local Sony Sales Office/Service Center.

*4 : Because data cannot be set again, IC31 of the DR-614 substrate cannot be exchanged.When the DR-614 board is replaced, remove IC31 from the former board and reinstall it to the new replacement DR-614 board.When IC31 needs to be replaced due to defective IC, contact your local Sony Sales Office/Service Center.

1-55HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-19. Description on the CCD Block Number

All of the CCD units have the unique ID number. The ID number is called CCD block number thatindicates the type and serial number of the CCD block.The label on which the CCD block number is printed, is pasted inside each CCD unit.

Example)

Aplicable Model (Serial No.) Type of the CCD Bock

HDW-F900R (10001- ) MLA

For the replacement procedure of the CCD unit, refer to “6-1-1. CCD Unit Replacement”.

MLA xxxxx Serial number of the CCD unit Type of the CCD block

1-56 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-20. Filter Knob Position Adjustment

nProcedure of the filter knob position adjustment is differentdepending on the type of the incorporated filter.

1. Move the mount lever in the direction of the arrow andremove the mount cap.nBe very careful not to touch the filter surface when themount cap is removed.

2. Rotate the knob shaft (thick) until the filter of thethinnest color is visible from the front.

3. Align the file (CC) knob number “B” with the mark onthe inside panel assembly and attach it with the use ofthe two stop screws (A).

4. Rotate the knob shaft (thin) until the filter of thethinnest color is visible from the front.

5. Align the file (ND) knob number “1” with the mark onthe inside panel assembly and attach it with the use ofthe two stop screws (B).

nStandard tightening torque :WP2 x 3 : 20 to 25 x 10-2 N.m (2 to 2.5 kgf.cm)WP3 x 3 : 53 x 10-2 N.m (5.3 kgf.cm)

Mount cap

Mount lever

1

2

Stop screws (B)WP2 x 3

Stop screws (B) WP2 x 3

Stop screw (A)WP2 x 3

Stop screw (A) WP2 x 3

Filter (CC) knob

Filter (ND) knob

Filter (ND) knob Inside panel assembly

Knob shaft (thin) Knob shaft (thick)

1

Mark

B

1-57HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-21. Memory Backup Battery

wThe lithium battery is critical part to safe operation.Replace the component with Sony part whose part numberappears in the manual published by Sony. If the componentis replaced by any part other than the specified ones, thismay cause a fire or electric shock.

cWhen replacing the lithium battery, ensure that the batteryis installed with “+” and “_” poles connected to thecorrect terminals.An improper connection may cause an explosion orleakage of fluid result in physical damage in the surround-ing materials.

The BP-33 board is equipped with the data backup battery(BT101). When replacing it, be sure to use the specifiedpart.

Replacement part : BT101 (on the BP-33 board)Part name : CR-2450 (lithium battery)Part No. : ! 1-528-229-41Recommended replacement period : Every five years

The memory IC stores the data such as date and time. If thebackup memory battery is dead or replaced, these data areall cleared.Refer to “4-8-6. Setting Date and Time of Internal Watch”in the Operation Manual to re-set the cleared data.

1-22. Fuse and IC Link Replacement

wThe fuse and IC link are critical parts to safe operation.Replace the components with Sony parts whose partnumber appear in the manual published by Sony. If thecomponents are replaced by any parts other than thespecified ones, this may cause a fire or electric shock.

cIf a fuse or IC link is replaced while the main power is kepton, this may cause electric shock.Before replacing fuse or IC link, not only turn off thePOWER switch but also remove the power cable that isconnected to the DC IN connector.

The EQ-88G board is equipped with fuse. The SS-92Gboard is equipped with IC link.Any an excessive current flow due to abnormality insidethe equipment, the fuse and IC link blow. If a fuse or IClink blows, turn off the main power of the equipment onceand inspect inside of the equipment and remove the causeof excessive current. After that, replace the fuse and/or IClink.

Board Ref. No. Description Part No.

EQ-88G F101, 102, 103 Fuse !1-576-270-21(4 A/125 V)

SS-92G PS201, 202 IC link 0.6 A !1-576-259-11

1-58 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-23. Circuit Protection Element

The CNB-23 board of this unit is equipped with thepositive characteristics thermister (power thermister) as thecircuit protection element. The positive characteristicsthermister limits the electric current flowing through thecircuit as the internal resistance increases when an exces-sive current flows or when the ambient temperatureincreases. If the positive characteristics thermister works,turn off the main power of the unit and inspect the internalcircuit of this unit. After the cause of the trouble is re-moved, turn on the main power back again. The unit worksnormally. It takes about one minute to cool down thepositive characteristics thermister after the main power isturned off.

Board Ref. No. Address Protection circuit/equipment

CNB-23 THP1 A8 Internal circuit of the board

1-59HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-24. Upgrading the ROM Version

nDo not downgrade the ROM version. It may cause amalfunction of the system.

The AT-172 board, EQ-88G board, FP-152 board and SS-92G board of this unit are equipped with ROMs.

Board Ref.No. Address Section to bereferred to

AT-172 IC38 A-2/B side 1-24-2, 1-24-3*1

EQ-88G IC1101 D-1/B side *2

FP-152 IC816 E-2/B side 1-24-2

SS-92G IC8 C-3/A side 1-24-2

*1 : When the ROM of the AT-172 board is replaced with the new one, aMemory Stick cannot be used for upgrading. In such a case, use theROM-28 board.

*2 : ROM on the EQ-88G board does not need upgrading.

1-24-1. Confirming the ROM Version

nFor the basic operations of the setup menu, refer to Section4-1-1.

1. Turn on the main power and set the MENU ON/OFFswitch to ON.

2. Let the display show the ROM VERSION submenu ofthe DIAGNOSIS menu.

3. Confirm the ROM version.

1-24-2. When a Memory Stick is Used forVersion Upgrading(AT-172 Board, FP-152 Board, SS-92G Board)

m. When the ROM of the AT-172 board is replaced with the

new one, a Memory Stick cannot be used for upgrading.In such a case, use the ROM-28 board.

. The upgrading program must have already been saved ina Memory Stick before.(For details of saving the upgrading program, contactyour local Sony Sales Office/Service Center.)

. For the basic operations of the setup menu, refer toSection 4-1-1.

. The following display is the sample when upgradingROM from Ver.1.00 to Ver.1.01.

1. Turn on the main power and set the MENU ON/OFFswitch to ON.

2. Let the display show the ROM VERSION submenu ofthe DIAGNOSIS menu.

3. Insert the Memory Stick in which the upgradingprogram is already saved. Press the rotary encoder fora few seconds with the cursor on the left being “?”shape until the system enters the version upgrademode.The message “MEMORY STICK ACCESS” appearson display. (If a Memory Stick is not inserted, themessage “NO MEMORY STICK” appears.)nDo not remove the Memory Stick while message“MEMORY STICK ACCESS” appears on display.

? 03OROM VERSION MEMORY STICK ACCESS AT : Ver 1.00 SS : Ver 1.00 FP : Ver 1.00 AU DSP: Ver 1.00 EQ : Ver 1.00

? 03OROM VERSION AT : Ver x.xx SS : Ver x.xx FP : Ver x.xx AU DSP: Ver x.xx EQ : Ver x.xx

1-60 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

4. Select the desired ROM that you want to upgrade the version. Then press the rotary encoder. Thefollowing confirmation message appears as follows.When a newer version than the current version is read : VERSION UP OK?When the same version as the current version is read : SAME VERSION OK?When an older version than the current version is read : VERSION DOWN OK?

5. Selecting YES and pressing the rotary encoder starts upgrading of the selected ROM version.6. In the case of the ROM on the AT-172 board:(1) The following displays to execute the version upgrade appear.

nNever remove a Memory Stick or never turn off the main power until the message “COMPLETE”appears.

(2) Within several seconds, the following message appears.

(3) Within five seconds, the following message appears.

03OROM VERSION VERSION UP OK? YES NO AT : Ver 1.00 1.01 SS : Ver 1.00 FP : Ver 1.00 AU DSP: Ver 1.00 EQ : Ver 1.00

→→

" Initializing... " " Checking... " "Reading ROM data ..."

AT version up! The dislay is switched in an instance.

↓

↓

FlashingThe dislay is switched in about five seconds.

←

↓" 3 / 4 "

" 4 / 4 "

Writing...1.01 001 1 / 4

Flashing← -------Complete------- * Power off *

1-61HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

In the case of ROM on the FP-152 board and SS-92G board:(1) Check to see that the message “COMPLETE !”

appears indicating that the version indication haschanged.

7. Turn off the main power and then back on to start theunit for upgrading of the ROM to take place.

1-24-3. When the ROM-28 Board is Used forVersion Upgrading (AT-172 Board)

Required tool : ROM-28 board(Sony part No. : A-8326-017-A)

nThe upgrading program must have already been saved inthe ROMs (IC2 and IC3) on the ROM-28 board before.(For details of saving the upgrading program, contact yourlocal Sony Sales Office/Service Center.)


2. Insert CN1 of the ROM-28 board to CN6 on the AT-172 board.

3. Set the switch S1 on the ROM-28 board as shown inthe illustration.

4. Turn on the main power. Then the data stored in theROM-28 board are transferred to the ROM on the AT-172 board in 10 and a few seconds.

5. Turn off the main power and remove the ROM-28board.

6. Close the inside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-5.)

7. Turn on the main power to start the unit for upgradingof the ROM to take place.

03OROM VERSION COMPLETE ! AT : Ver 1.00 SS : Ver 1.01 FP : Ver 1.00 AU DSP: Ver 1.00 EQ : Ver 1.00

→

ROM-28 board

CN1

AT-172 board (CN6)

S1

Switch knob

1-62 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-24-4. When the FL-272 Board is Used forVersion Upgrading (SS-92G Board)

Required tool : FL-272 board(Sony part No. : J-6531-280-A)SYSCON/SERVO ROM(Sony part No. : J-6531-320-A)

1. Open the inside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-5.)2. Remove the plug-in board assembly.

(Refer to Section 1-7.)3. Remove the dust protection cover.

(Refer to Section 1-15-9.)4. Insert the SYSCON/SERVO ROMs to the IC sockets

(IC8, IC9) on side A of the FL-272 board.nThe IC numbers printed on the ROM label shouldmatch with the IC numbers printed on the circuitboard.

5. Set the switch No.1 only of the DIP switch (S1) on theFL-272 board to the ON position. (See Fig. 1.)

6. Short-circuit the solder slit (SL1) on side B of the FL-272 board.

7. Turn off the power. Insert CN1 of the FL-272 board toCN3 of the SS-92G board.

8. Turn on the power. Erasing the software starts. (After the diode D6 turns on, the diodes flash in theorder of D8→D4→D7.)After that, writing the software starts.(After the diode D2 turns on, the diodes flash in theorder of D8→D4→D7.)

9. When you confirm that the diode D5 on the FL-272board lights, turn off the power.

10. Remove the FL-272 board from the SS-92G board.11. Turn on the power and confirm that the system

initialization has ended with success and the systemstarts up normally.

12. Upgrade the software version using Memory Stick.(Refer to Section 1-24-2.)

OPEN

No.1 pin

DIP switch (S1)

SL1

J/CAM

STUDIO

FL-272 boardCN1

CN3

SS-92G board

Fig.1

Fig.2

B side(Soldering side)

IC9

IC8

SYSCON/SERVOROM

1-63HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-25. How to Replace the Photo Sensorson the MDC-13G Board

The four photo sensors (PH301 to PH304) are installed onthe MDC-13G board of this unit.To replace these photo sensors, the accurate positionsetting of the sensors is required with the use of the DIF-110 sensor mount tool.

Required tool : DIF-110 sensor mount tool(Part No. J-6531-100-A)

nIf the sensors are not mounted in the correct positions, thecam gear position will not be correctly detected, which thatcauses malfunction of the unit.


1. Remove soldering from the photo sensor that you wantto replace and remove the photo sensor.

2. Place a new photo sensor on a solder land tentatively.Be careful to place a new photo sensor in the correctdirection. (Refer to the illustration below.)

3. Align the two projections of the sensor mount toolwith the holes of the board.

4. Solder the two leads of a photo sensor tentatively.

5. Remove the sensor mount tool and solder the fourleads of the photo sensor.

H G

F E D

C

B

A

1

2

3

4

5

6

PH301PH303

PH304

PH302

Photo sensor

White line on the photo sensor Silk screen on the

board (Thick line)

Sensor mount tool

Projection

Hole

Hole

Projection

Hole of the sensormount tool

Hole of the sensor mount tool

Solderings (two leads tentatively)

Photo sensor

Solderings

Solderings

1-64 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-26. Circuit Description

1-26-1. CCD Block (TG-256 Board, DR-614Board, BI-199/200/201 Board, andPA-340 Board)

TG-256 boardAmong the CCD driving pulses, the horizontal drive pulseis sent to the BI-199/200/201 board through the DR-614board, and the sampling pulse that samples the CCD outputsignal is output to the PA-340 board. The drive pulses aregenerated in synchronism with the H_PHASE that is inputfrom the DCP-43 board. The respective drive pulses aregenerated from the VCO clock signal (X1 : 74.1758 MHzand X2 : 74.25 MHz) on this board. The clock signal forthe digital circuit of this unit is also output via the LVDSdriver (IC17).

DR-614 boardAmong the CCD driving pulses, the vertical drive pulse isgenerated in this board and is converted by IC19 such thatthe vertical drive pulse can drive the CCD directly. Theconverted pulse is sent to the CCD through the BI-199/200/201 board. The drive pulses are output in synchronismwith the H_PHASE and FRM_RST signals that are inputfrom the DCP-43 board. At the same time, the data such asthe V-sub voltage of the CCD are stored in the EEPROM(IC31) of the DR-614 board. The DR-614 board has aninterface circuit with the optical filter.

BI-199/200/201 boardAmong the CCD driving pulses, the horizontal drive pulseis converted by this board so that it can drive the CCDdirectly. The CCD unit is mounted on the BI-199/200/201board to which the horizontal and vertical drive pulses andthe control voltage are applied to the CCD. The outputsignal from the CCD is supplied by the two output signallines to which the entire bandwidth of the CCD outputsignal is divided into the two signal lines equally. Theseoutput signals are sent to the PA-340 board via source-followers.

PA-340 boardThe two output signals (the bandwidth is half of theoriginal Hi-vision signal) from the CCD imager that aresupplied from the BI-199/200/201 board are sent to thecorrelation double-sampling circuit (IC100 for R-ch, IC200for G-ch, and IC300 for B-ch) where the video signal istaken out. These two outputs are synthesized to the originalbandwidth of the Hi-vision signal by multiplexing them(IC405 for R-ch, IC505 for G-ch, and IC605 for B-ch). Theoutput signal is sent to the DCP-43 board.

1-65HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-26-2. Camera System (DCP-43 Board)

DCP-43 boardThe DCP-43 board contains the circuit that performs thecamera signal processing, and consists of the followingfour blocks.1) VA block2) Digital signal processing block3) Output analog circuit block4) SG block

1) VA blockFor the RGB analog video signal output from the PA-340 board, the multiplication operation of the blackshading signal is performed in IC112/217/312 in thisblock. Also, IC119, 219, and 319 amplify signal level(white control, master gain settings), multiply whiteshading, add flare, and perform the Preknee processingso that the dynamic range of the signal matches that ofthe A/D converter circuit. Other than these processes,these ICs mix the analog test signal, and correct theblack level offset. Finally the bandwidth of the signalis limited to 37 MHz in the Prefilter and the outputsignal is sent to the digital signal process block.

2) Digital signal processing blockThe analog signal that is supplied from the VA blockis sent to the A/D converter (IC129/229/329) wherethe analog signal is converted to the digital signal of12-bit 74 MHz.The A/D converted video signal receives the additionprocessing of the digital pixels at the adder IC(IC1017) and is sent to the main digital processor IC(IC1019).The digital video signal receives bit expansion in orderto receive non-linear processing to the 10-bit 74 MHzsignal. Then the following processes are performed.

. Various level detections (level detections for Iris,AWB/ABB, DCC, Trueye, Flare, Area Matrix andothers)

. Linear matrix processing

. Knee (DCC, Tureye) processing

. Gamma processing

. Generation and addition of DTL and APT signals

. White clip and black clip

. Color bar signal generation

The video signal that has received the above digitalprocesses, is converted to the 10-bit 74 MHz Y-signaland the decoded color difference signals with whichthe title signal is mixed at IC2008.Then the 10-bit 74 MHz Y-signal and the decodedcolor difference signals are sent to the VTR block andto the camera output block. IC2008 acts as a bilateralinterface with the VTR in order to support the play-back operation of the VTR.

In addition to the above-described functions, IC2008performs the following processes.

. Signal detection processing

. Sync signal generation (for the DC-110A boardand character IC)

. Mixing and selection of the marker

. Digital Audio Delay (for the DC-110A board)

The following four digital signals are prepared as thecamera output signal and are D/A converted by IC201,IC206, IC211, IC212 and then sent to the outputanalog circuit block.

. Y (10-bit 74 MHz)

. R-Y (10-bit 37 MHz)

. B-Y (10-bit 37 MHz)

. VF DTL (8-bit 74 MHz)

3) Output analog circuit blockThe D/A converted signal passes through the postfilter, is added by the sync signal at IC859, IC861 andIC862, and is divided into the three outputs of compo-nent output, TEST OUT and VF output.Either the SD signal (down-converted standard signal)supplied from the DC-110A board or the TEST OUT/VF signal is selected by IC809 and IC810.The zebra signal and marker are added to the VFsignal at the circuit of Q804 to Q813, Q816, Q819 toQ821, IC827 and IC828 before the VF signal is outputto VF.This block also contains the zebra level detectioncircuit for HD and SD respectively.

4) SG blockThe SG block generates the sync signal to generate theHD signal and the various clamp and blanking pulsesto be used in the sync and analog circuit. These signalsare generated from the 74 MHz clock signal that issupplied from the CCD block.The SG block has the sync separators for the HD andSD respectively in order to establish GENLOCK. TheSG block can be locked by automatic HD/SD detec-tion.

1-66 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-26-3. Video Signal System (DVP-41 Board)

. Signal processing during recordingThe 74 MHz 20-bit Y-signal and the PbPr signal that aresupplied from the camera circuit of the DCP-43 board tothe DVP-41 board, are passed through the DF.F (IC140 toIC142) and then input to the REGALO (IC160) rateconverter circuit. The 74 MHz 20-bit Y-signal and thePbPr signal are down-sampled by the rate converter circuitto the 46 MHz 20-bit multiplexed Y/PbPr signal. At thesame time, the signal is sampled by every other pixel. Theoutput signal from the rate converter circuit is sent to thebit rate reduction circuit of the MICKY-A (IC300) andMICKY-B (IC350) via the BUS SWITCH (IC302). In thebit rate reduction circuit, the Y-signal is grouped into thesignal unit of 8 pixels (H) x 8 pixels (V) and the PbPrsignal is grouped into the signal unit of 4 pixels (H) x 8pixels (V), to which shuffling processing (i.e., the adjacentblocks are assigned to the six segments) is implemented.After the shuffling processing, the DCT coefficient iscalculated from the data of the respective blocks so that thequantization and VLC (Variable Length Coding) process-ing are performed. The compression rate here is 1/4.4.Combining the compression rate of 1/1.6 for down sam-pling at FIL (IC160), the total compression rate is about 1/7. The compressed video data passes through DF.F (IC403and IC404) and is sent to NECCY (IC400) that is the errorcorrection encoder circuit. In the error correction encodercircuit, the compressed picture data receives the followingprocesses.

. Generation of the outer parity and inner parity

. Addition of the SYNC/ID code

. Generation of SYNC block

At the same time, the serial audio data that is suppliedfrom the audio circuit of the FP-152 board passes throughthe SEL (IC406) and is input to the error correctionencoder circuit in ECC (IC400). In the error correctionencoder circuit, the serial audio data receives the processesof generating the outer parity and inner parity, addition ofthe SYNC/ID code and the SYNC block is generated.After the serial audio data is multiplexed with the picturedata, the multiplexed signal is sent to the RF system circuitin the EQ-88G board as two-channel serial data.

. Signal processing during playbackThe playback data that is supplied from the RF systemcircuit of the EQ-88G board to the DVP-41 board, passesthrough the BUS SWITCH (IC501), and is input to theerror correction decoder circuit of the ADAM-HS (IC500).

In the error correction decoder circuit, the errors that areoccured during the recording and playback processes arecorrected. An error flag is added to the errors that couldnot be corrected by the error correction decoder circuit sothat error concealment can be performed by the errorconcealment circuit of the CNC (IC700). At the same time,the audio data is separated in the error correction decodercircuit, and the separated audio data is sent to the audiocircuit of the FP-152 board as the playback serial audiodata.The playback video data that is supplied from the errorcorrection decoder circuit, passes through the BUSSWITCH (IC506 and IC507) and is sent to the bit ratereduction decoder circuit that consists of MINNY-A(IC600) and MINNY-B (IC650). In the bit rate reductiondecoder circuit, the reverse processing of the bit ratereduction circuit is performed. The 46 MHz 20-bit Y/PbPrsignal is generated by the bit rate reduction decoder circuit,and is sent to the error concealment circuit of CNC(IC700). In the error concealment circuit, the correct datais judged for error data for which the error flag is set, fromthe peripheral pixels and the data of the previous frame,and the error concealment is performed. After the errorconcealment, the data passes through the BUS SWITCH(IC161) and is input to the rate converter circuit of REGA-LO (IC160). In the rate converter circuit, the 46 MHz 20-bit Y/PbPr signal is up-sampled to the 74 MHz 20-bit Y-signal and to the PbPr signal, which are then sent to thecamera system circuit in the DCP-43 board.

. Clock signal and timing reference signal processingTwo types of clock signals (74 MHz and 46 MHz) are usedin the video system circuit of the DVP-41 board.The 74 MHz clock is supplied from the camera systemcircuit of the DCP-43 board to the DVP-41 board where itis phase-compensated by the 74M CLOCK DRIVE(IC101), and is then distributed to the respective ICs. The46 MHz clock is generated by TG (IC200) of the DVP-41board as the clock that is synchronous with the frame pulsesupplied from the camera system circuit of the DCP-43board. The 46 MHz clock is phase-compensated by the46M CLOCK DRIVE (IC203) and is then distributed tothe respective ICs.The timing reference signals are generated by TG (IC200)of the DVP-41 board for the respective ICs, from the framepulse and the HD pulse that are supplied from the camerasystem circuit of the DCP-43 board. However, the timingreference signal of the playback video data RAGALO(IC160) is supplied from the camera system circuit of theDCP-43 board.

1-67HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Fig.1 Audio system, frame diagram

1-26-4. Audio System(FP-152 Board, IFA-19G Board, APR-59AG Board, AL-43 Board,and AXM-33 Board)

The audio system consists of the following blocks:. Front microphone amp: IFA-19G board. Input signal selector: FP-152 board. A/D circuit (CH1&2): FP-152 board. A/D circuit (CH3&4): FP-152 board. D/A circuit: FP-152 board. AES/EBU audio signal processing block: FP-152 board. Monitor amp: APR-59AG board. Final amp: AL-43 board. Rear input: AXM-33 board

AXM-33

CNB-23

KY-475G

AL-43

MB-1096RX-54G

CN403

CN401

CN117SW-1309 CN1

CN117

CN401

CN109

CN109

CN402

CN207 CN205

CN205

CN204

CN204

STBY/SAVEOFF/ON-PAGELOW/M/HIGHPRST/ITEMPRESET A/BDCC-BRA

CN203

CN203

CN202

CN202

CN206

CN301

CN301CN302

CN207

CN107

CN107

CN208

CN106

CN106

CN105

CN105CN120

CN504

CN503

LENS

CN502

CN501

CN501

OUT

CN120

CN201

CN201

TEST

FP-152

HP-104

PCF8574PCF8574

SPEAKER

3

3

I2C

I2C

I2C

I2C

MIC

IN

IN

IFA-19G

TURBO_GAIN_SWASSIGNABLE_SW1ASSIGNABLE_SW2

APR-59AG

DCP-43DVP-41

PCF8574

HP-103

MS

FAN

ENC-61

SW-1038

VTR STARTAUTO W/B BALSHUTTER

MIC CONT

PSW

SW-1031

MA-103

+48V/OFF (CH1)+48V/OFF (CH2)

CN1

1-68 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

FP CPU (IC816: flash RAM) on the FP-152 board carries outaudio control according to the audio mode informationreceived from SS CPU (IC1) on the SS-92G board.The IFA-19G board has a front microphone amp (10dB/20dB/30dB) gain switch circuit.The APR-59AG board is composed of monitor amps (IC106,IC109, etc).The AL-43 board is composed of final amps (IC101, IC201)and connects to the CNB-23 board. The CH1 and CH2output signals are output from the 5-pin connector (CN301)on the AXM-33 board.The AXM-33 board is composed of LINE-IN/AES/EBU-IN/MIC-IN switch (S101, S201), microphone amp (20dB/30dB)gain switch circuit and AES/EBU digital audio signalreceiver block (IC500). The LINE IN input level settings canbe switched between +4dBu, 0dBu, and _3dBu with theslide switch (S202) on the AXM-33 board.The SW-1309 board is the ON/OFF switch (S1, S2) for +48V.

After turning the power to the unit on, FP CPU (IC816) onthe FP-152 board, each port is initialized, and the PLL circuitlock information for TG (IC321) on the DVP-41 board fromSS CPU (IC1) on the SS-92G board is received. Then, resetfor audio control IC (IC404) on the FP-152 board is released,program download and register data settings are performed,and then MUTE is released. (EE sound can be monitored)

Front microphone signal passes through the MA-103 board,IFA-19G board, and MB-1096 board before entering theinput signal selector (IC5 to IC8) of the FP-152 board.Rear input signal passes through the AXM-33 board, CNB-23 board, and MB-1096 board before entering the inputsignal selector (IC5 to IC8) of the FP-152 board.While switching LINE SELECT (IC16), FP CPU (IC816) onthe FP-152 reads the 2-bit signal for each switch (S1 to S4).With this information, the board switches between FRONT/REAR/WIRELESS switch information received by the inputsignal selectors (IC5 to IC8) and selects the audio signal.

The CH1 or CH2 signal selected by the input signal selector(IC5, IC6) on the FP-152 board is input into the differentialamp (IC1: switches between balanced/unbalanced). Thesignal then passes through the 9dB attenuated circuit. Thenthe signal is input into the A/D balance/unbalance conversionamp (IC101, IC104), and after being increased about 1dB, isinput into the A/D converter IC (IC103: 24-bit).At the same time, the CH3 or CH4 signal selected by theinput signal selector (IC7, IC8) on the FP-152 board is inputinto the differential amp (IC2: switches between balanced/unbalanced). The signal then passes through the 9dB attenu-ated circuit. Then the signal is input into the A/D balance/unbalance conversion amp (IC302, IC304), and after beingincreased about 1dB, is input into the A/D converter IC(IC301: 24-bit).

The serial digital audio signal input from the AES/EBUINPUT connector passes the receiver block on the AXM-33board, and is decoded in the decoder (IC200) on the FP-152board.Then the sampling rate conversion in synchronous with therecorded video signal takes place in the sampling rateconverter (IC201, IC202).

The 24-bit (64fs) 2CH digital audio signal from each A/Dconverter output, each decoded 2CH digital audio signalfrom AES/EBU input that underwent sampling rate conver-sion, and the digital audio signal from the CA adapter are allinput to the FPGA (IC401) on the FP-152 board. Then thesignals are switched and converted into 128fs serial 4CH.

The front volume and side volume are connected to the A/Dterminal of FP CPU (IC816) on the FP-152 board. Thevolume voltage is digitalized with a built-in 10-bit A/D, andafter changing the DSP multiplier, sends the signal to audioDSP (IC404) on the FP-152 board. After digital conversion,the combination of front volume and side volume, go throughmultiplication processing in FP CPU (IC816) and are sent tothe audio DSP (IC404) for the FP-152 board.

The digital audio signal made into 128fs serial 4CH withFPGA (IC401) on the FP-152 board is input into audio DSP(IC404). There, the signal undergoes processes from theaudio DSP high-speed calculation, such as gain processingduring manual control, AGC processing, LIMITER process-ing, LPF-ON when using the front microphone, recordingEMPHASIS processing, headroom level switch, delayprocessing for internal SG and VIDEO/AUDIO phasematching, and audio level detection. Then, the signal is madeinto 64fs parallel (CH1&CH2, CH3&CH4) with FPGA(IC401) on the FP-152 board. It then passes through the MB-1096 board before being input into the DVP-41 board.

The D/A parallel signal (64fs) for playback passes throughDVP-41 board and MB-1096 board. Then the signal is madeinto 128fs serial with FPGA (IC401) on the FP-152 boardand is input into audio DSP (IC404). The signal goes throughprocesses such as playback DE-EMPHASIS processing,headroom level switch, and output LIMITER processing.Then, the signal is made 64fs parallel in FPGA (IC401) onthe FP-152 board while CH1&CH2 and CH3&CH4 areselected. The FPGA (IC401) output playback digital audiosignal is then input into the 24-bit D/A converter (IC521).The D/A converter output passes through the differential amp(IC504, IC505), the T-shaped twin filter, the ATT unbalance/balance conversion amp (IC514, IC517), MB-1096 board,CNB-23 board, final amp (IC101, IC201) on the AL-43board. Then the signal is output from the 5-pin XLR connec-tor on the AXM-33 board. The audio signal for the monitorundergoes volume control in the APR-59AG board, thenpasses through the amp (IC106) on the APR-59AG boardbefore being output.

1-69HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Fig

. 2 A

ud

io d

ata

form

at

CH

1 or

MIX

or

CH

2C

UE

D/A

to A

NA

LOG

OU

T

A/D

A/D

FP

GA

(INP

UT

)

CH

3/4

CH

1/2

CA

CH

3/4

CA

CH

1/2

AN

A C

H4

AN

A C

H3

AN

A C

H2

AN

A C

H1

CA

/SD

I

MO

NIT

OR

RE

C

FP

GA

(PB

)

PB

CH

1/2

64F

S

64F

S

64F

S

64F

S

128F

SC

H1/

2/3/

4

PB

CH

3/4

128F

SC

H1/

2/3/

4

CH

1/2

or C

H3/

4D

/A

SE

L

MO

N C

H3/

4

MO

N C

H1/

2

RE

C C

H3/

4

RE

C C

H1/

2

FP

GA

(SD

I)

FP

GA

(MO

N)

FP

GA

(RE

C)

128F

SC

H1/

2/3/

4

128F

SC

H1/

2/3/

4

128F

SC

H1/

2/3/

4

24bi

t MS

B fi

rst,

LEF

T J

ustif

ied

CA

/SD

I CH

1/2

to C

A/S

DI

CA

CH

E R

EC

CH

1/2

CU

E (

CH

1 or

MIX

or

CH

2)

to C

UE

RE

C

CA

/SD

I CH

3/4

FS

230

CH

1C

H3

MS

B

CH

2C

H4

FS

23 -

0

CH

1MS

B

CH

2

23 -

023

- 0

23 -

0

CH

3C

H4

16bi

t MS

B fi

rst,

RIG

HT

Jus

tifie

d

24(2

0)bi

t LS

B fi

rst,

RIG

HT

Jus

tifie

d

32bi

t MS

B fi

rst,

LEF

T J

ustif

ied

24bi

t MS

B fi

rst,

LEF

T J

ustif

ied

24(2

0)bi

t LS

B fi

rst,

RIG

HT

Jus

tifie

d

24bi

t MS

B fi

rst,

LEF

T J

ustif

ied

FS

310

CH

1MS

B

CH

2

310

310

310

CH

3C

H4

FS

230

CH

1C

H3

MS

B

CH

2C

H4

FS

150

CH

1C

H3MS

B

CH

2C

H4

16bi

t MS

B fi

rst,

RIG

HT

Jus

tifie

d

DS

P

16bi

t MS

B fi

rst,

LEF

T J

ustif

ied

24bi

t MS

B fi

rst,

RIG

HT

Jus

tifie

d

FS

150

CH

1C

H3MS

B

CH

2C

H4

FP

GA

(M

UX

)F

PG

A (

DE

MU

X)

64F

S

64F

S

64F

S

64F

S

RE

C

PB

FS

150

CH

1M

IXC

H2MS

B

SE

LC

H1

MIX

CH

2

SE

L

DE

C&

SR

CC

H3/

464

FS

CH

1/2

64F

S

AE

S C

H3/

4

AE

S C

H1/

2

FS

230

CH

1C

H3

MS

B

CH

2C

H4

FS

23

-0

CH

1MS

B

CH

2

23

-0

23

-0

23

-0

CH

3C

H4

FS

230

CH

1C

H3

MS

B

CH

2C

H4

32bi

t MS

B fi

rst,

LEF

T J

ustif

ied

32bi

t MS

B fi

rst,

LEF

T J

ustif

ied

--

--

1-70 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Audio DSP Operation Processing. DIGITAL AGC ProcessingThree to five types of characteristics can be selected fromthe menu depending on the headroom.* MAINTENANCE menu AUDIO-2 page “AU AGC

SPEC ”: _6dB/_9dB/_12dB/_15dB/_17dB_6dB: Linear operation until approx. _8dBFS. Approx.

_6dBFS at Max._9dB: Linear operation until approx. _11dBFS. Approx.




_17dBFS at Max.

Fig.3 AGC features (Headroom 20dB)

. DIGITAL INPUT LIMITER characteristics (only duringmanual control)

Turn the LIMITER ON/OFF from the menu. Three to fivetypes of characteristics can be selected from the menudepending on the headroom.* MAINTENANCE menu AUDIO-2 page “AU LIMITERMODE”: OFF/_6dB/_9dB/_12dB/_15dB/_17dBOFF: LIMITER OFF_6dB: Linear operation until approx. _8dBFS. Approx.




_15dBFS at Max.

_17dB: Linear operation until approx. _20dBFS. Approx._17dBFS at Max.

. DIGITAL OUTPUT LIMITER characteristicsPerforms LIMITER processing on the EE and PB outputsignal. Turn the LIMITER ON/OFF from the menu.* MAINTENANCE menu AUDIO-2 page “AU OUTLIMITER”: ON/OFFON: Linear until approx. _13dBFS. Approx. _11dBFS

at Max.OFF: LIMITER OFF

. Gain control during manual controlThe A/D converted volume value is converted into a DSPmultiplication value at FP CPU (IC816) and handed overto DSP. The maximum variable for volume is approx.+12dB. (_∞ to +12 dB)

. Recording error correctionFor error correction on the A/D converter for audio, themultiplication value is corrected in the range +0 to _2dB.Adjustment is carried out from the menu with the standardsignal level applied. (fully automatic)

. Playback error correctionFor error correction on the D/A converter for audio, themultiplication value is corrected in the range +0 to _2dB.During adjustment, internal SG is used as the standardsignal, and the inside panel for each LEVEL volume isturned and fine-tuned. (semi-automatic)

. LPFRuns automatically during front microphone selection.

. Internal SGGenerates a _20dBFS (1kHz) fixed level signal and lateradjusts the gain depending on the SG level settings in themenu.

. EMPHASIS, DE-EMPHASISPerforms recording EMPHASIS processing depending on themenu settings. Also performs playback DE-EMPHASISprocessing.

. Headroom level switchPerforms headroom level switch during recording andplayback depending on the menu settings.

. Delay processingPerforms delay processing to match the VIDEO andAUDIO phases of each CH.

HEADROOM 20dB0

RE

C L

EV

EL

[dB

FS

]

LINE INPUT LEVEL [dBu]

-1-28

191494

-24

-20

-16

-12

-8

-4

24

AGC OFF

AGC max. -6dBFS (CLIP 0dBFS)

AGC max.-9dBFS (CLIP 0dBFS)

AGC max. -12dBFS (CLIP -2dBFS)



1-71HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-26-5. System Control (FP-152 Board andSS-92G Board)

FP-152 boardThe FP-152 board has the FP CPU (IC816 : with built-inflash RAM) as the sub system control for VTR.The FP CPU (IC816) performs the following processes.

. Communication with the VTR main CPU (IC1 : SSCPU) on the SS-92G board

The FP-152 board and the SS-92G board are connected viathe MB-1096 board. The FP CPU (IC816) and the SS CPU(IC1) on the SS-92G board are connected by the clock signalsynchronous-type serial communication once in every field atthe frequency of about 1 MHz. The clock signal is a fixedlength of 57 bytes. The SS CPU (IC1) is used as the masterclock generator.

. Audio mode controlAudio control is performed by receiving the audio modeinformation and the menu setup information from the SSCPU (IC1) on the SS-92G board. The port of the FP CPU(IC816) is used as the input port and the switch informa-tion that is required for the audio mode control is input tothis port. The control output is output from the I/O EX-PANDER IC (IC823) of the FP-152 board.

. Audio control ICThe following processes are performed by establishingparallel communication with the audio control IC (IC404)of the FP-152 board.

. AGC/LIMITER processing

. Gain control during manual control

. Recording/playback error correction

. LPF

. EMPHASIS/DE-EMPHASIS

. Head room level switch

. Level detection

. Internal SG ON/OFF control

. Audio delay controlThe block has a circuit configuration that can isolate thebus to enable the FP CPU (IC816) to operate even whenthe main power is turned off.

. AUDIO level indicationThe audio level information is supplied from the audiocontrol IC (IC404) of the FP-152 board, and is sent to theSS CPU (IC1) of the SS-92G board. It has the data size of16 bits x 4CH. The SS CPU (IC1) performs soft process-ing such as peak detection of the 16-bit data and creates theaudio level indication data that is sent to the FP CPU(IC816). The FP CPU (IC816) displays the audio level onthe LCD at every serial communication event.

. CTL/TC/UBIT displayThe ON/OFF information of the switches that are connect-ed to the port is scanned and sent to the SS CPU (IC1) ofthe SS-92G board. The SS CPU (IC1) changes the displaydata in accordance with the setting conditions, and thedisplay data is sent to the FP CPU (IC816). The FP CPU(IC816) displays the received data at every serial commu-nication event.The FP CPU (IC816) only sends the switch information tothe SS CPU (IC1), and does not create the display data.

. Watch IC controlThe watch data is read from the watch IC (IC831) of theFP-152 board, and is sent to the SS CPU (IC1) of the SS-92G board. The SS CPU (IC1) sends also the time data tothe camera CPU (IC27) of the AT-172 board. The view-finder uses the time data for displaying the time. When thetime of the watch is set with the use of the menu, a set ofdata, a year, month, day, time and minute, is sent to the FPCPU (IC816) in the reverse route. At the same time, thetime setting request is issued from the SS CPU (IC1). TheFP CPU (IC816) sets the time to the watch IC (IC831) andconfirms the data.

. WARNING LED control and alarm tone controlThe WARNING information is supplied from the SS CPU(IC1) of the SS-92G board that is used to turn on and offthe WARNING LED (D819) on the FP-152 board. The 1kHz square wave output from the PWM generator circuitinside the FP CPU (IC816), is used as the alarm tone and isoutput from the FP CPU (IC816 : pin-44).

. Connection circuit with the wireless receiver (optionalequipment)

The RS-232C TRANSCEIVER (IC809) on the FP-152board acts as the interface circuit for connection with thewireless receiver. The FP CPU (IC816) performs the serialcommunication when the optional wireless receiver isinstalled, and reads the reception RF sensitivity and mutinginformation. This data is sent to the camera CPU (IC27) ofthe AT-172 board via the SS CPU (IC1) on the SS-92Gboard so that it can be viewed on the viewfinder.

. Software download functionThe FP CPU (IC816) is a CPU with built-in flash memorythat enables rewriting of software.To rewrite the software, the software that is saved in amemory stick is read by the camera microprocessor and ison the SS-92G board transferred to the FP CPU (IC816)via the SS CPU (IC1) for rewriting. The FP CPU (IC816 :pin-4) goes “H” during rewriting to release the WRITEINHIBIT.

The FP-152 board contain the power supply control circuit.

1-72 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

. Power supply voltage measuring circuitThe power supply voltage measuring circuit (IC805) usesthe DA output data from the FP CPU (IC816). The twotypes of DC signal are output from the DA of the FP CPU(IC816), and are used to change the voltage at IC805 (pin-1) of the FP-152 board so that the voltage measurementranges are switched between the range of +9 V to +14 V,and the range of +12 V to +17 V. The result of the voltagemeasurement is sent to the SS CPU (IC1) in the form of avoltage value where the remaining amount of battery andremaining data for display are calculated by the SS CPU(IC1) on the SS-92G board. The created data is sent backto the FP CPU (IC816). The FP CPU (IC816) shows theremaining data at every serial communication event.

. PWM power supply circuit for FAN/FP circuitThe PWM control loop (Q808: Open Loop) preciselycontrols the supply voltages by using the switching powersupply circuit. Because the voltage input at the primarycircuit of the power supply circuit is supplied from battery,the input voltage changes significantly. Because of thesignificant change of input power voltage, the cycle of thePWM signal is changed in accordance with the result ofbattery voltage measurement so that the FAN powersupply voltage is kept constant. The camera CPU (IC27) ofthe AT-172 board that measures the CCD temperature alsodetermines the FAN control voltage. It sends the com-mands through the SS CPU (IC1).The switching circuit of the PWM circuit is shared so thatit can act as a power supply circuit for the FP microproces-sor (so that the FP CPU (IC816) can work during power-off) and the power supply circuit for the peripheral circuits.The consumption current is reduced so that the +6 Vpower is first generated by the PWM circuit. After that, theseries regulator circuit is activated. When the main poweris turned on, the +5 V power from MB-1096 is sent to theinput circuit of IC806 to IC808 of the FP-152 board. Whenthe main power is turned off, +6 V power is input. Theoutput signal from IC808 and the diode D810 are connect-ed as an OR gate so that the power supply of +5 V-2 issupplied all the time.The output signal from CN107 (pin-38) of the FP-152board is used to drive the fan. The FP CPU (IC816) canoperate during power-off from the power supplied fromCN107 (pin-39, pin-40) of the FP-152 board.

. Soft control circuit at power-offThe FP CPU (IC816) detects the switch information. Onlywhen the FP CPU (IC816) and the SS CPU (IC1) of theSS-92G board become ready to turn off, the main powercan be turned off. The FP CPU (IC816: pin-90) accepts theinput signal from the POWER switch. The FP CPU(IC816: pin-91) supplies the output signal for power-off.Only when this signal and the H_POWER_HOLD (IC816:pin-91) signal goes “L”, the main power can be turned off.However, the main power can be turned on simply byturning the POWER switch ON.

. FP CPU backup circuitThe FP CPU (IC816) is connected to a coin battery so thatthe data in the internal RAM is kept saved even after thepower is turned off. By saving the system data, the FPCPU (IC816) can start up very quickly when the power isturned on.IC813, IC810 and IC812 on the FP-152 board are identical+2.5 V threshold voltage detector ICs. Because IC813 hasresistors R845 and R846, the detection voltage is +3.05 V.Since IC810 has the delay circuit consisting of R838 andC829, detection by IC810 is delayed after IC812.The delay of detection is used as follows. A drop in thevoltage that is supplied to the CPU is detected by IC813first and the processing to enter the STANDBY modefinishes. Next, IC812 creates the hardware STANDBYstate (clock signal stops). Lastly, the FP CPU (IC816)enters the reset state by IC810 waiting for the next power-on. When the power is turned on, the STANDBY isreleased, the clock signal oscillation starts and then reset isreleased.

. Backup lithium battery voltage measurement circuitThe FP CPU (IC816) measures the output voltage of thebackup lithium battery BT101 (BP-33 board). When thebattery-end is detected, the low-voltage information is sentto the SS CPU (IC1) of the SS-92G board. Because thisbattery is used as the backup power for the watch IC(IC831) of the FP-152 board, measurement is performed atthe low rate of once every minute to reduce batteryconsumption together with the FET switch (Q814).

. Independent operation of FP CPU (IC816)The power supply circuits are grouped so that the FP CPU(IC816) can be operated even after the power is turned off.+3 V, +3.2 V, +5 V-2, +5.3 V, and +12 V are supplied tothe FP-152 board even after the power is turned off. +12 V-2 or +5 V is not supplied.

. Audio adjustment data storageWhen performing automatic adjustment of audio, theadjustment value is written to EEPROM (IC819). With thepower on, FP CPU (IC816) reads the adjustment valuefrom EEPROM (IC819) and uses it to correct relatedaudio.

1-73HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

2) Connection with EQ-88G board and CCM-45G board(IC1 : 278_SIN3, 279_SOUT3, and 280_SCK3)The REC/PB control is supported by the communica-tion with the EQ-88G board. The Read/Write controlof the FL-283 printed wiring board (TeleFile) issupported by the communication with the CCM-45Gboard. Selection of communication is performed byCN102 (pin-14 and pin-125). In addition, this serialcommunication line is used also to write the Configdata of FPGA (IC13) at power-on.

. KY-475G board controlThe VTR operation switches (S1 to S5) and the displayLEDs on the KY-475G board are connected directly withthe SS CPU (IC1 : 65_PB15 and 73_PB22) by parallelconnection.

. TimecodeThe timecode reader/generator that is built inside the SSCPU (IC1) is used. The recording LTC from the generatoris delayed by two frames by IC13 of the SS-92G board,passes through IC23 of the SS-92G board and is sent to therecord amplifier (IC610, Q617, and Q618) of the MDC-13G board. The audio FS signal that is supplied from theDVP-41 board is used as the reference clock of the delay inIC13.IC15 of the SS-92G board is the selector that selects eitherthe direct output from the generator or the delayed signalfrom the MY-99 board (LOOP REC).IC32 of the SS-92G board is the selector switch that selectswhether the PB timecode from the MDC-13G board isinput to the TC reader of the SS CPU (IC1), or the delayedREC timecode during LOOP recording is input to the TCreader. The switch IC32 is used to generate the VITCsignal during LOOP recording.IC16, IC17 and IC14 of the SS-92G board receive theexternal timecode that is input to the TC IN connectorfrom an external source and waveform-shapes it beforesending it to the SS CPU (IC1).IC19 on the SS-92G board is the output circuit of thetimecode OUT signal (REC TC and PB TC) that is sup-plied from the SS CPU (IC1) to feed the timecode signal tothe TC OUT connector.

SS-92G boardIC1 is SS CPU, and the ROM (IC8 : FLASH MEMORY)program is developed to the SDRAM (IC6 and IC33) and thefollowing processes are executed on a RAM basis.At the same time, the system control can be started from theexternal ROM through CN3.

. Connection with EEPROMThe EEPROM (IC403) on the MDC-13G board is connected tothe SS CPU (IC1 : 28_SITXO to 30_SICKO) using synchro-nous serial communication. Various hours meter data and servoadjustment values are saved in the EEPROM (IC403).

. Connection with the DVP-41 Board (Video Processor Control)The DVP-41 board is controlled mainly by the address busand the data bus that are shared with the ROM (IC8) andSDRAM (IC6 and IC33).Selection of the respective IC chips is performed by decodingthe address of A2 to A8. Data to the respective ICs is sent withthe common use of 8-bits of D0 to D7. The communicationmethod is the clock synchronous type and the clock signal isoutput from the SS CPU (IC1 : 31_HCLK) via IC10. IC11 andIC12 are used for the communication timing signal and for thePIO control. In addition to the above signals, the followingsignals are used for connecting the SS-92G board with theDVP-41 board.

. Input and Reference of the frame signal : CN102 pin-49

. Input and Reference of the color framing signal :CN102 pin-48

. Output and Frame pulse for ADAM-HS : CN102 pin-40

. Output and Frame pulse for ADAM-HS : CN102 pin-39

. Asynchronous serial communicationThe SS CPU (IC1) has two asynchronous serial connectionchannels.

. PC debug monitor connection :(25_TXD0 and 27_RXD0)

. Remote control connection : (32_TXD3 and 33_RXD3)The remote controller is connected to the 8-pin REMOTE ter-minal and is sent to the SS-92G board via the AT-172 board.

. Synchronous serial communicationThe SS-92G board has two groups of synchronous serialcommunication that are used to establish communicationwith the total five blocks.1) Connection with AT-172 board and FP-152 board (IC1 :

214_SIN1, 215_SOUT1, 216_SCK1)Connection with the camera block is performed throughthe AT-172 board. Connection of the audio data, theLCD display data, and the POWER ON/OFF relateddata, is performed through the FP-152 board. Selectionof communication is performed by CN102 (pin-28 andpin-101) of the SS-92G board. The following signals aresupported by connection with the FP-152 board afterpassing through CN102.. Output, Reference of frame signal : pin-103. Output, SS RESET signal : pin-104. Output, For rewriting the FP CPU ROM : pin-107

1-74 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-26-6. Servo Control System(SS-92G Board, MDC-13G Board,MDR-14G Board, and SE-613 Board)

Servo control is accomplished by the SS CPU (IC1) on theSS-92G board.The MDC-13G board, MDR-14G board and SE-613 boardhave the motor drive circuit and sensor system circuits.

The SS-92G board and the MDC-13G board are connectedby two flexible card wires (each 45 pins).The signals of the MDR-14G board are connected with theSS-92G board via the MDC-13G board.The MDR-14G board is connected with the drum motor andfunctions as a relay circuit board to transmit the signals comingfrom the drum motor and SS-92G board to the EQ-88G board.The SE-613 board is also connected to the SS-92G board viathe MDC-13G board.

SS-92G boardThe respective servo circuits are controlled by the SS CPU(IC1) that performs the system control and the servo controlof the VTR.The SS CPU (IC1) contains the FG detection, PPG, PWM,PIO, ADC modules that are required for the VTR servocontrol. Using these functions, the servo control and thecreation of the output control signals are performed.The drive voltages that drive the drum motor and the capstanmotor are controlled by the PWM control circuit. The PWMoutput signals are converted to analog voltages and are sent tothe MDC-13G board and to the MDR-14G board.The FG and PG signals that are waveform-shaped in theMDC-13G board and the MDR-14G board are sent to the SSCPU (IC1) of the SS-92G board where the respective motorsare controlled.The capstan FG wave amplifier in the SS-92G board is usedfor the STOP servo circuit.The CTL signal that is waveform-shaped for the capstan phaseservo in the MDC-13G board is input to the SS CPU (IC1).The loading motor is controlled by the three control signallines (two lines of SS_LOADING_CONT and aSS_L_LOADING_SLOW) that detect the 4-bit positioninformation data (MDC_FCAM) from the MDC-13G board.In addition to the above signals, information from the varioussensors is input to the SS CPU (IC1) and is used for variouscontrols.

On the other hand, the various IC control signals are createdspecifically for the respective applications and supplied to theEQ-88G board and DVP-41 board.The SS CPU (IC1) and the servo adjustment data storageEEPROM (IC403 : MDC-13G board) are connected by serialcommunication.

MDC-13G boardThe MDC-13G board consists of the capstan FG waveformshaping circuit, capstan drive PWM driver amplifier, mecha-nism drive motor driver, CTL record/playback amplifier, LTCrecord/playback amplifier, CUE record/playback amplifier,full erase circuit, mechanism position sensor, cassette locksensor, HUMID sensor circuit, and cassette ID switch.The capstan FG waveform shaping circuit amplifies theoutput signal from the MR sensor of the capstan motor withthe operational amplifier (IC201), adds an offset voltage at thecomparator (IC202 and IC203), and then shapes its waveformto a rectangular wave.The waveform shaping processing is performed by thecomparator IC204 (1/4 and 2/4) to generate the 4 times FGsignal that is used inside the SS CPU (IC1) of the SS-92Gboard.The capstan drive PWM driver amplifier consists of thePWM amplifier (PWM module IC (IC101) and switchingFET (Q102)) and 3-phase motor driver (IC102).The capstan drive PWM signal that is output from the SSCPU (IC1) of the SS-92G board is amplified by the driver anddrives the capstan motor.The CTL record/playback amplifier consists of the CTLamplifier (Q615 and Q616) for recording and the CTLplayback amplifier (IC616 and IC617). During recording, theCTL signal that is generated by the SS CPU (IC1) of the SS-92G board is amplified to control the recording currentflowing through the CTL head so that the CTL signal isrecorded on tape. During playback, the CTL signal that ispicked up from the playback amplifier is converted to arectangular wave that is used for the capstan playback servosystem that is controlled by the SS CPU (IC1) of the SS-92Gboard.The mechanism position sensors are used to monitor thestatus of the VTR mechanism. The SS CPU (IC1) of the SS-92G board judges the status of the mechanism position. Thecam gear motor is controlled by the mechanism drive motordriver that consists of IC402. Thus the mechanism is con-trolled as described above.

The cassette lock sensor consists of the optical sensor of PH307that sends the status of the cassette compartment as the mecha-nism information to the SS CPU (IC1) of the SS-92G board.The cassette ID switch consists of six push-switches (S301 toS305, and S308). Output information of the cassette ID switchis sent to the SS CPU (IC1) of the SS-92G board as the cassettetape ID and other cassette information.The HUMID sensor circuit consists of the HUMID sensorand the comparator (IC303). This HUMID information is sentto the SS CPU (IC1) of the SS-92G board.

1-75HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-26-7. RF System (EQ-88G Board)

. During record modeThe two channel standard-drum-diameter recording data inwhich ECC is added in the DVP-41 board, are converted to8-channel data for the small diameter drum at the RING(IC201) and modulated into BI-PHASE signal at the RECdriver (IC302 and IC410). The output of the REC driver issent to the head drum.At the same time the CPU controls such as the recordcurrent control for the REC amplifier/PB amplifier insidethe drum. The RF alarm detection is also performed bydetecting the playback RF level.The control signals for the drum are prepared as MPXdata/clock signals by the MPX ENCODER (IC101), andare sent via the MDR-14G board to the drum board (UDR-32 board), where they are decoded by the MPX DECOD-ER (IC3) and are supplied to the respective REC amplifiersand the PB amplifiers.

. During playback modeThe 8-channel playback RF signal is amplified and A/D-converted by the Read Channel (IC501, IC601, IC701,IC801, IC1501, IC1601, IC1701 and IC1801), and isoutput as 6-bit data.After that, the 8-channel playback RF signal receivesViterbi decoding, sync signal detection, inner error correc-tion and descramble at the EDEN (IC901 and IC1001).Then the data is output to the DVP-41 board.

. Setting and adjusting dataThe RING (IC201) data, the Read Channel (IC501, IC601,IC701, IC801, IC1501, IC1601, IC1701 and IC1801) dataand the EDEN (IC901 and IC1001) data are set by the EQCPU (IC1101) that enables the complete automaticadjustment of the record RF system and the playback RFsystem.

MDR-14G boardThe MDR-14G board consists of the drum drive PWMamplifier, the drum PG waveform shaping circuit and theFG waveform shaping circuit.The drum motor drive PWM driver amplifier consists ofthe PWM amplifier (PWM module IC (IC2) and switchingFET (Q1)) and the 3-phase motor driver (IC1). The drummotor drive PWM signal is supplied from the SS CPU(IC1) of the SS-92G board, amplified by this driver anddrives the head drum motor.The drum PG/FG amplifier consists of the PG/FG amplifi-er module IC (IC4). The FG/PG analog signal output fromthe drum motor is amplified by IC4, waveform-shaped to arectangular wave and is sent to the SS CPU (IC1) of theSS-92G board that performs the servo control of the drummotor.

SE-613 boardThe SE-613 board consists of the cassette-in sensor switchand the REC INHIBIT sensor switch. The switch informa-tion from these two switches is sent to the SS-92G boardvia the MDC-13G board.

1-76 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

. Excess current detectionThe output circuit of the UNREG +12 V from the CNB-23board has excess current detection resistors R142, R143and R147. A voltage drop at the resistors is detected by theFET CONTROLLER (IC109). When the voltage drop atthe resistors exceeds 200 mV, the power supply circuitenters the SHUT DOWN state.Another SHUT DOWN signal is the H SHUT DOWNsignal that is supplied from the RE-187B board. If any oneof the DC-DC converter outputs is shorted, the powersupply circuit enters the SHUT DOWN state except UNSW +12 V.Since the FET CONTROLLER (IC109) on the CNB-23board has a latch function, the power supply does notrestore automatically. The main power of the unit needs tobe turned off once and back on.

. Protection against input power connection of reversepolarity

If the input power is connected in reverse polarity, FET(Q101) is turned off so that the GND lines of the controlsystem circuits are disconnected. Thus the control circuitsare protected and supply of +12 V power to the respectivecircuits is stopped.

DC-DC converterThe DC-DC converter consists of two circuit boards, theRE-186 board and RE-187B board. Neither of these twoboards can be operated independently.

. PWM clock signalThe PWM POWER CONTROL (IC202) on the RE-186board generates the master clock signal (100 k ±10 kHz)for all of the controller ICs (IC101, IC202, and IC301 onthe RE-186 board and IC102 and IC103 on the RE-187Bboard) and distributes it.

. Input voltage monitoring circuitThe RE-187B board has the input power voltage monitor-ing circuit (IC105). When the input power voltage stayswithin the specified range, the powers are supplied to therespective controller ICs (IC101, IC202, and IC301 on theRE-186 board and, IC102 and IC103 on the RE-187Bboard).The power supply circuit starts up when the input powervoltage is within the range of +10.4 V to +18.8 V. Oncethe power supply circuit has started up, it keeps operatinguntil the input power voltage decreases below the lowerlimit (+9.5 V).

1-26-8. Power Supply Systems (CNB-23 Board,RE-186 Board, and RE-187B Board)

CNB-23 boardThis controls distribution of the input +12 V power to therespective circuit boards.

. Power ON/OFF ControlThe L PWR SW ON signal enters IC107 of the CNB-23board via the IFA-19G board and the MB-1096 board thatturns on Q107. As Q107 is turned on, the battery +12 V orthe EXT DC IN +12 V is supplied to the respectivecircuits.IC107 of this unit receives at the same time the H POWERHOLD signal from the FP-152 board after the main powerof this unit is turned on. Therefore, Q107 is kept on even ifthe L PWR SW ON (L) signal is set to OFF (H).In order to turn off the main power of this unit, the HPOWER HOLD signal must be opened and goes to “L”.When the FP CPU (IC816) of the FP-152 board detects thePOWER SW OFF, it waits for completion of the VTRoperations if any VTR operations are in progress, and setsthe POWER HOLD signal to “L” to turn off the mainpower of this unit.

. Protection from Excess Input VoltageThe VOLTAGE DETECT (IC101) monitors UN SW +12V through D105. If the UN SW +12 V exceeds approxi-mately +18 V, it outputs the PROTECT signal (L) from itspin-4 to turn off the +12 V power. (Except UN SW +12 Vfor the FP-152 board.)This circuit does not have a latch function so that thepower will be recovered immediately after the input powervoltage returns to +18 V or less.

. Battery/EXT DC selectionThe connector insert detection switch that is fitted with theEXT DC IN connector (XLR 4-pins) is used to selecteither battery or EXT DC input.The output signal from this switch passes through IC103 toIC105 and is sent to the FET CONTROLLER (IC109) thatfinally selects ON/OFF of the FETs (Q110 to Q112 andQ114 to Q116 : ON when battery is in use, Q120 to Q125 :ON when EXT DC power is in use).In this IC109, a step-up circuit (Vcc +8.5 V) that drivesthe N-CH MOS FET gate is employed.

1-77HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

. Protection circuit when output circuit is shortedA diode or transistor is connected to the respective outputcircuits. They are reverse-biased during normal operationof the unit so that they are turned off.However, if any single output circuit is shorted, or if theoutput power is not supplied due to any abnormality, theabove diode or transistor and Q132 on the RE-187B boardare turned on so that Q133 outputs the H SHUT DOWNsignal.The H SHUT DOWN signal stops sending the clock signalto the respective ICs and all of the power outputs arestopped.The H SHUT DOWN signal is also sent to the FETCONTROLLER (IC109) on the CNB-23 board wheresupply source of the UNREG +12 V power is stopped.

. Voltage control circuitThe power supply circuits of +1.5 V, +1.8 V, +2.5 V,+3.3 V, +5 V and +9.3 V are step-down type choppercircuits.The power supply circuits of _5 V and _8.5 V are invertedtype chopper circuits. The power supply circuit of +46 Vis a step-up type chopper circuit.The power supply circuits of +15.5 V and +28 V aredescribed as follows.The primary winding of the transformer T101 of the RE-187B board not only functions as the coil (L) of the _8.5 Vinverted type chopper, but is also used to step up itsdriving current by transformer coupling, and the stepped-up voltage is half-wave rectified to generate the abovepower voltage.The output voltage is again DC-biased by +9.3 V togenerate the powers of +15.5 V and +28 V.The output power voltages of the above-described twopower supply systems are not controlled by the controllerIC, so the output voltages are stabilized by a series regula-tor consisting of Q128, Q129 and IC106.

1-26-9. Option Board (DC-110A Board, MY-99 Board)

Down converter board(DC-110A board : HKDW-702)The down converter board DC-110A performs the follow-ing signal processing.The 1125 HD signal (10-bit parallel component Y/Csignal) that is input from the DCP-43 board is converted tothe D1 parallel signal (component Y/C digital parallel SDsignal) by IC23 so that the SD VBS, the SDI is output.The parallel HD signal is down-converted to the D1parallel signal (4 : 2 : 2) and so that the composite signal isoutput via the encoder (IC202).At the same time, the signal is multiplexed with the digitalaudio signal by IC403 and the multiplexed signal is outputas the SDI signal.The composite signal is not only output to the TEST OUTconnector via the character mix circuit on the DCP-43board, but also output to the VIDEO OUT connector viathe 75 Z driver on the DC-110A board.The VIDEO OUT connector can also output the SDIsignal. Selection of whether the composite signal or theSDI signal will be output is determined by using the menu.(OPERATION menu, OUTPUT SEL display : SD REARBNC OUT)(For more details, refer to “4-4. Operation Menu”.)

1-78 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Picture cache board (MY-99 board : HKDW-703)The circuit board MY-99 implements the LOOP REC andperforms the following processes.The signal format of the compressed video data and theaudio data that are supplied from the video system circuitof the DVP-41 board during the LOOP REC mode or theINTERVAL REC mode, is converted at the LOOP MEM-ORY (IC201) to be suitable for storage in the SDRAM.The video data is then written sequentially in the SDRAM(IC301 to IC308) and the audio data is written in theMEMORY (IC309 and IC310). The stored data is readfrom the memory in accordance with the specified timingand returned to the original signal format by the LOOPMEMORY (IC201) again. Then the video data passesthrough the BUS SWITCH (IC202 and IC204) and theaudio data passes through the SEL (IC207) respectively,and are sent to the video system circuit of the DVP-41board. The TC data is handled in the same manner as theaudio data and is stored in the MEMORY (IC309 andIC310).Control of the read/write timings of the SDRAM isperformed by commands supplied from the I/O EXPAND-ER (IC103). These are controlled by the system controlcircuit of the SS CPU (IC1) of the SS-92G board.

Regarding the clock signal for the SDRAM, the SDRAM(IC301 to IC308) for video data receives the 46.360 MHzclock coming from the video system circuit of the DVP-41board after it is phase-compensated by the CLOCKDRIVER (IC141) of the MY-99 board. The MEMORY(IC309 and IC310) for audio data receives the clock fromthe LOOP MEMORY (IC201).

1-79HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1-27. Unleaded Solder

Boards requiring use of unleaded solder are printed with alead free mark (LF) indicating the solder contains no lead.(Caution: Some printed circuit boards may not comeprinted with the lead free mark due to their particular size.)

: LEAD FREE MARK

m. Be sure to use the unleaded solder for the printed circuit

board printed with the lead free mark.. The unleaded solder melts at a temperature about 40 dC

higher than the ordinary solder, therefore, it is recom-mended to use the soldering iron having a temperatureregulator.

. The ordinary soldering iron can be used but the iron tiphas to be applied to the solder joint for a slightly longertime. The printed pattern (copper foil) may peel away ifthe heated tip is applied for too long, so be careful.

1-28. Notes on Repair Parts

1. Safety Related Components WarningwComponents marked ! are critical to safe operation.Therefore, specified parts should be used in the case ofreplacement.

2. Standardization of PartsSome repair parts supplied by Sony differ from thoseused for the unit. These are because of parts common-ality and improvement.Parts list has the present standardized repair parts.

3. Stock of PartsParts marked with “o” at SP (Supply Code) column ofthe spare parts list may not be stocked. Therefore, thedelivery date will be delayed.

4. HarnessHarnesses with no part number are not registered asspare parts.

1-29. Precautions for use ofCondensation Sensor

Due to the foreign substances adhering to the condensationsensor chip (see figure below), the sensor fails to measurethe correct value of residence to humidity. This preventsthe unit from functioning properly. If any foreign sub-stance gets adhered to the chip, replace the condensationsensor with a new one.

m. Do not touch the chip with bare hands.. Do not clean the chip with alcohol or other similar

agents.

Connector

1 pin

LeadsCondensationsensor chip

Bracket

Solders

2-1HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Section 2Periodic Maintenance and Inspection

2-1. Cleaning

To make the most of the functions, fully realize the performance of this unit and lengthen the life of theunit and tape, implement cleaning as a daily maintenance.

2-1-1. General Information for Cleaning

1. IndexThis section describes methods of cleaning the blocks that are shown in the illustration below.

S2 tape guide (Refer to Section 2-1-5.)



Cleaning blade (Refer to Section 2-1-5.)


FE head (Refer to Section 2-1-4.)

CTL head (Refer to Section 2-1-4.)

S plate assembly (Refer to Section 2-1-6.)

T plate assembly (Refer to Section 2-1-6.)Upper drum

(Refer to Section 2-1-2.)


Capstan (Refer to Section 2-1-5.)

Lower drum (Refer to Section 2-1-3.)

T5 tape guide (Refer to Section 2-1-5.)



Pinch roller assembly (Refer to Section 2-1-5.)



CUE/TC head (Refer to Section 2-1-4.)

2-2 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

2. NoteswNever touch the drum while it is rotating.Touching the drum rotating at a high speed with hands or screwdriver tip, they may be flipped offwith a strong force result in physical damage.Be sure confirm that the drum has come to complete stop before starting cleaning and part replace-ment.. Be sure to turn off the main power before cleaning.. The mechanical blocks of the mechanism deck consist of the precision parts and are adjusted

precisely. Be careful not to damage the parts and not to apply any excessive force during cleaning.. Do not touch the greased portions during cleaning. If grease attaches to the cleaning cloth, replace

the cleaning cloth by new one. If the cleaning cloth smeared with grease used, grease may attach tothe places where it should not.

. Do not insert a cassette tape before cleaning fluid completely evaporates.

3. Preparation before cleaning(1) Turn off the main power.(2) Remove the front lid and the outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-4.)

2-3HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

2-1-2. Cleaning the Upper Drum Tape Running Surface and Video Heads

nThe upper drum and video heads are the parts that can damage easily. Take care not to damage the upperdrum and rotary heads during cleaning.

Tools. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01

nNever use a cotton swab.

Procedure1. Press a cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid slightly against the video heads and rotate the

upper drum slowly counter-clockwise.2. Press a cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid slightly against the tape running surface of the

upper drum(shaded portion) as shown in the figure.nBe sure to rotate the upper drum counter-clockwise. Be sure to clean the rotary heads along thecircumference.Do not clean the video heads in the vertical direction. Doing this may damage them.

3. After cleaning, wipe the rotary heads using a dry cleaning cloth.

Cleaning cloth Video headsVideo heads

Upper drum tape running surface

2-4 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Skewer

Cleaning cloth

Rabbet guide Rabbet guideEdges Lower drum tape running surface

2-1-3. Cleaning the Lower Drum Tape Running Surface and Rabbet Guide

nTake care not to damage the lower drum (specially the rabbet guide surface) during cleaning. Take care toclean the edges above the lower drum because it is near the video head.

Tools. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01. Skewer or an equivalent (Do not use a metallic skewer.)

Procedure1. Put a skewer (or an equivalent) along the drum rabbet guide and remove magnetic powder as shown

in the figure.m. Do not use a metallic skew instead of a skewer. This may damage the tape running surface.. If the magnetic powder is accumulated in the drum rabbet guide, the tape-to-head tracking may

badly influence. Remove the magnetic powder completely.

2. Clean the tape running surface of the lower drum and the rabbet guide surface (shaded portion) asshown in the figure.

3. After cleaning, be sure to wipe the lower drum and the rabbet guide surface using a dry cleaningcloth.

2-5HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

2-1-4. Cleaning the Stationary Heads

cThe FE head has the cleaning blade.The cleaning blade has the sharp edge that can cut your hands. Never touch the cleaning blade with barehands. Be careful also not to cut your hands during cleaning.

nTake care not to damage the surfaces of the stationary heads when cleaning.


Procedure1. Clean the tape running surfaces of the FE, CTL and CUE/TC heads in the vertical direction using a

cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.nIf the magnetic powder is accumulated in the head gap of the FE, CTL and CUE/TC heads, a play-back error may occur during recording/playback. Remove the magnetic powder completely.

2. After cleaning, be sure to wipe the tape running surfaces of the FE, CTL and CUE/TC heads using adry cleaning cloth.nNever touch the cleaning blade of the FE head with bare hands.

CUE/TC head

FE head

CTL head

Cleaning blade

2-6 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

S5 tape guide

S3 tape guideS4 tape guide

S1 tape guide

T1 tape guide

T2 tape guide

S2 tape guide

Pinch roller

T3 tape guide

T4 tape guide

T5 tape guide

Capstan

Cleaning blade

2-1-5. Cleaning the Tape Running Path and Cleaning Blade

cThe cleaning blade has the sharp edge that can cut your hands. Never touch the cleaning blade with barehands. Be careful also not to cut your hands during cleaning.


Procedure1. Clean the tape running surface (shaded portion) of the following guides and the cleaning blade

edge as shown in the figure using a cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.(S1 to S5 guides, T1 to T5 guide, capstan, pinch roller, cleaning blade)

2. After cleaning, be sure to wipe them using a dry cleaning cloth.

2-7HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

T plate assembly

Manual eject gear (A)

S plate assembly

S slider assemblyT slider assembly

Two front feet

Two front feet

Two rear feet Two rear feet

Paper

PaperFig. 1

Fig. 2

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

Paper

Paper

2-1-6. Cleaning the S/T Plate Assemblies and S/T Slider Assemblies

nThe S1, S2 and T1, T2 tape guides are adjusted precisely. Be careful not to add any excessive forceduring cleaning.


Procedure1. Clean the top surface (shaded portions in the illustration where slider passes over) of the S/T plate

assemblies using a cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.2. Rotate the manual eject gear (A) counter-clockwise until the S/T sliders come to the position as

shown in the illustration.3. Insert a piece of paper that is as thick as the paper of this manual between the front feet (2 locations)

of the S/T sliders and the rail. (Raising the slider slightly facilitates this work.) (Fig. 1)4. While pressing the S1 and T1 tape guides lightly on their top, remove a piece of paper that is inserted

in step 3. When a piece of paper is removed, stain and dirt adhere to the paper. Then insert a newpaper and remove it for cleaning. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until paper is no more stained. (Fig. 2)

5. Insert a piece of paper between the rear feet (2 locations) of the S/T sliders and the rail.6. While pressing the S2 and T2 tape guides lightly on their top, remove a piece of paper. When a piece

of paper is removed, stain and dirt adhere to the paper. Then insert a new paper and remove it forcleaning. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until paper is no more stained. (Fig. 2)

7. Rotate the manual eject gear (A) clockwise to return to the unthreaded-end position.

2-8 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

2-1-7. Cares after Using under Special Environment

Checking the followings is recommended when returned from the news gathering at seaside, at the dustylocations, at hot spring, or if the unit is heavily splashed with water or water leaks in the unit in the roughweather or the like.

1. Carefully clean off sand and dust that entered the unit with airbrush or the like.2. If salt contained in seawater or sulfur contained in hot spring attaches to the non-painted surface of

outer cabinet, the cabinet may corrode in white. If it attaches, wipe it off immediately with alcohol.3. If water leaks inside the unit, dry the unit with hair-dryer. Check especially that water does not

remain in the CCD block or the power supply block.nIf the unit is not taken care of appropriately, corrosion may occur inside that may cause fire andelectric shock.

4. Clean the upper drum, lower drum and stationary heads.5. Clean the tape running surface (tape guides, capstan shaft, pinch roller and others).6. Clean out the contacting surface of connectors.7. Perform the general operational check and confirm that no abnormal sound is heard from inside the

unit or the unit operates correctly without any abnormality.

2-9HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

2-2. Periodic Inspection

To make the most of the functions, fully realize performance of the unit and to length the life of the unitand tape, a periodic check is recommended.

2-2-1. Hours Meter

The hours meter values can be displayed on the viewfinder. An hours meter can be reset as desired.The periodic inspection is recommended to be carried out with these hours meters as a reference.

1. Display method(1) Press the MENU ON/OFF switch on the side panel to the ON position.(2) Rotate the rotary encoder to move the arrow mark (→) to DIAGNOSIS.(3) Press the rotary encoder once.(4) Press the MENU ON/OFF switch on the side panel to the OFF position to exit the hours meter

display.

2. Reset by customerThe hours meters of “5. DRUM RUNNING-2”, “6. TAPE RUNNING-2”, “7. OPERATION-2” and“8. THREADING-2” can be reset as requested by customer.(1) Rotate the rotary encoder to move the at mark (@) in front of EXEC of RESET METER.

The message RESET METER: @EXEC appears(2) Press the rotary encoder.(3) Rotate the rotary encoder to move the arrow mark (→) to the desired hours meter.(4) Press the rotary encoder. The desired hours meter is reset.

3. Contents of display

Viewfinder display Contents

The following contents are displayed.

DRUM RUNNING XXXXXH 1. Accumulated drum rotation hours (in units of hour)

TAPE RUNNING XXXXXH 2. Accumulated tape running hours (in units of hour)

OPERATION XXXXXH 3. Accumulated power-on hours (in units of hour)

THREADING XXXXX 4. Accumulated times of threading (Times of actual threadingand unthreading)

DRUM RUNNING-2 XXXXH 5. Drum rotation hours (Customer-resetable)

TAPE RUNNING-2 XXXXH 6. Tape running hours (Customer-resetable)

OPERATION-2 XXXXH 7. Power-on hours (Customer-resetable)

THREADING-2 XXXX 8. Times of threading (Customer-resetable)

2-10 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

61

!=

2 53

48

7

9

0

!-

R : It indicates the timing of part replacement.*1 : It indicates the timing of applying oil. (Refer to Section 2-2-3.)*2 : It indicates the timing of applying grease. (Refer to Section 2-2-4.)

No. Inspection item Mode Inspection hours Replacement parts

2000 4000 6000 Part name Part No.

1 Upper drum assembly A R _ R Upper drum assembly (DJR-27-R) A-8326-897-B

2 Slip ring assembly A R _ R Slip ring assembly (RP) A-8326-899-B

3 Brush assembly A R _ R Brush assembly (RP) A-8326-898-B

4 Drum assembly A _ R _ Drum assembly (DJR-27A-R) A-8327-237-B

5 AHC roller assembly A R R R AHC roller assembly X-3949-109-1

6 CR spacer A R R R CR spacer (POM) 3-182-765-02

7 Timing belt B _ R _ Timing belt 3-629-223-01

8 S-Tension regulator band assembly B R R R S-Tension regulator band assembly X-3605-986-2

9 T-Tension regulator band assembly B R R R T-Tension regulator band assembly X-3605-994-3

!/ Pinch roller assembly B R R R Pinch roller assembly X-3678-926-1

!- Reel drive gear assembly A *1 *1 R Reel drive assembly A-8279-476-N

!= S tension regulator arm assembly A *2 *2 *2 _ _

2-2-2. Periodic Inspection List

Period of parts replacement that are indicated in the list below are not the guarantee term of the parts. Usethis list as guidelines for maintenance and inspection. Period of parts replacement varies depending on theoperation environment and conditions of the units.nThe parts marked by 1, 2 and 3 must be replaced at the same time when the drum assembly 4 isreplaced.

Mode A: DRUM RUNNING HOUR Mode B: TAPE RUNNING HOUR

2-11HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

2-2-3. Applying Oil to Reel Drive Gear Assembly

Inspection timingRefer to Section 2-2-2. Periodic Inspection List.

ToolsOil : 7-661-018-18

Preparation1. Check that the unit is in the unthreading end state.2. Turn off the main power.3. Remove the front lid and outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-4.)4. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)

Applying oil1. Rotate the S/T one-way gear in the direction of the arrow until the square holes showing the letter S

or T become visible.2. Apply a drop of oil to the square holes respectively.

nBe sure to wipe off the oil that oozes to the surface of the S/T one-way gear, with gauze or cloth.

nRefer to Section 7-1-5 for using oil.

S

S

T

T

T-one-way gear

S-one-way gear

Square hole

Square hole

Square holeSquare hole

Reel drive gear assembly

2-12 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

2-2-4. Applying Grease to S Tension Regulator Assembly

Inspection timingRefer to Section 2-2-2. Periodic Inspection List.

nThe stop washer is used to assemble the S tension regulator assembly.Prepare a new stop washer (3-559-408-11) when reassembling the S tension regulator assembly.

Tools. Grease (SGL-601) : 7-651-000-10. Stop washer insertion tool : J-6323-530-A. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01

Preparation1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)4. Check that the unit is in the unthreading end state.5. Remove the S tension regulator assembly. (Refer to Section 7-21.)

Applying grease and assembling1. Remove the spring. Then remove the stop washer and remove the S tension regulator arm and plate

spring.n. Be careful not to lose the plate spring because the plate spring will drop at the same time when the

S tension regulator arm is removed.. Take note of the original position where the spring is hooked.

2. Wipe off the grease that adheres to the plate spring and to the shaft of the S tension regulator armwith gauze or cloth.

3. Clean the plate spring and the shaft of the S tension regulator arm with cleaning cloth moistened withcleaning fluid.nNever apply a strong force to the bent portion of the plate spring.

4. Apply grease to the hatched ( ) portion of the boss.nRefer to Section 7-1-5 for the method of applying grease.

5. Install the plate spring to the boss of the S tension regulator arm.nInstall the plate spring in the direction as shown in Fig. 1.

6. Install the shaft of the S tension regulator arm to which the plate spring is attached, into the hole ofthe bearing holder and secure it with the new stop washer.nCheck that the S tension regulator arm can move smoothly by rotating it. If it does not rotate smooth-ly, check that the plate spring does not drop from boss of the S tension regulator arm and check thatthe plate spring does not override on top of the rib of the bearing holder. (See Fig. 2)

2-13HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7. Install the spring that is removed in step 1 to the original position that is taken note.nInstall the spring in the direction as shown in Fig. 3.

8. Install the S tension regulator assembly. (Refer to Section 7-21.)

S tension regulator arm



Stop washer

Spring

Spring

Apply here grease after cleaning

Illustration when viewed from the rear

Plate spring

Plate spring

Shaft block

Boss

Hole of bearing holder

Bearing holder

Rib of bearing holder

Rib of bearing holder

Bearing holder Bearing holderPlate spring

Boss

Fig. 1 Fig. 2

Fig. 3

Shaft

2-14 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

2-2-5. Notes on Repair Parts

1. Safety Related Components WarningwComponents marked ! are critical to safe operation.Therefore, specified parts should be used in the case ofreplacement.

2. Standardization of PartsSome repair parts supplied by Sony differ from thoseused for the unit. These are because of parts common-ality and improvement.Parts list has the present standardized repair parts.

3. Stock of PartsParts marked with “o” at SP (Supply Code) column ofthe spare parts list may not be stocked. Therefore, thedelivery date will be delayed.

4. HarnessHarnesses with no part number are not registered asspare parts.

2-15HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

14

12

13

15

11

No. Part No. SP Description

11 X-3605-994-3 s BAND ASSY, TENSION REGULATOR (T)12 X-3605-986-2 s BAND (S) ASSY,TEN-REGI13 X-3949-109-1 s ROLLER ASSY,AHC14 X-3678-926-1 s PINCH ROLLER ASSY15 3-182-765-02 s SPACER, CR

2-2-6. Recommended Periodic Replacement Parts

Mechanical block-1

2-16 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

101

104

106

105

103

102

No. Part No. SP Description

101 A-8326-897-B s DJR-27-R102 A-8326-898-B s BRUSH ASSY (RP)103 A-8326-899-B s RING ASSY (RP),SLIP104 A-8327-237-B s DJH-27A-R105 3-629-223-01 s BELT, TIMMING

106 A-8279-476-N o GEAR ASSY, REEL DRIVE

Mechanical block-2

2-17HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

2-2-7. Recommended Replacement Parts

The parts are recommended to be replaced as needed.

No. Part name Sony part No. Remarks

1 Filter unit, Optical 1-758-483-11 For HDW-F900R series (Note 2)

2 Drop protection (ME) 3-629-424-01 Part made of rubber (Note 1)

3 Screen (ST), Wind 3-709-606-02 (Note 1)

4 Cap, Remote 3-629-427-01 Part made of rubber (Note 1)

5 Eye cup KIT (RP) A-8319-943-B Part made of rubber (Note 1)

6 Cap BNC 3-604-795-01 Part made of rubber (Note 1)

7 Cap, DC out 3-609-573-01 Part made of rubber (Note 1)

8 Stopper, Ornamental panel 3-742-035-01 Part made of rubber (Note 1)

9 Foot, Rubber (SI-RBR) 3-723-097-01 Part made of rubber (Note 1)

0 Pad assembly, Shoulder A-8286-119-A Part made of rubber (Note 1)

!- Ring, Mount (AL) 3-992-340-01 Replace every five years.(Note 3)

!= Cover, BNC 3-868-956-03 Part made of rubber (Note 1)

_ Battery, Lithium (CR-2450) 1-528-229-41 Replace every five years.(on the BP-33 board) (Note 4)

Note 1 : Check for deformation and deterioration from time to time. Replace it as necessary.Note 2 : The optical filter unit can become nebulous (intransparent and whitened) with elapse of time. Then it will not satisfy the required

characteristics. Replace it as needed.Note 3 : There can be a case that the lens cannot be securely fixed due to abrasion after long hours of use. Check deformation and

deterioration, and replace it as necessary.Note 4 : For detail, refer to Section 1-21.

2-18 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

2

4

3

5

7

!=

1

!-

!/

9

8

6

6

3-1HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Section 3Error Diagnostics

OVER EMPH OVERDIAG PB VITC NDF EXT-LK HOLD

VH

TAPE

BATT

21 PEAK dB

E B

E F

RF SERVO HUMID SLACK

H MIN SEC FRM

0

20

10

30

•40

Error code

Warning display

Display window

The HDW-F900R has a built-in error diagnostics function for internal abnormalities.Among the various functions of these error diagnostics, this section describes only the error codes. Theyare displayed when an abnormality occurs in the tape run system and the self-diagnostics function whichdisplays the communication status of the devices on the various circuit boards.In addition to the above error codes and self-diagnostics function, the HDW-F900R has various warningsystems such as a warning indicator in the display window and a warning sound. For details of thesewarning systems that are not described in this section, refer to the Operation Manual of the HDW-F900R.

3-1. When Does the Error Code Appear?

The warning indicator in the display window turns on when an abnormality occurs immediately after thepower is turned on or an abnormality occurs during normal operation. Note that when the “SLACK”indicator turns on, which indicates a tape run system abnormality, or when a communication error isdetected, the corresponding error code is displayed in the time code area of the display window.

nThe contents of the respective warning indicators are shown below for reference.RF : Turns on when a video head is clogged or the recording current is distorted.SERVO : Turns on when a servo system malfunctions.HUMID : Turns on when condensation occurs.SLACK : Turns on when an abnormality occurs in the tape run system.

3-2 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

3-1-1. Description of Error Codes

The structure and the list of error codes are as follows.Details of the error codes (with detecting conditions and suspected causes) are described in Section 3-1-2in numerical order of the error codes.

Error list

Code Contents Page

Drum system 10 Drum drive voltage is abnormal. 3-4

11 Drum FG signal is abnormal. 3-4

12 Drum PG signal is abnormal. 3-4

Capstan system 20 Capstan drive voltage is abnormal. 3-4

21 Capstan FG signal is abnormal. 3-4

23 Direction of capstan rotation is abnormal. 3-5

24 Capstan speed is abnormal. 3-5

Reel system 32 S-reel FG signal is abnormal. 3-5

42 T-reel FG signal is abnormal. 3-5

Function cam system 61 Function cam forward rotation time-over 3-5

62 Function cam reverse rotation time-over 3-6

Sensor system 63 Tape top sensor time-over 3-6

65 Tape end sensor time-over 3-6

Communication system 70 Servo EEPROM communication is abnormal. 3-6

71 System control initialization command is abnormal. 3-6

Others 80 Communication error between SS and EQ 3-7

81 EQ switching pulse error 3-7

82 Communication error between SS and AT 3-7

83 SS-92G/IC13 program load error 3-7

86 FORMAT difference error 3-7

E-X XX

Drum drive voltage is abnormal.

Drum FG signal is abnormal.

Drum PG signal is abnormal.

Capstan drive voltage is abnormal.

Capstan FG signal is abnormal.

Direction of capstan rotation is abnormal.

Capstan speed is abnormal.

S-reel FG signal is abnormal.

T-reel FG signal is abnormal.

Function cam forward rotation time-over

Function cam reverse rotation time-over

Tape top sensor time-over

Tape end sensor time-over

Servo EEPROM communication is abnormal.

System control initialization command is abnormal.

Command when the error occurs

0 :

1 :

2 :

3 :

4 :

5 :

8 :

9 :

A :

b :

C :

E :

F :

Cause of the error

10 :

11 :

12 :

20 :

21 :

23 :

24 :

32 :

42 :

61 :

62 :

63 :

65 :

70 :

71 :

Communication error between SS and EQ

EQ switching pulse error

Communication error between SS and AT

SS-92G/IC13 program load error

FORMAT difference error

EEPROM writing error

FORMAT setting switch error

RE-TAKE error

DVP TG IC LOCK error

VTR System control microprocessor

abnormal

Cause of the error

80 :

81 :

82 :

83 :

86 :

88 :

89 :

91 :

92 :

95 :

POWER ON

REC

REC PAUSE

THREAD

UNTHREAD

STOP

PLAY

FF

REW

REC REVIEW

Rewinding to tape top

FF search

REW search

3-3HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Error list (continued from the previous page)

Code Contents Page

Others 88 EEPROM writing error 3-7

89 FORMAT setting switch error 3-7

91 RE-TAKE error 3-8

92 DVP TG IC LOCK error 3-8

95 VTR System control microprocessor abnormal 3-8

Protection operation when SLACK is detectedWhen SLACK is detected, the tape run system stops automatically.

Tape eject operation when SLACK is detectedEven when SLACK is detected, the EJECT button can be accepted but the tape is unthreaded interrupted-ly as described below. (Emergency EJECT)1) When the EJECT button is pressed, the tape is unthreaded for a certain period of time and after that

tape stops.2) When the EJECT button is kept pressed, unthreading and pausing are repeated until the tape is

completely ejected.The moment the EJECT button is released, the tape remains in the stop state.nWhen an error that may damage the tape is detected, the EJECT command is not accepted. When theEJECT command is not accepted, the viewfinder displays “Power OFF & Manual Eject”. Take outthe cassette tape manually by referring to Section “1-11. How to Eject a Cassette Tape Manually”.

When the Emergency EJECT is activatedWhen the Emergency EJECT is activated, there are cases that the tape is rewound.If you continue recording from the point of Emergency EJECT, the previously recorded information willbe possibly overwritten. To avoid this trouble, be sure to check the tape position whenever you haveactivated Emergency EJECT.

3-4 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

3-1-2. Details of Error Codes

E-x10

Contents : Abnormality is detected in the drum drive voltage.Detecting conditions : The specified time has elapsed with the drum drive voltage exceeding its rated

voltage.Suspected cause : . Tape tension is so high that the drum motor cannot rotate.

. Drum motor drive circuit (MDR-14G board) is defective.

. Drive voltage detector circuit (MDR-14G, SS-92G boards) is defective.

. Drum motor is defective.

E-x11

Contents : Abnormality is detected in the drum FG signal.Detecting conditions : . The drum FG counter does not start counting within the specified time.

. The drum does not lock within the specified time.Suspected cause : . Tape tension is so high that the drum motor cannot rotate.

. Drum motor drive circuit (MDR-14G board) is defective.

. Drum FG detector circuit (MDR-14G, SS-92G boards) is defective.

. Synchronization (DVP-41 board) with the reference signal (DVP_REF_FRM/CF) is faulty.


E-x12

Contents : Abnormality is detected in the drum PG signal.Detecting conditions : The drum PG signal cannot be detected even when the drum makes more than one

complete revolution.Suspected cause : . Drum PG detector circuit (MDR-14G, SS-92G boards) is defective.


. Tape tension is so high that the drum motor cannot rotate.

E-x20Contents : Abnormality is detected in the capstan drive voltage.Detecting conditions : The specified time has elapsed with the capstan drive voltage exceeding its rated

voltage.Suspected cause: . Mechanical load to the capstan motor is so high that the capstan motor cannot

rotate. (Mechanical reason). Capstan motor drive circuit (MDC-13G board) is defective.. Drive voltage detector circuit (MDC-13G, SS-92G boards) is defective.. Capstan motor is defective.

E-x21

Contents : Abnormality is detected in the capstan FG signal.Detecting conditions : The capstan FG counter does not start counting. (Only in the x1 speed or more)Suspected cause : . Mechanical load to the capstan motor is so high that the capstan motor cannot

rotate. (Mechanical reason). Capstan motor drive circuit (MDC-13G board) is defective.. Capstan FG detector circuit (MDC-13G, SS-92G boards) is defective.. Capstan motor is defective.

3-5HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

E-x23

Contents : Abnormality is detected in the rotating direction of capstan.Detecting conditions : Direction command of the capstan rotation does not match with the detected

direction of capstan rotation for the specified period of time.Suspected cause : . Capstan motor drive circuit (MDC-13G board) is defective.

. Capstan FG detector circuit (MDC-13G, SS-92G boards) is defective.

. Capstan motor is defective.

E-x24

Contents : Abnormality is detected in the capstan speed.Detecting conditions : The measured capstan speed does not reach the specified speed even when the

specified time has elapsed. (Only in the x1 speed or more)Suspected cause : . Mechanical load to the capstan motor is so high that the capstan motor cannot

reach the specified speed. (Mechanical reason). Capstan motor drive circuit (MDC-13G board) is defective.. Capstan FG detector circuit (MDC-13G, SS-92G boards) is defective.. Capstan motor is defective.. CTL pitch of the playing tape is faulty.

E-x32

Contents : Abnormality is detected in the S-reel FG signal.Detecting conditions : The S-reel FG counter does not count up nor down while the tape is running. (Only

in the x1 speed or more)Suspected cause : . Pressure force of the pinch arm is insufficient.

. Mechanical driving force is not transmitted to the S-reel. (Mechanical reason)

. S-reel FG detector circuit (MDC-13G, SS-92G boards) is defective.

. Tape is being broken.

. Tape tension is so high that the tape cannot run.

E-x42

Contents : Abnormality is detected in the T-reel FG signal.Detecting conditions : (1) The T-reel FG counter does not count up nor down during unthreading.

(2) The FWD tape movement at the end of threading cannot be completed.(3) The reel tightening operation during cassette-in and cassette-out cannot be

completed.(4) The T-reel FG counter does not count up nor down while the tape is running.

(Only in the x1 speed or more)Suspected cause : . Cassette tape is not inserted. (Cassette-in sensor is defective.)

. Pressure force of the pinch arm is insufficient.

. Mechanical driving force is not transmitted to the T-reel. (Mechanical reason)

. T-reel FG detector circuit (MDC-13G, SS-92G boards) is defective.

. Tape is being broken.

. Tape tension is so high that the tape cannot run.

. The tape is slack in the cassette when the cassette is inserted.

3-6 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

E-x61

Contents : Time-over of the function cam forward rotation is detected.Detecting conditions : The function cam cannot complete its forward rotation within the specified time.Suspected cause : . Mechanical load to the gear block is so high that it cannot drive the function

cam. (Mechanical reason). Reflection seal for detecting the cam position is dirty.. Loading motor is defective.. Loading motor drive circuit (MDC-13G, SS-92G boards) is defective.. Cam position detector circuit (MDC-13G, SS-92G boards) is defective.

E-x62

Contents : Time-over of the function cam reverse rotation is detected.Detecting conditions : The function cam cannot complete its reverse rotation within the specified time.Suspected cause : . Mechanical load to the gear block is so high that it cannot drive the function

cam. (Mechanical reason). Reflection seal for detecting the cam position is dirty.. Loading motor is defective.. Loading motor drive circuit (MDC-13G, SS-92G boards) is defective.. Cam position detector circuit (MDC-13G, SS-92G boards) is defective.

E-x63

Contents : Time-over of the tape top sensor is detected.Detecting conditions : The tape top sensor is reacting even when the tape is wound up after tape top

detection.Suspected cause : . Tape position detector sensor circuit (MDC-13G, SS-92G boards) is defective.

. Tape top sensor is defective.

E-x65

Contents : Time-over of the tape end sensor is detected.Detecting conditions : The tape end sensor is reacting even when the tape is wound up after tape end

detection.Suspected cause : . Tape position detector sensor circuit (MDC-13G, SS-92G boards) is defective.

. Tape end sensor is defective.

E-x70

Contents : Abnormality is detected in the servo EEPROM communication.Detecting conditions : (1) The error in the communication with the servo EEPROM is detected.

(2) The checksum does not match.Suspected cause : . IC403 on the MDC-13G board is defective.

. Signal path between the MDC-13G board and the SS-92G board is defective.

3-7HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

E-x71

Contents : Abnormality is detected in the system control initialization command.Detecting conditions : The initialization command is not completed within the specified time at the event

of power-on with a cassette being inserted.Suspected cause : . Signal path between the FP-152 board and the SS-92G board is defective.

E-x80

Contents : Communication error between SS and EQDetecting conditions : Communication cannot be established between the SS-92G board and the EQ-88G

board.Suspected cause : The EQ board is defective.

E-x81

Contents : EQ switching pulse errorDetecting conditions : None of the switching pulses in the EQ-88G board changes from “H”.Suspected cause : Connection among the MDC-13G board, MDR-14G board, and EQ-88G board is

faulty.

E-x82

Contents : Communication error between SS and ATDetecting conditions : Communication failure with AT exceeds three seconds, or the checksum of the

data sent from AT does not match for three seconds or more.Suspected cause : . Connection of the connectors on the SS-92G board, AT-172 board, and DCP-43

board is faulty.. The SS-92G board or the AT-172 board is defective.

E-x83

Contents : SS-92G/IC13 program load errorDetecting conditions : Loading of a program to the SS-92G board IC13 is not complete.Suspected cause : The SS-92G board IC13 is defective.

E-x86

Contents : FORMAT difference errorDetecting conditions : FORMAT of the camera and FORMAT of the VTR are different.Suspected cause : Connection between AT and SS is faulty.

E-x88

Contents : EEPROM writing errorDetecting conditions : Writing error has occurred in the servo EEPROM.Suspected cause : . The MDC-13G board IC403 is defective.

. Signal path between the SS-92G board and the MDC-13G board is faulty.

3-8 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

E-x89

Contents : FORMAT setting switch errorDetecting conditions : NO. 5 of the SS-92G board S101 is set to ON (forcible mode).Suspected cause : Initial setup at board replacement is wrong.

E-x91

Contents : RE-TAKE errorDetecting conditions : When the cue-up operation has failed at RE-TAKE, VF shows “Retake Search

failed”.Suspected cause : Playback of the TIMECODE record is faulty.

E-x92

Contents : DVP TG IC LOCK errorDetecting conditions : The DVP-41 board TG IC (IC200) cannot PLL-LOCKED.Suspected cause : . GENLOCK IN signal is defective.

. The DVP-41 board IC219, IC242 and IC243 is faulty.

E-x95

Contents : VTR System control microprocessor abnormalDetecting conditions : The camera block microprocessor or the microprocessor on the FP-152 board

cannot communicate with the VTR system control microprocessor.Suspected cause : VTR system control microprocessor has hung up. (Turn off the power and turn it

on again to recover.)

3-2. Device Check

The HDW-F900R has the self-diagnostics function to check the communication function of the respectivedevices.Result of the self-diagnostics is displayed on the [DEV STATUS display] of the DIAGNOSIS menu.(For more details, refer to Section “4. Setup Menu”.)

4-1HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Section 4Setup Menu

4-1. Setup Menus

The HDW-F900R has setup menus for making various settings and adjustments. The setup menus of thisunit include the USER menu, MENU CUSTOMIZE menu, ALL menu, OPERATION menu, PAINTmenu, MAINTENANCE menu, FILE menu, DIAGNOSIS menu and SERVICE menu.The setup menus are displayed on the viewfinder of this unit.

4-1-1. Basic Operations of Setup Menus

Identifying switches

MENU ON/OFF switchUse this switch to display the setup menu. When the lid is closed, the switch is set to the OFF position.ON : Displays the setup menu.OFF : Exits the setup menu.

MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switchUse this switch to cancel the setup of the items that are selected by the setup menu, or return to the initialsetup when the MENU ON/OFF switch is in the ON position.CANCEL/PRST : Cancels the executed setup or returns to the initial (PRST) setup.ESCAPE : Returns to the display of one layer higher in the menu hierarchy.

STATUS ON/SEL/OFF switchUse this switch to show or to clear the setup displays in order to confirm various settings and statuseswhen the MENU ON/OFF switch is in the OFF position.ON/SEL : Shows the various settings and status check displays for about 10 seconds. Each press of this

switch turns over the display page.OFF : Clears the display that is selected by ON/SEL.

Rotary encoderWhen rotated : Moves to the other pages or items, or changes the setup value.When pressed : Enters the page set mode or the setup value modification mode.

Rotary encoder

CANCEL/PRSTOFF

ONESCAPE

MENU

ON/SEL

OFFSTATUS

STATUS ON/SEL/OFF switch

MENU ON/OFF switch

MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch

4-2 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Operating procedure1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.2. To move to another page, rotate the rotary encoder. (Press the rotary encoder to set it.)3. To move to another item, rotate the rotary encoder.

nPressing the rotary encoder enters the setup value modification mode.

4. To modify a setup value, rotate the rotary encoder.5. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF to exit the setup menu.

4-1-2. How to Display the SERVICE Menu

Set the switch S1-1/AT-172 board to the ON position to display the SERVICE menu.

4-3HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

4-2. TOP Menu

While pressing the rotary encoder, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON. Then the TOP menu appears.However, the TOP menu is not displayed when the switch S3 (TOP MENU DISABLE)/AT-172 board isin the ON position.

TOP MENU Display

Menu Function

USER Use the USER menu to set the functions that are used for daily routine operationssuch as MONITOR OUT setting.(This menu appears when the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to ON normally.)

USER MENU CUSTOMIZE Use this menu to add or delete the pages that are required for the USER menu to suitoperators’ needs depending on applications.(For more details, refer to “5-1-3. Editing the USER Menu” of Operation Manual.)

ALL The ALL menu contains all pages of each category of the “USER 1” to “USER 19”pages edited by “USER MENU COSTOMIZE”, “ASSIGN ITEM SEL” page, OPERA-TION, PAINT, MAINTENANCE, FILE and DIAGNOSIS. It means that you can move toany page from the ALL menu without returning to the TOP menu.

OPERATION Usually, the camera operator is expected to use the OPERATION menu to set orchange the preference setups to suit the shooting conditions of each object.

PAINT Use this menu to implement fine adjustment of pictures by monitoring the cameraoutput waveform on a waveform monitor etc.

MAINTENANCE This is the camera maintenance menu. Use this menu to set the PAINT items of loweroperating frequency or to alter the system configuration.

FILE This is the file operation menu. Use this menu to save data in the REFERENCE fileetc.

DIAGNOSIS Use this menu to check the VTR status or to diagnose the circuit boards that aresuspected to have an error.

SERVICE Use this menu for service and maintenance.(This menu is enabled when the switch S1-1/AT-172 board is set to ON.)

S <TOP MENU>

USER USER MENU CUSTOMIZE ALL OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE DIAGNOSIS SERVICE

→

.

.

.

.

.

4-4 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

4-3. USER Menu

A user can select the desired menus that the user uses frequently in daily operation and can store them inthe USER menu.The USER menu contains the following menu items as the default when the unit was shipped from thefactory.Add or delete the menu items as desired with the use of the MENU CUTOMIZE menu.

Name of page Name of category

OUTPUT SEL OPERATION

FUNCTION1 OPERATION

VF DISP1 OPERATION

VF DISP2 OPERATION

‘!’ LED OPERATION

MARKER1 OPERATION

GAIN SW OPERATION

VF SETTING OPERATION

AUTO IRIS OPERATION

SHOT ID OPERATION

SHOT DISP OPERATION

SET STATUS OPERATION

USER FILE FILE

LENS FILE OPERATION

4-5HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

4-4. OPERATION Menu

nWhen the range of setting is surrounded by parenthesis ( ) in the setting column, the setup value is therelative value. The range of setting in parenthesis ( ) can be different from what shown in the manualdepending on the setting in the layer lower than this menu.

OUTPUT SEL Display (Setting the Output Signal)

Item Setting Function

HD SDI OUT OFF/ON Sets the output signal from the HD SDI OUTterminal.*1

SD REAR BNC OUT OFF/VBS/SDI Selects the output signal from the VBS/SDIOUT terminal.*1, *2, *3, *5

VBS : VBS signalSDI : SDI signalOFF : No output signal

TEST OUT SELECT HD/SD Selects the output signal from the TEST OUTterminal.*6

DOWN CON MODE SQEZE/LETTR/CROP Selects aspect ratio at down-conversion.*2, *4, *5

SQEZE : SqueezeThe HD video signal is converted tothe SD signal with the aspect ratioof 16 : 9 as it is. (16 : 9)

LETTR : LetterboxThe HD video signal having aspectratio of 16:9 is inserted into thepicture frame of 4 : 3 as it is and isconverted to the SD signal. (4 : 3)The black level bars are inserted inthe top and bottom of the SD outputvideo signal.

CROP : Edge cropThe video signal area occupying theaspect ratio of 4 : 3 is cut out fromthe HD video signal and isconverted to the SD signal. (4 : 3)

*1 : The HD-SDI OUT terminal on the side of HDW-F900R can be used as the VBS/SDI output when the HKDW-702 is installed.*2 : Displayed only when the HKDW-702 is installed.*3 : If a value other than Y (R, G, B) is selected for the “OUTPUT SELECT” item, a single-channel monochrome signal is output even

when VBS or SDI is selected for “SD REAR BNC OUT”.*4 : MARKER or ZEBRA is not output to the TEST OUT terminal when CROP is selected for TEST OUT SELECT: SD.*5 : If the format is set to 24PsF/23.98PsF when the HKDW-702 is installed, the setting is displayed as “_ _”.*6 : The SD output is not possible if the format is set to 24PsF/23.98PsF when the HKDW-702 is installed.

(When the SD output is selected, the output turns OFF.)

? 01OOUTPUT SEL HD SDI OUT : ON

SD REAR BNC OUT : OFF TEST OUT SELECT : HD DOWN CON MODE : CROP

4-6 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

FUNCTION 1 Display (Setting the various functions)


ASSIGN SW <1> OFF : No function is assigned to this position. Selects the functions of the

F.MIC : Sets the input of FRONT MIC. ASSIGN1 switch.

CACHE : CACHE REC function ON/OFF switch(Refer to Operation Manual

CHARA : Character mix to the TEST OUT terminalfor details.)

MARKR :Marker superimposition ON/OFF switch

RTAKE : Executes RE-TAKE when pressed togetherwith the RET switch at the same time.

ATW : ATW (Automatic Tracking White-balance)function ON/OFF switch

RET.V : Displays the return video signal on VF.

RET : The same function as a Return switch of a lens.

REC : VTR S/S (Start/Stop) switch

TURBO : TURBO GAIN switch

TMARK : TELE FILE MARK recording switch

ZEBRA : Zebra display ON/OFF switch

5600K : Turns ON/OFF the function that electricallyapplies a 5600K color temperature filter.

UA01 to 10 : The items added in ASSIGN EDIT in USERMENU CUSTOMIZE can be selected.

ASSIGN SW <2> OFF : No function is assigned to this position. Selects the functions of the

F.MIC : Sets the input of FRONT MIC ASSIGN2 switch.

CACHE : CACHE REC function ON/OFF switch(Refer to Operation Manual

CHARA : Character mix to the TEST OUT terminalfor details.)

MARKR :Marker superimposition ON/OFF switch

ZEBRA : Zebra display ON/OFF switch

UA01 to 10 : (Same as ASSIGN SW <1>)

TURBO SW The items that can be set are the same as for “ASSIGN SW <1>”.

FRONT MIC SELECT MONO/STREO Sets the FRONT MIC.

DF/NDF DF/NDF Sets DF/NDF.*1

END SEARCH OFF/ON END SEARCH function ON/OFF

CACHE/INTVAL REC OFF/CACHE/A.INT/M.INT Sets the CACHE RECfunction.*2

(Refer to the next page fordetails.)OFF : Not usedCACHE : CACHE RECA.INT : Auto INTerval

recordingM.INT : Manual INTerval

recording

*1 : Displayed only when the format is 59.94i/29.97PsF.*2 : Turns OFF by turning the power OFF and back ON when A.INT/M.INT is selected.

? 02OFUNCTION 1 ASSIGN SW <1> : 5600K ASSIGN SW <2> : F.MIC TURBO SW : TURBO FRONT MIC SELECT: STREO DF/NDF : DF END SEARCH : OFF

CACHE/INTVAL REC: OFF Displays are switched in accordance with the setting of CACHE/INTVAL REC.

4-7HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

When CACHE is selected in CACHE/INTVAL REC


CACHE REC TIME 0SEC/1SEC/2SEC/3SEC/4SEC/ Sets the time of CACHE REC. (SEC: second.)5SEC/6SEC/7SEC* (When 0 sec is set, Just REC is selected.)

Displayed only when CACHE is selected in theabove CACHE/INTVAL REC.

* : 7SEC when the format is 59.94i/29.97PsF.8SEC when the format is 50i/25PsF/24PsF/23.98PsF.

When A.INT is selected in CACHE/INTVAL REC


TAKE TOTAL TIME 5MIN/10MIN/15MIN/20MIN/ Sets the total recording time of the Auto30MIN/40MIN/50MIN/1H/2H/3H/ Interval REC. (MIN: minutes, H: hours)4H/5H/7H/10H/15H/20H/30H/40H/ Displayed only when A.INT is selected in the50H/70H/100H above CACHE/INTVAL REC.

REC TIME 5SEC/10SEC/15SEC/20SEC/30SEC/ Sets the actual recording time of the Auto40SEC/50SEC/ Interval REC. (SEC: seconds, MIN: minutes)1MIN to 40MIN (59.94i) (29.97PsF) / Displayed only when A.INT is selected in the1MIN to 48MIN (50i) (25PsF) / above CACHE/INTVAL REC.1MIN to 50MIN (24PsF) (23.98PsF)

PRE-LIGHTING OFF/2SEC/5SEC/10SEC Sets the function of turning on the lightautomatically during the Auto Interval REC.This is the function to set the timing how manyseconds before starting recording, the lightturns on.Displayed when A.INT or M.INT is selected inthe above CACHE/INTVAL REC, andTRIGGER INTERVAL is other than M.INT.

CACHE/INTVAL REC: CACHE CACHE REC TIME : 0SEC

CACHE/INTVAL REC: A.INT TAKE TOTAL TIME : 5MIN REC TIME : 5SEC PRE-LIGHTING : OFF

4-8 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

When M.INT is selected in CACHE/INTVAL REC


NUMBER OF FRAME 1/2/4/8 Sets the number of picture frames that arerecorded in one recording in the ManualInterval REC.Displayed only when M.INT is selected in theabove CACHE/INTVAL REC.

TRIGGER INTERVAL M/1SEC/2SEC/3SEC/4SEC/5SEC/ Sets the interval time.6SEC/7SEC/8SEC/9SEC/10SEC/ When “M” is set, the number of frames that15SEC/20SEC/30SEC/40SEC/50SEC/ are specified are recorded at the moment of1MIN/2MIN/3MIN/4MIN/5MIN/6MIN/ pressing the REC switch manually.7MIN/8MIN/9MIN/10MIN/15MIN/20MIN/ When any specific time is set, numbers of the30MIN/40MIN/50MIN/1H/2H/3H/4H/6H/ specified frames are recorded as a trigger the12H/24H REC switch.

PRE-LIGHTING OFF/2SEC/5SEC/10SEC Sets the function of turning on the lightautomatically during the Manual Interval REC.This is the function to set the timing how manyseconds before starting recording, the lightturns on.This item is displayed only when theA.INT is selected in the aforementionedCACHE/INTVAL REC, or when the M. INT isselected and the TRIGGER INTERVAL isother than “M”.

CACHE/INTVAL REC: M.INT NUMBER OF FRAME : 1 TRIGGER INTERVAL: 5MIN PRE-LIGHTING : OFF

4-9HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

? 03OFUNCTION 2 5600K : OFF WHITE SWITCH : MEM SHOCKLESS WHITE : 1 ATW SPEED : 4 LOW LIGHT : OFF LOW LIGHT LEVEL : 0 VF BATT WARNING : 10% PB VIDEO : ALL ABS (VF MENU) : OFF

FUNCTION 2 Display (Setting the various functions)


5600K OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that electrically applies a 5600K colortemperature filter.

WHITE SWITCH MEM/ATW Sets the following modes when the WHITE BAL switch is setto the B (B-CH) position.ATW : Auto Tracking White-balanceMEM : Automatic white balance

SHOCKLESS WHITE OFF/1/2/3 Turns ON/OFF the function that smooths out the transition ofwhite balance when the WHITE BAL switch is operated. It alsosets the transition time of white balance. 1 (Fast) ↔ 3 (Slow)

ATW SPEED 1/2/3/4/5 Switches the tracking speed of ATW.1 (Fast) ↔ 5 (Slow)

LOW LIGHT OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the LOW LIGHT message display function in VF.(It displays the warning message on screen when the averagepicture level decreases below a specific level.)

LOW LIGHT LEVEL (_99 to 99) Sets the video level to start displaying the LOW LIGHTmessage when the above LOW LIGHT message displayfunction is ON.Reference : When a menu is being displayed on screen,

the character “L” is displayed instead of themessage “LOW LIGHT”.(Example) LOW LIGHT LEVEL: L 0

VF BATT WARNING 10%/20% Sets the percentage below which the display blinks when theremaining battery level is displayed in % on the VF DISP.

PB VIDEO ALL/HD SDI Can output camera images by limiting output destinations ofplayback images at the time of PB.ALL : Outputs PB VIDEO to VF, TEST OUT, REAR BNC, and

HD SDI.HDSDI : Outputs PB VIDEO to the HD SDI terminal only.

ABS (VF MENU) OFF/ON Displays the menu items that are displayed in relative values indefinite values.(The values of the applicable items are inverted.)

4-10 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

VF DISP 1 Display (Setting the VF displays)


VF DISP OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the VF display items other than menu.

VF DISPLAY MODE 1/2/3 Sets the display mode.*1

DISP EXTENDER OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the extender display.

DISP FILTER OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the filter display.

DISP WHITE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the white balance memory display.

DISP 5600K OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the 5600K display.

DISP GAIN OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the gain setup value display.

DISP SHUTTER OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the shutter speed display.

DISP AUDIO OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the audio level display.

DISP TAPE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the remaining amount of tape display.

*1 : Regarding the messages that indicate the contents of setup change and the messages that indicate progress/result of adjustments,only a part of the display items can be selected or no display at all can also be selected by setting the display mode.

Correspondence between the conditions of the unit when the message is displayed and the display modes are shown as follows.O : Message is displayed.X : Message is not displayed.

The conditions that necessitate Message Display modeshowing of the message setting

1 2 3

When FILTER selection is changed. FILTER : n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4) X X O

When GAIN setting is changed. GAIN : n (n = _3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB, 9 dB, X X O12 dB, 18 dB, 24 dB, 30 dB, 36 dB, 42 dB)

When the WHITE BAL switch setting WHITE : n (n = A CH, B CH, PRESET) X X Ois changed. or ATW (Auto Tracking White-balance)

: RUN

When the OUTPUT/DCC switch is DCC : ON (or OFF) X O Oset to DCC ON or DCC OFF.

When the shutter speed/shutter : SS : 1/100 (or 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, X O Omode setting is changed.*2 1/1000, 1/2000, ECS, EVS)

When BLACK balance/WHITE balance example : WHITE : OK X O Oadjustment is in progress.

*2 : It is also displayed for about 3 seconds when the SHUTTER switch is set to ON.

? 04OVF DISP 1 VF DISP : ON VF DISPLAY MODE : 3 DISP EXTENDER : ON DISP FILTER : ON DISP WHITE : ON DISP 5600K : ON DISP GAIN : ON DISP SHUTTER : ON DISP AUDIO : ON DISP TAPE : ON

4-11HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

VF DISP 2 Display (Setting the VF displays)


DISP IRIS OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the lens iris value display.

DISP ZOOM OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the zoom display.

DISP COLOR TEMP OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the color temperature display.

DISP BATT REMAIN INT/VOLT/AUTO Selects the mode for the remaining battery (or DC IN) voltage display.

DISP DC IN OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the “DC IN” display on the VF when the setting is DC IN.

DISP WRR RF LVL OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the wireless receiver RF level display.

DISP TIME CODE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the time-code display.

‘!’ LED Display (Selecting the conditions to turn on the ‘!’ indicator on VF)


GAIN <!> OFF/ON OFF : Does not turn on.ON : Turns on when the GAIN value is other than the GAIN<!> setting

in '!'LED STD.

SHUTTER <!> OFF/ON OFF : Does not turn on.ON : Turns on when the SHUTTER setting is other than the

SHUTTER<!> setting in '!'LED STD.

WHITE BAL <!> OFF/ON OFF : Does not turn on.ON : Turns on when the WHITE BAL setting is other than the WHITE

BAL<!> setting in '!'LED STD.

5600K <!> OFF/ON OFF : Does not turn on.ON : Turns on when the 5600K setting is other than the 5600K<!>

setting in '!'LED STD.

ATW <!> OFF/ON OFF : Does not turn on.ON : Turns on when the ATW setting is other than the ATW<!> setting

in '!'LED STD.

EXTENDER <!> OFF/ON OFF : Does not turn on.ON : Turns on when the EXTENDER setting is other than the

EXTENDER<!> setting in '!'LED STD.

FILTER <!> OFF/ON OFF : Does not turn on.ON : Turns on when the FILTER setting is other than the FILTER

ND<!> and FILTER CC<!> settings in '!'LED STD.

OVERRIDE <!> OFF/ON OFF : Does not turn on.ON : Turns on when the IRIS OVERRIDE setting is other than the

OVERRIDE<!> setting in '!'LED STD.

FORMAT <!> OFF/ON OFF : Does not turn on.ON : Turns on when the FORMAT setting is other than the FORMAT

setting in '!'LED STD.

? 05OVF DISP 2 DISP IRIS : ON DISP ZOOM : ON DISP COLOR TEMP : OFF DISP BATT REMAIN: INT DISP DC IN : OFF DISP WRR RF LVL : OFF

DISP TIME CODE : OFF

? 06O'!'LED GAIN <!> : ON SHUTTER <!> : ON WHITE BAL <!> : ON 5600K <!> : ON ATW <!> : ON EXTENDER <!> : ON FILTER <!> : OFF OVERRIDE <!> : ON FORMAT <!> : OFF

4-12 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

? 07O'!'LED STD GAIN <!> : 0dB SHUTTER <!> : OFF WHITE BAL <!> : AB 5600K <!> : OFF ATW <!> : ON EXTENDER <!> : ON FILTER ND <!> : 1 FILTER CC <!> : B OVERRIDE <!> : ON FORMAT <!> : 23.98

‘!’ LED STD Display (The ‘!’ indicator on VF)


GAIN <!> 0dB/LOW/MID/HIGH Sets the reference value of GAIN<!>.(Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)

SHUTTER <!> OFF/ECS/SLS/ Sets the reference value of SHUTTER<!>.each FORMAT (Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)SHUTTER SPEED*

WHITE BAL <!> P/A/B/PA/PB/AB Sets the reference value of WHITE BAL<!>.(Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)

5600K <!> OFF/ON Sets the reference value of 5600K<!>.(Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)

ATW <!> OFF/ON Sets the reference value of ATW<!>.(Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)

EXTENDER <!> OFF/ON Sets the reference value of EXTENDER<!>.(Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)

FILTER ND <!> 1/2/3/4 Sets the reference value of FILTER ND<!>.(Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)

FILTER CC <!> A/B/C/D Sets the reference value of FILTER CC<!>.(Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)

OVERRIDE <!> OFF/ON Sets the reference value of OVERRIDE<!>.(Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)

FORMAT <!> 59.94i/50i/23.98PsF/ Sets the reference value of FORMAT<!>.24PsF/25PsF/29.97PsF (Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)

* : The selectable shutter speeds are different for each format. (Refer to Operation Manual for details.)

4-13HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

MARKER 1 Display (Setting the MARKER)


MARKER OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF all the MARKER display functions.

CENTER OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the CENTER MARKER display.

CENTER MARK 1/2/3/4 Selects the types of CENTER MARKER when theabove CENTER MARKER display is ON.*1

SAFETY ZONE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the SAFETY ZONE MARKERdisplay.

SAFETY AREA 80/90/92.5/95% Selects the ranges of the SAFETY ZONEMARKER display.

ASPECT OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the ASPECT MARKER display.

ASPECT SELECT 14 : 9/13 : 9/4 : 3/1.85/2.35 Selects the aspect ratio1.85 : 1.85 : 12.35 : 2.35 : 1

ASPECT MASK OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to darken the outsideof the specified aspect.nThis setting is effective in the VF output only.

ASPECT MASK LVL 0 to 8 Selects the darkness level of the outside of thespecified aspect when ASPECT MASK is ON.nThis setting is effective in the VF output only.

100% MARKER OFF/ON/SD*2 Selects the 100% (effective picture elements)MARKER display.

*1 : The CENTER MARKER is displayed as shown below.

*2 : 100% MARKER : SD is displayed only when the HKDW-702 is installed. OFF : 100% marker OFF.ON : HD 100% marker displaySD : SD 100% marker display

nMARKER or ZEBRA is not output to the TEST OUT terminal when “TEST OUT SELECT” is set to SDand “DOWN CON MODE” to CROP on the OUTPUT SEL screen.

? 08OMARKER 1 MARKER : OFF CENTER : OFF CENTER MARK : 3 SAFETY ZONE : OFF SAFETY AREA : 90% ASPECT : OFF ASPECT SELECT : 4:3 ASPECT MASK : OFF ASPECT MASK LVL : 0 100% MARKER : OFF

Setting 1 2 3 4

VFscreen

4-14 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

MARKER 2 Display (Setting the MARKER-related items)


USER BOX OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the BOX cursor display.

USER BOX WIDTH 1 to 479 Sets the horizontal width of the BOX cursor.

USER BOX HEIGHT 1 to 269 Sets the vertical width of the BOX cursor.

USER BOX H POS. _480 to 479* Sets the BOX cursor position (horizontal position).

USER BOX V POS. _270 to 269* Sets the BOX cursor position (vertical position).

CENTER H POS. _479 to 479 Sets the CENTER MARKER position (horizontal position).

CENTER V POS. _268 to 268 Sets the CENTER MARKER position (vertical position).

ASPECT SAFE ZONE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the SAFETY ZONE MARKER display withrespect to the ASPECT MARKER.

ASPECT SAFE AREA 80%/90%/92.5%/95% Selects the ranges of the SAFETY ZONE MARKER displaywith respect to the ASPECT MARKER.

* : Range of this setting is different depending upon the above USER BOX WIDTH/HEIGHT setting.

GAIN SW Display (Setting GAIN)


GAIN LOW _3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/30/36/42 dB Sets the gain value when the GAIN switch is set tothe “L” position.

GAIN MID _3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/30/36/42 dB Sets the gain value when the GAIN switch is set tothe “M” position.

GAIN HIGH _3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/30/36/42 dB Sets the gain value when the GAIN switch is set tothe “H” position.

GAIN TURBO _3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/30/36/42 dB Sets the gain value of the TURBO GAIN switch.

TURBO SW IND. OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that disables L/M/H ofthe GAIN switch while the TURBO GAIN is beingselected.

? 09OMARKER 2 USER BOX : OFF USER BOX WIDTH : 240 USER BOX HEIGHT : 135 USER BOX H POS. : 0 USER BOX V POS. : 0 CENTER H POS. : 0 CENTER V POS. : 0

ASPECT SAFE ZONE : OFF ASPECT SAFE AREA : 90%

? 10OGAIN SW GAIN LOW : 0dB GAIN MID : 6dB GAIN HIGH : 12dB GAIN TURBO : 42dB

TURBO SW IND. : OFF

4-15HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

VF SETTING display (Setting VF)


ZEBRA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF all the zebra display.

ZEBRA SELECT 1/2/BOTH Selects the zebra pattern type.

ZEBRA1 DET.LEVEL (50% to 105%) Sets the ZEBRA1 display level (center value).

ZEBRA2 DET.LEVEL (95% to 105%) Sets the ZEBRA2 display level (center value).

ASPECT OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF all the ASPECT marker display.

VF DETAIL LEVEL (_99 to 99) Sets the amount of details of the VF picture.(Details of the main line video output remain unchanged.)

VF DTL H LEVEL (_99 to 99) Sets the H. details of the VF picture.(Details of the main line video output remain unchanged.)

VF DTL V LEVEL (_99 to 99) Sets the V. details of the VF picture.(Details of the main line video output remain unchanged.)

? 11OVF SETTING ZEBRA : OFF ZEBRA SELECT : 1 ZEBRA1 DET.LEVEL: 70% ZEBRA2 DET.LEVEL: 100% ASPECT : OFF

VF DETAIL LEVEL : 0 VF DTL H LEVEL : 0 VF DTL V LEVEL : 0

4-16 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

AUTO IRIS Display (Setting AUTO IRIS)


IRIS OVERRIDE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the AUTO IRIS OVERRIDE function.When set to ON, the reference value of the AUTO IRIS can bechanged by the rotary encoder. (5 steps: _1, _1/2, 0, +1/2, +1)

IRIS SPEED 0/1/2/3/4/5 Sets the AUTO IRIS response speed. 0 (Fast) ↔ 5 (Slow)

CLIP HIGH LIGHT OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that limits the AUTO IRISdetection level to 100% when the video signal of higher than100% is input.

IRIS WINDOW 1/2/3/4/5/6/VAR Selects the IRIS WINDOW (detection range).*1

When VAR is selected, the iris window can be set by theIRIS VAR WIDTH/HEIGHT/H POS/V POS as describedbelow.

IRIS WINDOW IND. OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that checks the iris window withthe box cursor.

IRIS VAR WIDTH 20 to 479 Sets width of the iris window when VAR is selected in theabove IRIS WINDOW.

IRIS VAR HEIGHT 20 to 269 Sets height of the iris window when VAR is selected inthe above IRIS WINDOW.

IRIS VAR H POS _460 to 460*2 Sets the center in the horizontal direction of the iris windowwhen VAR is selected in the above IRIS WINDOW.

IRIS VAR V POS _249 to 249*2 Sets the center in the vertical direction of the iris windowwhen VAR is selected in the above IRIS WINDOW.

*1 : The IRIS WINDOW is set as shown below.

*2 : Range of this setting is different depending upon the above IRIS VAR WIDTH/HEIGHT setting.

? 12OAUTO IRIS IRIS OVERRIDE : OFF IRIS SPEED : 3 CLIP HIGH LIGHT : OFF IRIS WINDOW : 1 IRIS WINDOW IND.: OFF IRIS VAR WIDTH : 240 IRIS VAR HEIGHT : 135 IRIS VAR H POS : 0 IRIS VAR V POS : 0

Setting 1 2 3 4 5 6

VF screen

Shaded ( ) area : IRIS WINDOW frame

4-17HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

SHOT ID Display (Setting SHOT ID)


ID-1 12 characters (alphanumeric characters, symbols and spaces) Setting SHOT ID-1




SHOT DISP Display (Selecting the shot data to be superimposed on color bar)


SHOT DATA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the date display.

SHOT TIME OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the time display.

SHOT MODEL NAME OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the model name display of this unit.

SHOT SERIAL NO OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the serial number display of this unit.

SHOT ID SEL OFF/ID-1/ID-2/ID-3/ID-4 Displays the SHOT ID number that is selected by theSHOT ID page.

SHOT BLINK CHARA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the blinking of the asterisk “*” on thecolor bar.

? 13OSHOT ID ID-1 : ID-2 : ID-3 : ID-4 :

? 14OSHOT DISP SHOT DATE : OFF SHOT TIME : OFF SHOT MODEL NAME : OFF SHOT SERIAL NO : OFF SHOT ID SEL : OFF SHOT BLINK CHARA: OFF

4-18 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

SET STATUS Display (Selecting the status check display page that appears when theSTATUS ON/SEL/OFF switch is operated*****)


STATUS ABNORMAL OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the ABNORMAL <!> screen display.

STATUS FUNCTION OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the FUNCTION screen display.

STATUS AUDIO OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the AUDIO STATUS screen display.

* : The status display screens are shown as follows.

ABNORMAL <!> display (Indicating the conditions to turn on the Abnormal LED <!> thatis set by the <!> LED display)

FUNCTION display (Indicating the setup status of the various functions that are set bythe FUNCTION display)


FORMAT Indicating the present format.

POWER OFF>ON TO 50i Display only Indication requesting to turn off the main power once when theFORMAT is switched.This indication appears only when the FORMAT is switched.

ASSIGN <1> Displays the function that is assigned to the ASSIGN1 switch.

ASSIGN <2> Displays the function that is assigned to the ASSIGN2 switch.

ASSIGN <T> Displays the function that is assigned to the TURBO switch.

CACHE REC Displays the ON/OFF status of the CACHE REC function.(only when the CACHE REC board is installed)

<Actual State> Displays the output status of the various BNC connectors.SD REAR BNCTEST OUTHD SDI

? 15OSET STATUS STATUS ABNORMAL : ON STATUS FUNCTION : ON STATUS AUDIO : ON

ABNORMAL<!> !GAIN : ON 12dB!SHUTTER : ON ECS 5600K : ON OFF WHITE BAL : ON W:B ATW : ON OFF EXTENDER : ON OFF!FILTER : OFF 2B OVERRIDE : ON 0 FORMAT : OFF 59.94

FUNCTION FORMAT : 59.94iPOWER OFF>ON TO 50iASSIGN <1> : 5600KASSIGN <2> : F.MICASSIGN <T> : TURBOCACHE REC : OFF : 1SEC- Actual State --------- SD REAR BNC : VBS TEST OUT : HD HD SDI : OFF

4-19HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

TEST OUT Display (Setting on TEST OUT and return video)


TEST OUT MARKER OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to output the VF marker to theTEST OUT terminal.

TEST OUT VFDISP OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to output the characters thatappear on VF, to the TEST OUT terminal when the VF’sDISPLAY switch is set to ON.

TEST OUT MENU OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to output the menus that appearon VF, to the TEST OUT terminal when the MENU ON/OFFswitch is set to ON.

TEST OUT ZEBRA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to output the zebra pattern to theTEST OUT terminal.

OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB* Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUT andthe VBS/SDI OUT terminal.(The Y-signal becomes the VBS signal when VBS is selectedin the SD REAR BNC OUT of the OUTPUT SEL display (ofthe OPERATION menu) and SD is selected in the TEST OUTSELECT.) The output signal returns to the Y-signal without failat power-on.

* : RGB can be selected only when the Camcorder is used in the service mode.

nMARKER or ZEBRA is not output to the TEST OUT terminal when “TEST OUT SELECT” is set to SDand “DOWN CON MODE” to CROP on the OUTPUT SEL screen.

? 16OTEST OUT

TEST OUT MARKER : OFF TEST OUT VFDISP : OFF TEST OUT MENU : OFF TEST OUT ZEBRA : OFF

OUTPUT SELECT : Y

AUDIO STATUS Display (Indicating the setup status on audio)

Item Function

EMPHASIS Displays the EMPHASIS, DF/NDF, and FRONT MIC MONO/STEREO setting.

CH1 Displays the input signals of CH1 to CH4.CH2CH3CH4

CH1 Displays the input signal level of CH1 to CH4. (When the input signal overflows,CH2 OV is displayed.)CH3CH4

AUDIO STATUS EMPHASIS:OFF NDF STEREO

CH1:FRONT CH3:WIRELESCH2:REAR CH4:WIRELES

∞ 40 30 20 10 0CH1: CH2:CH3:CH4:

OV

4-20 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

OFFSET WHT Display (Setting on the offset white function)


OFFSET WHITE <A> OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the offset white function. (A-CH)Note : If the white balance auto adjustment is not performed,

the following settings are not reflected.

WARM-COOL <A> Displays the color Sets the offset value. (A-CH)temperature(Guideline)

WARM-COOL BAL <A> (_99 to 99) Used for the above WARM-COOL fine adjustment. (A-CH)

OFFSET WHITE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the offset white function. (B-CH)Note : If the white balance auto adjustment is not performed,

the following settings are not reflected.

WARM-COOL Displays the color Sets the offset value. (B-CH)temperature(Guideline)

WARM-COOL BAL (_99 to 99) Used for the above WARM-COOL fine adjustment. (B-CH)

? 17OOFFSET WHT OFFSET WHITE <A>: OFF WARM-COOL <A>: 3200 WARM-COOL BAL<A>: 0

OFFSET WHITE : OFF WARM-COOL : 3200 WARM-COOL BAL: 0

4-21HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

? 18OSHT ENABLE SHUTTER ECS : ON SHUTTER 1/100 : ON SHUTTER 1/125 : ON SHUTTER 1/250 : ON SHUTTER 1/500 : ON SHUTTER 1/1000 : ON SHUTTER 1/2000 : ON

SHT ENABLE Display (Setting the shutter mode/speed that can be selected by theSHUTTER switch etc)


SHUTTER ECS OFF/ON When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit.

SHUTTER 1/32*1 OFF/ON When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit.








SHUTTER 1/125 OFF/ON When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit.





*1 : Displayed only in FORMAT 24PsF or 23.98PsF.*2 : Displayed only in FORMAT 25PsF.*3 : Displayed only in FORMAT 29.97PsF.*4 : Displayed only in FORMAT 24PsF, 23.98PsF or 25PsF.*5 : Displayed in formats other than FORMAT 59.94i.*6 : Displayed only in FORMAT 59.94i or 25PsF.

4-22 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

LENS FILE Display (Operating the LENS file)


LENS FILE SELECT 1 to 32 Selects the LENS file.

F.ID Display only Displays the file ID of the LENS file that is selected by theabove LENS FILE SELECT.

L.ID* Display only Displays the LENS-specific ID.

L.MF* Display only Displays the name of the LENS manufacturer.

* : When a lens other than a serial lens is attached, (Unknown) is displayed.

UMID SET Display (Setting the UMID)


EX-OWNERSHIP REC OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF user information recording

COUNTRY CODE 4 characters (alphanumeric characters) Setting the country code.

ORGANIZATION 4 characters (alphanumeric characters) Setting the organization code.

USER CODE 4 characters (alphanumeric characters) Setting the user code.

INSTANCE NO RND/GEN Selecting the method of generating thenumber to be used for identifying the originalvideo signal.RND : Random numberGEN : Generation

TIME ZONE Press the rotary encoder to move to Setting TIME ZONE (time difference)the TIME ZONE selection display.

MACHINE Display only The ID number indicating the equipmentunique number is displayed.

? 19OLENS FILE LENS FILE SELECT : 1

F.ID: <LENS INFORMATION> L.ID : (unknown) L.MF : (unknown)

? 20OUMID SET EX-OWNERSHIP REC: OFF

COUNTRY CODE : ORGANIZATION : USER CODE : INSTANCE NO : RND

TIME ZONE:00:+00:00

MACHINE:080046

4-23HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

4-5. PAINT Menu


SW STATUS Display (Turns ON/OFF the PAINT related functions)


GAMMA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the gamma correction function.

BLACK GAMMA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the black gamma correction function.

MATRIX OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF all of the linear matrix correction functions.

KNEE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the knee correction function.

WHITE CLIP OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the white clip correction function.

DETAIL OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that adds the detail signal to thevideo signal to improve resolution power.

APERTURE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the aperture correction function.

FLARE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the flare correction function.

EVS OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the super EVS (enhanced vertical resolution)mode.

TEST SAW OFF/ANALOG/ Turns ON/OFF the function that outputs the TEST signal forciblyDIGITAL to the video signal system, and selects the type of TEST signal.

(Invalid when the BARS signal is selected.)

? 01OSW STATUS GAMMA : ON BLACK GAMMA : OFF MATRIX : OFF KNEE : ON WHITE CLIP : ON DETAIL : ON APERTURE : ON FLARE : ON EVS : OFF TEST SAW : OFF

4-24 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

WHITE Display (Setting color temperature at WHITE A/B)


COLOR TEMP.<A> Displays the color temperature Sets the value that is close to the color temperature of(Guideline) your preference. <A ch>

(The displayed value is a guideline.)Reference : The R GAIN and B GAIN values also

change accordingly at the same time.When data of the color temperaturedisplay is more than 100000K, ******appears.

C TEMP BAL <A> (_99 to 99) Uses this item for fine adjustment when the optimumcolor cannot be obtained by the above COLORTEMP. <A ch>Reference : The R GAIN and B GAIN values also

change accordingly at the same time.

R GAIN <A> (_99 to 99) Uses this item when you want to adjust the colortemperature by changing the R GAIN. <A ch>

B GAIN <A> (_99 to 99) Uses this item when you want to adjust the colortemperature by changing the B GAIN. <A ch>

5600K <A> OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that electrically applies a5600K color temperature filter. <A ch>

COLOR TEMP. Displays the color temperature Sets the value that is close to the color temperature of(Guideline) your preference. 

(The displayed value is a guideline.)Reference : The R GAIN and B GAIN values also

change accordingly at the same time.When data of the color temperaturedisplay is more than 100000K, ******appears.

C TEMP BAL (_99 to 99) Uses this item for fine adjustment when the optimumcolor cannot be obtained by the above COLORTEMP. Reference : The R GAIN and B GAIN values also

change accordingly at the same time.

R GAIN (_99 to 99) Uses this item when you want to adjust the colortemperature by changing the R GAIN. 

B GAIN (_99 to 99) Uses this item when you want to adjust the colortemperature by changing the B GAIN. 

5600K OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that electrically applies a5600K color temperature filter. 

? 02OWHITE COLOR TEMP. <A>: 3200 C TEMP BAL <A>: 0 R GAIN <A>: 0 B GAIN <A>: 0 5600K <A>: OFF COLOR TEMP. : 3200 C TEMP BAL : 0 R GAIN : 0 B GAIN : 0 5600K : OFF

4-25HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

BLACK/FLARE Display (Adjusting black/flare)


MASTER BLACK (_99 to 99) Adjusts the master black level. (All of the R, G and Bblack levels are adjusted.)

R BLACK (_99 to 99) Adjusts the R black level.

B BLACK (_99 to 99) Adjusts the B black level.

MASTER FLARE (0 to 199) Adjusts the master flare compensation level. (All ofthe R, G and B flare compensation levels areadjusted.)

R FLARE (_99 to 99) Adjusts the R flare compensation level.

G FLARE (_99 to 99) Adjusts the G flare compensation level.

B FLARE (_99 to 99) Adjusts the B flare compensation level.

FLARE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the flare compensation function.

OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB* Selects the video signal that is output from the TESTOUT and the VBS/SDI OUT terminal.(The Y-signal becomes the VBS signal when VBS isselected in the SD REAR BNC OUT of the OUTPUTSEL display (of the OPERATION menu) and SD isselected in the TEST OUT SELECT.) The outputsignal returns to the Y-signal without fail at power-on.


? 03OBLACK/FLARE MASTER BLACK : 0 R BLACK : 0 B BLACK : 0 MASTER FLARE : 0 R FLARE : 0 G FLARE : 0 B FLARE : 0 FLARE : ON

OUTPUT SELECT : Y

4-26 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

GAMMA Display (Adjusting gamma)


GAMMA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the gamma correction function.

STEP GAMMA 0.35 to 0.90 Sets the master gamma correction curve for each(0.05 STEP) step.

MASTER GAMMA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the master gamma correction curve.

R GAMMA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the R gamma correction curve.

G GAMMA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the G gamma correction curve.

B GAMMA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the B gamma correction curve.

OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB*1 Selects the video signal that is output from the TESTOUT and the VBS/SDI OUT terminal.(The Y-signal becomes the VBS signal when VBS isselected in the SD REAR BNC OUT of the OUTPUTSEL display (of the OPERATION menu) and SD isselected in the TEST OUT SELECT.) The outputsignal returns to the Y-signal without fail at power-on.

GAMMA SELECT STD/HG/USER Selects the major classifications of gamma.STD : StandardHG: Hyper gamma*2

USER : User gammaBy executing USER GAMMA LOAD, thegamma table loaded from the memory stickcan be selected.

GAM SEL (STD) / (HG) / (USER) 1 to 4 (STD/HG) Selects the gamma curve.1 to 5 (USER) Display is switched by selecting the aforementioned

GAMMA SELECT.

*1 : RGB can be selected only when the Camcorder is used in the service mode.

*2 :

? 04OGAMMA GAMMA : ON STEP GAMMA : 0.45 MASTER GAMMA : 0 R GAMMA : 0 G GAMMA : 0 B GAMMA : 0 OUTPUT SELECT : Y GAMMA SELECT : STD GAM SEL (STD) : 3

With 100% white clip With 109% white clip

Effective for expressing the Hyper gamma 1 Hyper gamma 3tone for low luminance.(The -3 dB gain can be usedfor reducing more noise.)

Effective for expressing a wide Hyper gamma 2 Hyper gamma 4range of contrast from low tohigh luminance.(The -3 dB gain cannot be used.)

4-27HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

BLK GAMMA Display (Adjusting black gamma)


BLACK GAMMA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the black gamma correction function.

BLK GAMMA RANGE LOW/L.MID/H.MID/HIGH Sets the range in which the black gamma correction iseffective.LOW : 0 to 3.6 %L.MID : 0 to 7.2 %H.MID : 0 to 14.4 %HIGH : 0 to 28.8 %

MASTER BLK GAMMA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the master black gamma correction curve.(All of the R, G and B black gamma are adjusted.)

R BLACK GAMMA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the R black gamma correction curve.

G BLACK GAMMA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the G black gamma correction curve.

B BLACK GAMMA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the B black gamma correction curve.

OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB* Selects the video signal that is output from the TESTOUT and the VBS/SDI OUT terminal.(The Y-signal becomes the VBS signal when VBS isselected in the SD REAR BNC OUT of the OUTPUTSEL display (of the OPERATION menu) and SD isselected in the TEST OUT SELECT.) The outputsignal returns to the Y-signal without fail at power-on.


? 05OBLK GAMMA BLACK GAMMA : OFF BLK GAMMA RANGE : HIGH

MASTER BLK GAMMA: 0 R BLACK GAMMA : 0 G BLACK GAMMA : 0 B BLACK GAMMA : 0

OUTPUT SELECT : Y

4-28 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

KNEE 1 Display (Adjusting knee 1)


KNEE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the knee correction function.

KNEE POINT (M) 50 to 109 (%) Adjusts the master knee point level during the manualknee adjustment.

KNEE SLOPE (M) (_99 to 99) Adjusts the master knee slope level during the manualknee adjustment.

KNEE SATURATION OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the knee saturation function.

KNEE SAT LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjusts the knee saturation level.

WHITE CLIP OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the white clip function. (used during thevideo signal adjustment)Note : The video level that is higher than 109% is not

output even if this setting is set to OFF.

WHITE CLIP LEVEL 100.0 to 109.5 (%) Set the master white clip level.

KNEE 2 Display (Adjusting knee 2)


KNEE SATURATION OFF/ON Turns OFF/ON the knee saturation function.

KNEE POINT (R) _45.0 to 14.0 Adjusts the R knee offset from the master knee point level(0.1 STEP) when the KNEE SATURATION function is OFF.

KNEE SLOPE (R) (_99 to 99) Adjusts the R knee slope level when the KNEESATURATION function is OFF.

KNEE POINT (G) _45.0 to 14.0 Adjusts the G knee offset from the master knee point level(0.1 STEP) when the KNEE SATURATION function is OFF.

KNEE SLOPE (G) (_99 to 99) Adjusts the G knee slope level when the KNEESATURATION function is OFF.

KNEE POINT (B) _45.0 to 14.0 Adjusts the B knee offset from the master knee point level(0.1 STEP) when the KNEE SATURATION function is OFF.

KNEE SLOPE (B) (_99 to 99) Adjusts the B knee slope level when the KNEESATURATION function is OFF.

? 06OKNEE 1 KNEE : ON KNEE POINT (M) : 95.0 KNEE SLOPE (M) : 0

KNEE SATURATION : OFF KNEE SAT LEVEL : 0

WHITE CLIP : ON WHITE CLIP LEVEL: 108.0

? 07OKNEE 2 KNEE SATURATION : OFF

KNEE POINT(R) : 0.0 KNEE SLOPE(R) : 0 KNEE POINT(G) : 0.0 KNEE SLOPE(G) : 0 KNEE POINT(B) : 0.0 KNEE SLOPE(B) : 0

4-29HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

? 08ODETAIL 1 DETAIL : ON APERTURE : ON DETAIL LEVEL : 0 APERTURE LEVEL : 0 DETAIL H/V RATIO: 0 CRISPENING : 0 LEVEL DEPEND : ON LEVEL DEPEND LVL: 0 DETAIL FREQ. : 0

DETAIL 1 Display (Adjusting DETAIL 1)


DETAIL OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the detail signal.

APERTURE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the aperture correction function.

DETAIL LEVEL (_99 to 99) Sets the overall detail signal level.

APERTURE LEVEL (0 to 15) Sets the aperture correction level.

DETAIL H/V RATIO (_99 to 99) Sets the V. detail signal level only.

CRISPENING (_99 to 99) Sets the range of video signal amplitude to which thedetail signal is crispening.

LEVEL DEPEND OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the level depend function. (This functiondecreases the amount of detail signal when the videosignal amplitude is small.)

LEVEL DEPEND LVL (_99 to 99) Sets the range of video signal amplitude that is suppressedby the level depend.

DETAIL FREQ. (_99 to 99) Sets the frequency (thickness) of the H. detail signal.

DETAIL 2 Display (Adjusting DETAIL 2)


KNEE APERTURE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the knee aperture function. (This functioncontrols the amount of the detail signal that is added tothe highlight signal higher than the knee point.)

KNEE APT LEVEL (0 to 199) Adjusts the amount of the detail signal that is added to thehighlight signal higher than the knee point.

DETAIL WHT LIMIT (_99 to 99) Limits the white peak of the detail signal.

DETAIL BLK LIMIT (_99 to 99) Limits the black peak of the detail signal.

DETAIL V-BLK LMT (_99 to 99) Limits the black peak of the V. detail signal.

H/V CONTROL MODE V/ H/V Selects an operation mode of DETAIL H/V RATIO on theDETAIL 1 page.H/V : Controls the ratio of H and V.V : Controls V.

? 09ODETAIL 2 KNEE APERTURE : OFF KNEE APT LEVEL : 0

DETAIL WHT LIMIT: 0 DETAIL BLK LIMIT: 0 DETAIL V-BLK LMT: 0

H/V CONTROL MODE: V

4-30 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

SD DETAIL Display (Adjusting DETAIL of DOWN CON OUT)*****

* : Displayed only when the HKDW-702 is installed.


SD DETAIL OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the detail signal.*1

SD DETAIL LEVEL (_99 to 99) Sets the overall detail signal level.*1

SD CRISPENING (0 to 15) Sets the range of video signal amplitude to which thedetail signal is crispening.*1

SD DTL WHT LIMIT (_99 to 99) Limits the white peak of the detail signal.*1

SD DTL BLK LIMIT (_99 to 99) Limits the black peak of the detail signal.*1

SD LEVEL DEPEND OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the level depend function. (This functiondecreases the amount of detail signal when the videosignal amplitude is small.)*1

SD LV.DEPEND LVL (0 to 15) Sets the range of video signal amplitude that is suppressedby the level depend.*1

SD DTL FREQ. (0 to 3) Sets the frequency (thickness) of the H. detail signal.*1

SD DTL H/V RATIO (0 to 7) Sets the V. detail signal level only.*1

SD CROSS COLOR (0 to 15) Sets the cross-color suppression level.*1, *2

*1 : If the format is set to 24PsF/23.98PsF when the HKDW-702 is installed, the setting is displayed as “_ _”.*2 : Displayed only when the format is set to 59.94i/29.97PsF when the HKDW-702 is installed.

? 10OSD DETAIL SD DETAIL : ON SD DETAIL LEVEL : 0 SD CRISPENING : 0 SD DTL WHT LIMIT: 0 SD DTL BLK LIMIT: 0 SD LEVEL DEPEND : ON SD LV.DEPEND LVL: 0 SD DTL FREQ. : 0 SD DTL H/V RATIO: 0 SD CROSS COLOR : 0

4-31HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

SKIN DETAIL Display (Controlling DETAIL of specific color such as skin tone)


SKIN DETAIL ALL* OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the skin detail function.

SKIN DETECT Press the rotary encoder to Automatic color detection function.execute this menu item Move the cursor to the desired object color and press the

rotary encoder. Then the SKIN DTL SAT. and the SKINDTL HUE will be set automatically.

SKIN AREA IND OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the zebra display to the target area.

SKIN DTL SELECT* 1/2/3 Selects the skin detail BANK.(When BANK is switched, the lower 5 lines of display areswitched at the same time.)

SKIN DETAIL* OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the skin detail function.ON/OFF can be set to each BANK (3 different settings) ofthe above SKIN DTL SELECT.

SKIN DETAIL LVL (_99 to 99) Sets the skin detail signal level.(Increasing this value increases the skin detail signalamplitude.)This item can be set to each BANK (3 different settings) ofthe above SKIN DTL SELECT.

SKIN DTL SAT. (_99 to 99) Sets the range of (saturation) of chroma signal in whichthe skin detail signal is effective.This item can be set to each BANK (3 different settings) ofthe above SKIN DTL SELECT.

SKIN DTL HUE 0 to 359 Sets the center phase of the chroma phase (HUE) inwhich the skin detail functions (Unit: Degrees)This item can be set to each BANK (3 different settings) ofthe above SKIN DTL SELECT.

SKIN DTL WIDTH 0 to 359 Sets the width of the chroma phase (HUE) in which theskin detail functions (Unit: Degrees)This item can be set to each BANK (3 different settings) ofthe above SKIN DTL SELECT.

* : Setting of the SKIN DTL SELECT is effective when both the SKIN DETAIL ALL and SKIN DETAIL are set to ON.

? 11OSKIN DETAIL SKIN DETAIL ALL: OFF SKIN DETECT : EXEC SKIN AREA IND : OFF

SKIN DTL SELECT: 1 SKIN DETAIL : ON SKIN DETAIL LVL: 0 SKIN DTL SAT. : 0 SKIN DTL HUE : 0 SKIN DTL WIDTH : 40

4-32 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

MTX LINEAR Display (Setting linear matrix)


MATRIX OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the linear matrix and multi matrix functions.

MATRIX (USER) OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the linear matrix function.

MATRIX (PRESET) OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the preset matrix function.

MATRIX (PRST) SEL 1/2/3/4/5/6 Selects the preset matrix.1 : equivalent to SMPTE 240M 2 : equivalent to ITU-7093 : equivalent to SMPTE WIDE 4 : equivalent to NTSC5 : equivalent to EBU 6 : equivalent to ITU-609

MATRIX (USER) R-G (_99 to 99) Sets the matrix coefficients.

MATRIX (USER) R-B (_99 to 99) Sets the matrix coefficients.

MATRIX (USER) G-R (_99 to 99) Sets the matrix coefficients.

MATRIX (USER) G-B (_99 to 99) Sets the matrix coefficients.

MATRIX (USER) B-R (_99 to 99) Sets the matrix coefficients.

MATRIX (USER) B-G (_99 to 99) Sets the matrix coefficients.

MTX MULTI Display (Setting multi matrix)


MATRIX OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the linear matrix and multi matrixcorrection functions.

MATRIX (MULTI) OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the multi matrix function.

MTRIX AREA IND. OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that shows the zebrapattern indicating the detecting region of the multimatrix correction, inside VF.

MTRIX COLOR DET Press the rotary encoder Automatic color detection function.to execute this menu item. Move the cursor to the desired object color and press

the rotary encoder. Then the MTX (MULTI) AXIS willbe set automatically.

MULTI MTX PRESET Press the rotary encoder Presets the HUE/SAT settings of all AXIS.to execute this menu item.

MTX (MULTI) AXIS B/B+/MG_/MG/MG+/ Selects the chroma phase to correct.R/R+/YL_/YL+/G_/G/G+/CY/CY+/B_

MTX (MULTI) HUE (_99 to 99) Adjusts the chroma phase (HUE) of the multi matrix correction.

MTX (MULTI) SAT (_99 to 99) Adjusts the saturation (SAT) of the multi matrix correction.

? 12OMTX LINEAR MATRIX : OFF MATRIX (USER) : OFF MATRIX (PRESET) : OFF MATRIX (PRST)SEL : 2 MATRIX(USER) R-G : 0 MATRIX(USER) R-B : 0 MATRIX(USER) G-R : 0 MATRIX(USER) G-B : 0 MATRIX(USER) B-R : 0 MATRIX(USER) B-G : 0

? 13OMTX MULTI

MATRIX : OFF MATRIX (MULTI) : OFF

MATRIX AREA IND.: OFF MATRIX COLOR DET: EXEC MULTI MTX PRESET: EXEC

MTX(MULTI) AXIS : B MTX(MULTI) HUE : 0 MTX(MULTI) SAT : 0

4-33HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

V MODULATION Display (Adjusting Temporary WHITE V SAW SHADING for LENS)


VMOD OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the V. modulation function.

MASTER VMOD (_99 to 99) Adjusts amount of the master V. modulation correction.(All of the R, G and B V. modulation corrections arecontrolled.)

R VMOD (_99 to 99) Adjusts amount of the R V. modulation correction.

G VMOD (_99 to 99) Adjusts amount of the G V. modulation correction.

B VMOD (_99 to 99) Adjusts amount of the B V. modulation correction.

OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB* Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUTand the VBS/SDI OUT terminal.(The Y-signal becomes the VBS signal when VBS is selectedin the SD REAR BNC OUT of the OUTPUT SEL display (ofthe OPERATION menu) and SD is selected in the TEST OUTSELECT.) The output signal returns to the Y-signal without failat power-on.


nIn the MASTER VMOD and R/G/B VMOD, the lens extender position is displayed in the rightmost-endof the menu items.Blank : Extender OFFEX : Extender ON

? 14OV MODULATION

VMOD : ON

MASTER VMOD EX: 0 R VMOD EX: 0 G VMOD EX: 0 B VMOD EX: 0

OUTPUT SELECT : Y

4-34 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

SATURATION Display (Setting the saturation)


SATURATION OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the saturation function.

SAT. LEVEL _99 to 0 Sets the saturation level.

LOW KEY SAT. OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the low key saturation function.

L.KEY SAT.LEVEL (_99 to 99) Sets the saturation level in the darker video signal.

L.KEY SAT.RANGE LOW/L.MID/ Sets the range of video signal in which the low keyH.MID/HIGH saturation correction is effective.

LOW : 0 to 3.6 %L.MID : 0 to 7.2 %H.MID : 0 to 14.4 %HIGH : 0 to 28.8 %

Y BLK GAMMA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the Y black gamma correction function.

Y BLK GAM LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjust the Y black gamma correction curve.

Y BLK GAM RANGE LOW/L.MID/ Sets the range of video signal in which the Y blackH.MID/HIGH gamma correction is effective.

LOW : 0 to 3.6 %L.MID : 0 to 7.2 %H.MID : 0 to 14.4 %HIGH : 0 to 28.8 %

? 15OSATURATION

SATURATION : OFF SAT. LEVEL : 0

LOW KEY SAT. : OFF L.KEY SAT.LEVEL : 0 L.KEY SAT.RANGE : HIGH

Y BLK GAMMA : OFF Y BLK GAM LEVEL : 0 Y BLK GAM RANGE : HIGH

4-35HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

SCENE FILE Display (Operating the SCENE file)


1 to 5 / RECALL/CANCEL function of the SCENE file.Selects whether to read the SCENE file from the inside ofthe main unit or not to read.

: Not reading (CANCEL) : Reading (RECALL)

STANDARD / Selects whether to return the SCENE file setup to thestandard setting or not to return to.When pressing the rotary encoder during the display, thestandard setting is canceled and returns to the originalsetting.

SCENE RECALL Press the rotary encoder to Calls the SCENE file from the main unit.move to the file selection Or read the SCENE file from a Memory Stick.display.*

SCENE STORE Press the rotary encoder to Save the SCENE file to the main unit or Memory Stick.move to the file selectiondisplay.*

F.ID 16 characters Sets the file ID. (When the SCENE file is stored, the file ID(alphanumeric characters, is saved.)symbols and spaces)

* : Refer to “4-7. FILE Menu” for the file selection display.

? 16OSCENE FILE

1 2 3 4 5 STANDARD SCENE RECALL : EXEC SCENE STORE : EXEC F.ID

4-36 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

4-6. MAINTENANCE Menu


WHT SHADING Display (Adjusting white shading)


SHADING CH SEL R/G/B/TEST*1 Selects the channel of shading correction.

OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB*2 Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUTand the VBS/SDI OUT terminal.(The Y-signal becomes the VBS signal when VBS is selectedin the SD REAR BNC OUT of the OUTPUT SEL display (ofthe OPERATION menu) and SD is selected in the TEST OUTSELECT.) The output signal returns to the Y-signal without failat power-on.

R/G/B WHT H SAW (_99 to 99) Adjusts the H.SAW correction.The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with thechannel selection implemented by the above SHADING CHSEL.

R/G/B WHT H PARA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the H.PARA correction.The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with thechannel selection implemented by the above SHADING CHSEL.

R/G/B WHT V SAW (_99 to 99) Adjusts the V.SAW correction.The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with thechannel selection implemented by the above SHADING CHSEL.

R/G/B WHT V PARA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the V.PARA correction.The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with thechannel selection implemented by the above SHADING CHSEL.

WHITE SAW/PARA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF all of the white shading menu items of R/G/B,H/V and SAW/PARA corrections.

*1 : When TEST is set, the channels switch in relation with OUTPUT SELECT.*2 : RGB can be selected only when the Camcorder is used in the service mode.

nIn the R/G/B WHITE H SAW/PARA and R/G/B WHITE V SAW/PARA, the lens extender position isdisplayed in the rightmost-end of the menu items.Blank : Extender OFFEX : Extender ON

? 01OWHT SHADING

SHADING CH SEL : TEST OUTPUT SELECT : Y R WHT H SAW : 0 R WHT H PARA : 0 R WHT V SAW : 0 R WHT V PARA : 0

WHITE SAW/PARA : ON

4-37HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

BLK SHADING Display (Adjusting black shading)


SHADING CH SEL R/G/B/TEST*1 Selects the channel of black shading correction.

OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB*2 Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUTand the VBS/SDI OUT terminal.(The Y-signal becomes the VBS signal when VBS is selectedin the SD REAR BNC OUT of the OUTPUT SEL display (ofthe OPERATION menu) and SD is selected in the TEST OUTSELECT.) The output signal returns to the Y-signal without failat power-on.

R/G/B BLK H SAW (_99 to 99) Adjusts the H.SAW correction.The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with thechannel selection implemented by the above SHADING CHSEL.

R/G/B BLK H PARA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the H.PARA correction.The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with thechannel selection implemented by the above SHADING CHSEL.

R/G/B BLK V SAW (_99 to 99) Adjusts the V.SAW correction.The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with thechannel selection implemented by the above SHADING CHSEL.

R/G/B BLK V PARA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the V.PARA correction.The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with thechannel selection implemented by the above SHADING CHSEL.

BLACK SAW/PARA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF all of the black shading menu items of R/G/B,H/V and SAW/PARA corrections.

MASTER BLACK (_99 to 99) Adjusts the master black level. (All of the R, G and B signalblack levels are adjusted.)

MASTER GAIN (TMP) _3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/ Sets the temporary master gain.30/36/42 dB

*1 : When TEST is set, the channels switch in relation with OUTPUT SELECT.*2 : RGB can be selected only when the Camcorder is used in the service mode.

? 02OBLK SHADING

SHADING CH SEL : R OUTPUT SELECT : Y R BLK H SAW : 0 R BLK H PARA : 0 R BLK V SAW : 0 R BLK V PARA : 0

BLACK SAW/PARA : ON MASTER BLACK : 0 MASTER GAIN(TMP): 0dB

4-38 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

LEVEL ADJ Display (Adjusting output signal level)


Y LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjust the Y signal output level.

SYNC LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjust the sync signal output level.

Pr LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjust the Pr signal output level.

Pb LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjust the Pb signal output level.

OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB* Selects the video signal that is output from the TESTOUT and the VBS/SDI OUT terminal. (Invalid whenthe BARS signal is selected.)(The Y-signal becomes the VBS signal when VBS isselected in the SD REAR BNC OUT of the OUTPUTSEL display (of the OPERATION menu) and SD isselected in the TEST OUT SELECT.) The outputsignal returns to the Y-signal without fail at power-on.


SD LEVEL ADJ Display (Adjusting the down converter (SD OUT) output level)*****1

(Require an optional HKDW-702.)


SD VBS LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjusts the VBS signal output level.*2

SD VBS SETUP LVL 0%/7.5% Selects the setup level.*2

0% : Normal7.5% : When an additional setup is required.

*1 : Displayed only when the HKDW-702 is installed.*2 : If the format is set to 24PsF/23.98PsF when the HKDW-702 is installed, the setting is displayed as “_ _”.

? 03OLEVEL ADJ

Y LEVEL : 0 SYNC LEVEL : 0 Pr LEVEL : 0 Pb LEVEL : 0

OUTPUT SELECT : Y

? 04OSD LEVEL ADJ

SD VBS LEVEL : 0 SD VBS SETUP LVL: 0%

4-39HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

? 05OBATTERY

<Sony Info> BEFORE END 1 : 5% END 1 : 0% <Sony> BEFORE END 2 : 11.3V END 2 : 11.0V <Others,EXT DC> BEFORE END 3 : 11.8V END 3 : 11.0V

BATTERY Display (Setting the battery-related items)


BEFORE END 1 5% to 100% (5% steps) When a SONY-made battery pack such as BP-GL65/

END 1 0/1/2/3/4/5%GL95 is used, sets the battery-before-end capacity andthe battery-end capacity.

BEFORE END 2 11.0 to 17.0 V (0.1 V steps) When a SONY-made battery pack such as BL-L60S is

END 2 10.5 to 11.5 V (0.1 V steps) used, sets the battery-before-end voltage and thebattery-end voltage.

BEFORE END 3 11.0 to 17.0 V (0.1 V steps) When any battery pack other what are listed above or

END 3 10.5 to 11.5 V (0.1 V steps) DC IN terminal is used, sets the battery-before-endvoltage and the battery-end voltage.

4-40 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

? 06OAUDIO-1

AUDIO OUT (F/R) : CUE REC AUDIO OUT : EE CAMERA ADAPTER : ENABL AUDIO CH3/4 MODE: SW

FRONT MIC REF : -50dB REAR MIC REF : -60dB REAR MIC +48V : ENABL

AUDIO-1 Display (Setting-1 on audio)


AUDIO OUT (F/R) CUE/EE Selects the audio output signal during FF/REW.

REC AUDIO OUT EE/SAVE Selects the audio output signal during recording.EE : EE outputSAVE : No output

CAMERA ADAPTER ENABL/DSABL Selects whether the AUDIO IN CH3, CH4 of thecamera adapter is enabled to use or not enabledwhen camera adapter is installed.ENABL : Camera adapter can be used.DSABL : Camera adapter cannot be used.

AUDIO CH3/4 MODE CH1/2/SW Selects the input signal to be recorded on CH3/4.CH1/2 : Same signals as CH1 and CH2.SW : The input signals that are selected by the

AUDIO IN CH3, CH4 switches on the insidepanel.

FRONT MIC REF _60 dB/_50 dB/_40 dB Sets the reference input level of the front microphone.

REAR MIC REF _60 dB/_50 dB/_40 dB Sets the reference input level of AUDIO IN at therear.

REAR MIC +48V ENABL/DSABL Selects whether or not to enable the 48V power inputmicrophone from AUDIO IN.ENABLE: Can be used.DSABL: Cannot be used.

4-41HDW-F900R/V1 (E)



AU REC EMPHASIS OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the audio emphasis during recording.

CUE REC OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to record the CUE AUDIO tothe tape.

AU REF LEVEL _18 dB/_20 dB Sets the AUDIO reference input level.

AU REF OUT 0 dB/+4 dB/_3 dB Sets the output level with respect to the REF. level.

AU CH12 AGC MODE STREO/MONO Selects whether to perform the auto adjustment on theinput level of the analog audio signals to be recorded onCH1/CH2 separately for each channel, or in the stereomode.

AU CH34 AGC MODE STREO/MONO Selects whether to perform the auto adjustment on theinput level of the analog audio signals to be recorded onCH3/CH4 separately for each channel, or in the stereomode, or to turn it off.

AU AGC SPEC _6 dB/_9 dB/_12 dB/ Sets the AGC characteristics. (saturation level)_15 dB/_17 dB

AU LIMITER MODE OFF/_6 dB/_9 dB/_12 dB/ Sets the limiter characteristics (saturation level) for large_15 dB/_17 dB input signals during the manual adjustment of the audio

input level.

AU OUT LIMITER OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the audio output limiter.

? 07OAUDIO-2

AU REC EMPHASIS : OFF CUE REC : ON AU REF LEVEL : -20dB AU REF OUT : 0dB AU CH12 AGC MODE: MONO AU CH34 AGC MODE: MONO AU AGC SPEC : -6dB AU LIMITER MODE : OFF AU OUT LIMITER : ON

4-42 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)



AU SG (1 KHz) ON/OFF/AUTO Sets whether to output the 1 kHz test tone during the Color BARmode or not.ON : 1 kHz test tone is output during the Color BAR mode.OFF : 1 kHz test tone is not output during the Color BAR

mode.AUTO : 1 kHz test tone is output only when the CH1 AUDIO

SELECT switch on the inside panel is in the AUTOposition.

MIC CH1 LEVEL SIDE1/FRONT/F+S1 Selects any of these knobs to adjust the front microphone L-CH.SIDE1 : Adjusts it with the AUDIO LEVEL knob (left side) on

the side panel.FRONT : Adjusts it with the MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel.F + S1 : It can be adjusted by either the AUDIO LEVEL knob

(left side) or the MIC LEVEL knob. (Two knobs areinterlocked each other.)

MIC CH2 LEVEL SIDE2/FRONT/F+S2 Selects any of these knobs to adjust the front microphone R-CH.SIDE2 : Adjusts it with the AUDIO LEVEL knob (right side) on

the side panel.FRONT: Adjusts it with the MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel.F + S2 : It can be adjusted by either the AUDIO LEVEL knob

(right side) or the MIC LEVEL knob. (Two knobs areinterlocked each other.)

REAR1/WRR LEVEL SIDE1/FRONT/F+S1 Selects any of these knobs to adjust the equipment that isconnected to the wireless microphone and what is connected tothe AUDIO IN CH1 connector on the rear panel.SIDE1 : Adjusts it with the AUDIO LEVEL knob (left side) on


(left side) or the MIC LEVEL knob. (Two knobs areinterlocked each other.)

REAR2/WRR LEVEL SIDE2/FRONT/F+S2 Selects any of these knobs to adjust the equipment that isconnected to the wireless microphone and what is connected tothe AUDIO IN CH2 connector on the rear panel.SIDE2 : Adjusts it with the AUDIO LEVEL knob (right side) on


(right side) or the MIC LEVEL knob. (Two knobs areinterlocked each other.)

AUDIO SELECT CH3 AUTO/MANU Sets whether to adjust the audio recording level of audiochannel 3 automatically or manually.

AUDIO SELECT CH4 AUTO/MANU Sets whether to adjust the audio recording level of audiochannel 4 automatically or manually.

LVL CONTROL CH3 0 to 100 Sets the audio recording level of audio channel 3 at the timeof manual adjustment

LVL CONTROL CH4 0 to 100 Sets the audio recording level of audio channel 4 at the timeof manual adjustment

? 08OAUDIO-3

AU SG (1KHz) : OFF MIC CH1 LEVEL : FRONT MIC CH2 LEVEL : FRONT REAR1/WRR LEVEL : SIDE1 REAR2/WRR LEVEL : SIDE2

AUDIO SELECT CH3: AUTO AUDIO SELECT CH4: AUTO LVL CONTROL CH3: 70 LVL CONTROL CH4: 70

4-43HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

TIME CORD Display (Setting-1 on VTR)


TC OUT AUTO/GENE Sets the time-code signal output.AUTO : Outputs the time-code generator during

recording and outputs the time-code readerduring playback.

GENE : Outputs the time-code generator duringrecording and playback.

DF/NDF DF/NDF Sets DF/NDF.DF : Drop frame modeNDF : Non drop frame mode

EXT-LK UBIT INT/EXT Sets whether the LTC UBIT setup value locks to INTor EXT source when the time-code is locked to anexternal source.INT : Internal lockEXT : External lock

LTC UBIT FIX/TIME Sets the data to be recorded in UBIT of LTC.FIX : Records the data that is set by user.TIME : Records the present time.

VITC UBIT FIX/TIME Sets the data to be recorded in UBIT of VITC.FIX : Records the data that is set by user.TIME : Records the present time.

WATCH AUTO ADJ OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to match the built-in watchwith the actual time data contained in the UBIT ofexternal time code data.

UBIT GROUP ID 000/101 Selects the UBIT GROUP ID.

? 09OTIME CODE

TC OUT : AUTO DF/NDF : DF EXT-LK UBIT : INT LTC UBIT : FIX VITC UBIT : FIX WATCH AUTO ADJ : ON UBIT GROUP ID : 000

4-44 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

VTR MODE Display (Setting-2 on VTR)


REC TALLY BLINK OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the tally blinking at the event of BATTERYBEFORE END/TAPE BEFORE END.

REC START BEEP OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the beep sound at REC START/STOP.

LCD DISPLAY HOLD TIMER/OFF/CONT Sets the time counter display on the LCD after the powersupply is turned off.TIMER : Display is terminated after the elapse of time which

is specified in the item LCD HOLD TIMER below.OFF : No displayedCONT : Displayed

LCD HOLD TIMER 1H/3H/8H Specifies the time to terminate the display of time counter afterthe power-off, when TIMER was set in the above DISPLAYHOLD (H : hour) .

SHOT TIME DISP MD : HM/DM : HM/D : HMS Sets the format of the time to be displayed on the LCD.MD : HM : Month, day, hour, minuteDM : HM : Day, month, hour, minuteD : HMS : Day, hour, minute, second

VIDEO OUT (F/R) EE/PB Selects the video single during FF/REW.EE : Input signal.PB : Playback signal.

STBY OFF TIMER OFF/5MIN/10MIN/ When the SAVE/STBY switch is set to STBY, sets the time to30MIN/60MIN release the STBY state automatically.

STOP KEY FREEZE OFF/FRAME/FIELD Sets whether to freeze picture by pressing the STOP buttonduring playback.

? 10OVTR MODE

REC TALLY BLINK : ON REC START BEEP : OFF LCD DISPLAY HOLD: TIMER LCD HOLD TIMER : 1H SHOT TIME DISP : MD:HM VIDEO OUT (F/R) : EE STBY OFF TIMER : 60MIN STOP KEY FREEZE : OFF

4-45HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

SHOT MAKER Display (Setting-3 on VTR)


LTC UB-MARKER SET/ALL/OFF Sets whether to write down the marker in UBIT of LTC, or not.SET : Write the marker only of the items that are set to ON among the REC START MARK

or SHOT MARKER1 or SHOT MARKER2 respectively describes shown below.ALL : All markers are written.OFF : All markers are not written.nWhen ALL or OFF is selected, the setting of among the REC MARK or SHOT MARKER1 orSHOT MARKER2 becomes invalid.

REC START MARK OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to write the REC START MARK.

SHOT MARKER 1 OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to write the SHOT MARKER 1.

SHOT MARKER 2 OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to write the SHOT MARKER 2.

PRESET WHT Display (WHITE BAL switch: The function to adjust the white balance gain that isassigned to PRST)


COLOR TEMP. Displays the color Sets the value that is close to the color temperature of your referencetemperature using the displayed value as the guideline.(Guideline) Reference : The R GAIN and B GAIN values also change accordingly at

the same time.

C TEMP BAL (_99 to 99) Uses this item for fine adjustment when the optimum color cannot beobtained by the above COLOR TEMP.Reference : The R GAIN and B GAIN values also change accordingly at

the same time.

R GAIN (_99 to 99) Uses this menu item to set the color temperature of a WHITE presetvalue, by adjusting R GAIN.

B GAIN (_99 to 99) Uses this menu item to set the color temperature of a WHITE presetvalue, by adjusting B GAIN.

5600K OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the electrically applies 5600K color temperature filter(WHITE PRESET)

AWB ENABLE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that sets the white balance adjustment valueas the preset value when the white balance automatic adjustment isexecuted with the WHITE BAL switch being set in PRST.

? 11OSHOT MARKER

LTC UB-MARKER : SET REC START MARK : OFF SHOT MARKER 1 : OFF SHOT MARKER 2 : OFF

? 12OPRESET WHT

COLOR TEMP. : 3200 C TEMP BAL : 0 R GAIN : 0 B GAIN : 0 5600K : OFF

AWB ENABLE : OFF

4-46 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

DCC ADJUST Display (Setting the DCC function)


DCC FUNCTION SEL DCC/FIX Selects the DCC function modes when the DCCswitch is ON.DCC : Normal modeFIX : The knee correction is performed with the

dynamic range fixed to 600%.

DCC D RANGE 400/450/500/550/600 (%) Sets the dynamic range when the DCC switch isset to ON.

DCC POINT (_99 to 99) Sets the minimum knee point when the DCC switch isset to ON.

DCC GAIN (_99 to 99) Sets the knee slope when the DCC switch is set to ON.

DCC DELAY TIME (_99 to 99) Sets the response speed of DCC. (Increasing the dataslows down the response speed.)

PREKNEE POINT AUTO/FIX Selects the mode of preknee.AUTO : Has the dedicated preknee point when the

DCC switch is set to OFF.FIX : Even when the DCC switch is set to OFF, the

preknee point is the same as when the DCCswitch is set to ON.

? 13ODCC ADJUST

DCC FUNCTION SEL: DCC

DCC D RANGE : 600% DCC POINT : 0 DCC GAIN : 0

DCC DELAY TIME : 0

PREKNEE POINT : AUTO

4-47HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

AUTO IRIS 2 Display (Setting AUTO IRIS)


IRIS WINDOW 1/2/3/4/5/6/VAR Selects the IRIS WINDOW (detection range).*1

When VAR is selected, the iris window can be setby the IRIS VAR WIDTH/HEIGHT/H POS/V POS asdescribed below.

IRIS WINDOW IND. OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that checks the iriswindow that is being selected, with the box cursor.

IRIS LEVEL (_99 to 99) Sets the auto iris convergence level.

IRIS APL RATIO (_99 to 99) Adjusts the mix ratio of the auto iris detection peakvalue and average value.

IRIS VAR WIDTH 20 to 479 Sets width of the iris window when VAR isselected in the above IRIS WINDOW.

IRIS VAR HEIGHT 20 to 269 Sets height of the iris window when VAR isselected in the above IRIS WINDOW.

IRIS VAR H POS _460 to 460*2 Sets the center in the horizontal direction of the iriswindow when VAR is selected in the above IRISWINDOW.

IRIS VAR V POS _249 to 249*2 Sets the center in the vertical direction of the iriswindow when VAR is selected in the above IRISWINDOW.

IRIS SPEED 0/1/2/3/4/5 Sets the AUTO IRIS response speed.0 (Fast) ↔ 5 (Slow)

CLIP HIGH LIGHT OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that limits the AUTO IRISdetection level to 100% when the video signal ofhigher than 100% is input.

*1 : The IRIS WINDOW is set as shown below.*2 : Range of this setting is different depending upon the above IRIS VAR WIDTH/HEIGHT setting.

? 14OAUTO IRIS 2

IRIS WINDOW : 1 IRIS WINDOW IND.: OFF IRIS LEVEL : 0 IRIS APL RATIO : 0 IRIS VAR WIDTH : 240 IRIS VAR HEIGHT : 135 IRIS VAR H POS : 0 IRIS VAR V POS : 0 IRIS SPEED : 3 CRIP HIGH LIGHT : OFF

Setting 1 2 3 4 5 6

VF screen

Shaded ( ) area : IRIS WINDOW frame

4-48 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

FUNCTION 3 Display (Setting various functions)


WHT FILTER INH OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that maintains the white balancevalue without regard to the CC filter position.

COLOR BAR SEL SMPTE/100 %/75 %/ Selects the internal color bar signal.4 : 3-1 (SMPTE) /4 : 3-2 (100%) /4 : 3-3 (75%)

SHT DISP MODE SEC/DEG Selects whether to display shutter speeds in second or degree.SEC : Displays in second.DEG : Displays in degree.

RM COMMON MEMORY OFF/ON Sets the setup values that are connected in the event ofconnecting a remote control unit (such as RM-B150, MSU) .OFF : An independent value that is effective only when

the remote control is connected, is set. (Whenthe remote control is disconnected, the value returnsto the original setup before connecting the remotecontrol.)

ON : The setup value that is common to both connectionswhen a remote control is connected and when aremote control is not connected. (When the remotecontrol is disconnected, the adjusted setup valueremains unchanged.)

(For more details, refer to Operation Manual.)

VTR START/STOP RM/CAM/PARA Selects whether to perform the recording operation on theremote control unit or on the camera when the remote controlunit is connected.RM : Enables starting or stopping recording only on the

remote control unit.CAM : Enables starting or stopping recording only on the

camera.PARA : Enables starting or stopping recording on both the

remote control unit and the camera.

FAN OFF/ON/AUTO Selects a fan operation when the temperature exceeds thesetting value.OFF : Does not activate the fan.ON : Activates the fan.AUTO : Turns off the fan while recording.

USER & ALL ONLY OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that prohibits to display thecategories from OPERATION to DIAGNOSIS on the TOPmenu.

HDSDI REMOTE I/F OFF/CHARA/G-TLY/ Performs settings when performing synchronous recording withR-TLY multiple HDW-250/S280 units by adding the trigger signal to

the output signal from the HD-SDI OUT terminal.Three types of display for indicating that the REC triggersignal is output from the HD-SDI OUT terminal can beselected. (When HDW-250/S280 appears to be performinga recording operation)OFF : Does not record synchronously.CHARA : Displays REC2 on the view finder display.G-TLY : Green tally in the view finder lights.R-TLY : REC tally in the view finder lights.(When R-TRY is selected, the REC tally lights even without acassette tape in the unit.)

SD ASPECT PULSE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that mixes the 16:9 (SQUEEZE)selection control signal with the SD VBS/SDI output when theextension board HKDW-702 is installed. (This is thespecification only for the NTSC signal. The control signal isnot mixed with the PAL signal.)

? 15OFUNCTION 3

WHT FILTER INH : OFF COLOR BAR SEL : 100% SHT DISP MODE : SEC RM COMMON MEMORY: ON VTR START/STOP : RM FAN : ON USER&ALL ONLY : OFF

HDSDI REMOTE I/F: OFF SD ASPECT PULSE : OFF

4-49HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

GENLOCK Display (Setting on GENLOLCK input terminal)


GENLOCK OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that synchronizes theinternal reference signal with the video signal that isconnected to the GENLOCK terminal.

RETURN VIDEO OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to display the camerareturn signal on VF when the RET button on the lensis pressed.

GL H PHASE COASE (_99 to 99) GENLOCK phase adjustment (coarse adjustment)

GL H PHASE FINE (_99 to 99) GENLOCK phase adjustment (fine adjustment)

ND COMP Display (ND OFFSET compensation)

nWhen only a single filter is used, this menu is not displayed.


ND OFFSET ADJUST OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the ND OFFSET adjustment mode.

CLEAR ND OFFSET Press the rotary encoder to Returns the ND OFFSET value to the default valueexecute this menu item. when manufactured in the production plant.

ND ADJUST MODE _ ND OFFSET message display areaND1 to 4 Display only OK : The filter on which the white balance automatic

adjustment is already completed.YET : The filter on which the white balance automatic

adjustment is not completed yet.(When the main power is turned off or then the aboveCLEAR ND OFFSET is performed, all displayschange to YET.)This item is displayed when above ND OFFSETADJUST is set to ON.

? 17OND COMP

ND OFFSET ADJUST: OFF CLEAR ND OFFSET : EXEC

****ND ADJUST MODE**** ND1:YET ND2:YET ND3:YET ND4:OK

? 16OGENLOCK

GENLOCK : ON RETURN VIDEO : OFF

GL H PHASE COASE: 0 GL H PHASE FINE : 0

4-50 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

FORMAT Display (Switching the video format)


CURRENT Display only Displays the present format.

NEXT 59.94i/50i/23.98PsF/ Sets the format when the power is turned on next24PsF/25PsF/29.97PsF time.

VANC RX Display (Setting the UMID LINE)


UMID LINE1 0, 9 to 20 When a tape recorded by Camcorder is played backby VTR, the line number in which the UMID data iscontained in the HD SDI output signal can beselected. (1st field)

UMID LINE2 0, 564 to 593 When a tape recorded by Camcorder is played backby VTR, the line number in which the UMID data iscontained in the HD SDI output signal can beselected. (2nd field)

? 18OFORMAT TOP

CURRENT : 59.94 NEXT : 23.98

59.94i 24PsF 50i 25PsF 23.98PsF 29.97PsF

PLEASE POWER OFF->ON TO CHANGE FORMAT

This message is displayed only when the current format and the format that is set by NEXT are different.At the same time, the tally lamp blinks.

The item selected for NEXT is highlighted.

? 19OVANC RX UMID LINE1 : 0UMID LINE2 : 0

4-51HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

4-7. FILE Menu

For details of the file structure and the method to save the files, refer to “Section 5. File System.”nWhen the range of setting is surrounded by parenthesis ( ) in the setting column, the setup value is therelative value. The range of setting in parenthesis ( ) can be different from what shown in the manualdepending on the setting in the layer lower than this menu.

USER FILE Display (Operating the USER files)


USER FILE LOAD Press the rotary encoder to move Reads the USER file from a Memory Stick.to the file selection display. (For the description of the file selection display,

refer to the following descriptions.)

USER FILE SAVE Press the rotary encoder to move Saves the USER file to a Memory Stick.to the file selection display. (For the description of the file selection display,

refer to the following descriptions.)

F.ID 16 characters (alphanumeric characters, Sets the file ID.(When the USER FILE SAVE issymbols and spaces) executed, this ID is saved.)

USER PRESET Press the rotary encoder Returns all the items of the USER menu to theto execute this menu item. standard setup.

File selection display


MEMORY STICK ACCESS Display only The display appears when inserting a Memory Stick orduring saving data in a Memory Stick or during readingdata from a Memory Stick.

DISPLAY MODE ALL/F.ID/DATA/MODEL Switches the attributes when displaying the following file.ALL : File ID and date are displayed.

( 00/JAN/00)F. ID : File ID is displayed.

( )DATA : Date and time of saving the file are displayed.

(00/00/00 00 : 00 : 00)MODEL: Model name and format are displayed.

(HDW-F900R 59.94i )

001 to 005 Press the rotary encoder When the file does not exist, the message NO FILE is displayed.to execute this menu item. Select the target read file from which data is read or select

the target storage file to which the data is going to be stored.When saving the data in a new file, select NEW FILE.

? 01OUSER FILE USER FILE LOAD : EXEC USER FILE SAVE : EXEC

F.ID

USER PRESET : EXEC

P00 USER LOAD ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NO FILE

P00 USER SAVE ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NEW FILE

USER FILE LOAD USER FILE SAVE

4-52 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

USER FILE 2 Display (Operating the USER file)


STORE USR PRESET Press the rotary encoder Saves the data that is set by the USER menu, in theto execute this menu item. PRESET layer and uses it as the standard setup.

CLEAR USR PRESET Press the rotary encoder Returns the USER menu setup to the default settingto execute this menu item. when shipped from the factory.

CUSTOMIZE RESET Press the rotary encoder Returns the items that are edited by the MENUto execute this menu item. CUSTOMIZE menu, to the original setting.

LOAD CUSTOM DATA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to read out the data fromMemory Stick that are set on the MENU CUSTOMIZEmenu during execution of USER FILE LOAD.

LOAD OUT OF USER OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to read out the data fromMemory Stick that are not contained in the presentUSER menu during execution of USER FILE LOAD.

BEFORE FILE PAGE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function not to save the USERFILE page and the subsequent pages of the USERmenu, in Memory Stick during execution of USERFILE SAVE.ON: Not to save.

USER LOAD WHITE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to read out the whitebalance data from Memory Stick that are saved inUSER FILE during execution of USER FILE LOAD.

? 02OUSER FILE 2

STORE USR PRESET: EXEC CLEAR USR PRESET: EXEC CUSTOMIZE RESET : EXEC

LOAD CUSTOM DATA: OFF LOAD OUT OF USER: OFF BEFORE FILE PAGE: OFF USER LOAD WHITE : OFF

4-53HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

ALL FILE Display (Operating the ALL file)


ALL FILE LOAD Press the rotary encoder to Reads the ALL file from a Memory Stick.move to the file selection (For the description of the file selection display,display. see below.)

ALL FILE SAVE Press the rotary encoder to Saves the ALL file in a Memory Stick.move to the file selection (For the description of the file selection display,display. see below.)

F.ID 16 characters Sets the file ID.(alphanumeric numbers, (When ALL FILE SAVE is execute, this name issymbols and space) saved.)

ALL PRESET Press the rotary encoder to Returns all the data of all menu items to the standardexecute this menu item. settings.

STORE ALL PRESET Press the rotary encoder to Saves all the data that are set by all of the menuexecute this menu item. items, in the PRESET layer and uses them as the

standard setups.

CLEAR ALL PRESET Press the rotary encoder to Returns the settings of all menu items to the defaultexecute this menu item. setting when shipped from the factory.

3SEC CLR PRESET OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that returns the data in thePRESET layer to its factory-set value when the MENUCANCEL/PRST switch is pressed for 3seconds. (It returns to OFF at power-on even whenhaving been turned ON.)

File selection display

ALL FILE LOAD ALL FILE SAVE

Descriptions of the respective file selection displays are the same as the file selection display of the USERFILE display.For details, refer to the corresponding item of the USER FILE display.

? 03OALL FILE ALL FILE LOAD : EXEC ALL FILE SAVE : EXEC

F.ID :

ALL PRESET : EXEC STORE ALL PRESET: EXEC CLEAR ALL PRESET: EXEC

3SEC CLR PRESET : OFF

P00 ALL LOAD ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NO FILE

P00 ALL SAVE ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NEW FILE

4-54 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

SCENE FILE Display (Operating the SCENE file)


1 to 5 / RECALL/CANCEL function of the SCENE file.Selects whether to read the SCENE file from the inside ofthe main unit or not to read.

: Not reading (CANCEL) : Reading (RECALL)

STANDARD / Selects whether to return the SCENE file setup to thestandard setting or not to return to.When pressing the rotary encoder during the display, thestandard setting is canceled and returns to the original setting.

SCENE RECALL Press the rotary encoder Calls the SCENE file from the main unit, or read the SCENEto move to the file file from a Memory Stick.selection display. (For the description of the file selection display, see below.)

SCENE STORE Press the rotary encoder Save the SCENE file to the main unit or Memory Stick.to move to the file (For the description of the file selection display, see below.)selection display.

F.ID 16 characters Sets the file ID.(alphanumeric characters, (When the SCENE file is stored, the file ID is saved.)symbols and space)

File selection display (When calling a file from the inside of the unit/when saving a file tothe inside of the unit)

SCENE RECALL SCENE STORE


DISPLAY MODE ALL/F.ID/DATE/MODEL Switches the attributes when displaying a file stored in aMemory Stick.For a file stored in the main unit, the file ID is displayedwhen ALL/F.ID/DATE is selected. When MODEL isselected, the format when the file was saved is displayed.

MEM (1) to (5) Press the rotary encoder Select the target read file from which data is read orto execute this menu item. select the target storage file to which the data is going to

be stored.When the file does not exist, the message NO FILE isdisplayed.When saving the data in a new file, select NEW FILE.

? 04OSCENE FILE

1 : 2 : 3 : 4 : 5 : STANDARD SCENE RECALL : EXEC SCENE STORE : EXEC F.ID

P00 SCENE RECALL ESC DISPLAY MODE : ALL

MEM(1): MEM(2): MEM(3): MEM(4): MEM(5):NO FILE

P00 SCENE STORE ESC DISPLAY MODE : ALL

MEM(1): MEM(2): MEM(3): MEM(4): MEM(5):NEW FILE

4-55HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

File selection display (When reading a file from a Memory Stick/when saving a file to aMemory Stick)

↓ page moves to ↓ page moves to

SCENE RECALL SCENE STORE


MEMORY STICK ACCESS Display only The display appears when inserting a Memory Stickor during saving data in a Memory Stick or duringreading data from a Memory Stick.

DISPLAY MODE ALL/F.ID/DATE/MODEL Switches the attributes when displaying the followingfile.ALL : File ID and date are displayed.

( 00/JAN/00)F. ID : File ID is displayed.

( )DATE : Date and time of saving the file are displayed.

(00/00/00 00 : 00 : 00)MODEL: Model name and format are displayed.

(HDW-F900R 59.94i)

001 to 005 Press the rotary encoder to When the file does not exist, the message NO FILE isexecute this menu item. displayed.

Select the target read file from which data is read orselect the target storage file to which the data is goingto be stored.When saving the data in a new file, select NEW FILE.

5FILE LOAD Press the rotary encoder to Reads the 5 files that are being displayed onexecute this menu item. screen, into MEM1-5 inside the main unit.

5FILE SAVE Press the rotary encoder to Saves the contents of MEM1-5 of the main unit thatexecute this menu item. are being displayed on screen, into 5 files.

P01 SCENE RECALL ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NO FILE ***.5FILE LOAD MEM 1-5→

P01 SCENE STORE ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NEW FILE ***.5FILE SAVE MEM 1-5←

P00 SCENE RECALL ESC DISPLAY MODE : ALL

MEM(1): MEM(2): MEM(3): MEM(4): MEM(5):NO FILE

P00 SCENE STORE ESC DISPLAY MODE : ALL


4-56 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

REFERENCE Display (Operating the REFERENCE file)


REFERENCE STORE Press the rotary encoder and Saves the REFERENCE file in the main unit.select YES for the confirmationmessage to execute this menu item.

REFERENCE CLEAR Press the rotary encoder and Returns the setting of the REFERENCE file to theselect YES for the confirmation standard setting.message to execute this menu item.

REFERENCE LOAD Press the rotary encoder and Reads the REFERENCE file from a Memory Stick.select YES for the confirmationmessage to execute this menu item.

REFERENCE SAVE Press the rotary encoder and Saves the REFERENCE file in a Memory Stick.select YES for the confirmationmessage to execute this menu item.

F.ID 16 characters (alphanumeric Sets the file ID.numbers, symbols and space) (When REFERENCE STORE of REFERENCE

SAVE is executed, this ID is saved.)

SCENE WHITE DATA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to read out the whitebalance data that are saved in SCENE file duringexecution of SCENE RECALL.

USER GAMMA Display (Operating the USER GAMMA)


USER GAMMA LOAD Press the rotary encoder and Loads the user gamma from the memory stick.select YES for the confirmationmessage to execute this menu item.

USER GAMMA RESET Press the rotary encoder and Returns the user gamma stored in the internalselect YES for the confirmation memory to the factory default settings.message to execute this menu item.

F.ID Display only Displays the file ID.

F.ID* Display only Displays the file ID of the user gamma stored inthe memory stick.

DATE* Display only Displays the date on which the user gamma inthe memory stick was saved.

* : Displayed only when user gamma is stored in the inserted memory stick.

? 05OREFERENCE

REFERENCE STORE : EXEC REFERENCE CLEAR : EXEC

REFERENCE LOAD : EXEC REFERENCE SAVE : EXEC F.ID :

SCENE WHITE DATA: OFF

? 06OUSER GAMMA

USER GAMMA LOAD : EXEC USER GAMMA RESET: EXEC

F.ID :

F.ID : DATE : SEP/19/05

4-57HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

LENS FILE 1 Display (Operating the LENS file)


LENS FILE RECALL Press the rotary encoder to Calls the LENS file from the main unit, or read the LENS file from amove to the file selection display. Memory Stick.

(For the description of the file selection display, see below.)

LENS FILE STORE Press the rotary encoder to Save the LENS file to the main unit or Memory Stick.move to the file selection display. (For the description of the file selection display, see below.)

F.ID 16 characters (alphanumeric Sets the file ID. (When the LENS FILE STORE is executed, the file ID ischaracters, symbols and spaces) saved.)

SOURCE Display only Displays the memory number of the LENS file from which the data is read.

LENS NO OFFSET Press the rotary encoder to Returns the LENS file setting to the standard setting.execute this menu item.

LENS AUTO RECALL OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the auto recall function when a serial lens is attached.

L.ID* Display only Displays the unique ID of the lens (when a serial lens is attached).

L.MF* Display only Displays the manufacturer name of the lens (when a serial lens is attached).

* : When a lens other than a serial lens is attached, (Unknown) is displayed.

nWhen the LENS FILE STORE is executed, the stored memory number is displayed. When the LENS NO OFFSET isexecuted, the message NO OFFSET is displayed.

File selection display (When calling a file from the inside of the unit/when saving a file to the inside of the unit)

LENS FILE RECALL LENS FILE STORE

File selection display (When reading a file from a Memory Stick/when saving a file to a Memory Stick)

LENS FILE RECALL LENS FILE STORE

Descriptions of the respective file selection displays are the same as the file selection display of the SCENE FILE display.For details, refer to the corresponding item of the SCENE FILE display.

? 07OLENS FILE 1 LENS FILE RECALL: EXEC LENS FILE STORE : EXEC F.ID : SOURCE : MEMORY 1 LENS NO OFFSET : EXEC

LENS AUTO RECALL: ON <LENS INFORMATION> L.ID : (unknown) L.MF : (unknown)

LENS RECALL ESC DISPLAY MODE : ALL


LENS STORE ESC DISPLAY MODE : ALL


P07 LENS RECALL ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NO FILE

***.M.S.001-032 MEM1-32

P07 LENS STORE ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NEW FILE

***.M.S.001-032 MEM1-32

4-58 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

LENS FILE 2 Display (Various adjustments-1 for LENS file)


LENS M VMOD (_99 to 99) Adjusts the master V. modulation correction value.

LENS CENTER H _480 to 479 Sets the center marker position. (Horizontal direction)

LENS CENTER V _270 to 269 Sets the center marker position. (Vertical direction)

OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB* Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUTand the VBS/SDI OUT terminal.(The Y-signal becomes the VBS signal when VBS isselected in the SD REAR BNC OUT of the OUTPUT SELdisplay (of the OPERATION menu) and SD is selected inthe TEST OUT SELECT.) The output signal returns to theY-signal without fail at power-on.

LENS R FLARE (_99 to 99) Adjusts the R flare compensation level.

LENS G FLARE (_99 to 99) Adjusts the G flare compensation level.

LENS B FLARE (_99 to 99) Adjusts the B flare compensation level.

LENS W-R OFST (_99 to 99) Adjusts the R white gain offset value.

LENS W-B OFST (_99 to 99) Adjusts the B white gain offset value.


nIn the LENS M VMOD, LENS CENTER H, LENS CENTER V, LENS R/G/B FLARE and LENS W-R/W-B OFST, the lens extender position is displayed in the rightmost-end of the menu items.Blank : Extender OFFEX : Extender ON

? 08OLENS FILE 2

LENS M VMOD : 0 LENS CENTER H : 0 LENS CENTER V : 0

OUTPUT SELECT : Y LENS R FLARE : 0 LENS G FLARE : 0 LENS B FLARE : 0 LENS W-R OFST : 0 LENS W-B OFST : 0

4-59HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

? 10OMEMORY STICK

M.S.FORMAT : EXEC M.S.IN > JUMP TO: OFF

LENS FILE 3 Display (Various adjustments-2 on LENS file)


SHADING CH SEL Y/R/G/B/TEST Selects the channel of shading adjustment.

OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB* Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUTand the VBS/SDI OUT terminal. (The Y-signal becomes theVBS signal when VBS is selected in the SD REAR BNC OUTof the OUTPUT SEL display (of the OPERATION menu) andSD is selected in the TEST OUT SELECT.) The output signalreturns to the Y-signal without fail at power-on.

LENS R/G/B H SAW (_99 to 99) Adjusts the H SAW correction value.

LENS R/G/B H PARA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the H PARA correction value.

LENS R/G/B V SAW (_99 to 99) Adjusts the V SAW correction value.

LENS R/G/B V PARA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the V PARA correction value.


nIn the LENS R/G/B V/H SAW and LENS R/G/B V/H PARA, the lens extender position is displayed inthe rightmost-end of the menu items.Blank : Extender OFFEX : Extender ON

MEMORY STICK Display (Function on Memory Stick)


M. S. FORMAT Press the rotary encoder Implements formatting of a Memory Stick.to execute this menu item. (All of the data is erased.)

M. S. IN > JUNP TO OFF/USER/ALL/SCENE/ Sets the function that opens the file setup pageLENS/REFER/USER1 automatically as a Memory Stick is inserted when this

menu is set to ON. (This function is disabled when the file-related page isopened already.)

? 09OLENS FILE 3

SHADING CH SEL : R OUTPUT SELECT : Y

LENS R H SAW : 0 LENS R H PARA : 0 LENS R V SAW : 0 LENS R V PARA : 0

4-60 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

TELE FILE Display (Confirming the TELE FILE information and clearing it)


TELE FILE CLEAR Press the rotary encoder and Clears the CUE point information inside the TELE FILE.select YES for the confirmationmessage to execute this menu item.

TELE FILE MARK OK/NG/KP Selects any of the following three judgment marks(TELE FILE MARK) that are the rating of the imagesrecorded immediately before, when a tape with memorylabel is used and the ASSIGN 1 switch is assigned toTMARK.OK: Place this mark when you decide the recorded

images are good.NG: Place this mark when you decide the recorded

images are not good.KP: Place this mark when it is hard to decide whether

or not the recorded images are good immediatelyafter recording, or when you want to insert a markin between multiple shots.

nYou can select the judgment marks (TELE FILE MARK)if you press the ASSIGN 1 switch continuouslyregardless of the selected judgment marks (TELE FILEMARK).

ID Display only Memory label ID (20 characters)

SIZE Display only Memory label capacity

REMAIN Display only Memory label free capacity

STATUS Display only Displays the memory label status.STANDBY : Write enabledNO LABEL : Memory label is not attached.WRITE PROTECT : Over-write is prohibited.UNKNOWN FORMAT : Information of the different

models is already written.(Write disabled)

NO CASSETTE : Cassette is not inserted.UNFORMAT : The media is not formatted yet.MEMORY FULL : The media does not have a

free memory capacity.NEAR FULL : The free memory capacity of

media is less than 5%.

? 11OTELE FILE TELE FILE CLEAR : EXEC TELE FILE MARK : OK ID :SIZE : 0000KBYTEREMAIN : 00%STATUS : STANDBY

4-61HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

4-8. DIAGNOSIS Menu

HOURS METER Display (Confirming and resetting hours meter)


RESET METER Press the rotary encoder to Resets the hours meters. (For the description of themove to the RESET METER RESET METER display, refer to the followingdisplay. description.)

DRUM RUNNING Display only Accumulated drum rotation hours

TAPE RUNNING Display only Accumulated tape running hours

OPERATION Display only Accumulated power-on hours

THREADING Display only Accumulated number of threading

DRUM RUNNING-2 Display only Accumulated drum rotation hours (resettable)

TAPE RUNNING-2 Display only Accumulated tape running hours (resettable)

OPERATION-2 Display only Accumulated power-on hours (resettable)

THREADING-2 Display only Accumulated number of threading (resettable)

RESET METER display (Selecting the meter to reset)

Select a meter that you want to reset and press the rotary encoder.

? 01OHOURS METER RESET METER : EXEC

DRUM RUNNING : 000000H TAPE RUNNING : 000000H OPERATION : 000000H THREADING : 000000 DRUM RUNNING-2: 000000H TAPE RUNNING-2: 000000H OPERATION-2 : 000000H THREADING-2 : 000000

RESET METER ESC

RESET DRUM RUNNING-2 RESET TAPE RUNNING-2 RESET OPERATION-2 RESET THREADING-2

→ ←←←←

Drum rotation hoursTape running hoursPower-on hoursThreading hours

4-62 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

TIME/DATE Display (Confirming and setting date and hour)


ADJUST Press the rotary encoder. Sets date and time. (For more details, refer toThen theTIME ADJUST “5-3-6. Setting the Date/Time of Internal Clock”display appears. of Operation Manual.)

HOUR Display only Hour

MIN Display only Minute

SEC Display only Second

YEAR Display only Year

MONTH Display only Month

DAY Display only Day

ROM VERSION Display (Displaying the ROM version)


AT Display only For IC89,90/AT-172 board

SS Display only For IC8/SS-92G board

FP Display only For IC816/FP-152 board

AU DSP Display only For IC404/FP-152 board

EQ Display only For IC1101/EQ-88G board

nFor the version upgrade procedure of ROM, refer to “1-24. Upgrading the ROM Version”.

? 02OTIME/DATE ADJUST : EXEC HOUR : 12 MIN : 55 SEC : 58

YEAR : 00 MONTH : 06 DAY : 24

? 03OROM VERSION AT : Ver x.xx SS : Ver x.xx FP : Ver x.xx AU DSP: Ver x.xx EQ : Ver x.xx

4-63HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

DEV STATUS Display (Checking the communication function of each device)


I/O _ I/O checkOK/NG/__ message is displayed.OK : NormalNG : Abnormal__ : The state is not defined.

IFA1 OK/NG/__ IC201/IFA-19G board

IFA2 OK/NG/__ IC204/IFA-19G board

DR OK/NG/__ IC33 or DR-614 board

VF1 OK/NG/__ IC inside the VF

VF2 OK/NG/__ IC inside the VF

FP1 OK/NG/__ IC704/FP-152 board

FP2 OK/NG/__ IC705/FP-152 board

RP OK/NG/__ IC3/RP-131 board

EEPROM _ EEPROM check

IFA OK/NG/__ IC202/IFA-19G board

VF OK/NG/__ IC inside the VF

DCP OK/NG/__ IC611/DCP-43 board

DR OK/NG/__ IC31/DR-614 board

LSI _ LSI check

SCVP OK/NG/__ IC1019/DCP-43 board

SG OK/NG/__ IC614/DCP-43 board

DCON OK/NG/__ IC23/DC-110A board

SCI _ SCI check

SS OK/NG/__ Communication with the SS microprocessor

RM OK/NG/__ Communication with the equipment that is connectedto the 8-pin remote connector.

BATT OK/NG/__ Communication with the Info Type Battery

NVRAM _ NVRAM check

DCP OK/NG/__ IC51/DCP-43 board

? 04ODEV STATUS I/O EEPROM LSIIFA1:OK IFA :OK SCVP:OKIFA2:0K VF :OK SG :OKDR :OK DCP :OK DCON:OKVF1 :OK DR :OK VF2 :OK FP1 :OK NVRAM SCIFP2 :OK DCP :OK SS :OKRP :OK RM :OK BATT:OK

4-64 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

OPTION BOARD Display (Displaying use or not use of optional boards)


DOWN CONVERTER Display only Use or not use of the Down Converter board isdisplayed.*

O : Used_ : Not used

PICTURE CACHE Display only Use or not use of the PICTURE CACHE board isdisplayed.*


SLOW SHUTTER Display only Use or not use of the SLOW SHUTTER board isdisplayed.*


* : This display is not reflected to the screen when the power is turned on after the optional board is installed or removed. When theoptional board is installed or removed, perform setting after turning the power OFF 8 ON (wait for 10 seconds or more) 8 OFF 8ON.

? 05OOPTION BOARD

O DOWN CONVERTER- PICTURE CACHE- SLOW SHUTTER

4-65HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

4-9. SERVICE Menu

m. To enable use of the SERVICE menu, set the switch S1-1/AT-172 board to ON.. When the range of setting is surrounded by parenthesis ( ) in the setting column, the setup value is the

relative value. The range of setting in parenthesis ( ) can be different from what shown in the manualdepending on the setting in the layer lower than this menu.

MENU SET Display (Special settings related to the menu)


RE ROTATION REV OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to invert the rotatingdirection of rotary encoder.

RE SPEED 1/2/3/4/5 Sets the response speed of rotary encoder.1 (slow) ↔ 5 (fast)

DIRECT VALUE OFF/ON ON : The set value is displayed as it is.OFF : The set value is displayed after converted

(in the range of _99 to 99.)(It is returned to OFF when the main power isturned on.)

SERVICE RESET Press the rotary encoder Resets the data in the SERVICE hierarchy.to execute this menu item. Refer to “5-2. Data Structure” for details of the

hierarchical structure.

FACTORY PRESET Press the rotary encoder Returns all of the settings to the default setting whento execute this menu item. shipped from the factory.

(Excluding the black balance automatic adjustmentvalue.)

? 01OMENU SET RE ROTATION REV : OFF RE SPEED : 3 DIRECT VALUE : OFF

SERVICE RESET : EXEC

FACTORY PRESET : EXEC

4-66 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

SP FUNC Display (Setting the special functions)


COMP OUT ENABLE OFF/ON Sets this menu item to ON when the component signalunit is connected.

CHARA 4 : 3 MODE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that adjusts the width ofcharacter into the cut-out width of the 4 : 3 aspect ratio.

VF ZEBRA FORM 1/2/3 Switches the ZEBRA pattern to be displayed in VF.

BATT REMAIN DISP 1/2/3* Switches the mode for indicating the remaining power ofbattery.“Sony” indicates the item that corresponds to <Sony Info> or<Sony> in “Maintenance: Battery Page”. “Others” indicates theitem that corresponds to <Others, EXT DC>.

GAIN DISP MODE* dB/ISO Turns ON/OFF the function that sets the GAIN value in theISO indication.ISO : ISO indicationdB : Decibel (dB) indicationnCorrespondence between the ISO indication and decibel (dB)indication in 59.94i/50i is shown below.Values in parenthesis ( ) indicates the decibel (dB) indication.440 (_3) /630 (0) /880 (3) /1250 (6) /1770 (9) /2500 (12) /5000 (18) /10000 (24) /20000 (30) /40000 (36) /80000 (42)In 23.98PsF/24PsF/25PsF/29.97PsF, the sensitivity isreduced in half, so the values on each ISO indication alsobecome half.

* : Detected by the DC voltage.

? 02OSP FUNC COMP OUT ENABLE : OFF CHARA 4:3 MODE : OFF VF ZEBRA FORM : 1 BATT REMAIN DISP: 1 GAIN DISP MODE : dB

1 2 3

Sony Info/voltage % ← ←approximate

Others Tester display Voltage % ←approximate

Remaining power Info Sony only ← ←indication to VF (%) communication

Other than Info Others only ← Sony/Otherscommunication*

Remaining powerindication on theLCD DISPLAY PANEL

4-67HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

VA ADJUST Display (Adjusting the video amplifier system)


R AD LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjusts gain of the R-channel video signal that is input toA/D converter.

G AD LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjusts gain of the G-channel video signal that is input toA/D converter.

B AD LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjusts gain of the B-channel video signal that is input toA/D converter.

PREKNEE ADJ MODE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to adjust preknee.

P PRE KNEE*2 (_99 to 99) Adjusts preknee of the R-channel video signal.

G PRE KNEE*2 (_99 to 99) Adjusts preknee of the G-channel video signal.

B PRE KNEE*2 (_99 to 99) Adjusts preknee of the B-channel video signal.

OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB*1 Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUTand the VBS/SDI OUT terminal.(The Y-signal becomes the VBS signal when VBS isselected in the SD REAR BNC OUT of the OUTPUT SELdisplay (of the OPERATION menu) and SD is selected inthe TEST OUT SELECT.) The output signal returns to theY-signal without fail at power-on.

TEST SAW OFF/ANALOG/DIGITAL Turns ON/OFF the function that outputs the TEST signalforcibly to the video signal system, and selects the type ofTEST signal. (Invalid when the BARS signal is selected.)

TEST SAW H LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjusts the amplitude of the rectangular signal that islocated in the right of the TEST SAW.

*1 : RGB can be selected only when the Camcorder is used in the service mode.*2 : “DCC OFF” and “DCC ON” have their own preknee level adjustment values. When the adjustment value of “DCC ON” is activated,

“DCC” is displayed on the right-most side of the menu item.

? 03OVA ADJUST R AD LEVEL : 0 G AD LEVEL : 0 B AD LEVEL : 0 PREKNEE ADJ MODE: OFF R PRE KNEE : 0 G PRE KNEE : 0 B PRE KNEE : 0 OUTPUT SELECT : Y TEST SAW : OFF TEST SAW H LEVEL: 0

4-68 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

CCD ADJUST Display (Adjusting CCD block)


R VSUB 9.4 V to 19.5 V Sets the V. substrate voltage value of the R-channel.

G VSUB 9.4 V to 19.5 V Sets the V. substrate voltage value of the G-channel.

B VSUB 9.4 V to 19.5 V Sets the V. substrate voltage value of the B-channel.

R VSUB OFST 500 _5.0 V to 5.0 V Sets the V. substrate voltage value of the R-channel. (This is the adjustment for offset when shutter speed ishigher than 1/500.)

G VSUB OFST 500 _5.0 V to 5.0 V Sets the V. substrate voltage value of the G-channel.(This is the adjustment for offset when shutter speed ishigher than 1/500.)

B VSUB OFST 500 _5.0 V to 5.0 V Sets the V. substrate voltage value of the B-channel.(This is the adjustment for offset when shutter speed ishigher than 1/500.)

R VSUB (P) _5.0 V to 5.0 V Sets the V. substrate voltage value of the R-channel.(This is the adjustment for offset when the format is29.97PsF/25PsF/24PsF/23.98PsF.)

G VSUB (P) _5.0 V to 5.0 V Sets the V. substrate voltage value of the G-channel.(This is the adjustment for offset when the format is29.97PsF/25PsF/24PsF/23.98PsF.)

B VSUB (P) _5.0 V to 5.0 V Sets the V. substrate voltage value of the B-channel.(This is the adjustment for offset when the format is29.97PsF/25PsF/24PsF/23.98PsF.)

OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB* Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUTand the VBS/SDI OUT terminal. (The Y-signal becomes theVBS signal when VBS is selected in the SD REAR BNCOUT of the OUTPUT SEL display (of the OPERATIONmenu) and SD is selected in the TEST OUT SELECT.) Theoutput signal returns to the Y-signal without fail at power-on.


? 04OCCD ADJUST R VSUB : 14.4V G VSUB : 14.4V B VSUB : 14.4V R VSUB OFST 500 : +0.0V G VSUB OFST 500 : +0.0V B VSUB OFST 500 : +0.0V R VSUB(P) : +0.0V G VSUB(P) : +0.0V B VSUB(P) : +0.0V OUTPUT SELECT : Y

4-69HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

DCP ADJUST Display (Adjusting the DCP-43 board)


VF Y DC LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjusts the black level of the signal that is output to VF.

VCO CONT (_99 to 99) Adjusts the oscillating frequency.*

RGB OUT R LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjusts the R-signal level when the OUTPUT SELECT is set to RGB.

RGB OUT B LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjusts the B-signal level when the OUTPUT SELECT is set to RGB.

Reference : When the OUTPUT SELECT is set to RGB uponcompletion of the Y/Pb/Pr signal level adjustment, theoffset values are adjusted by the RGB OUT R/B LEVEL.Because the digital output code of Pr/Pb is larger thanthe digital output code of R/G/B, a slight level differenceis generated between the above two signals when thesame output signal amplitude of 700 mV is desired at theanalog OUT connector.

DETAIL BALANCE (_8 to 8) Adjusts the right-side and the left-side balance on screen of the detailsignal.

VF ZEBRA1 OFFSET (_99 to 99) Adjusts the reference value of ZEBRA1 of VF SETTING in theOperation menu. Adjusts the standard level for the reference voltageinput to AT.

VF ZEBRA2 OFFSET (_99 to 99) Adjusts the reference value of ZEBRA2 of VF SETTING in theOperation menu.

AT AD REF LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjusts the standard level for the reference voltage input to AT.

* : This has two different adjustment values depending on the 59.94i/24.97PsF/23.98PsF or 50i/25PsF/24PsF format.

? 05ODCP ADJUST VF Y DC LEVEL : 0 VCO CONT : 0 RGB OUT R LEVEL : 0 RGB OUT B LEVEL : 0 DETAIL BALANCE : 0

VF ZEBRA1 OFFSET: 0 VF ZEBRA2 OFFSET: 0

AT AD REF LEVEL : 0

4-70 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

RP DC OFFSET Display (Adjusting the DC value of the RP-131 board)


R DC OFFSET 0 (_99 to 99) R DC 0 phase adjustment

R DC OFFSET 180 (_99 to 99) R DC p phase adjustment

G DC OFFSET 0 (_99 to 99) G DC 0 phase adjustment

G DC OFFSET 180 (_99 to 99) G DC p phase adjustment

B DC OFFSET 0 (_99 to 99) B DC 0 phase adjustment

B DC OFFSET 180 (_99 to 99) B DC p phase adjustment

DC ADJ MODE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF of the DC ADJ MODE. How to adjust the DCADJ, refer to “9-6. Black Offset Adjustment” of this manual.

OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB* Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUTand the VBS/SDI OUT terminal. (The Y-signal becomes theVBS signal when VBS is selected in the SD REAR BNC OUTof the OUTPUT SEL display (of the OPERATION menu) andSD is selected in the TEST OUT SELECT.) The output signalreturns to the Y-signal without fail at power-on.


? 06ORP DC OFFSET R DC OFFSET 0 : 0 R DC OFFSET 180 : 0 G DC OFFSET 0 : 0 G DC OFFSET 180 : 0 B DC OFFSET 0 : 0 B DC OFFSET 180 : 0

DC ADJ MODE : OFF OUTPUT SELECT : Y

4-71HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

MANUAL RPN Display (Adjusting the DC value of the RP-131 board)


OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB* Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUT andthe VBS/SDI OUT terminal.(The Y-signal becomes the VBS signal when VBS is selectedin the SD REAR BNC OUT of the OUTPUT SEL display (ofthe OPERATION menu) and SD is selected in the TEST OUTSELECT.) The output signal returns to the Y-signal without failat power-on.

RPN CURSOR OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the cursor for RPN.

TEST OUT MENU OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to mix the menu display in theoutput signal of the TEST OUT terminal.

CURSOR H POS. _480 to 479 Sets the position of the RPN cursor. (Horizontal direction)

CURSOR V POS. _270 to 269 Sets the position of the RPN cursor. (Vertical direction)

CURSOR JUMP PREV/CURR/NEXT Has the cursor jump to the place where the RPN data isregistered.PREV : Jumps to the RPN data before the current position.CURR : Current displayNEXT : Jumps to the RPN data after the current position.

RECORD RPN Press the rotary encoder Registers the RPN data of the current cursor position.to execute this menu item.

DELETE RPN Press the rotary encoder Deletes the RPN data of the current cursor position.to execute this menu item.

FIELD/FRAME FIELD/FRAME Sets the CCD read-out system.FIELD : Field reading-out (normal readout)FRAME : Frame reading-out

(This position is used to obtain the highervertical resolution power.)

Reference : When the super EVS (high vertical resolution)mode is set to ON, FIELD is selected forcibly.


? 07OMANUAL RPN OUTPUT SELECT : Y RPN CURSOR : OFF TEST OUT MENU : ON CURSOR H POS. : 0 CURSOR V POS. : 0 CURSOR JUMP : CURR RECORD RPN : EXEC DELETE RPN : EXEC FIELD/FRAME : FIELD

4-72 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

? 09OSD ADJUST SD SDI LOCK/FREE: LOCK SD SDI VCO FREQ.: 0

SD VBS LEVEL : 0

SD ZEBRA Y LEVEL: 0 SD ZEBRA Y OFST : 0

RPN MANAGE Display


CONC.(APR) RESET Press the rotary encoder Clears the RPN data registered by ABB or AUTO CONCEAL.to execute this menu item.

RPN ALL PRESET Press the rotary encoder Initializes all the RPN data.to execute this menu item. (The data manually registered is also cleared.)

AUTO CONCEAL Press the rotary encoder Executes auto RPN concealment.to execute this menu item. (The Black Level adjustment is not executed.)

SD ADJUST Display (down converter out adjustment (Valid only when the downconverter board is installed))


SD SDI LOCK/FREE LOCK/FREE Sets the oscillator in a free-running state when FREE is selected.

SD SDI VCO FREQ. (_99 to 99) Adjusts the free-running frequency of SD SDI.

SD VBS LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjusts the VBS OUT signal level.

SD ZEBRA Y LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjusts the level of the ZEBRA mixed here to be equivalent to thelevel of the ZEBRA mixed to VF when SD is selected for TESTOUT SELECT.

SD ZEBRA Y OFST (_99 to 99) Adjusts the level of the ZEBRA mixed here to be equivalent to thelevel of the ZEBRA mixed to VF when SD is selected for TESTOUT SELECT.

? 08ORPN MANAGE CONC.(APR) RESET: EXEC

RPN ALL PRESET EXEC

AUTO CONCEAL EXEC

4-73HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

VTR MODE-7 Display (Setting-7 on VTR)


FAN MODE AUTO/FIX Sets the fan mode.Use the fan in the AUTO position normally.AUTO : Temperature increase inside the unit is detected

and the fan is automatically controlled.FIX : The fan is controlled with the fixed voltage (8 V).

(For the operation check of the fan)

VF DETAIL Display (Setting the VF details)


VF DETAIL LEVEL (_99 to 99) Sets the amount of the VF detail signal.(Amount of the detail signal of the main line video signalremains unchanged.)

VF DTL H LEVEL (_99 to 99) Sets the amount of the VF H detail signal.(Amount of the detail signal of the main line video signalremains unchanged.)

VF DTL V LEVEL (_99 to 99) Sets the amount of the VF V detail signal.(Amount of the detail signal of the main line video signalremains unchanged.)

VF DTL WHT LIMIT (_99 to 99) Sets the white peak of the white limiter of the VF detailsignal.(It does not affect the amount of the detail signal of themain line video signal.)

VF DTL BLK LIMIT (_99 to 99) Sets the black peak of the black limiter of the VF detailsignal.(It does not affect the amount of the detail signal of themain line video signal.)

? 10OVTR MODE-7

FAN MODE : AUTO

? 11OVF DETAIL

VF DETAIL LEVEL : 0

VF DTL H LEVEL : 0 VF DTL V LEVEL : 0 VF DTL WHT LIMIT: 0 VF DTL BLK LIMIT: 0

4-74 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

MEASURE Display (Setting the measurement mode)


MEASUREMENT MODE OFF/S/N/MODU/RESO/ Selects the measurement mode.SENS/REGI S/N : S/N ratio measurement mode

MODU : Modulation measurement modeRESO : Resolution measurement modeSENS : Sensitivity measurement modeREGI : Registration measurement mode

MASTER BLACK (_99 to 99) Adjusts the master black level. (All of the R, G and Bsignal black levels are adjusted.)

MASTER GAIN (TMP) _3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/30/ Sets the temporary gain value.36/42 dB

? 12OMEASURE

MEASUREMENT MODE: OFF

MASTER BLACK : 0 MASTER GAIN(TMP): 0dB

4-75HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

VTR MAINTE Display (VTR maintenance)


C0 : SERVO CHECK When the rotary encoder is Diagnoses the servo system.pressed, the SERVO CHECK (For details, refer to “11-3-1. Servo System Self-diagnosisMENU display appears. Mode”.)

C1 : RF CHECK When the rotary encoder is Checks the error rate during recording and playbackpressed, the RF CHECK mode.MENU display appears. (For details, refer to “11-3-2. RF System Self-diagnosis

Mode”.)

C2 : AUDIO CHECK When the rotary encoder is Checks the audio system.pressed, the AUDIO CHECK (For details, refer to “11-3-2. RF System Self-diagnosisMENU display appears. Mode”.)

A0 : SERVO ADJUST When the rotary encoder is Adjusts the servo system.pressed, the SERVO ADJUST (For details, refer to “11-3-4. Servo System AdjustmentMENU display appears. Mode.”)

A1 : RF ADJUST When the rotary encoder is Adjusts the RF system.pressed, the RF ADJUST (For details, refer to “11-3-5. RF System AdjustmentMENU display appears. Mode.”)

A2 : AUDIO ADJUST When the rotary encoder is Adjusts the audio system.pressed, the AUDIO ADJUST (For details, refer to “11-3-5. RF System AdjustmentMENU display appears. Mode.”)

A4 : MECHANISM ADJUST When the rotary encoder is Adjusts the mechanism.pressed, the MECHANISM (For details, refer to “11-3-7. Mechanism AdjustmentADJUST MENU display Mode.”)appears.

A9 : OTHERS ADJUST When the rotary encoder is Compensates for the voltage drop by the internalpressed, the OTHERS circuit and adjustment when the MDC-13G board isADJUST MENU display replaced.appears. (For details, refer to “11-3-8. Other Adjustments”.)

? 13OVTR MAINTE

C0 : SERVO CHECK C1 : RF CHECK C2 : AUDIO CHECK A0 : SERVO ADJUST A1 : RF ADJUST A2 : AUDIO ADJUST A4 : MECHANISM ADJUST A9 : OTHERS ADJUST

4-76 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

FILTER CTEMP Display (Setting of color temperature)


FILTER CTEMP A 2000 to 10000 Sets the color temperature of the color temperature filter A.

FILTER CTEMP B 2000 to 10000 Sets the color temperature of the color temperature filter B.

FILTER CTEMP C 2000 to 10000 Sets the color temperature of the color temperature filter C.

FILTER CTEMP D 2000 to 10000 Sets the color temperature of the color temperature filter D.

BATTERY INFO Display (Information when connecting the Battery)


TYPE Display only Indicating the battery types.

MFD DATA D/M/Y Display only Date of shipment from factory.

CYCLE COUNT Display only Number of times of charge/discharge.

CAPACITY Display only Indicating the capacity when battery is fully charged.

VOLTAGE Display only Indicating the battery output voltage.

CURRENT Display only Indicating the battery output current.

REMAINING % Display only Indicating the remaining power of the battery in units of %.

REMAINING MIN Display only Indicating the remaining power of the battery in units of time (minute)(estimate).

MODE Display only Battery operating mode is displayed.

STATUS Display only Battery status is displayed.

? 15OBATTERY INFO TOP

TYPE : NIMH MFD DATE D/M/Y:05062002 CYCLE COUNT : 500 CAPACITY : 3700mAh VOLTAGE : 13.5V CURRENT : 3000mA REMAINING(%) : 87% REMAINING(MIN): 120M MODE : 6080 STATUS : 000C

When the battery (BP-M50/M100, BP-GL65/GL95/IL75 etc.)

supporting Info is used.

? 15 BATTERY TOP

TYPE : ----- MFD DATE D/M/Y:-------- CYCLE COUNT : --- CAPACITY : ----mAh VOLTAGE : ----V CURRENT : ----mA REMAINING(%) : --% REMAINING(MIN): ---M MODE : ---- STATUS : ----

When other types of battery are used.

? 14OFILTER CTEMP

FILTER CTEMP A : 5600 FILTER CTEMP B : 3200 FILTER CTEMP C : 4300 FILTER CTEMP D : 6300

HDW-F900R/V1 (E) 4-77

4-10. Setup Menu List

The data that is set by the Setup menu can be saved in files. (Refer to Section 5 for the details of the filesystem.)This section shows the list covering all the items of the setup menu. The following list shows the respec-tive default settings when the unit was shipped from the factory and the destination files to which therespective menu items can be saved.F-SET : Indicates the default setting when the unit was shipped from the factory.C-SET : (Expected to write down the customers’ setup conditions.)ALL : Indicates the items that can be saved when the ALL FILE SAVE is executed. The items are

indicated by the symbols.PRESET : Indicates the items that can be preset when the ALL PRESET is executed. The items are

indicated by the symbols.SCENE : Indicates the items that can be saved in the SCENE file when the SCENE STORE is

executed. The items are indicated by the symbols.REFER : Indicates the items that can be saved in the REFERENCE file when the REFERENCE

SAVE/STORE is executed. The items are indicated by the symbols.LENS : Indicates the items that can be saved in the LENS file when the LENS FILE STORE is

executed. The items are indicated by the symbols.STD : The items that are returned to the standard setup (PRESET value) when the STANDARD

submenu is clicked.Power OFF : Indicates the items that return to the default setting when the unit was shipped from the

factory at power-off.

Symbols : Can be saved. (The menu display value remains as it is even after saving.)

O : Can be saved. (The menu display value becomes 0 when it is saved.)X : Cannot be saved.

: Special saving items. (Refer to “5-8. Special Saving Items”.) : Special saving items. (When an absolute value switch exists, the switch value has priority (Refer to

“5-8. Special Saving Items”.))

nThe items that have the crossing mark X (cannot be saved) in their ALL and PRESET columns, can bethe target of the USER file and USER PRESET if the items are located in the USER menu. However, theitems that return to the default setting when the unit was shipped from the factory at power-OFF, areexcluded from the target.

4-78 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

1. OPERATION Menu

No. Page Setup Item F-SET C-SET ALL PRSET SCENE REFER LENS STD Power OFF

01 OUTPUT SEL HD SDI OUT ON X X X X _

SD REAR BNC OUT VBS X X X X _

TEST OUT SELECT HD X X X X _

DOWN CON MODE CROP X X X X _

02 FUNCTION 1 ASSIGN SW <1> 5600K X X X X _

ASSIGN SW <2> F.MIC X X X X _

TURBO SW TURBO X X X X _

FRONT MIC SELECT STREO X X X X _

DF/NDF DF X X X X _

END SEARCH OFF X X X X _

CACHE/INTVAL REC OFF X X X X It is set toOFF when A.INT/M. INT isselected.

CACHE REC TIME 0SEC X X X X _

TAKE TOTAL TIME 5MIN X X X X _

REC TIME 5SEC X X X X _

PRE-LIGHTING OFF X X X X _

NUMBER OF FRAME 1 X X X X _

TRIGGER INTERVAL 5MIN X X X X _

PRE-LIGHTING OFF X X X X _

03 FUNCTION 2 5600K OFF X X O _

WHITE SWITCH MEM X X X X _

SHOCKLESS WHITE 1 X X X X _

ATW SPEED 4 X X X X _

LOW LIGHT OFF X X X X _

LOW LIGHT LEVEL 0 O X X X X _

VF BATTERY WARNING10% X X X X _

PB VIDEO ALL X X X X _

ABS (VF MANU) OFF X X X X X O OFF

04 VF DISP 1 VF DISP ON X* X X X X X Depends onthe VF switchsetting.

VF DISPLAY MODE 3 X X X X _

DISP EXTENDER ON X X X X _

DISP FILTER ON X X X X _

DISP WHITE ON X X X X _

DISP 5600K ON X X X X _

DISP GAIN ON X X X X _

DISP SHUTTER ON X X X X _

DISP AUDIO ON X X X X _

DISP TAPE ON X X X X _

* : It is not saved even in the USER FILE.

HDW-F900R/V1 (E) 4-79


05 VF DISP 2 DISP IRIS ON X X X X _

DISP ZOOM ON X X X X _

DISP COLOR TEMP OFF X X X X _

DISP BATT REMAIN OFF X X X X _

DISP DC IN OFF X X X X _

DISP WRR RF LVL OFF X X X X _

DISP TIME CODE OFF X X X X _

06 ‘!’ LED GAIN <!> ON X X X X _

SHUTTER <!> ON X X X X _

WHITE BAL <!> ON X X X X _

5600K <!> ON X X X X _

ATW <!> ON X X X X _

EXTENDER <!> ON X X X X _

FILTER <!> OFF X X X X _

OVERRIDE <!> ON X X X X _

FORMAT <!> OFF X X X X _

07 ‘!’ LED STD GAIN <!> 0dB X X X X _

SHUTTER <!> OFF X X X X _

WHITE BAL <!> AB X X X X _

5600K <!> OFF X X X X _

ATW <!> OFF X X X X _

EXTENDER <!> OFF X X X X _

FILTER ND <!> 1 X X X X _

FILTER CC <!> B X X X X _

OVERRIDE <!> OFF X X X X _

FORMAT <!> 23.98 X X X X _ ‘

08 MARKER 1 MARKER OFF X X X X _

CENTER OFF X X X X _

CENTER MARK 3 X X X X _

SAFETY ZONE OFF X X X X _

SAFETY AREA 90% X X X X _

ASPECT OFF X X X X _

ASPECT SELECT 4 : 3 X X X X _

ASPECT MASK OFF X X X X _

ASPECT MASK LVL 0 X X X X _

100% MARKER OFF X X X X _

09 MARKER 2 USER BOX OFF X X X X _

USER BOX WIDTH 240 X X X X _

USER BOX HEIGHT 135 X X X X _

USER BOX H POS. 0 X X X X _

USER BOX V POS. 0 X X X X _

CENTER H POS. 0 X X X X _

CENTER V POS. 0 X X X X _

ASPECT SAFE ZONE OFF X X X X _

ASPECT SAFE AREA 90% X X X X _

4-80 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)


10 GAIN SW GAIN LOW 0dB X X X X _

GAIN MID 6dB X X X X _

GAIN HIGH 12dB X X X X _

GAIN TURBO 42dB X X X X _

TURBO SW IND. OFF X X X X _

11 VF SETTING ZEBRA OFF X* X X X X X Depends on theVF ZEBRAswitch setting.

ZEBRA SELECT 1 X X X X _

ZEBRA1 DET.LEVEL 70% X X X X _

ZEBRA2 DET.LEVEL 100% X X X X _

ASPECT OFF X X X X _

VF DETAIL LEVEL 0 O X X X X _

VF DTL H LEVEL 0 O X X X X _

VF DTL V LEVEL 0 O X X X X _

12 AUTO IRIS IRIS OVERRIDE OFF X X X X _

IRIS SPEED 3 X X O _

CLIP HIGH LIGHT OFF X X O _

IRIS WINDOW 1 X X O _

IRIS WINDOW IND. OFF X X X X X O OFF

IRIS VAR WIDTH 240 X X O _

IRIS VAR HEIGHT 135 X X O _

IRIS VAR H POS 0 X X O _

IRIS VAR V POS 0 X X O _

13 SHOT ID ID-1 _ X X X X X _

ID-2 _ X X X X X _

ID-3 _ X X X X X _

ID-4 _ X X X X X _

14 SHOT DISP SHOT DATE OFF X X X X _

SHOT TIME OFF X X X X _

SHOT MODEL NAME OFF X X X X _

SHOT SERIAL NO OFF X X X X _

SHOT ID SEL OFF X X X X _

SHOT BLINK CHARA OFF X X X X _

15 SET STATUS STATUS ABNORMAL ON X X X X _

STATUS FUNTION ON X X X X _

STATUS AUDIO ON X X X X _

16 TEST OUT TEST OUT MARKER OFF X X X X _

TEST OUT VFDISP OFF X X X X _

TEST OUT MENU OFF X X X X _

TEST OUT ZEBRA OFF X X X X _

OUTPUT SELECT Y X X X X X O Y

* : It is not saved even in the USER FILE.

HDW-F900R/V1 (E) 4-81


17 OFFSET WHT OFFSET WHITE <A> OFF X X X X _

WARM-COOL <A> 3200 X X X X _

WARM-COOL BAL <A> 0 X X X X _

OFFSET WHITE OFF X X X X _

WARM-COOL 3200 X X X X _

WARM-COOL BAL 0 X X X X _

18 SHT ENABLE SHUTTER ECS ON X X X X _

SHUTTER 1/32 ON X X X X _













19 LENS FILE LENS FILE SELECT 1 X X X X X X _

F. ID NO OFFSET X X X X X _

<LENS INFORMATION> _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

L. ID _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Depends onthe Lens.

L. MF _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Depends onthe Lens.

20 UMID SET EX-OWNERSHIP REC OFF X X X X _

COUNTRY CODE _ X X X X X _

ORGANIZATION _ X X X X X _

USER CODE _ X X X X X _

INSTANCE NO RND X X X X _

TIME ZONE 00 X X X X _

MACHINE Fixed value X X X X X X _

4-82 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

2. PAINT Menu


01 SW STATUS GAMMA ON X X O _

BLACK GAMMA OFF X O _

MATRIX OFF X O _

KNEE ON X O _

WHITE CLIP ON X X O _

DETAIL ON X X O _

APERTURE ON X X O _

FLARE ON X X O _

EVS OFF X O _

TEST SAW OFF X X X O _

02 WHITE COLOR TEMP. <A> 3200 X _

C TEMP BAL <A> 0 X _

R GAIN <A> 0 X _

B GAIN <A> 0 X _

5600K <A> OFF X X _

COLOR TEMP. 3200 X _

C TEMP BAL 0 X _

R GAIN 0 X _

B GAIN 0 X _

5600K OFF X X _

03 BLACK/FLARE MASTER BLACK 0 O O X O _

R BLACK 0 O X X O _

B BLACK 0 O X X O _

MASTER FLARE 0 O O X O _

R FLARE 0 O O X O _

G FLARE 0 O O X O _

B FLARE 0 O O X O _

FLARE ON X X O _


04 GAMMA GAMMA ON X X O _

STEP GAMMA 0.45 X O _

MASTER GAMMA 0 O O X O _

R GAMMA 0 O O X O _

G GAMMA 0 O O X O _

B GAMMA 0 O O X O _


GAMMA SELECT STD X O _

GAM SEL (STD) 3 X O _

GAM SEL (HG) 4 X O _

GAM SEL (USER) 1 X O _

HDW-F900R/V1 (E) 4-83


05 BLK GAMMA BLACK GAMMA OFF X O _

BLK GAMMA RANGE HIGH X O _

MASTER BLK 0 O O X O _GAMMA

R BLACK GAMMA 0 O O X O _

G BLACK GAMMA 0 O O X O _

B BLACK GAMMA 0 O O X O _


06 KNEE 1 KNEE ON X O _

KNEE POINT (M) 95. 0 O X O _

KNEE SLOPE (M) 0 O O X O _

KNEE SATURATION OFF X O _

KNEE SAT LEVEL 0 O O X O _

WHITE CLIP ON X X O _

WHITE CLIP LEVEL 108. 0 X O _

07 KNEE 2 KNEE SATURATION OFF X O _

KNEE POINT (R) 0. 0 X O _

KNEE SLOPE (R) 0 O O X O _

KNEE POINT (G) 0. 0 X O _

KNEE SLOPE (G) 0 O O X O _

KNEE POINT (B) 0. 0 X O _

KNEE SLOPE (B) 0 O O X O _

08 DETAIL 1 DETAIL ON X X O _

APERTURE ON X X O _

DETAIL LEVEL 0 O O X O _

APERTURE LEVEL 0 O O X O _

DETAIL H/V RATIO 0 O O X O _

CRISPENING 0 O O X O _

LEVEL DEPEND ON X O _

LEVEL DEPEND LVL 0 O O X O _

DETAIL FREQ. 0 O O X O _

09 DETAIL 2 KNEE APERTURE OFF X O _

KNEE APT LEVEL 0 O O X O _

DETAIL WHT LIMIT 0 O O X O _

DETAIL BLK LIMIT 0 O O X O _

DETAIL V-BLK LMT 0 O O X O _

H/V CONTROL MODE V X O _

10 SD DETAIL SD DETAIL ON X O _

SD DETAIL LEVEL 0 O O X O _

SD CRISPENING 0 O O X O _

SD DTL WHT LIMIT 0 O O X O _

SD DTL BLK LIMIT 0 O O X O _

SD LEVEL DEPEND ON X O _

SD LV.DEPEND LVL 0 O O X O _

SD DTL FREQ. 0 O O X O _

SD DTL H/V RATIO 0 O O X O _

SD CROSS COLOR 0 O O X O _

4-84 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)


11 SKIN DETAIL SKIN DETAIL ALL OFF X O _

SKIN DETECT EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _

SKIN AREA IND OFF X X X X X O OFF

SKIN DTL SELECT 1 X X X X X O 1

SKIN DETAIL ON X O _

SKIN DETAIL LVL 0 O O X O _

SKIN DTL SAT. 0 O O X O _

SKIN DTL HUE 0 X O _

SKIN DTL WIDTH 40 X O _

12 MTX LINEAR MATRIX OFF X O _

MATRIX (USER) OFF X O _

MATRIX (PRESET) OFF X O _

MATRIX (PRST) SEL 2 X O _

MATRIX (USER) R-G 0 O O X O _

MATRIX (USER) R-B 0 O O X O _

MATRIX (USER) G-R 0 O O X O _

MATRIX (USER) G-B 0 O O X O _

MATRIX (USER) B-R 0 O O X O _

MATRIX (USER) B-G 0 O O X O _

13 MTX MULTI MATRIX OFF X O _

MATRIX (MULTI) OFF X O _

MATRIX AREA IND. OFF X X X X X O OFF

MATRIX COLOR DET _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

MULTI MTX PRESET _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

MTX (MULTI) AXIS B X X X X X O B

MTX (MULTI) HUE 0 O O X O _

MTX (MULTI) SAT 0 O O X O _

14 V MODULATION VMOD ON X X X O _

MASTER VMOD 0 O X X O _

R VMOD 0 O X X O _

G VMOD 0 O X X O _

B VMOD 0 O X X O _


15 SATURATION. SATURATION OFF X O _

SAT.LEVEL 0 O O X O _

LOW KEY SAT. OFF X O _

L. KEY SAT. LEVEL 0 O O X O _

L. KEY SAT. RANGE HIGH X O _

Y BLK GAMMA OFF X O _

Y BLK GAM LEVEL 0 O O X O _

Y BLK GAM RANGE HIGH X O _

16 SCENE FILE [] 1 to 5 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

[] STANDARD _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

SCENE RECALL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

SCENE STORE _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

F.ID _ X X X X X _

HDW-F900R/V1 (E) 4-85

3. MAINTENANCE Menu


01 WHT SHADING SHADING CH SEL TEST X X X X _


R/G/B WHT H SAW 0 X O X X X X _

R/G/B WHT H PARA 0 X O X X X X _

R/G/B WHT V SAW 0 X O X X X X _

R/G/B WHT V PARA 0 X O X X X X _

WHITE SAW/PARA ON X X X X X O ON

02 BLK SHADING SHADING CH SEL TEST X X X X _


R/G/B BLK H SAW 0 X O X X X X _

R/G/B BLK H PARA 0 X O X X X X _

R/G/B BLK V SAW 0 X O X X X X _

R/G/B BLK V PARA 0 X O X X X X _

BLACK SAW/PARA ON X X X X X O ON

MASTER BLACK 0 O X O _

MASTER GAIN(TMP) Depends on the X X X Depends on theswitch setting. GAIN switch

setting.

03 LEVEL ADJ Y LEVEL 0 X O X X X X _

SYNC LEVEL 0 X O X X X X _

Pr LEVEL 0 X O X X X X _

Pb LEVEL 0 X O X X X X _


04 SD LEVEL ADJ SD VBS LEVEL 0 X O X X X X _

SD VBS SETUP LVL 0 % X X X X _

05 BATTERY <Sony Info>

BEFORE END 1 5 % X X X X _

END 1 0 % X X X X _

<Sony>

BEFOR END 2 11.3V X X X X _

END 2 11.0V X X X X _

<Others, EXT DC>

BEFORE END 3 11.8V X X X X _

END 3 11.0V X X X X _

06 AUDIO-1 AUDIO OUT(F/R) CUE X X X X _

REC AUDIO OUT EE X X X X _

CAMERA ADAPTER ENABL X X X X _

AUDIO CH3/4 MODE SW X X X X _

FRONT MIC REF _50dB X X X X _

REAR MIC REF _60dB X X X X _

REAR MIC +48V ENABL X X X X _

4-86 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)


07 AUDIO- 2 AU REC EMPHASIS OFF X X X X _

CUE REC ON X X X X _

AU REF LEVEL _20dB X X X X _

AU REF OUT 0dB X X X X _

AU CH12 AGC MODE MONO X X X X _

AU CH34 AGC MODE MONO X X X X _

AU AGC SPEC _6dB X X X X _

AU LIMITER MODE OFF X X X X _

AU OUT LIMITER ON X X X X _

08 AUDIO-3 AU SG (1KHz) OFF X X X X _

MIC CH1 LEVEL FRONT X X X X _

MIC CH2 LEVEL FRONT X X X X _

REAR1/WRR LEVEL SIDE1 X X X X _

REAR2/WRR LEVEL SIDE2 X X X X _

AUDIO SELECT CH3 AUTO X X X X _

AUDIO SELECT CH4 AUTO X X X X _

LVL CONTROL CH3 70 X X X X _

LVL CONTROL CH4 70 X X X X _

09 TIME MODE TC OUT AUTO X X X X _

DF/NDF DF X X X X _

EXT-LK UBIT INT X X X X _

LTC UBIT FIX X X X X _

VITC UBIT FIX X X X X _

WATCH ATUO ADJ ON X X X X _

UBIT GROUP ID 000 X X X X _

10 VTR MODE REC TALLY BLINK ON X X X X _

REC START BEEP OFF X X X X _

LCD DISPLAY HOLD TIMER X X X X _

LCD HOLD TIMER 1H X X X X _

SHOT TIME DISP MD : HM X X X X _

VIDEO OUT (F/R) EE X X X X _

STBY OFF TIMER 60MIN X X X X _

STOP KEY FREEZE OFF X X X X _

11 SHOT MARKER LTC UB-MARKER SET X X X X _

REC START MARK OFF X X X X _

SHOT MARKER 1 OFF X X X X _

SHOT MARKER 2 OFF X X X X _

12 PRESET WHT COLOR TEMP. 3200 X X X X _

C TEMP BAL 0 X X X X _

R GAIN 0 O X X X X _

B GAIN 0 O X X X X _

5600K OFF X X X X O _

AWB ENABLE OFF X X X X X O OFF

HDW-F900R/V1 (E) 4-87


13 DCC ADJUST DCC FUNCTION SEL DCC X O _

DCC D RANGE 600% X O _

DCC POINT 0 O O O X O _

DCC GAIN 0 O O O X O _

DCC DELAY TIME 0 O O O X O _

PREKNEE POINT AUTO X X X X _

14 AUTO IRIS 2 IRIS WINDOW 1 X X O _

IRIS WINDOW IND. OFF X X X X X X OFF

IRIS LEVEL 0 O O X O _

IRIS APL RATIO 0 O O X O _

IRIS VAR WIDTH 240 X X O _

IRIS VAR HEIGHT 135 X X O _

IRIS VAR H POS 0 X X O _

IRIS VAR V POS 0 X X O _

IRIS SPEED 3 X X O _

CLIP HIGH LIGHT OFF X X O _

15 FUNCTION 3 WHT FILTER INH OFF X X X X _

COLOR BAR SEL 100% X X X X _

SHT DISP MODE SEC X X X X _

RM COMMON ON X X X X _MEMORY

VTR START/STOP RM X X X X _

FAN ON X X X X _

USER & ALL ONLY OFF X X X X _

HDSDI REMOTE I/F OFF X X X X _

SD ASPECT PULSE OFF X X X X _

16 GENLOCK GENLOCK ON X X X X _

RETURN VIDEO OFF X X X X _

GL H PHASE COASE 0 X O X X X X _

GL H PHASE FINE 0 X O X X X X _

17 ND COMP ND OFFSET ADJUST OFF X X X X X X OFF

CLEAR ND OFFSET EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _

18 FORMAT CURRENT 23. 98 X X X X X X Setting valueof NEXT

NEXT 23. 98 X X X X X X _

19 VANC RX UMID LINE1 0 X X X X _

UMID LINE2 0 X X X X _

4-88 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

4. FILE Menu


01 USER FILE USER FILE LOAD EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _

USER FILE SAVE EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _

F. ID _ X X X X X X _

USER PREST EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _

02 USER FILE 2 STORE USR EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _PRESET

CLEAR USR EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _PRESET

CUSTOMIZE RESET EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _

LOAD CUSTOM OFF X X X X _DATA

LOAD OUT OF USER OFF X X X X _

BEFORE FILE PAGE OFF X X X X _

USER LOAD WHITE OFF X X X X _

03 ALL FILE ALL FILE LOAD EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _

ALL FILE SAVE EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _

F. ID _ X X X X X _

ALL PRESET EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _

STORE ALL PRESET EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _

CLEAR ALL PRESET EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _

3SEC CLR PRESET OFF X X X X X O OFF

04 SCENE FILE [] 1 to 5 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

[] STANDARD _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

SCENE RECALL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

SCENE STORE _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

F.ID _ X X X X X _

05 REFERENCE REFERENCE STORE EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _

REFERENCE CLEAR EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _

REFERENCE LOAD EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _

REFERENCE SAVE EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _

F. ID _ X X X X X _

SCENE WHITE DATA OFF X X X X _

06 USER GAMMA USER GAMMA LOAD _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

USER GAMMA RESET _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

F. ID _ X X X X X X _

↓ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

F. ID _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

DATA _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

HDW-F900R/V1 (E) 4-89


07 LENS FILE 1 LENS FILR RECALL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

LENS FILE STORE _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

F. ID NO OFFSET X X X X X _

SOURCE _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

LENS NO OFFSET _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

LENS AUTO RECALL ON X X X X _

<LENS INFORMATION>

L. ID _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Depends onthe Lens.

L. MF _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Depends onthe Lens.

08 LENS FILE 2 LENS M VMOD 0 X X X X X _

LENS CENTER H 0 X X X X X _

LENS CENTER V 0 X X X X X _


LENS R FLARE 0 X X X X X _

LENS G FLARE 0 X X X X X _

LENS B FLARE 0 X X X X X _

LENS W-R OFST 0 X X X X X _

LENS W-B OFST 0 X X X X X _

09 LENS FILE 3 SHADING CH SEL TEST X X X X _


LENS R/G/B H SAW 0 X X X X X _

LENS R/G/B H PARA 0 X X X X X _

LENS R/G/B V SAW 0 X X X X X _

LENS R/G/B V PARA 0 X X X X X _

10 MEMORY STICK M. S. FORMAT _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

M. S. IN > JUMP TO OFF X X X X _

11 TELE FILE TELE FILE CLEAR _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

TELE FILE MARK OK X X X X _

ID _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

SIZE _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

REMAIN _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

STATUS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

4-90 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

5. DIAGNOSIS Menu


01 HOURS METER RESET METER _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

DRUM RUNNING _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

TAPE RUNNING _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

THREADING _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

DRUM RUNNING-2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

TAPE RUNNING-2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

OPERATION-2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

THREADING-2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

02 TIME/DATE ADJUST _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

HOUR _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

MIN _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

SEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

YEAR _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

MONTH _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

DAY _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

03 ROM VERSION AT _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

SS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

FP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

AU DSP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

EQ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

04 DEV STATUS I/O _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

IFA1 OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _

IFA2 OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _

DR OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _

VF1 OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _

VF2 OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _

FP1 OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _

FP2 OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _

RP OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _

EEPROM _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

IFA OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _

VF OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _

DCP OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _

DR OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _

NVRAM _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

DCP OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _

LSI _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

SCVP OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _

SG OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _

DCON OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _

SCI _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

SS OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _

RM _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

BATT _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

05 OPTION BOARD DOWN CONVERTER _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

PICTURE CACHE _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

SLOW SHUTTER _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

HDW-F900R/V1 (E) 4-91

6. SERVICE Menu


01 MENU SET RE ROTATION REV OFF X X X X X X _

RE SPEED 3 X X X X X X _

DIRECT VALUE OFF X X X X X X OFF

SERVICE RESET _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

FACTORY PRESET _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

02 SP FUNC COMP OUT ENABLE OFF X X X X X X _

CHARA 4 : 3 MODE OFF X X X X X X _

VF ZEBRA FORM 1 X X X X X X _

BATT REMAIN DISP 1 X X X X X X _

GAIN DISP MODE dB X X X X X X _

03 VA ADJUST R AD LEVEL 0 X X X X X X _

G AD LEVEL 0 X X X X X X _

B AD LEVEL 0 X X X X X X _

PREKNEE ADJ OFF X X X X X O OFFMODE

R PRE KNEE 0 X X X X X X _

G PRE KNEE 0 X X X X X X _

B PRE KNEE 0 X X X X X X _


TEST SAW OFF X X X O _

TEST SAW H LEVEL 0 X X X X X X _

04 CCD ADJUST R VSUB _ X X X X X X _

G VSUB _ X X X X X X _

B VSUB _ X X X X X X _

R VSUB OFST 500 _ X X X X X X _

G VSUB OFST 500 _ X X X X X X _

B VSUB OFST 500 _ X X X X X X _

R VSUB (P) _ X X X X X X _

G VSUB (P) _ X X X X X X _

B VSUB (P) _ X X X X X X _

OUPUT SELECT Y X X X X X O Y

05 DCP ADJUST VF Y DC LEVEL 0 X X X X X X _

VCD CONT 0 X X X X X X _

RGB OUT R LEVEL 0 X X X X X X _

RGB OUT B LEVEL 0 X X X X X X _

DETAIL BALANCE 0 X X X X X X _

VF ZEBRA1 OFFSET 0 X X X X X X _

VF ZEBRA2 OFFSET 0 X X X X X X _

AT AD REF LEVEL 0 X X X X X X _

4-92 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)


06 RP DC OFFSET R DC OFFSET 0 0 X X X X X X _

R DC OFFSET 180 0 X X X X X X _

G DC OFFSET 0 0 X X X X X X _

G DC OFFSET 180 0 X X X X X X _

B DC OFFSET 0 0 X X X X X X _

B DC OFFSET 180 0 X X X X X X _

DC ADJ MODE OFF X X X X X X OFF

OUPUT SELECT Y X X X X X O Y

07 MANUAL RPN OUTPUT SELECT Y X X X X X O Y

RPN CURSOR OFF X X X X X O OFF

TEST OUT MENU OFF X X X X _

CURSOR H POS. 0 X X X X X X _

CURSOR V POS. 0 X X X X X X _

CURSOR JUMP CURR X X X X X X CURR

RECORD RPN _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

DELETE RPN _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

FIELD/FRAME FIELD X X X X X O FIELD

08 RPN MANAGE CONC. (APR) RESET _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

RPN ALL PRESET _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

AUTO CONCEAL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

09 SD ADJUST SD SDI LOCK/FREE LOCK X X X X X O LOCK

SD SDI VCO FREQ. 0 X X X X X X _

SD VBS LEVEL 0 X O X X X X _

SD ZEBRA Y LEVEL 0 X X X X X X _

SD ZEBRA Y OFST 0 X X X X X X _

10 VTR MODE 2 FAN MODE AUTO X X X X X O AUTO

11 VF DETAIL VF DETAIL LEVEL 0 O X X X X _

VF DTL H LEVEL 0 O X X X X _

VF DTL V LEVEL 0 O X X X X _

VF DTL WHT LIMIT 0 X X X X X X _

VF DTL BLK LIMIT 0 X X X X X X _

12 MEASURE MEASUREMENT OFF X X X X X X OFFMODE

MASTER BLACK 0 O O X O _

MASTER GAIN (TMP) Depends on the X X X Depends on theswitch setting. GAIN switch

setting.

13 VTR MAINTE C0 : SERVO CHECK _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

C1 : RF CHECK _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

C2 : AUDIO CHECK _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

A0 : SERVO ADJUST _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

A1 : RF ADJUST _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

A2 : AUDIO ADJUST _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

A4 : MECHANISM _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ADJUST

A9 : OTHERS ADJUST _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

HDW-F900R/V1 (E) 4-93


14 FILTER CTEMP FILTER CTEMP A 5600 X X X X X X _

FILTER CTEMP B 3200 X X X X X X _

FILTER CTEMP C 4300 X X X X X X _

FILTER CTEMP D 6300 X X X X X X _

15 BATTERY INFO TYPE _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

MFD DATE D/M/Y _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

CYCLE COUNT _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

CAPACITY _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

VOLTAGE _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

CURRENT _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

REMAINING (%) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

REMAINING (MIN) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

MODE _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

STATUS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

4-94 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7. OthersFor more detail, refer to “5-8. Special Saving Items”.


_ _ WHITE R Gain 0 X _

_ _ WHITE B Gain 0 X _

_ _ MASTER GAIN _ X X X It becomes theGAIN switchsetting.

_ _ SHUTTER _ X X X It becomes theSHUTTERswitch setting.

_ _ DCC (Auto knee) _ X X X It becomes theDCC switchsetting.

_ _ SHUTTER SEL _ X X X

_ _ SHUTTER ECS FREQ _ X X X

5-1HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Section 5File System

5-1. Structure of File System

The HDW-F900R can save data modifications made using the setup menu, as files in the main unit itself andin a Memory Stick. The file system consists of the USER file, ALL file, SCENE file, REFERENCE file andLENS file. For details of the respective files, refer to Section 4-10, “Setup Menu List”.

USER fileThe USER file contains data set using the USER menu. The data can also be saved in a Memory Stick.When this file is saved in a Memory Stick, the USER category can be set in the user preference setupimmediately by reading USER file data from the Memory Stick next time.The USER category itself can also be customized so that items can be added or deleted. Therefore, theUSER file can be used as a SCENE file or an ALL file as appropriate.

ALL fileThe ALL file contains the setups of all categories. The ALL file can be saved in a Memory Stick.When the ALL file is saved in a Memory Stick after adjusting the first camera, the user can set the secondand subsequent cameras to have the same adjustment setup as the first camera immediately by reading theALL file data from a Memory Stick.

SCENE fileThe SCENE file contains data that has been painted in accordance with the shooting scene.When an operator saves the setup data that is optimized for a specific scene during rehearsal, the operatorcan establish exactly the same setup for the actual take as in the rehearsal by calling the saved setup data.Up to 5 SCENE files can be saved in the main unit and 100 SCENE files can be saved in a Memory Stick.(For details of the hierarchical layer structure, refer to Section 5-2, “Data Structure”.)The SCENE file data are maintained until the new data are set and stored.

REFERENCE fileThe REFERENCE file contains the standard setup data.When the STANDARD operation is performed, the setup stored in the REFERENCE file is called out.A single REFERENCE file can be saved in the PRESET layer of the PAINT category of main unit, and asingle REFERENCE file can also be saved in a Memory Stick. (For details of the hierarchical layerstructure, refer to Section 5-2, “Data Structure”.)If the REFERENCE file is not registered, the default setup data when shipped from the factory is used asthe reference values.The REFERENCE file data are maintained until the new data are set and stored.

LENS fileThe LENS file contains data of unique characteristics (flare, white shading, center marker position andextender white correction values) for each lens.Up to 32 LENS files can be saved in the main unit and 100 LENS files can be saved in a Memory Stick.(For details of the hierarchical layer structure, refer to Section 5-2, “Data Structure”.)

5-2 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

USER

USER layer

PRESET layer

SERVICE layer

FACTORY layer

PAINT FILEOPERA

TIONMAINTENANCE

SERVICEData structure

Category

ALL

5-2. Data Structure

Each menu item is classified into categories such as USER, OPERATION, PAINT, and MAINTENANCE. The setup dataof each item has a layered structure that includes the USER layer (not the USER category), the PRESET layer, the SER-VICE layer, and the FACTORY layer, each of which contains data.

USER layer : Data that can be changed by menu operation. This layer is used mainly by users.PRESET layer : Data to be registered as the standard setup. This layer is mainly set up by video engineer.SERVICE layer*1 : Data that can be changed by service engineer after entering the SERVICE mode.

For users, this layer is identical to the factory default setup.FACTORY layer : Factory-adjusted values and fixed values.

*1 : To change data in the SERVICE layer, be sure to set the switch S1-1 on the AT-172 board to ON.

Relationship between the values set in the unit and the data layersThe data of each item is stored in absolute values in each layer. The USER layer data, which is at the top, serves as theactual setup data, but in the SERVICE mode, the SERVICE layer data serves as the actual setup data. Note that the setupdone in the lower layer is not reflected to the upper layer. For example, if you want to reflect the data set in the SERVICEmode to the USER mode, you need to perform CLEAR ALL PRESET, and then copy the SERVICE layer data to theUSER layer.As an exception, for items such as WHITE SHADING and R/G/B FLARE, which require adjustments in a service whenreplacing a board, the setup values in the SERVICE layer are added to the setup values in the USER layer. Theseitems are listed below:

. PAINT categoryBLACK/FLARE page

R/G/B FLAREGAMMA page

R/G/B GAMMADETAIL1 page

DETAIL LEVEL. MAINTENANCE category

WHT SHADING pageR/G/B WHT H SAW, R/G/B WHT H PARA, R/G/B WHT V SAW, R/G/B WHT V PARA

BLK SHADING pageR/G/B BLK H SAW, R/G/B BLK H PARA, R/G/B BLK V SAW, R/G/B BLK V PARA

LEVEL ADJ pageY LEVEL, SYNC LEVEL

Data display on the menuEach menu item is classified as the one that displays the difference from the standard setup data (relative value display),and the one that displays the actual value of the data stored in that layer (absolute value display).Most of the volume-related items display relative values, and the switch-related items, MASTER GAMMA, KNEE POINTand other similar items display absolute values.The items that display relative values usually perform adjustments by modifying the values between –99 and 99, makingthe setup data become “0” after the PRESET or STORE operation.

5-3HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

USER

USER layer

PRESET layer

SERVICE layer

Data structure

Category

USER PRESET


F.ID

USER PRESET : EXEC

USER

USER layer

PRESET layer

SERVICE layer

Data structure

Category

STORE USER PRESET

? 02OUSER FILE 2



5-3. Operating the USER File

Calling the Standard Setup

1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Let the USER FILE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the rotary encoder.

3. Select USER PRESET and execute it by pressing the rotary encoder.

Modifying and Registering the Standard Setup

1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Create the standard setup of your preference by setting the items on each page of the USER menu.

(Refer to Section 4 “Setup Menu”.)3. Let the USER FILE 2 display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the rotary encoder.

4. Select STORE USR PRESET and execute it by pressing the rotary encoder.

5-4 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

USER

USER layer

PRESET layer

SERVICE layer

Data structure

Category

CLEAR USER PRESET

? 02OUSER FILE 2



USER

USER layer

PRESET layer

SERVICE layer

Data structure

Category

Memory Stick

USER FILE SAVE


F.ID

USER PRESET : EXEC

How to Return the Standard Setup to the Default Setup When Shipped from the Factory

1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Let the USER FILE 2 display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the rotary encoder.

3. Select CLEAR USR PRESET and execute it by pressing the rotary encoder.

Saving the Setup Contents to a Memory Stick

1. Insert a Memory Stick.2. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.3. Let the USER FILE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the rotary encoder.

4. Select F.ID and set the file ID. (For details, refer to Section 6-1. “Saving and Loading User Files” ofthe Operation Manual.)

5. Select USER FILE SAVE and execute it by pressing the rotary encoder.

5-5HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

P00 USER SAVE ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NEW FILE

USER

USER layer

PRESET layer

SERVICE layer

Data structure

Category

USER FILE LOAD

Memory Stick

P00 USER LOAD ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NO FILE


F.ID

USER PRESET : EXEC

6. When the cursor is moved to the file selection display, select the destination file where the file isgoing to be saved and press the rotary encoder. (When saving a new file, select NEW FILE.)

7. Confirm that the screen returns to the USER FILE display and the message [COMPLETE!] appearsindicating that the saving is complete.

How to Read the Saved File from a Memory Stick

1. Insert a Memory Stick.2. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.3. Let the USER FILE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the rotary encoder.

4. Select USER FILE LOAD and press the rotary encoder.5. When the cursor is moved to the file selection display, select the desired file that you want to read

and press the rotary encoder.

6. Confirm that the screen returns to the USER FILE display and the message [COMPLETE!] appearsindicating that the reading is complete.

5-6 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

USER

USER layer

PRESET layer

SERVICE layer

PAINTOPERATIONMAINTENANCE

FILEData structure

Category

ALL PRESET


F.ID :



USER

USER layer

PRESET layer

SERVICE layer


FILEData structure

Category

STORE ALL PRESET


F.ID :



5-4. Operating the ALL File

Calling the Standard Setup

1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Let the ALL FILE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the rotary encoder.

3. Select ALL PRESET and execute it by pressing the rotary encoder.

Modifying and Registering the Standard Setup

nBefore starting to create the standard setup of your preference, be sure to execute the first topic “Callingthe standard setup (ALL PRESET)”. If any other setup item is modified accidentally from the standardsetup, and if ALL PRESET is not executed, the modified setup is set as the standard setup when theSTORE ALL PRESET is executed.

1. Perform the steps 1 through 3 of “Calling the standard setup” as described above.2. Create the standard setup of your preference by setting the items on each page of the USER menu.

(Refer to Section 4 “Setup Menu”.)3. Let the ALL FILE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the rotary encoder.

4. Select STORE ALL PRESET and execute it by pressing the rotary encoder.

5-7HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

USER

USER layer

PRESET layer

SERVICE layer


FILEData structure

Category

CLEAR ALL PRESET


F.ID :



How to Return the Standard Setup to the Default Setup when Shipped from the Factory

1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Let the ALL FILE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the rotary encoder.

3. Select CLEAR ALL PRESET and execute it by pressing the rotary encoder.

5-8 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

USER

USER layer

PRESET layer

SERVICE layer


FILEMENU

CUSTOMIZEData structure

Category

ALL FILE SAVEMemory Stick


F.ID :



P00 ALL SAVE ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NEW FILE

Saving the Setup Contents to a Memory Stick

1. Insert a Memory Stick.2. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.3. Let the ALL FILE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the rotary encoder.

4. Select F.ID and set the file ID. (For details, refer to Section 6-1. “Saving and Loading User Files” ofthe Operation Manual.)

5. Select ALL FILE SAVE and execute it by pressing the rotary encoder.6. When the cursor is moved to the file selection display, select the destination file where the file is

going to be saved and press the rotary encoder. (When saving a new file, select NEW FILE.)

7. Confirm that the screen returns to the ALL FILE display and the message [COMPLETE!] appearsindicating that the saving is complete.nWhen the user sets the desired standard setup by adjusting the first HDW-F900R (to be executed upto STORE ALL PRESET), and the data is saved in a Memory Stick by the ALL FILE SAVE, theuser can set the second and subsequent cameras to have the same adjustment setup as the first cameraimmediately by reading the ALL file data from a Memory Stick.

5-9HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

USER

USER layer

PRESET layer

SERVICE layer


FILEMENU

CUSTOMIZEData structure

Category

ALL FILE LOADMemory Stick


F.ID :



P00 ALL LOAD ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NO FILE


nThe ALL FILE LOAD reads the standard setup and saves in the main unit. If it reads the ALL file thatcontains the modified standard setup data, the standard setup will be modified.

1. Insert a Memory Stick.2. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.3. Let the ALL FILE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the rotary encoder.

4. Select ALL FILE LOAD and press the rotary encoder.5. When the cursor is moved to the file selection display, select the desired file that you want to read


6. Confirm that the screen returns to the ALL FILE display and the message [COMPLETE!] appearsindicating that the reading is complete.

5-10 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

? 04OSCENE FILE


SCENE STORE ESC DISPLAY MODE : ALL

MEM(1): MEM(2): MEM(3): MEM(4): MEM(5):

5-5. Operating the SCENE File

Saving in the Main Unit

1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Create the optimum scene data by painting and other adjustments using the setup menu.

(For details of the respective file items of the SCENE file, refer to Section 4-10, “Setup Menu List”.)3. Let the SCENE FILE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and select F.ID to set the file

ID.

4. Select SCENE STORE and execute it by pressing the rotary encoder.5. When the cursor is moved to the file selection display, select the destination file where the file is


6. Confirm that the screen returns to the SCENE FILE display and the message [COMPLETE!] appearsindicating that the saving is complete.

5-11HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

? 04OSCENE FILE


SCENE RECALL ESC DISPLAY MODE : ALL

MEM(1): MEM(2): MEM(3): MEM(4): MEM(5):

? 04OSCENE FILE


Calling from the Main Unit

1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Let the SCENE FILE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the rotary encoder.

3. Select the SCENE RECALL and press the rotary encoder.4. When the cursor is moved to the file selection display, select the file that you want to call and press

the rotary encoder.

nTo call the SCENE FILE using the SCENE RECALL/CANCEL function of the SCENE FILE display,follow the steps as shown below.1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Let the SCENE FILE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the rotary encoder.

3. Select the desired file from the files 1 through 5.4. Press the rotary encoder to change the “ ” display to “ ”.

(When the rotary encoder is pressed while “ ” is being displayed, calling the file is canceled andthe display returns to the original display before calling.)

5-12 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

P00 SCENE STORE ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NEW FILE ***.5FILE SAVE MEM1-5←

P00 SCENE RECALL ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NO FILE ***.5FILE LOAD MEM1-5→

? 04OSCENE FILE


Saving in a Memory Stick

1. Insert a Memory Stick and perform the steps 1 to 5 of “Saving in the Main Unit” as described above.When you want to save 5 SCENE files in the Memory Stick at the same time, select 5 FILE SAVEand press the rotary encoder.

2. Confirm that the screen returns to the SCENE FILE display and the message [COMPLETE!] appearsindicating that the saving is complete.

How to Read the Saved Data from a Memory Stick

1. Insert a Memory Stick.2. Perform the steps 1 to 4 of “Calling from the Main Unit” as described above.

When you want to call 5 SCENE files from the Memory Stick at the same time, select 5 FILE LOADand press the rotary encoder.

3. Confirm that the screen returns to the SCENE FILE display and the message [COMPLETE!] appearsindicating that the reading is complete.

How to Return to the Standard Setup

1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Let the SCENE FILE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the rotary encoder.

3. Select STANDARD. Press the rotary encoder to change the “ ” display to “ ”.(When the rotary encoder is pressed while “ ” is being displayed, calling the file is canceled andthe display returns to the original display before calling.)

5-13HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

? 05OREFERENCE




? 05OREFERENCE




? 05OREFERENCE SAVE DATA OK? YES NO REFERENCE STORE : EXEC REFERENCE CLEAR : EXEC



→

5-6. Operating the REFERENCE File


1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Create the optimum reference file data by various adjustments using the setup menu.

(For details of the respective file items of the REFERENCE file, refer to Section 4-10, “Setup MenuList”.)

3. Let the REFERENCE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and select F.ID to set the fileID.

4. Select REFERENCE STORE and execute it by pressing the rotary encoder.5. A message appears prompting your confirmation. Select YES and press the rotary encoder.


1. Insert a Memory Stick2. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.3. Let the REFERENCE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and select F.ID to set the file

ID.

4. Select REFERENCE SAVE and press the rotary encoder. The message [SAVE DATA OK?] appears.

5-14 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

? 05OREFERENCE MEMORY STICK ACCESS REFERENCE STORE : EXEC REFERENCE CLEAR : EXEC



? 05OREFERENCE




? 05OREFERENCE LOAD DATA OK? YES NO REFERENCE STORE : EXEC REFERENCE CLEAR : EXEC



→

5. Select YES and press the rotary encoder. The message [MEMORY STICK ACCESS] appears.

nThe following messages appear depending on the conditions.. When a Memory Stick is not inserted : NO MEMORY STICK!. When a Memory Stick is write-protected : MEMORY STICK LOCKED

6. Confirm that the message [COMPLETE!] appears indicating that the reading is complete.


1. Insert a Memory Stick.2. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.3. Let the REFERENCE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen.

4. Select REFERENCE LOAD and press the rotary encoder. The message [LOAD DATA OK?]appears.

5-15HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

5. Select YES and press the rotary encoder. The message [MEMORY STICK ACCESS] appears.

nThe following messages appear depending on the conditions.. When a Memory Stick is not inserted : NO MEMORY STICK!. When an error occurs : FILE ERROR

6. Confirm that the message [COMPLETE!] appears indicating that the reading is complete.


1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Let the REFERENCE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen. Select REFERENCE CLEAR


3. A message appears prompting your confirmation. Select YES and press the rotary encoder.

? 05OREFERENCE MEMORY STICK ACCESS REFERENCE STORE : EXEC REFERENCE CLEAR : EXEC



? 05OREFERENCE




5-16 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)


LENS AUTO RECALL: OFF <LENS INFORMATION> L.ID : (unknown) L.MF : (unknown)

P00 LENS STORE ESC DISPLAY MODE : ALL

MEM(1):NO OFFSET MEM(2): MEM(3): MEM(4): MEM(5):



5-7. Operating the LENS File


1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Create the optimum lens file data by performing the various adjustments using the setup menu.

(For details of the respective file items of the LENS file, refer to Section 4-10, “Setup Menu List”.)3. Let the LENS FILE 1 display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and select F.ID to set the file ID.

4. Select LENS FILE STORE and execute it by pressing the rotary encoder.5. When the cursor is moved to the file selection display, select the destination file where the file is


Calling from the Main Unit

1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Let the LENS FILE 1 display of the FILE menu appear on the screen. Select LENS FILE RECALL


3. When the cursor is moved to the file selection display, select the file that you want to call and pressthe rotary encoder.

P00 LENS RECALL ESC DISPLAY MODE : ALL

MEM(1):NO OFFSET MEM(2): MEM(3): MEM(4): MEM(5):

5-17HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

P00 LENS STORE ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NEW FILE

***.M.S.001-032 MEM1-32

P00 LENS RECALL ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NO FILE

***.M.S.001-032 MEM1-32




1. Insert a Memory Stick and perform the steps 1 to 5 of “Saving in the Main Unit” as described above.To save 32 files at once, select [M.S. 001_032 MEM1-32] or [M.S. 051_082 MEM1_32], andpress the rotary encoder.

2. Confirm that the screen returns to the LENS FILE 1 display and the message [COMPLETE!] appearsindicating that the saving is complete.


1. Insert a Memory Stick. Perform the steps 1 to 3 of “Calling from the Main Unit” as described above.To read 32 files at once, select [M.S. 001_032 MEM1_32] or [M.S. 051_082 MEM1_32], andpress the rotary encoder.

2. Confirm that the screen returns to the LENS FILE 1 display and the message [COMPLETE!] appearsindicating that the reading is complete.


1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Let the LENS FILE 1 display of the FILE menu appear on the screen. Select LENS NO OFFFSET


3. Confirm that the message [COMPLETE!] appears and [F.ID] changes to [NO OFFSET] indicatingthat the screen returns to the standard setup.

5-18 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

5-8. Special Saving Items

5-8-1. White Gain

Using the ALL file

Executing item Status after execution

ALL FILE SAVE All the values of the white gain are saved in the ALL FILE. (Filter A/B/C/D, WHITE BAL A/B)(FILE menu/ALL FILE page)

ALL FILE LOAD All the values of the white gain are overwritten to the value of ALL FILE.(FILE menu/ALL FILE page) (Filter A/B/C/D, WHITE BAL A/B)

STORE ALL PRESET The value of the preset white gain specified on the MAINTENANCE menu/PRESET WHT page(FILE menu/ALL page) is saved as the value of the PRESET layer (identical to the value of the REFERENCE FILE).

CLEAR ALL PRESET All the values of the white gain are overwritten to the factory default value.(FILE menu/ALL FILE page) (Filter A/B/C/D, WHITE BAL A/B)

The PRESET WHITE R/B GAIN is also changed to the factory default value.

ALL PRESET All the values of the white gain are overwritten to the value of PRESET layer.(FILE menu/ALL FILE page)

Using the REFERENCE file


REFERENCE STORE (FILE menu/REFERENCE page) The white gain values during execution are saved.(When the WHITE BAL switch is in A, the value of A is saved. When it is in B,the value of B is stored. When it is in PRST, the value of PRST is stored.)The white gain value that is assigned by the [PRESET WHT] display with theWHITE BAL switch being set in PRST, is saved.

REFERENCE CLEAR (FILE menu/REFERENCE page) Both R/B GAIN values are set to 0 (3200K).

PRESET of the setup value The value returns to the REFERENCE file value.(FILE menu/REFERENCE page)

Using the SCENE file. When “SCENE WHITE DATA” is set to ON using the [REFERENCE] display


SCENE STORE (FILE menu/SCENE FILE page) The white gain values during execution are saved.(When the WHITE BAL switch is in A, the value of A is saved. When it is in B,the value of B is stored. When it is in PRST, the value of PRST is stored.)The white gain value that is assigned by the [PRESET WHT] display with theWHITE BAL switch being set in PRST, is saved.

SCENE RECALL (FILE menu/SCENE FILE page) The white gain values during execution are replaced by the SCENE filevalues. However, when “RECALL” is executed with the WHITE BAL switchbeing in the PRST position, the values are not replaced.

SCENE STANDARD (FILE menu/SCENE FILE page) The white gain values during execution become the REFERENCE file values.

. When “SCENE WHITE DATA” is set to OFF using the [REFERENCE] display


SCENE STORE (FILE menu/SCENE FILE page) The white gain values during execution are saved.

SCENE RECALL (FILE menu/SCENE FILE page) The white gain values are not rewritten.

SCENE STANDARD/CANCEL The PRESET value and the white gain values during execution are not(FILE menu/SCENE FILE page) replaced.

5-19HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

5-8-2. Master Gain

The Master Gain value can be saved in the REFERENCE file and in the SCENE file.However, the Master Gain value is not controlled and the present value is maintained even though theMaster Gain value is read from the files.(The Master Gain value is determined by the hardware switch.)If the remote control devices that do not have the GAIN hardware switches such as MSU, the value ischanged to what is read from the file.

5-8-3. Shutter

The SHUTTER ON/OFF data, ECS frequency data and SHUTTER SEL value can be saved in theREFERENCE file and in the SCENE file.The ECS frequency data and SHUTTER SEL value are controlled by the setup data that are read from thefiles, but the SHUTTER ON/OFF is determined by the hardware switch.If the remote control devices that do not have the SHUTTER hardware switches such as MSU, the valueis changed to what is read from the file.

6-1HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Section 6Parts Replacement

6-1. CCD Unit and its Components PartsReplacement Procedure

6-1-1. CCD Unit Replacement

Overview

Removing the Front AssemblyRemoving the Filter KnobRemoving the CCD UnitInstalling the CCD UnitInstalling the Filter KnobAttaching the Front Assembly

Adjustment after Replacement

8-2-1. Tape Run Adjustment9-2. VCO Frequency Adjustment9-6. Black Offset Adjustment

Removal

1. Removing the front assembly(1) Remove the outside panel assembly.

(Refer to Section 1-4.)(2) Open the inside panel assembly.

(Refer to Section 1-5.)(3) Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN3) on

the DCP-43 board.(4) Disconnect the harness and flexible card wire from the

connectors (CN1, CN9, CN10) on the DR-614 board.(5) Remove the one screw (PSW2 x 5) and disconnect the

DCP holder (F) from the CHB stay.(6) Remove the four screws (B3 x 10). While removing

the front assembly, disconnect harness from theconnector (CN502, CN503) on the IFA-19G board.

CN10

CN1

CN503CN9

CN3

CN502

Front assembly

Flexible card wire

DR-614 board

DCP-43 board

IFA-19G board

B3 x 10

B3 x 10

PSW 2x5

DCP holder (F)

CHB stay

6-2 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

2. Removing the filter knob(1) Loosen the two set screws, and remove the filter (ND)

knob.(2) Loosen the two set screws, and remove the filter (CC)

knob.Tool : L shaped hex wrench (d = 0.89 mm)

3. Removing the CCD unitRemove the four stainless bolts (M3 x 8) and the fourwashers (SW3). Then remove the CCD unit from the frontframe sub assembly.Tool : L shaped hex wrench (d = 2.5 mm)

CCD unit

Filter (CC) knob

Filter (ND) knob

Set screwsWP2 x 3

Stainless bolts (M3 x 8)

SW3

SW3

Front frame assembly

6-3HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

4. Installing the CCD unit(1) Clean the areas (the shaded portion shown in

illustration) that are contacting with the front frame asshown in the illustration.

(2) Install the CCD unit to the front frame sub assemblywith the four stainless bolts (M3 x 8) and the fourwashers (SW3).Standard tightening torque :110 x 10_2 N.m (11 kgf.cm)

5. Installing the filter knob(1) Rotate the knob shaft (thick) until the filter of the

thinnest color is visible from the front.(2) Align the filter (CC) knob number “B” with the mark

on the inside panel assembly and attach it with the useof the two set screws (A).

(3) Rotate the knob shaft (thin) until the filter of thethinnest color is visible from the front.

(4) Align the filter (ND) knob number “1” with the mark onthe inside panel assembly and attach it with the use ofthe two set screws (B).Standard tightening torque :20 to 25 x 10_2 N.m (2 to 2.5 kgf.cm)

Cleaning

CCD unit

Mount cap

Removal

Installation

Mount lever

Set screw (B)WP2 x 3

Set screw (B)WP2 x 3

Set screw (A)WP2 x 3

Set screw (A)WP2 x 3

Filter (CC) knob

Filter (ND) knob

Inside panel assembly

Knob shaft (thin)

Knob shaft (thick)

1

Mark

B

6-4 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6. Attaching the front assembly(1) Connect the harnesses that are removed in steps (3),

(4) and (5) of Removal, to the IFA-19G board(CN502, 503), DR-614 board (CN9, CN10) and DCP-43 board (CN3). Connect the flexible card wire that isremoved in step (4) of Removal, to the DR-614 board(CN1) securely.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.

(2) Attach the front assembly with the four screws (B3 x10).Standard tightening torque :80 x 10_2 N.m (8 kgf.cm)

(3) Tighten the CHB Stay and the DCP holder (F) with thescrew of one (PSW2 x 5).

(4) Close the inside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-5.)

(5) Reinstall the outside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-4.)

7. Routing the harnessesnBe sure that the flexible card wire connecting the BI-199board and the CN-2871 board does not touch harness B(gray) connecting the BI-199/200/201 board and the PA-340 board. Otherwise, the black level drops.

(1) Fix harness B to harness A with UL tape. Be sure tofix it at the root of harness A close to the filter unit.UL tape: UL tape equivalent product

(2) When installing the front assembly, pass harness B bythe right side of the threaded base as shown in thefigure.


8. Tape Path Running Adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-1.)

9. VCO Frequency Adjustment(Refer to Section 9-2.)

CN10

CN1

CN503CN9

CN3

CN502

Front assembly

Flexible card wire

DR-614 board

DCP-43 board

IFA-19G board

B3 x 10

B3 x 10

PSW 2x5

DCP holder (F)

CHB stay

Wrap the UL tape.

CN3Flexible card wire

Harness A

DR-614 board

CN-2871 board

BI-199 board

BI-200 board

PA-340 board

Harnesses B

Harnesses B

Threaded base

6-5HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6-2. Filter Disk Unit Replacement

nReplace the filter disk unit in the place such as clean roomthat is free from dust.

Removal



3. Remove the CCD unit. (Refer to 6-1-1.)4. Remove the two screws and disconnect the harness

from the connector (CN3) on the DR-614 board andtake the filter disk unit out gently.

Installation

1. Install the new filter disk unit by reversing step 4 ofremoval.nWhen installing the filter disk unit, be careful nottouch the surface of the filter disk unit with hand.

2. Install the CCD unit. (Refer to Section 6-1-1.)


Adjustment after Replace of the Filter Disk Unit(Refer to Section 9-28.)

K3 x 6

Filter disk unit

CN3

DR-614 board

CCD unit

6-6 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6-3. Replacement of the Circuit Boardsinside the CCD Unit

1. Remove the outside panel assembly. (Refer toSection 1-4.)

2. Open the inside panel assembly (Refer toSection 1-5.)

3. Remove the front assembly. (Refer to Section6-1.)

4. Removing the DR-614 board(1) Remove the connector (CN3) on the DR-614 board.(2) Remove soldering connected to the CCD ground sheet

(IN).(3) Remove the two screws (PSW2 x 5) and the board

spacer.(4) Remove the connector (CN1) on the CN-2871 board

and the connector (CN1) on the TG-256 board, andremove the DR-614 board.

5. Removing the TG-256 boardRemove the connector (CN104) on the PA-340 board andthe connector (CN2) on the TG-256 board, and remove theTG-256 board.

6. Removing the RP-131 boardRemove the three screws (PSW2 x 5), remove the connec-tor (CN1) on the PA-340 board and the connector (CN1)on the RP-131 board, and remove the RP-131 board.

7. Removing the PA-340 board(1) Remove the two solderings connected to the CCD

ground sheet (OUT).(2) Remove the three screws (PSW2 x 5), remove the PA-

340 board from the CHB assembly, and disconnect theharnesses from the connectors (CN101, CN102,CN103) on the PA-340 board.

6-7HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

8. Removing the CN-2871 board(1) Remove the four screws (P2 x 4) and remove the CHB

assembly.(2) Remove the BI flexible protection sheet.(3) Disconnect the flexible card wires from the connectors

(CN2, CN3, CN4) on the CN-2871 board.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.

(4) Remove the two solderings with the CCD ground sheet(IN).

(5) Remove the two screws (PSW2 x 5), and remove theCN-2871 board.

9. AttachingAttach the boards by reversing the step 1 to 8.

CN103

CN102

CN101CN1

CN2

CN3

CN2

CN3

CN1

CN4

CN1

CN1

4. DR-614 board

BI flexible protection sheet

CHB stay

8. CN-2871 board

CCD ground sheet (IN)

CCD ground sheet (OUT)

5. TG-256 board

6. RP-131 board

7. PA-340 board

Board spacers

Flexible card wire

Flexible card wires

CN104

PSW 2 x 5PSW 2 x 5

PSW 2 x 5

PSW 2 x 5

PSW 2 x 5P2 x 4

P2 x 4

Connected by soldering





PSW 2 x 5

PSW 2 x 5

6-8 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6-4. Shutter, AUTO W/B BAL Switch andAUDIO Volume ControlsReplacement

1. Remove the front assembly.(Refer to Section 6-1.)

2. Loosen the two screws fixing the harness (lens) andremove the three screws from the front SW coverassembly.

3. While removing the groove of the SW-1031 boardfrom the front assembly, remove the front SW coverassembly.

4. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN1) onthe SW-1031 board.

5. Remove the two screws and remove the SW-1031board from the front SW cover assembly.nThe VTR START switch is equipped with the cushion.Be careful not to lose the cushion.

6. Remove the soldering. Remove the shutter switch,AUTO W/B BAL switch and AUDIO volume con-trols.

Front SW cover assembly

Groove on the SW-1031 board

Front assembly



Harness (lens)

SW-1031 board

Shutter switch

AUTO W/B BAL switch

Audio volumecontrol

VR (audio) knob

PTP2.6 x 8CN1

Shield plate (FR)

Front SW cover assembly

Cushion

VTR start switch

6-9HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6. Install the new shutter switch, AUTO W/B BALswitch and AUDIO volume controls by reversing thesteps of removal.nWhen installing the SW-1031 board, be careful thatthe hole of the shield plate (FR) is located on the rearof the SW-1031 board.

SW-1031 board

S2

Hole

Shield plate (FR)

6-10 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6-5. MIC IN Connector Replacement

1. Remove the three precision screws. While removingthe MIC connector box assembly in the direction ofA, disconnect the harness from the connector (CN501)on the MA-103 board.

2. Remove the two precision screws and remove the MA-103 board from the MIC connector box in the directionof A.

3. Remove the soldering and remove the MIC IN connec-tor from the MA-103 board.

4. Install the new MIC IN connector by reversing thesteps of removal.nWhen installing the MIC connector box assembly tothe main unit, be careful not to damage the harness.

MA-103 board

CN501

A

MIC connector box assembly

Precision screwP2.6 x 5


MA-103 board

MIC connector box

Precision screws2.6 x 5

MIC IN connector

A

6-11HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6-6. Rotary Encoder Replacement


2. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN204)on the SW-1038 board.

3. Remove the two screws and remove the SW-1038board.

4. Insert a flat head (_) screwdriver tip between therotary encoder knob and the inside panel assembly.Push the rotary encoder knob out and then remove thesleeve (ENC2).

5. Remove the ENC-61 board from the inside panelassembly, then remove the sleeve (ENC1) and theearth plate.

6. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN1) onthe ENC-61 board.

7. Remove the soldering and remove the rotary encoderfrom the ENC-61 board.

PSW2 x 5 SW-1038 board

CN204

ENC-61 board

Rotary encoder

RE knobFlat head (_) screwdriver tip


Sleeve (ENC1)

Sleeve (ENC2)

CN203

Earth plate

6-12 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

8. Install the new rotary encoder by reversing the steps ofremoval.m. When installing the ENC-61 board to the inside

panel assembly, assemble the sleeve (ENC1) and theearth plate as shown in Fig. 1.

. Insert the protruded portion of the rotary encoderinto the square hole of the sleeve (ENC1) and at thesame time, align the protruded portion of the sleeve(ENC1) with the groove the of inside panel assem-bly.

ENC-61 board

Rotary encoder

Protruded portion

Protruded portion

Protruded portion

Protruded portion

Square hole

Earth plate

Square holeSquare hole

Groove

Sleeve (ENC1)

Sleeve (ENC1)

Earth plate

Earth plate

Fig.1

6-13HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6-7. Connector Box Board Replacement

6-7-1. Removing the Connector BoxAssembly

1. Remove the connector box. (Refer to Section 1-6.)

6-7-2. Removing the CNB-23 Board and AL-43 Board

1. Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector(CN401) on the CNB-23 board.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.

2. Remove the insulating sheet.

3. Remove the three screws. While removing the CNB-23 board, disconnect the harnesses from the connectors(CN102, CN104, CN105).

CNB-23 board

CN104

CN102CN105

CN401

Connector box

PSW2 x 5

Flexible card wire

Insulating sheet

CNB-23 board

AL-43 board

CN403

CN402

PTP2.6 x 8

PTP2.6 x 8

IO-202 board CN105

4. Remove the AL-43 board from the connectors(CN402, CN403) that are connected to the CNB-23board.

6-7-3. Removing the IO-202 Board

1. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN105)on the IO-202 board.

2. Remove the three screws and remove the IO-202 boardin the direction of the arrow.

6-14 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6-7-5. Removing the SW-1309 Board and theAXM-33 Board

1. Remove the two screws (M2 x 4), and remove theSW-1309 board and the SW bracket.

2. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN1) onthe SW-1309 board.

3. Remove the two screws (PSW2 x 5), and remove theSW-1309 board from the SW bracket.

4. Remove the one screw (PSW2 x 5) and remove theCNB bracket.

5. Remove the six precision screws (P2.6 x 5), andremove the AXM-33 board in the direction of arrow B.nWhen removing the AXM-33 board, push down thePUSH levers of the two AUDIO IN connectorssimultaneously in the direction of arrow A, andremove the board in the direction of arrow B.

6-7-4. Removing the RM-201 Board

1. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN1) onthe RM-201 board.

2. Remove the two precision screws, and remove theRM-201 board.

nWhen attaching the AXM-33 board to the connector box,push down the PUSH levers of the two AUDIO IN connec-tors simultaneously, and pass it through the hole of theconnector box.

PUSH lever

AXM-33 board

AXM-33 board

CN1

SW-1309 board,SW bracket

Connector box

AUDIO IN connector

Fig. 1 Fig. 2

PSW2 x 5

PSW2 x 5


M2x 4

Side view

CNB bracket

A

B

B

SW bracket

SW-1309 board

PUSH lever

TweezersAXM-33 board

Connector box

Hole

RM-201 board

CN1


6-15HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6-7-6. Removing the DC IN Connector

1. Remove the two precision screws and remove the DCIN connector.

6-7-7. Removing the DC OUT/HD SDI OUTConnectors

1. Remove the cap BNC and DC out cap. Remove thethree precision screws and remove the DC OUT/HDSDI OUT connector assembly in the direction of thearrow.

2. Disconnect the coaxial cable from the BNC coaxialcable hold washer.

3. Remove the coaxial cable, nut, and BNC coaxial cablehold washer, and remove the HDSDI OUT connectorfrom the DC OUT bracket.

4. Remove the nut and washer. Remove the coaxialconnector converter from the OUT bracket.

DC IN connector



DC OUT/HD SDI OUT connector assembly

BNC cap

DC OUT cap

DC OUT connector

DC OUT bracket

HDSDI OUT connector

NutWasher

Nut

Coaxial cable hold washer

Coaxial cable

Coaxial cable hold washer

Coaxial cable

5. Attach the new boards and the connectors by reversingthe steps of removal.

6-16 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6-8. DC-DC Converter Replacement

nThe DC-DC converter consists of the two circuit boardsthat are the RE-186 board and RE-187B board. Replacethem simultaneously.


2. Remove the screw and remove the RE retainer (2).3. Remove the RE-186 board and RE-187B board in the

direction of the arrow, from the connectors that areconnected to the MB-1096 board.

4. Remove the two circuit boards of the RE-186 boardand RE-187B board together in the direction of thearrow as shown.

RE-187B board

MB-1096 board

RE-186 board

PSW2 x 5

RE retainer (2)

RE-186 board

RE-187B board

MB-1096 board

6-17HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

5. Install the new RE-186 board and RE-187B board byreversing the steps of removal.m. When connecting the RE-187B board to the connec-

tor, confirm that the projection of the board issecurely inserted into the slot on the outside of theunit.

. When connecting the RE-186 board to the connec-tor, confirm that the top of the board is securelyinserted into the cut-out on the outside of the unit.

nWhen fixing the RE-187B board and RE-186 board withthe RE retainer (2), confirm the following points.1. Confirm that the portions A (two locations) of each

circuit board are pressed by the flat surface of the REretainer (2).

2. Confirm that the portions B (two locations) of eachcircuit board have entered into the holes of the REretainer (2).

3. Confirm that the connectors are securely inserted.

RE-187B board

RE-186 board Cut out Outside of the unit

RE-186 board

RE-187Bboard

Slot

Projection in the bottom

Corner at the top

IF PC board retainer

Outside of the unit

Protruded portion

RE retainer (2)

RE-187B board

RE-186 board

Hole

Hole

A

B

Flat surface

6-18 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6-9. Fan Replacement

nThis unit has the two DC fans.

6-9-1. Replacing the Fan on the Inside PanelAssembly


2. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN206)on the FP-152 board.

3. Remove the four screws and remove the fan bracket.Then remove the D.C. fan.

4. Install the new D.C. fan by reversing the steps ofremoval.m. When installing the D.C. fan, plate the D.C. fan in

the direction as shown in Fig. 1.. When installing the fan bracket, plate the fan bracket

in the direction as shown in Fig. 2.

Fig.1 : Direction of the D.C. fan when viewed from the

direction of arrow A.

Fig.2 : Direction of the D.C. fan when viewed from the

direction of arrow B.

D.C. fan


Fan bracket

Step small screws

FP-152 board(CN206)

B(See Fig.2)A

(See Fig.1)

SEPA

Fan bracket

Low

Frame

High

6-19HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6-9-2. Replacing the Fan in the Unit

1. Open the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)

2. Open the inside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-5.)

3. Remove the DC-DC converter. (Refer to Section 6-8.)4. Remove the DCP-43 board. (Refer to Section 1-7.)5. Remove the DVP-41 board. (Refer to Section 1-7.)6. Remove the CCM-45G board. (Refer to Section 6-17.)7. Remove the PS-595 board. (Refer to Section 6-18.)8. Remove the IF-794G/RX-54G board. (Refer to Section

6-19.)9. Remove the connector box. (Refer to Section 1-6.)10. Remove the one screw (precision P2 x 3) and remove

the FFC card.11 Disconnect the harnesses and flexible card wire from

the connectors (CN116, CN117, CN201) on the MB-1096 board.nLife of the flexible card wire will be significantlyshortened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.

12. Disconnect the coaxial cables from the connectors(CN1, CN2) on the MB-1096 board.

13. Remove the three screws (PSW2 x 5), and remove theD.C. fan and the rear rail bracket together as anassembled part from the two unit frame dowels.

14. Remove the D.C. fan harness from the clamp attachedto the rear rail bracket.

15. Remove the two precision screws (P1.4 x 3.5), andremove the D.C. fan from the rear rail bracket.

16. Install the new D.C. fan by reversing the steps ofremoval.nWhen installing the D.C. fan, place the D.C. fan in theorientation shown in the figure.

FFC guard

Flexible card wire

PSW2 x 5

PSW2 x 5

harnesses

Two dowels

D.C. fan,Rear rail bracket

D.C. fan

D.C. fan harnessesClamp

P1.4 x 3.5

A(See the above figure.)

Rear rail bracket

D.C. fan

Side withoutlabel

Direction of the D.C. fan when viewed from the direction of arrow A.

MB-1096 board

CN201

CN116

CN1CN2

CN117

Precision screwsP2 x 3

Coaxial cable

6-20 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6-10. Camera SW Ornamental Plate (3)Replacement

nThe camera SW ornamental plate (3) is attached to theinside panel assembly with a both-sided adhesive tape.

1. Insert a flat head (_) screwdriver tip between thecamera SW ornamental plate (3) and the inside panelassembly. Remove the plate carefully starting with theedge.

2. Clean the surface (the shaded portion shown inillustration) from which the camera SW ornamentalplate (3) is peeled off.

3. Peel the protection sheet off the new camera SWornamental plate (3) and attach it to the inside panelassembly.

Camera SW ornamental plate (3)


Flat head (_) screwdriver tip

Cleaning

6-21HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6-11. 50P Fitting Bracket AssemblyReplacement

Removal1. Remove the three screws (P2 x 4) and remove the

spacer.2. Loosen the precision screw (with drop-safe) and

remove the connector cover assembly.

3. Remove the three screws (B3 x 8) and remove the Vmounted assembly.

4. Remove the five precision screws (P2.6 x 5). Whileremoving the 50P fitting bracket assembly, disconnectthe flexible card wires from the connectors (CN601,CN602) on the CI-32G board.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.

Installation

5. Disconnect the flexible card wires from the connectors(CN601, CN602) on the CI-32G board.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.

6. Align the position-setting hole of the new 50P fittingbracket assembly with the position-setting pin of theframe. Install it with the five precision screws (P2.6 x 5).Standard tightening torque :53 x 10_2 N.m (5.3 kgf.cm)

7. Align the position-setting hole of the V mountedassembly with the position-setting pin of the frame.Install it with the three screws (B3 x 8).Standard tightening torque :80 x 10_2 N.m (8 kgf.cm)

8. Install the connector cover assembly and spacer byreversing the steps of removal.

Connector cover assembly

Spacer

P2 x 4

Precision screw (with drop-safe)


V mounted assembly

Position-setting pins of the V mounted assembly

Position-setting hole

Position-setting holes

CI-32G board

B3 x 850P fitting bracket assembly

Position-setting pin of the 50P fitting bracket assembly

Flexible card wires

CN601

CN602

6-22 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6-12. MS Lid Assembly Replacement

1. Open the SW door of the inside panel assembly in thedirection of the arrow and remove the two VR knobs(2).


3. Remove the screw and the FR flexible cable retainer.

4. Remove the three precision screws and remove theshield plate.

5. Disconnect the flexible card wires from the connectors(CN105 to CN107) on the MB-1096 board.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.

6. Disengage the hinge from the two hooks and removethe inside panel assembly from the unit.

VR knobs (2)

SW door

PSW2 x 5

PSW2 x 5

Shield plate

MB-1096 board

Hinge

Hinge

Flexible card wires


CN105CN106

CN107

Hook

Hook

FR flexible cable retainer

6-23HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7. Disconnect the harness and the flexible card wire fromthe connectors (CN105 to CN107, CN201 to CN207,CN303) on the FP-152 board.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.

8. Remove the eight screws and remove the FP-152board.

9. Release the lock by pressing the MS knob (open) asshown in the illustration on the front of the insidepanel assembly. Remove the MS lid assembly in thedirection of the arrow.

MS lid assembly

MS knob (open)

FP-152 board

FP-152 board

PSW2 x 5

PSW2 x 5

PSW2 x 5

CN107

CN205

CN106CN105CN303

CN204

CN203

CN202

CN201CN207

CN206

PSW2 x 5

Flexible card wires

Flexible card wires

6-24 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

10. Remove the two screws. While removing the MS lidassembly in the direction of the arrow, disconnect theflexible card wire from through the hole.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.

11. When installing the new MS lid assembly into theinside panel assembly, insert the flexible card wire intothe hole first. Then, while pressing the protrudedportion of the MS lid assembly against the sponge onthe back of the MS knob (open), insert it into theinside panel assembly.

P1.7 x 2.5

MS lid assembly

Flexible card wire

Hole

MS lid assemblyFlexible card wire

Hole

Sponge


Protruded portion

MS knob (open)

6-25HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

12. Install the new MS lid assembly by reversing the stepsof removal.

Note on installationWhen the FR flexible cable retainer is available, secure theflexible card wire with is as shown.

6-13. VF Connector Replacement



3. Remove the front assembly.(Refer to Section 6-1-1.)

4. Remove the handle assembly.(Refer to Section 6-22.)

5. Remove the two screws (PSW2 x 5) and remove theDCP holder (F).

6. Disconnect the harness from the coating lead pin.7. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN4) on

the DCP-43 board.8. Remove the two precision screws (P2.6 x 5) and

remove the VF connector.9. Open the claws of the sleeve ferrite clamp by pressing

them, that are attached to the harness, and remove thesleeve ferrite clamp.

Chassis sideInside panel assembly FP-152 board

FR flexiblecable retainer

Flexible card wires


Shield plate

CN4

DCP-43 board

Coating lead pinSleeve ferrite clamp


Direction when the VF connector is installed.

VF connector

PSW2 x 5

DCP holder (F)

Harness

Claw

10. Install the new VF connector by reversing the steps ofremoval.

6-26 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6-14. POWER Switch Replacement




4. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN504)on the IFA-19G board.

5. Remove the nut and remove the POWER switch.

6. Install the new POWER switch by reversing the stepsof removal.nWhen the POWER switch is installed, direction of thePOWER switch must be set as shown in the illustra-tion.

CN504

IFA-19G board

POWER switch Nut

POWER switch

To the front panel

Top view

RED

GRAY

6-27HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6-15. IFA-19G Board Replacement




4. Disconnect the harness and flexible card wire from theconnectors (CN120, CN501, CN504) on the IFA-19Gboard.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.

5. Remove the nylon rivet and remove the IFA-19Gboard.

6. When installing the new IFA-19G board to the frame,insert the protruded portion in the right to the half-round hole and insert the protruded portion in the leftinto the groove. Then install the IFA-19G boardbetween the upper and lower protruded portions.nUpon completion of the IFA-19G board replacement,remove EEPROM (IC202) from the former board andinstall it to the new board.

7. Install it by reversing the steps of removal.

CN120IFA-19G board

CN501

CN504

Nylon rivet

Flexible card wire

IFA-19G board

Upper protruded portion

Lower protruded portion

Half-round hole

Protruded portion in the right

Protruded portion in the left Groove

Frame

6-28 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6-16. Battery Connector Assembly(DC-111 Board) Replacement


2. Remove the plug-in boards.(Refer to Section 1-7.)

3. Remove the connector box assembly.(Refer to Section 1-6.)

4. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN115)on the MB-1096 board.

5. Remove the four precision screws. While removing theshield finger (BATT) and battery connector assembly,pull the two harnesses out of the hole.nBe careful not to damage the harness as it is caught bythe frame.

6. Install the new battery connector assembly by revers-ing the steps of removal.Standard tightening torque :40 x 10_2 N.m (4 kgf.cm)



Battery connector assembly

Shield finger (BATT)

MB-1096 board

CN115

Hole

6-29HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6-17. CCM-45G Board Replacement


2. Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connectors(CN1, CN2) on the CCM-45G board.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.

3. Loosen the precision screw A and remove the protrud-ed portion of the IF retainer from the recessed portionof the frame.

4. Remove the precision screw B and remove the CCM-45G board.

5. Install the new CCM-45G board by reversing the stepsof removal.

nWhen install the IF PC board retainer to the RE-187Bboard, insert the cut-out portion of the IF PC board secure-ly into the RE-187B board.


Antenna Tuning Frequency Adjustment(Refer to Section 10-4-2.)

PSW2 x 5

PSW2 x 5

CCM-45G board

CN1

CN2

Flexible card wires

IF PC board retainer

Projec-tion

Recessed portion of the frame.

A

B

PSW2 x 5

CCM-45G board

RE-187B boardIF PC board retainer

Cut out

6-30 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6-18. PS-595 Board Replacement


2. Remove the CCM-45G board.(Refer to Section 6-17.)

3. Remove the two precision screws. While removing thePS-595 board, disconnect the harness from the connec-tor (CN101, CN102).

4. Install the new PS-595 board by reversing the steps ofremoval.

PSW2 x 5

PS-595 board

CN101

CN102

6-31HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6-19. IF-794G Board, HN-277G Boardand RX-54G Board Replacement



3. Remove the DC-DC converter.(Refer to Section 6-8.)

4. Remove the CI-32G board.(Refer to Section 6-11.)

5. Remove the CCM-45G board.(Refer to Section 6-17.)

6. Remove the PS-595 board.(Refer to Section 6-18.)

7. Remove the four precision screws fixing the IF-794Gboard and remove the connector connecting the IF-794G board with the HN-277G board.

IF-794G board

HN-277G board



On the side of the inside panelassembly

6-32 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

8. Remove the IF-794G board in the direction of thearrow.nThe flexible card wire is used in the IF-794G board.Life of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.

9. Remove the connector connecting the MB-1096 boardwith the HN-277G board. Remove the HN-277G boardin the direction of the arrow.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.

IF-794G board

Flexible card wires

HN-277G board

MB-1096 board

Flexible card wire

6-33HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

10. Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector(CN117) on the MB-1096 board.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.

11. Remove the two precision screws. Remove the hole ofthe WRR guide from the pin and remove the WRRguide in the direction of the arrow.


On the side of the outside panel assembly

Holes

Pins

WRR guide

CN117

WRR guide

MB-1096 board

Flexible card wire

RX-54G board

Connector retainer

Precision screwsP2 x 4.5

WRR guide

Flexible card wire

12. Remove the two precision screws and remove the RX-54G board.nBe careful not lose the connector retainer.

13. Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector(CN117) on the RX-54G board.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.

14. Install the new IF-794G board, HN-277G board andRX-54G board by reversing the steps of removal.

6-34 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6-20. SS-92G Board Replacement


2. Remove the plug-in boards.(Refer to Section 1-7.)

3. Remove the harness clamp.4. Remove the five screws and remove the dust protec-

tion cover.5. Disconnect the flexible card wires from the connectors

(CN201, CN202) on the SS-92G board.nLife of flexible card wires will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.

6. Remove the screw and remove the SS PC boardretainer.

7. While loosening the connector (CN102), remove theSS-92G board that is connected to the MB-1096 board.

8. Install the new SS-92G board by reversing the steps ofremoval.nWhen attaching the improved type of the SS PC boardretainer, confirm that the SS PC board retainer ishoused in between the frame and the SS-92G board,and the SS-92G board is firmly fixed.

SS-92G board

MB-1096 board

CN201

CN202

CN102


Flexible card wires

Harness clamp

PSW2 x 5

PSW2 x 5

Dustprotection cover

SS-92G board


Frame

6-35HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6-21. LP-114 Board Replacement

1. Remove the precision screw (P2.6 x 5) and removethe rear cover assembly in the direction of the arrow.m. Be careful not to lose the washer.. The two drop protections are not fixed. Be careful

not to lose it.

2. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN116)on the LP-114 board.

3. Remove the two precision screws (P1.4 x 3.5) andremove the LP shield plate and the LP-114 board.nBe careful not to lose the LP shield plate.

4. Install the new LP-114 board by reversing the steps ofremoval.



Washer

Rear cover assembly

LP shield plate

LP-114 board

CN116

Drop protection (SW) (washer)

Dropprotection (TALLY)

6-36 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6-22. SW-1312 Board Replacement

1. Remove the LP-114 board.(Refer to Section 6-21.)

2. Rotate the lock lever in the direction of arrow A tounlock it.

3. Rotate the lock lever in the direction of arrow B tounlock it. Slide the VF slide assembly in the directionof the arrow C.

4. Remove the four screws and remove the handleassembly in the direction of arrow D.

5. Disconnect the harnesses from the connectors (CN1,CN21) on the SW-1312 board.

6. Remove the two precision screws (PSW2 x 5) andremove the SW-1312 board assembly in the directionof the arrow.nBe careful not to lose the drop protection (LIGHT).

7. Remove the precision screw (P1.4 x 3.5) and nut.Remove the SW-1312 board from the light switchholder.nBe careful not to lose the drop protection.

8. Install the new SW-1312 board by reversing the stepsof removal.

B3 x 8

B3 x 8

Handle assembly

Lock lever

Lock knob

VF slide assembly

A

C

B

D

SW-1312 board

SW-1312 board

Light switch holder

CN121

CN121

CN1

CN1

Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5 PSW

2 x 5

Nut

Drop protection (LIGHT)

Drop protection

New Tape Old Tape

6-37HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6-23. MB-1096 Board Replacement


2. Remove the connector box. (Refer to Section 1-6.)3. Remove the plug-in boards. (Refer to Section 1-7.)4. Remove the front panel. (Refer to Section 6-1.)5. Remove the DC-DC converter. (Refer to Section 6-8.)6. Remove the inside panel assembly.

(Refer to Section 6-12.)7. Remove the HN-277G board. (Refer to Section 6-19.)8. Remove the SS-92G board. (Refer to Section 6-20.)9. Remove the LP-114 board. (Refer to Section 6-21.)10. Remove the handle assembly. (Refer to Section 6-22.)11. Remove the one screw (precision P2 x 3) and remove

the FFC card.12. Disconnect the harness and flexible card wire from the

connectors (CN116, CN117, CN201) on the MB-1096board.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.

13. Disconnect the coaxial cables from the connectors(CN1, CN2) on the MB-1096 board.

14. Remove the three screws and remove the rear railbracket.

15. Remove the two screws and remove the DCP holder(F).

16. Disconnect the flexible card wire from the PC boardholder (F).

17. Remove the two screws and remove the PC boardholder (F).

18. Disconnect the harness and flexible card wire from theconnectors (CN101, CN114, CN115, CN118 toCN121) on the MB-1096 board.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.

19. Disconnect the two harnesses from the four claws ofthe harness cover. Then remove the toothed smallscrew A and remove the harness cover.

20. Remove the three screws (PSW2 x 5) and remove theMB-1096 board.

21. Install the new MB-1096 board by reversing the stepsof removal.

PSW2 x 5

PSW2 x 5

PSW2 x 5

PSW2 x 5

Flexible card wire

PC board holder (F)

DCP holder (F)

Rear rail bracket

Precision screwP2 x 3

FFC guard

MB-1096 board

CN201

CN116

CN1CN2

CN117Coaxial cable

Flexible card wire

Cover harness

Claws

PSW2 x 5

PSW2 x 5

Flexible card wireA

MB-1096 board

MB-1096 board

CN121

CN119

CN120

CN101

CN118 CN115

CN114

harnesses

6-38 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6-24. Mechanical Deck AssemblyBoards Replacement

6-24-1. MDR-13G Board Replacement

nFor replacement of the MDC-13G board, refer to “7-36.MDC-13G Board Replacement”.

6-24-2. MDR-14G Board Replacement

1. Open the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-5.)2. Remove the plug-in board. (Refer to Section 1-6.)3. Disconnect the flexible card wires from the connectors

(CN3, CN4) on the MDR-14G board.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.

4. Remove the one precision screw (P1.4 x 4.5) and theone step screw (step screw 2), and remove the FGmagnet cover.

5. Remove the screws (two step screws and one precisionscrew P1.4 x 3.5).While disconnecting the connector from the drumassembly, remove the MDR-14G board.

6. Install the new MDR-14G board by reversing the stepsof removal.nWhen installing the new MDR-14G board, use aprecision screw for the position A.


Drum Phase Adjustment (Refer to Section 10-5-4.)

A



Step screws

Step screw 2

Connectors of drum assembly

Flexible card wires

FG magnet coverMDR-14G board

CN3CN4

6-39HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6-24-3. SE-613 Board Replacement

1. Remove the mechanical deck assembly. (Refer toSection 1-15-12.)nWhen the mechanical deck assembly is going to beremoved for maintenance, place a protection sheetunderneath the mechanical deck assembly beforehand.

2. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN1) onthe SE-613 board.

3. Remove the two precision screws and remove the SE-613 board.

4. Install the new SE-613 board by reversing the steps ofremoval.


SE-613 board

CN1

Protection sheet

7-1HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Section 7Part Replacement of Mechanical Deck Assembly

7-1. General Information on Mechanical Part Replacement

nThe mechanical parts that are shown in this Section can be removed and replaced directly from themechanical deck assembly unless otherwise specified. The mechanical frame is omitted and not shown inthe illustrations in this Section

7-1-1. Index

No. Part name Section

1 Upper Drum Assembly 7-2

2 Drum Assembly 7-3

3 Brush assembly for Slip Ring 7-4

4 Slip Ring Assembly 7-5

5 AHC Roller Assembly for Video Head 7-6

6 Pinch Roller Assembly 7-7

7 S-tension Regulator Band Assembly 7-8

8 T-tension Regulator Band Assembly 7-9

9 Timing Belt 7-10

10 S/T Idler Assembly 7-11

11 CTL Head 7-12

12 FE Head 7-13

13 Holder Assembly Sensor (REC) 7-14

14 End Sensor Assembly 7-15

15 Full Top Sensor Assembly 7-16

16 S1, T1, T3 Tape Guide 7-17

17 (S) Soft Brake Assembly 7-18

18 T Soft Brake 7-19

No. Part name Section

19 Manual Eject Assembly 7-20

20 S-Tension Regulator Assembly 7-21

21 T-Tension Regulator Assembly 7-22

22 Cassette Stopper 7-23

23 Gear Block Assembly 7-24

24 S/T Reel Table Assembly 7-25

25 Reel Drive Gear Assembly 7-26

26 Holder Assembly Sensor (ID) 7-27

27 Top Sensor Assembly 7-28

28 Pinch Arm Assembly 7-29

29 Threading Arm Assembly 7-30

30 CUE/TC Head Assembly 7-31

31 S ldler Assembly 7-32

32 T S ldler Assembly 7-33

33 Cam Gear Assembly 7-34

34 Capstan Motor 7-37

Mechanical Deck Assembly 7-35

MDC-13G Board 7-36

41

2

3

5

67

8

9

0 0

![

!]

!,

!.

@/

@-@=

@[

@] @]

@\@;

@'

@,

!-

!=

!\!; !; !;

!'

@.

#/

#-

#=

#[

#]

7-2 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-1-2. Notes

1. Notes on tape cleanerwThe tape cleaner located at the input head block has a cleaning blade which is sharpand can cut your hands. Never touch the cleaning blade with bare hands, and becareful not to cut your hands when cleaning, replacing parts nearby and makingadjustments.

2. Cleaning the tools and fixturesBe sure to clean the surface of tools and fixtures before using them.. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01

Handle tools and fixtures carefully so as not to scratch them.Correct adjustments cannot be made with damaged tools and fixtures.

Cleaning blade

7-3HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-1-3. Threading-End State and Unthreading-End State

1. Threading-end stateThreading-end state means the mechanical state in which the S slider assembly andT slider assembly have moved to both sides of the drum so that they reached andstopped at the pins of the S plate assembly and the T plate assembly respectively.

(1) How to establish the threading-end state using a cassette tape(a) Insert a cassette tape into the cassette compartment.(b) Close the front lid.

(2) How to establish the threading-end state without using a cassette tape(a) Move the cassette compartment to its down position.

(If a cassette compartment is not installed, insert a piece of black paper intothe photo interrupter of the cassette compartment lock switch on the MDC-13G board to disable the photo interrupter.)

(b) Set the SLACK MUTE to ON on the adjustment mode menu A40 : PATHMODE SEL. (Refer to Section 11-3-7.)

(c) When the above state is established, press the CASSETTE IN switch forabout 1 second.

(3) How to establish the threading-end state manuallyRotate the manual eject assembly manually by hand. (Refer to Section 7-1-4.)

S plate assembly

S slider assembly

Pin Pin

T plate assembly

T slider assembly

Photo interrupter (Cassette compartment lock switch)

CASSETTE IN switch

A piece of black paper

7-4 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

2. Unthreading-end stateUnthreading-end state means the mechanical state in which the S slider assemblyand T slider assembly have moved from the S plate assembly and the T plateassembly toward the reel tables respectively, and have come to a complete stop.This is also called the STANDBY state.(1) How to establish the unthreading-end state

Press the EJECT button.(2) How to establish the unthreading-end state manually

Rotate the manual eject assembly manually by hand. (Refer to Section 7-1-4.)nFor the procedure to establish the unthreading-end state with a cassette tapeinserted, refer to Section 1-11.

7-1-4. How To Eject a Cassette Tape Manually

The threading-end state and the unthreading-end state can be established by rotatingthe manual eject gear (A) or the worm wheel of the manual eject assembly by handeven when the main power is turned off.

m. Do not rotate the respective gears excessively more than required, otherwise the

parts of the unit may be damaged.. Use an Phillips screwdriver for size M3 to rotate the worm wheel.

Phillips screwdriver (for M3) : 7-700-749-04

nThe worm wheel is provided to allow the engineer to fix problems in case of tapeslack, etc.


Worm wheel

7-5HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Threading-endThe mechanism can be driven in the threading mode manually until it reaches the threading-end state byrotating it counter-clockwise while pressing down the manual eject gear (A). Alternatively, rotate theworm wheel clockwise manually by using the Phillips screwdriver.

Stop rotating the mechanism manually when the intermittent gear stops rotating and both the S gearassembly and the T gear assembly have opened the spaces shown by the arrow in the illustration.nIf the mechanism is rotated further, the parts of the unit may be damaged.

Unthreading-endThe mechanism can be driven in the unthreading mode manually until it reaches the unthreading-end stateby rotating it clockwise while pressing down the manual eject gear (A). Alternatively, rotate the wormwheel clockwise manually by using the Phillips screwdriver.

When the cassette compartment has moved to the up state.When the cassette compartment is not installed.When the intermittent gear stops rotating and both the S slider assembly and T slider assembly havereached the specified positions as shown in the illustration.nIf the mechanism is rotated further, the parts of the unit may be damaged.

S slider assembly T slider assembly

T gear assembly

Intermittent gear (White gear visible through opening of the T rail)S gear assembly

Opens Opens

Intermittent gear (White gear visible through opening of the T rail)S slider assembly T slider assembly

7-6 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-1-5. About Oil and Grease

Be sure to use the specified oil and grease.If the different oil or grease used, major malfunction may cause due to the differenc-es in viscosity and ingredients.If the oil and grease used which mixed with dust, major malfunction may cause.Be sure to use the following oil and grease.

Oil: 7-661-018-18Grease (SGL-601) : 7-651-000-10Grease (SGL-801) : 7-651-000-11

. A drop of oil defines as follows: About the amount will adhere to the end of astick (2 mm in diameter) as shown in the figure.

. Apply grease to the surface of the part like a thin film.If grease applied spread from the specified areas, be sure to wipe using a gauze orsoft cloth.

. Apart from the specified areas never use the oil and grease.

2 mm

Oil

7-7HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-1-6. Screw Tightening Torque and Washer

1. About screwdriver and screw tightening torqueThis unit uses the screws of the two types.Be sure to use the specified tools when loosening and tightening.Be sure to use the torque screwdriver when tightening the screws, and tighten in thespecified torque reading.

Torque screwdriver bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-ATorque screwdriver bit (for M2) : J-6325-380-AHexagon bit (across 1.5) : J-6326-120-ATorque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A

Tightening torqueFor M1.4 (+) screw : 10 x 10_2 N.m (1.0 kgf.cm)For M2 (+) screw : 20 x 10_2 N.m (2.0 kgf.cm)For hexagon screw : 30 x 10_2 N.m (3.0 kgf.cm)

nThis unit uses the small size screws. When removing or attaching, the screw mayfall in the unit. To prevent from the falling, it recommends that the bit of the screw-driver magnetizes.

2. About stop washerNever re-use the pre-used stop washers.When attaching the part, be sure to use the new stop washer.

Stop washer : 3-559-408-11

How to remove stop washer(a) Remove the stop washer using a pair of small nippers or tweezers.

m. Take care not to fall in the unit.. Take care not to touch the tool against the other parts (especially the drum).

How to install stop washerWhen attaching, it recommends to use the

following tool.Stop washer fastening tool : J-6323-530-A

(a) Put the stop washer to the top of the stopwasher fastening tool.

(b) Put the top of the tool on the top of the shaftin an upright position.

(c) Press down the tool and attach the stopwasher to the shaft.

Stop washer

Stop washer

Stop washer fastening tool

7-8 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-2. Upper Drum Assembly Replacement

Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)

Removing the cleaning assemblyRemoving connector from brush assemblyRemoving the full top sensor assemblyRemoving the drum assemblyInstalling the drum assembly to drum install plateRemoving the brush coverRemoving the brush assemblyRemoving the slip ring assemblyRemoving the upper drum assemblyCleaning the drum contact surfaceInstalling the upper drum assemblyInstalling the upper drum eccentricity adjustment toolAdjusting Upper drum eccentricityRemoving the upper drum eccentricity adjustment toolInstalling the slip ring assemblyInstalling the brush assemblyInstalling the brush coverRemoving the drum assembly from drum install plateCleaning the drum contact surfaceInstalling the drum assemblyInstalling the full top sensor assemblyInstalling the cleaning assemblyConnecting the connector to brush assemblyCleaning the cleaning assembly and tape running surface

Adjustments after replacementTape run adjustmentVideo tracking adjustmentCTL head height adjustmentCTL head position adjustmentCUE/TC head height adjustmentCUE/TC head position adjustmentDrum phase adjustment

NoteIf rotary heads are worn out or broke, replace the entire upper drum assembly. Thehead chip cannot be replaced independently.

Basic Information

Apart from the periodic replacement time, the upper drum assembly needs to bereplaced in the following cases.. If a correct RF waveform cannot be obtained after the tracking adjustment.

7-9HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Preparations

Preparation on unit’s side1. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end

state.2. Turn off the main power.3. Remove the front lid and the outside panel

assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)

Preparation on tool’s sideRemove the two screws that are supplied with thedrum install plate. (Fig. 1)Install the drum install plate to the boss of theflatness check tool with the two screws removed.(Fig. 2)

nThe upper drum assembly can be replaced whenthe cassette compartment attaches to the unit.

Supplied screws(B2 x 8)

Supplied screws(B2 x 8)

Drum install plate

Drum install plate

Flatness check tool

Flatness check tool

Boss

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

7-10 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Tools

. Torque screwdriver bit (for M2) : J-6325-380-A

. Torque screwdriver bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A

. Hexagon bit (across 1.5) : J-6326-120-A

. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A

. Upper drum eccentricity adjustment tool (3) : J-6001-820-A



. Flatness check tool : J-6325-360-A

. Drum install plate : J-6531-110-A

. Cleaning cloth: 3-184-527-01

. Cleaning fluid: 9-919-573-01

. Skewer

m(1) When attaching the upper drum assembly to

the flange, tighten the screws with two stepsof different torques as described below.. First, tighten the screws with 10 x 10_2

N.m (1 kgf.cm).. Second, tighten the screws with 25 x 10_2

N.m (2.5 kgf.cm) finally. To tighten thescrews to the above torque reading, attachthe hexagon bit to the torque screwdriverand set the torque to 9.8 x 10_2 N.m (1kgf.cm).

(2) Assemble the upper drum eccentricityadjustment tools as shown.

Removal

1. Removing the cleaning assemblySetting mode :Enter the unthreading-end state of the unit.

(1) Remove the precision screw and hold thespecified position of the cleaning assembly asshown in the illustration, and raise it upexceeding the top of the manual eject gear(A).

(2) Remove the AHC roller assembly of thecleaning assembly between the drum supportand main frame.nWhen removing the cleaning assembly, becareful not to touch the upper drum assemblyand drum assembly.

Upper drum eccentricity adjustment tool (3)




Drum support

Main frame

AHC roller assembly

Cleaning assembly


7-11HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

2. Removing connector from brushassembly

Remove the connector from the brush assembly.

3. Removing the full top sensorassembly

Remove the precision screw. While removing theconnector on the MDC-13G board, remove thefull top sensor assembly.nWhen removing the full top sensor assembly, bevery careful not to touch the drum.


MDC-13G board connector

Brush assembly (RP)

Full top sensor assembly

4. Removing the drum assemblynThe drum assembly is fixed by the two screws.The drum assembly is connected with the MDR-14G board on the rear of the mechanical deckwith connector. Due to these connections, do notput excessive force to the drum assembly evenafter the two screws are removed.

nWhen removing the drum assembly, be carefulnot to touch the CTL head, CUE head and nearbytape guides.

Remove the two screws. Hold the upper part ofthe brush support. While loosening the connectoron the MDR-14G board, remove the drumassembly.

Connectors on the MDR-14G board

Drum assembly

PSW2 x 5

PSW2 x 5

7-12 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

5. Installing the drum assembly to druminstall plate

Install the drum assembly to the boss of the druminstall plate with the screws that are removed inpreparation step.


Brush cover

PSW2 x 5

PSW2 x 5

Drum assembly

Boss Drum install plate

6. Removing the brush coverRemove the two precision screws and remove thebrush cover in the direction of the arrow.

7-13HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7. Removing the brush assembly(1) Among the two screws that are fixing the

brush base, remove the screw that is shown as1 by the illustration.

(2) Loosen the screw 2 and move the brushbase in the direction of the arrow.

(3) Remove the screw 2 and remove the brushassembly.

Brush assembly

Brush base

1PSW2 x 5

2PSW2 x 5

8. Removing the slip ring assembly(1) Remove the two screws fixing the slip ring

assembly.(2) While removing the connector on the UDR-

32 board, remove the slip ring assemblytogether.

UDR-32 board

Connector

B2 x 4

Slip ring assembly

7-14 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9. Removing the upper drum assembly(1) Remove the four hexagon cap screws secur-

ing the upper drum assembly.(2) Remove the upper drum assembly in the

direction of the arrow.nAfter the upper drum assembly is removed,be careful not to touch the upper edge of thelower drum.

Hexagon cap screws

Upper drum assembly

Edge of the lower drum

Installation

10. Cleaning the drum contact surface(1) Clean the following places using a cleaning

cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.. Flange of the lower drum assembly (Upper

drum mount surface). Tape running surface and rabbet guide of

the lower drum assembly. Mount surface on the rear of the new upper

drum assembly

(2) Wipe the 20 round patterns of the LDR-28board in the lower drum with dry cloth.nNever clean the round patterns with anythingmoistened with cleaning cloth.

LDR-28 board

Upper drum assembly (rear)

Mount surface (cleaning)

Lower drum assembly

Flange (cleaning)

Round patterns

Rabbet guide (cleaning) Tape running surface (cleaning)

7-15HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

11. Installing the upper drum assembly(1) Hold the top of the new upper drum assembly

with hand. Align the phasing hole of theupper drum assembly with the phasing pin ofthe lower drum.

(2) Insert the phasing hole and the drum shafthole of the upper drum assembly into thephasing pin of the drum shaft of the lowerdrum very gently and carefully. Place theupper drum assembly on the flange surfacethe lower drum without any slant angle.nWhen installing the upper drum assembly, becareful not to touch the video head againstbrush support and other mechanism.

1

2

34

Hexagon cap screws

Hexagon cap screws

Lower drum assembly

Drum shaft hole

Upper drum assembly

Phasing pin

Phasing hole

Drum shaft

Flange surface

(3) Insert the four hexagon cap screws into themount holes that are removed when removingthe upper drum assembly with a pair oftweezers.

(4) Tighten the hexagon cap screws tentativelywith hexagon bit, one bolt after another in theorder as shown in the illustration so that theyare tightened with equal strength.

7-16 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

12. Installing the upper drum eccentricityadjustment tool

(1) Attach the upper drum eccentricity adjust-ment tool that is assembled at the beginningof this Section (see n of Tools), to theflatness check tool.

(2) Adjust the upper drum eccentricity adjust-ment tool so that the probe at the top of theupper drum eccentricity adjustment tool (6) ispositioned between the 2nd and the 3rdgrooves from the bottom of the outsidesurface on the upper drum assembly.nBe careful not to touch the measurementprobe against the video head.

Measurement probe

Measurement probe

3rd groove2nd groove

Upper drum assembly

Flatness check tool

Upper drum eccentricity adjustment tool

13. Adjusting upper drum eccentricity(1) Slowly rotate the upper drum assembly

counter-clockwise. Check that the eccentrici-ty gauge reading meets the following specifi-cation of the gauge pointer deflectionthroughout the one full rotation of the upperdrum assembly.Specification : Within 3 um

If the specification does not meet, repeat thefollowing three steps of (a) to (c) and adjustuntil the specification meets.(a) Slowly rotate the upper drum assembly

counter-clockwise and check the maxi-mum and minimum values of the gaugepointer deflection.

(b) Then rotate the upper drum to theposition that gives the minimum deflec-tion of the gauge pointer reading.

(c) Press the point that is 180 degree oppo-site of the measurement probe, of theupper drum in the direction of the arrowso that the gauge pointer reading is halfway (1/2) between the maximum andminimum values of deflection.

nIf the gauge pointer reading does not moveeven when the upper drum is pressed byfinger, loosen the four hexagon cap screwsslightly that secure the upper drum.If the gauge pointer reading moves too easily whenpressed, tighten the hexagon cap screws a little.

7-17HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

(2) Insert the torque screwdriver that is set to 10x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm), in the four holes onthe board of the upper drum and tighten thefour hexagon cap screws one bolt afteranother in the order as shown.nWhen tightening the screws just after theeccentricity adjustment, the tighteningtorque value should be 10 x 10_2 N.m (1kgf.cm) .

(3) Set the torque screwdriver to 25 x 10_2 N.m(2.5 kgf.cm).

(4) Tighten the four hexagon cap screws in thesame order as in step 2 with the torquescrewdriver

(5) Re-check that the specification met.

1

23 4

Upper drum eccentricity adjustment tool

Upper drum assembly

B2 x 4Screws coated with screw lock

UDR-32 board

Connector

ConnectorSlip ring assembly

14. Removing the upper drum eccentricityadjustment tool

Remove the upper drum eccentricity adjustmenttool.

15. Installing the slip ring assembly(1) Place the connector of the slip ring assembly

in front of the connector on the UDR-32board of the upper drum assembly. Whileinstalling the slip ring assembly to the drumshaft, connect the connectors.

(2) While pressing the slip ring assembly to theupper drum, install the slip ring assemblytentatively with the two screws that arecoated with the locking compound with equaltorque. Then tighten the screws with torquescrewdriver.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kg.cm)

7-18 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

16. Installing the brush assembly(1) Install the new brush assembly tentatively to

the brush support with the screw as shown.(2) Move the brush base in the direction of the

arrow. Check that the brush touches againstthe slip ring correctly. Then tighten the otherscrew tentatively.

(3) Push the brush base further in the direction ofarrow A, and tighten the screws that aretentatively tightened in steps (1) and (2).The standard tightening torque value :20 x 10_2 N.m (2 kgf.cm)

(4) Check that the two brushes touch to each ofthe three grooves of the slip ring respectively.

nOnce the above steps (1) to (3) are completed, theheight of the brushes and the contact pressure ofbrushes against the slip ring will be automaticallyadjusted.

P2 x 2Precision screwscoated with screw lock

Brush cover

Brush cover

Center

Slip ring shaft

17. Installing the brush cover(1) Adjust the brush cover so that the slip ring

shaft comes to the center of the top of thebrush cover and tighten the two precisionscrews.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)

(2) Coat the two precision screws with lockingcompound.

Fig.1 Fig.2

Brush

Brush assembly

Later, tighten this screw tentatively.

First, tighten this screw tentatively.

Brush base

Top view

Side view

Slip ring

Slip ring

Brush support

A

7-19HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

18. Removing the drum assembly fromdrum install plate

Remove the two screws and remove the drumassembly from the drum install plate.

19. Cleaning the drum contact surfaceClean the contact surface of the rear of the drumassembly and the contact surface of the framewith a cleaning cloth moistened with cleaningfluid.

PSW2 x 5

PSW2 x 5

Drum assembly

Drum install plate

Drum assembly (rear)

Cleaning Cleaning

CleaningCleaning

7-20 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

20. Installing the drum assembly(1) Hold the brush base with hands as shown in

illustration. Align the connector on thebottom of the drum assembly with theconnector on the MDR-14G board, and alignthe position-setting hole of the drum assem-bly with the position-setting pin of the frame.

PSW2 x 5

Fig.1 Fig.2

Skewers

Flanges

(2) Push down the flange with two skewerperpendicularly, connect the connector (Fig.1) and tighten the two screws. (Fig. 2)The standard tightening torque value :20 x 10_2 N.m (2 kgf.cm)

nCheck that the brush cover and brush assem-bly are set in the right position.

Position-settingpins of frame



Connectors on the drumassembly

Drum assembly


Flange base

7-21HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

21. Installing the full top sensor Assembly(1) Connect the connector of the full top sensor

assembly to the connector on the MDC-13Gboard.

(2) Press down the full top sensor in the directionof the arrow until top of the full top sensorassembly touches the lower drum surface andtighten the precision screw.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)

Connector on the MDC-13G board



Top


Drum support

Main frameAHC roller assembly

Cleaning assembly


Cam cleaning roller (white part)

Cleaning arm (B)

Position-setting pin


22. Installing the cleaning assembly(1) Insert the AHC roller assembly at the top of

the cleaning assembly in between the mainframe and drum support.

(2) Place the cleaning assembly under themanual eject gear (A) and move it in thedirection of the arrow.

(3) Align the position-setting hole with theposition-setting pin and tighten the precisionscrew.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)

7-22 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

nCheck that top of the cleaning arm (B) is posi-tioned on top of the cam cleaning roller (whitepart).

Cleaning arm (B)

Cleaning assembly

Cam cleaning roller (white part) Top

Operation Check

Rotate the manual eject gear (A) (red gear)clockwise and counter-clockwise several turnsand check that the AHC roller assembly comesinto contact with drum and is then detached.Check that its height also changes at the sametime.

23. Connecting the connector to brushassembly

Connect the connector that is removed in step 2 tothe connector on the brush assembly board.

24. Cleaning the cleaning assembly andtape running surface

Clean the following places using a cleaning clothmoistened with cleaning fluid.. Video head (Refer to Section 2-1-2.). Tape running surface of upper drum

(Refer to Section 2-1-2.). Rabbet guide and tape running surface of lower

drum(Refer to Section 2-1-3.)

nAfter cleaning, be sure to wipe the cleaning fluidoff the cleaned portions using a dry cleaningcloth.

7-23HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Adjustments after Replacement

25. Tape run adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-1.)

26. Video tracking adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-2.)

27. CTL head height adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-3.)

28. CTL head position adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-4.)

29. CUE/TC head height adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-5.)

30. CUE/TC head position adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-8.)

31. Drum phase adjustment(Refer to Section 10-5-4.)

7-24 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-3. Drum Assembly Replacement


Removing the cleaning assemblyRemoving connector from brush assemblyRemoving the full top sensor assemblyRemoving the drum assemblyCleaning the drum contact surfaceInstalling the new drum assemblyInstalling the full top sensor assemblyInstalling the cleaning assemblyConnecting the connector to brush assemblyCleaning the cleaning assembly and tape running surface

Adjustments after replacementTape run adjustmentVideo tracking adjustmentCTL head height adjustmentCTL head position adjustmentCUE/TC head height adjustmentCUE/TC head position adjustmentDrum phase adjustment

Note

If rotary heads are worn out or broke, replace the entire upper drum assembly. Thehead chip cannot be replaced independently.

Basic Information

Apart from the periodic replacement time, the upper drum assembly needs to bereplaced in the following cases.. If a correct RF waveform cannot be obtained after the tracking adjustment.

Preparations

Preparation on unit’s side1. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.2. Turn off the main power.3. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)

nThe upper drum assembly can be replaced when the cassette compartment attachesto the unit.

7-25HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Tools

. Torque screwdriver bit : J-6325-380-A(for M2)

. Torque screwdriver bit : J-6325-110-A(for M1.4)




. Skewer

Removal

1. Removing the cleaning assemblySetting mode:Enter the unthreading-end state of the unit.




Drum support


Cleaning assembly




Connector on the brush assembly



Remove the connector from the brush assembly.


Remove the precision screw. While removing theconnector on the MDC-13G board, remove thefull top sensor assembly.nWhen removing the full top sensor assembly, bevery careful not to touch the drum.

7-26 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

4. Removing the drum assemblynThe drum assembly is fixed by the two screws.The drum assembly is connected with the MDR-14G board on the rear of the mechanical deckwith connector. Due to these connections, do notput excessive force to the drum assembly evenafter it is removed.

nWhen removing the drum assembly, be carefulnot to touch the CTL head, CUE head and nearbytape guides.

Remove the two screws. Hold the upper part ofthe brush support. While loosening the connectoron the MDR-14G board, remove the drumassembly.

Drum assembly (rear)

Cleaning

CleaningCleaning

Cleaning

Connectors onthe MDR-14G board

Drum assembly

PSW2 x 5

PSW2 x 5

5. Cleaning the drum contact surfaceClean the drum contact surface on the rear of thenew drum assembly using a cleaning clothmoistened with cleaning fluid.

7-27HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6. Installing the new drum assembly(1) Hold the brush base with hands as shown in

the illustration. Align the connector on thebottom of the drum assembly with theconnector on the MDR-14G board, and alignthe position-setting hole of the drum assem-bly with the position-setting pin of the frame.

Position-setting pins of frame



Connectors on the drum assembly

Drum assembly


Flange base

Fig.1 Fig.2

PSW2 x 5Skewers

Flanges

(2) Push down the flange with two skewersperpendicularly, connect the connector (Fig.1) and tighten the two screws. (Fig. 2)The standard tightening torque value :20 x 10_2 N.m (2 kgf.cm)

nCheck that the brush cover and brush assem-bly are set in the right position.

7-28 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7. Installing the full top sensor assembly(1) Connect the connector on the full top sensor

assembly to the connector on the MDC-13Gboard.

(2) Press down the full top sensor in the directionof the arrow until top of the full top sensorassembly touches the lower drum surface andtighten the precision screw.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)




Top

Precision screw P1.4 x 3.5

Drum support


Cleaning assembly



Cleaning arm (B)







7-29HDW-F900R/V1 (E)


Cleaning arm (B)

Cleaning assembly


Operation Check

Rotate the manual eject gear (A) (red gear)clockwise and counter-clockwise several turnsand check that the AHC roller assembly comesinto contact with drum and is then detached.Check that its height also changes at the sametime.


Connect the connector that is removed in step 2 tothe connector on the brush assembly board.

10. Cleaning the cleaning assembly andtape running surface

Clean the following places using a cleaning clothmoistened with cleaning fluid.. Video head (Refer to Section 2-1-2.). Tape running surface of upper drum

(Refer to Section 2-1-2.). Rabbet guide and tape running surface of lower

drum (Refer to Section 2-1-3.)


7-30 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)






15. CUE/TC head height adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-5.)



7-31HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-4. Replacement of Brush Assembly for Slip Ring


Removing connector from brush assemblyRemoving the brush coverRemoving the brush assemblyInstalling the brush assemblyInstalling the brush coverConnecting the connector to brush assembly

Notes

. If brushes are worn out, replace the entire brush assembly.

. When the brush assembly installation is completed with the following steps, theheight of the brushes and the contact pressure of brushes against the slip ring willbe automatically adjusted. No adjustment is required after replacement.

. Never attach cleaning fluid on the brush surface.

Preparations

Preparation on unit’s side1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)

nThe brush assembly can be replaced when the cassette compartment attaches to theunit

Tools




. Locking compound : 7-432-114-11

7-32 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Removal


Remove the connector from the brush assemblyboard.


Connector of Brush assembly board


Brush cover

2PSW2 x 5

1PSW2 x 5

Slip ring

Brush assembly

Brush base





7-33HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Installation










Fig.1 Fig.2

Brush

Brush assembly



Brush base

Top view

Side view

Slip ring

Slip ring

Brush support

A

Brush coverCenter

Slip ring shaft

P2 x 2Precision screwscoated with locking compound

Brush cover


Connect the connector that is removed in step 1 tothe connector on the brush assembly board.nCheck that the brush assembly has moved out ofthe correct position.

7-34 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-5. Slip Ring Assembly Replacement


Removing connector from brush assemblyRemoving the brush coverRemoving the brush assemblyRemoving the slip ring assemblyInstalling the slip ring assemblyInstalling the brush assemblyInstalling the brush coverConnecting the connector to brush assembly

Notes

. When the brush assembly installation is completed with the following steps, theheight of the brushes and the contact pressure of brushes against the slip ring willbe automatically adjusted. No adjustment is required after replacement.

. Never attach cleaning fluid on the brush surface.

Preparations

Preparation on unit’s side1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)

nThe brush assembly can be replaced when the cassette compartment attaches to theunit.

Tools




. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01


. Locking compound : 7-432-114-11

7-35HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Removal


Remove the connector from the brush assemblyboard.


Connector of brush assembly


Brush cover

2PSW2 x 5

1PSW2 x 5

Slip ring

Brush assembly

Brush base





7-36 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

4. Removing the slip ring assembly(1) Remove the two screws fixing the slip ring

assembly.(2) While removing the connector on the UDR-

32 board, remove the slip ring assemblytogether.

UDR-32 board

Connector

B2 x 4

Slip ring assembly

B2 x 4Screws coated with locking compound

UDR-32 boardConnectors

Slip ring assembly

Installation

5. Installing the slip ring assemblynWhen the upper drum assembly is not going to bereplaced, remove the locking compound that hasadhered to the two screws that fix the upper drumslip ring assembly.

(1) Place the connector of the new slip ringassembly in front of the connector on theUDR-32 board of the upper drum assembly.While installing the slip ring assembly to thedrum shaft, connect the connectors.

(2) While pressing the slip ring assembly to theupper drum, install the slip ring assemblywith the two screws that are coated with thelocking compound with equal torque. Thentighten the screws with torque screwdriver.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)

7-37HDW-F900R/V1 (E)







Fig.1 Fig.2

Brush assembly



Brush base

Top view

Side view

Brush

Slip ring

Slip ring

A

Brush support

Brush coverCenter

Slip ring shaft

Brush cover

P2 x 2Precision screwscoated with locking compound




8. connecting the connector to brushassembly

Connect the connector that is removed in step 1 tothe connector on the brush assembly board.nCheck that the brush assembly has moved out ofthe correct position.

7-38 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-6. Replacement of AHC Roller Assembly for Video Head


Removing the cleaning assemblyReplacement of AHC roller assembly for video headInstalling the cleaning assemblyOperation check

Note

When replacing the cleaning assembly, be careful not to touch the video head.

Preparations

1. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.2. Turn off the main power.3. Remove the front lid and the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)

nIn order to replace the AHC roller assembly, the new CR spacer is required.Prepare the new CR spacer (3-182-765-02) when replacing the AHC roller assem-bly.

nThe cleaning assembly can be replaced when the cassette compartment attaches tothe unit.

7-39HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Removal

1. Removing the cleaning assemblySetting mode:Enter the unthreading-end state of the unit.





Drum support

Main frame

AHC roller assembly

Cleaning assembly

Arm

Flat head (_) screwdriver

AHC roller assembly

CR spacer

Narrow

Narrow

AHC roller assembly

CR spacer

Wide

Wide

Pins

2. Replacement of AHC roller assemblyfor video head

(1) Remove the AHC roller assembly and the CRspacer from the arm with flat head (_)screwdriver as shown.

(2) Assemble the new AHC roller assembly andthe new CR spacer as shown in illustration.nNever attach oil on the new AHC rollerassembly.

7-40 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)





Cleaning assembly


Cleaning arm (B)



Drum support

Main frame

AHC roller assembly

Cleaning assembly



Cleaning arm (B)



4. Operation checkRotate the manual eject gear (A) (red gear)clockwise and counter-clockwise several turnsand check that the AHC roller assembly comesinto contact with drum and is then detached.Check that its height also changes at the sametime.

7-41HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-7. Pinch Roller Assembly Replacement


Removing the pinch roller assemblyCleaning the mount shaftInstalling the pinch roller assemblyCleaning the pinch roller assembly

Adjustments after replacementTape run adjustmentCUE/TC head height check

Note

If pinch roller assembly is worn out, replace the pinch roller assembly assembly onlynot as an assembly.Be sure to wear a pair of gloves to for the replacement work.

Preparations

1. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.2. Turn off the main power.3. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)

nPinch roller assembly can be replaced when the cassette compartment attaches to theunit.

Tools





7-42 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Removal

1. Removing the pinch roller assembly(1) Rotate the manual eject gear (A) counter-

clockwise and remove it until the pinch rollerassembly comes out of the rib of the cassettestopper completely. Manual eject

gear (A)


Pinch roller assemblymount shaft (cleaning)

Pinch roller assembly

Rib of cassette stopper

(2) Loosen the precision screw in the center ofpinch roller assembly. Remove the pinchroller assembly by pulling it straight up.nWhen loosening the precision screw, do notpress it excessively with screwdriver. At thesame time, rotate the screwdriver whileholding the pinch roller assembly with hand.

(3) Remove the precision screw from pinch rollerassembly.

7-43HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Installation

2. Cleaning the mount shaftClean the pinch roller assembly mount shaft using a cleaning cloth moistened withcleaning fluid.

3. Installing the pinch roller assemblyInstall the pinch roller assembly to the pinch roller assembly mount shaft. Tightenthe precision screw that is removed in step 1.The standard tightening torque value : 10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)

nNever touch the pinch roller assembly surface with bare hands.

nTop and bottom of the pinch roller assembly are identical and cannot be identifiedeach other.

4. Cleaning the pinch roller assemblyClean the surface of the pinch roller assembly using a cleaning cloth moistened withcleaning fluid.Rotate the manual eject gear (A) clockwise until the unit returns to the unthreading-end state.



6. CUE/TC head height check (Refer to Section 8-2-5.)

7-44 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-8. S-Tension Regulator Band Assembly Replacement


Removing the S-tension regulator band assemblyCleaning S reel tableInstalling the S-tension regulator band assembly

Adjustments after replacementS tension regulator operating position adjustmentFWD Back Tension adjustmentTape run adjustmentCapstan add-on recording adjustment

Notes

If felt surface of the S-tension regulator band assembly becomes hardened, or wornout, replace the S-tension regulator band assembly as an entire assembly.

Preparations

1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)4. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.

nThe stop washer is used to fix the tension regulator band assembly.Prepare a new stop washer (3-559-408-11) when replacing the tension regulatorband assembly.

Tools

. Stop washer fastening tool : J-6323-530-A


. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01

7-45HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Removal

1. Removing the S-tension regulatorband assembly

(1) Remove the stop washer of the S-tensionregulator band assembly and remove it fromthe shaft of link (S) assembly.nWhen removing the stop washer, be carefulnot to apply an excessive force to the S-tension regulator band assembly.

(2) Move the S5 tape guide of the S-tensionregulator arm in the direction of the arrow,and remove the retainer shaft of the S-tensionregulator band assembly from the shaft of S-tension regulator arm.

(3) While moving the (S) soft brake assembly outwith finger, remove the S-tension regulatorband assembly.

Installation

2. Cleaning S reel tableClean the surface that contacts the tensionregulator band, of the S reel table using a cleaningcloth moistened with cleaning fluid.

3. Installing the S-tension regulator bandassembly

(1) Install the new S-tension regulator bandassembly with its felt-side facing inside, byreversing the steps of removal.m. When installing it, be careful not to bend

the S-tension regulator band assembly thatresults in damage.

. Do not touch the felt surface of the S-tension regulator band assembly hands.Also never attach oil on the felt surface.

. Check that the (S) soft brake assembly ispressing down the regulator band as shown.

(2) Attach the S-tension regulator band assemblyusing a new stop washer.nWhen installing the stop washer, do not applyexcessive force to the S-tension regulatorband assembly.

Retainer shaft

Stop washer

Surface of felt

S-Tension regulator band assembly

Shaft of link (S) assembly

Shaft of S-tension regulator arm

S5 tape guide

(S) soft brake assembly

(S) soft brakeassembly

S reel table

S reel table

Band

Cleaning

7-46 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)


4. S tension regulator operating positionadjustment


5. FWD back tension adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-3.)


7. Capstan add-on recording adjustment(Refer to Section 10-5-3.)

7-47HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-9. T-Tension Regulator Band Assembly Replacement


Removing the T-tension regulator band assemblyCleaning the T reel tableInstalling the T-tension regulator band assembly

Adjustments after replacementT Tension regulator operating position adjustmentREV back tension adjustmentTape run adjustmentCapstan add-on recording adjustment

Preparations


nWhen installing T-tension regulator band assembly, the two stop washers are used.Prepare the two new stop washers (3-559-408-11) when replacing it.

Tools




7-48 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Removal

1. Removing the T-tension regulatorband assembly

(1) Remove the two stop washers.(2) While moving the T soft brake away from the

position with finger, remove the T-tensionregulator band assembly.

Installation2. Cleaning the T reel tableClean the surface that contacts the tensionregulator band, of the T reel table using a clean-ing cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.

3. Installing the T-tension regulator bandassembly

(1) Hold the new T-tension regulator bandassembly with its felt-side facing inside, installthe new T-tension regulator band assembly tothe shaft of eject link assembly (B).

(2) While holding the shaft of eject link assembly(B) from its bottom with a screwdriver,install the new T-tension regulator bandassembly using new washer.nWhen installing the stop washer, do not applyexcessive force to the T-tension regulatorband assembly.

(3) While pushing the T soft brake away from itsposition with finger, install the hook-2 to theshaft by passing underneath the T-tensionregulator arm.

(4) While pushing up the shaft of the T-tensionregulator arm from its bottom, install the T-tension regulator band assembly using a newstop washer.nWhen installing the stop washer, do not applyexcessive force to the T-tension regulatorband assembly.

m. When installing it, be careful not to bend the T-

tension regulator band assembly that results indamage.

. Do not touch the felt surface of the T-tensionregulator band assembly hands. Also neverattach oil on the felt surface.

. Check that the T soft brake is pressing downthe regulator band as shown.

T-Tension regulator band assembly

Cleaning

T reel table

Stop washer

T-tension regulator arm

Shaft of the T-tension regulator arm

T soft brakeHook-1

Hook-2

Felt surface

Shaft of eject link assembly (B)

T reel tableassembly

Band

T soft brake

7-49HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Adjustments after replacement

4. T tension regulator operating positionadjustment


5. REV back tension adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-4.)



7-50 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-10. Timing Belt Replacement


Removing the FG magnet coverRemoving the timing beltCleaning the pulleyInstalling the timing beltInstalling the FG magnet cover

Adjustments after replacementTiming belt tension adjustmentCapstan add-on recording adjustment

Preparations

1. Turn off the main power.2. Open the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-5.)3. Removing the plug-in boards (Refer to Section 1-7.)4. Removing the SS-92G board (Refer to Section 6-20.)

nTiming belt can be replaced when the mechanical deck assembly attaches to the unit.

Tools



7-51HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Removal

1. Removing the FG magnet cover(1) Remove the precision screw (P1.4 x 4.5) and the step

screw 2, and then remove the FG magnet cover fromthe mechanical chassis.

2. Removing the timing belt(1) Remove the timing belt from the pulley assembly.(2) Remove the timing belt from pulleys of the capstan

motor and the reel drive gear assembly.

Pulley (capstan motor)

Pulley (reel drive gear assembly)

Pulley assembly

Timing belt

Cleaning

Cleaning

Timing belt

Pulley assembly

Pulley (capstan motor)

Pulley (reel drive gear assembly)

FG magnetcover


Stepscrew 2

Installation

3. Cleaning the pulleyClean the pulleys and the pulley assemblies of the capstanmotor and the reel drive gear assembly using a cleaningcloth moistened with cleaning fluid.

4. Installing the timing belt(1) Engage the timing belt on the pulleys of the capstan

motor and the reel drive gear assembly.(2) Engage the timing belt on the pulley assembly.

5. Installing the FG magnet cover(1) Install the FG magnet cover with the precision screw

(P1.4 x 4.5) and the step screw 2 to the mechanicalchassis.

(2) Confirm that the FG magnet cover has not come incontact with the capstan motor and the timing belt.


6. Timing belt tension adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-5.)


7-52 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-11. S Idler Assembly Replacement and T Idler AssemblyReplacement


Removing the S or T idler assemblyCleaning and applying oil to the mount shaftInstalling the S or T idler assembly

Adjustment after replacementCapstan add-on recording adjustment

Note

The S idler assembly and the T idler assembly are the different parts, but the samereplacement procedure apply to both of them.

Preparations

1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)

nThe stop washer is used to fix the S and T idler assemblies.Prepare a new stop washer (3-559-408-11) when replacing the S and T idler assem-blies.

Tools






. Oil : 7-661-018-18

7-53HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Removal

1. Removing the S or T idler assemblyRemove the stop washer and remove the S or Tidler assembly.nDo not remove the poly-washers that are insertedunder the S or T idler assembly, from the mountshaft.There are cases that the poly-washers are re-moved together with the idler assembly when theidler assembly is removed. Do not lose the poly-washers.

Installation

2. Cleaning and applying oil to themount shaft

(1) Clean the mount shaft using a cleaning clothmoistened with cleaning fluid.

(2) Apply a 1/4 drop of oil to the mount shaft.

3. Installing the S or T idler assembly(1) Hold the new S or T idler assembly with its

white side facing up, and insert it to themount shaft.

(2) Install the new stop washer.

Mount shafts (Apply oil after cleaning)

S idlerassembly Stop washer

Stop washer

Recessed portion

Recessedportion

T idlerassembly

Poly washer

Poly washers (Do not remove it)

White side face

White side face


4. Capstan add-on recording Adjustment(Refer to Section 10-5-3.)

7-54 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-12. CTL Head Replacement


Removing the FE/CTL head assemblyCTL Head replacementInstalling the FE/CTL head assemblyCleaning FE/CTL head assembly

Adjustments after replacementTape run adjustmentVideo tracking adjustmentCTL head height adjustmentCTL head position adjustmentCUE/TC head position adjustment

cThe tape cleaner that is attached to the FE head has the cleaning blade.The cleaning blade has the sharp edge that can cut your hands. Never touch thecleaning blade with bare hands. Be careful also not to cut your hands during CTLhead replacement and adjustments.

Preparations


nThe CTL head can be replaced when the cassette compartment attaches to theunit.

Tools





7-55HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Removal

1. Removing the FE/CTL head assembly(1) Remove the connector CN505 on the MDC-

13G board.(2) Remove the three precision screws and

remove the FE/CTL head assembly from theunit.

nBe careful not to touch the screwdriver againstthe video head, drum, erase head, tape guide andother parts.


CN505

MDC-13G board

FE/CTL head assembly

2. CTL head replacement(1) Remove soldering from the two wires that are

connected to the head.(2) Remove the two screws on the rear of the

CTL head and remove the CTL head.(3) Clean the contact surface and install the new

CTL head with two screws.The standard tightening torque value :20 x 10_2 N.m (2 kgf.cm)

(4) Connect the two wires to the printed wiringboard of the CTL head. (Refer to (1) of step 2of “Removal”.)nNever make mistake of colors and connec-tions of the wires when soldering them. Anymistake results in severe troubles of tapeinterchangeability.

PS2 x 5

Red Gray

CTL head

CTL headSoldering

7-56 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Installation

3. Installing the FE/CTL head assembly(1) Align the respective position-setting pins

with the reference holes of the FE/CTL headassembly with the mechanical deck assembly,and install the FE/CTL head assembly withthe three precision screws.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)

(2) Connect the harness of the FE/CTL headassembly to the connector CN505 on theMDC-13G board.

4. Cleaning FE/CTL head assemblyClean the CTL head, FE head, tape cleaner andtape guide using a cleaning cloth moistened withcleaning fluid.nAfter cleaning, be sure to wipe the cleaning fluidoff the cleaned portions using a dry cleaningcloth.


CN505

MDC-13G board


Reference hole

Reference hole








8. CTL head position adjustment (Refer to Section 8-2-4.)

9. CUE/TC head position adjustment (Refer to Section 8-2-8.)

7-57HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-13. FE Head Replacement


Removing the FE/CTL head assemblyFE head replacementInstalling the FE/CTL head assemblyCleaning FE/CTL head assembly

Adjustment after replacementTape run adjustment

cThe tape cleaner that is attached to the FE head has the cleaning blade.The cleaning blade has the sharp edge that can cut your hands. Never touch thecleaning blade with bare hands. Be careful also not to cut your hands during CTLhead replacement and adjustments.

Preparations


nThe FE head can be replaced when the cassette compartment attaches to the unit.

Tools





7-58 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Removal

1. Removing the FE/CTL head assembly(1) Remove the connector CN505 on the MDC-


remove the FE/CTL head assembly from theunit.

nBe careful not to touch the screwdriver againstthe video head, drum, erase head, tape guide andother parts.


CN505

FE/CTL headassembly

MDC-13G board

PS2 x 5

WhiteBlack

FE head

FE head

FE head

Soldering

Head CTL plate assembly

Cleaning

2. FE head replacement(1) Remove soldering from the two wires that are

connected to the FE head.(2) Remove the screw from the rear of the FE

head and remove the FE head.(3) Clean the contact surface. Push the new FE

head toward the Head CTL plate assembly asfor as it can go, and fix it with screw.The standard tightening torque value :20 x 10_2 N.m (2 kgf.cm)

(4) Solder the two wires to the printed wiringboards of the FE head. (Refer to (1) of step 2of “Removal”.)nNever make mistake of colors and connec-tions of the wires when soldering them.

7-59HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Installation

3. Installing the FE/CTL head assembly(1) While aligning the position-setting pins of the

new full FE/CTL head assembly with thereference holes of the mechanical deckassembly respectively, install the FE/CTLhead assembly with three precision screws.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)

(2) Connect the harness of the FE/CTL headassembly to the connector CN505 on theMDC-13G board.

4. Cleaning FE/CTL head assemblyClean the CTL head, FE head, tape cleaner andtape guide using a cleaning cloth moistened withcleaning fluid.nAfter cleaning, be sure to wipe the cleaning fluidoff the cleaned portions using a dry cleaningcloth.


CN505

MDC-13G board



Reference hole

Reference hole





7-60 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-14. Holder Assembly Sensor (REC) Replacement


Removing the holder assembly sensor (REC)Installing the holder assembly sensor (REC)Operation check

Preparations


Removal

1. Removing the holder assembly sensor(REC)

While holding down the two claws with a pair oftweezers, remove the holder assembly sensor(REC) by pulling it up.

Holder assembly sensor (REC)

Claw

Claw

7-61HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Installation

2. Installing the holder assembly sensor(REC)

Insert the bosses and claws of the new holderassembly sensor (REC) into four holes of theMDC-13G board and install the new holderassembly sensor (REC).

3. Operation checkCheck that the detection pin moves up and downsmoothly, and returns to the original position.

MDC-13G board

Holder assembly sensor (REC)

Claw

Claw

Boss

Boss

Holes

Holes

7-62 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-15. End Sensor Assembly Replacement


Removing the end sensor assemblyInstalling the end sensor assembly

Preparations


nEnd sensor assembly can be replaced when the cassette compartment attaches to theunit.

Tools



Removal

1. Removing the end sensor assembly(1) Remove the precision screw fixing the end

sensor assembly.(2) While removing the connector CN509 on the

MDC-13G board, remove the end sensorassembly.

Installation

2. Installing the end sensor assembly(1) While aligning the two position-setting pins

on the bottom of the end sensor assemblywith the reference holes of the MD framerespectively, connect the end sensor assemblyconnector CN509 on the MDC-13G board.

(2) Install the new end sensor assembly with theprecision screw.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)


MDC-13G board(CN509)

End sensor assembly

Position-setting pins

Position-setting holes

7-63HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-16. Full Top Sensor Assembly Replacement


Removing the full top sensor assemblyInstalling the full top sensor assembly

Preparations


nThe full top sensor assembly can be replaced when the cassette compartmentattaches to the unit.

Tools



Removal


(1) Remove the precision screw that fixes the fulltop sensor assembly.

(2) While removing the connector CN512 on theMDC-13G board, remove the full top sensorassembly.

Installation

2. Installing the full top sensor assembly(1) While aligning the position-setting pin on the

bottom of the new full top sensor assemblywith the slot of the cassette stopper, connectthe connector to CN512 on the MDC-13Gboard.

(2) Push the full top sensor in the direction allowof A until top of the full top sensor holdercontacts the lower drum surface and installthe full top sensor with the precision screw.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)


MDC-13G board (CN512)

A

TopFull top sensor assembly


Slot of the cassette stopper

7-64 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-17. S1, T1, T3 Tape Guide Replacement

Because the T4 tape guide is fixed, it cannot be replaced. Do not rotate the upperflange with excessive force.Replace the following tape guides in units of block.. S2 tape guide (Refer to Section 7-32.). S3/S4 tape guide (Refer to Section 7-30.). S5 tape guide (Refer to Section 7-21.). T2 tape guide (Refer to Section 7-33.). T5 Tape guide (Refer to Section 7-22.)


Removing the tape guideInstalling the tape guideCleaning of tape guide


Tape guide height adjustment

m. The tape guides have the various shape, but the same replacement procedure apply

to all of them.. When two or more tape guides are going to be replaced, replace tape guides one

guide after another and perform adjustment at every replacement. Adjusting thetwo or more tape guides at the same time is extremely difficult.

. The set screws on top of each tape guide must be tightened with the followingtightening torque.The standard tightening torque value : 9 x 10_2 N.m (0.9 kgf.cm)

Preparations


Tools

. Screwdriver (tool) TG adjustment (45) : J-6322-420-B





7-65HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Removal

1. Removing the tape guide(1) Install the screwdriver (Tool) TG adjustment

on top of the upper flange as shown.Loosen the set screw on top of tape guide byrotating it by 1/4 turn counter-clockwise.

(2) Rotate the knob of the screwdriver (Tool) TGadjustment itself counter-clockwise andremove the upper flange.

(3) Remove the tape guide.At this point, the lower flange and thecompression (coil) (ST) spring can beremoved.

Compression (coil) (ST) spring

Lower flange*

Upper flange

Upper flange

Tape guide

Tape guide

Screwdriver (Tool) TG adjustment

Set screw

Installation

2. Installing the tape guide(1) Install the compression (coil) (ST) spring to

the guide shaft.(2) Install the lower flange to the guide shaft.(3) Install the tape guide to the guide shaft.(4) Screw-in the upper flange to the guide shaft

as far as it can go.

nWhen the upper flange or the set screw is re-placed, establish the state that the set screwexceeds the top surface of the upper flange by 0.4mm for the S1 and T1 tape guides and 0.6 mm forthe T3 tape guide. Then perform step (4).

3. Cleaning of tape guideClean the tape guide using a cleaning clothmoistened with cleaning fluid.



4. Tape guide height adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-1.)

* : The T3 tape guide of the pinch arm assembly doesn't have a lower flange.

7-66 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-18. (S) Soft Brake Assembly Replacement


Removing the (S) soft brake assembly replacementInstalling the (S) soft brake assembly replacement


Note

If a tape hunts or slackens during the REW mode, replace the (S) soft brake assem-bly.

Preparations


Tools



Removal

1. Removing the (S) soft brake assemblyreplacement

Remove the two precision screws and the (S) softbrake assembly.



7-67HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Installation

2. Installing the (S) soft brake assembly(1) Align the position-setting pin and the posi-

tion-setting hole of the mechanical deckassembly, and fix it with two screws.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)






Band

S soft brake

S reel table assembly

nCheck that the S soft brake assembly arm ispressing the band as shown.



7-68 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-19. T Soft Brake Replacement


Removing the T soft brakeInstalling the T soft brake


Note

If a tape hunts or slackens during the REW mode, replace the T soft brake.

Preparations


nThe T Soft Brake can be replaced when the cassette compartment attaches to the unit.

nThe stop washer is used to fix the T soft brake.Prepare a new stop washer (3-559-408-11) when replacing it.

Brake spring

T soft brake

Stop washerTools




Removal

1. Removing the T soft brake(1) Remove the extension spring from the T soft

brake.(2) Remove the stop washer and remove the T

soft brake.

7-69HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Installation

2. Installing the T soft brake(1) Install the new T soft brake to the shaft of

mechanical deck assembly and fix it with thenew stop washer.

(2) Install the extension spring that is removed instep 1 (1).


T soft brake

Stop washer

Brake spring

Shaft

nCheck that the T soft brake is pressing down theband as shown.

T reel tableassembly

Band

T soft brake



7-70 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-20. Manual Eject Assembly Replacement


Removing the manual eject assemblyInstalling the manual eject assemblyOperation check

Preparations


nManual eject assembly can be replaced when the cassette compartment attaches tothe unit.

Tools



Removal

1. Removing the manual eject assemblyRemove the precision screw and manual ejectassembly in the direction of the arrow.

nThe mount shaft contains the compression (coil)(ST) spring inside. Be careful not to lose it.



Manual eject assembly

7-71HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Installation

2. Installing the manual eject assemblyInstall the new compression (coil) (ST) springand the new manual eject assembly into themount shaft and fix it with precision screw.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)

3. Operation check(1) Check that the manual eject gear (A) returns

when it is pressed once and then depressed.(2) Push in the manual eject gear (A) and then

rotate it. Check that it moves smoothly.


Mount shaft


Manual eject assembly


7-72 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-21. S-Tension Regulator Assembly Replacement


Moving the S3 tape guideRemoving the S-tension regulator band assemblyRemoving the end sensor assemblyRemoving the S-tension regulator assemblyInstalling the S-tension regulator assemblyInstalling the S-tension regulator band assemblyInstalling the end sensor assemblyCleaning of tape guide of S-tension regulator arm (S5)Moving the S3 tape guide

Adjustments after replacementS-Tension regulator operating position adjustmentFWD back tension adjustmentTape run adjustmentCapstan add-on recording adjustment

Preparations


Tools



. Torque cassette (FWD back tension) : J-6323-890-A



Note

The S-tension regulator assembly has the built-in plate spring and requires periodicapplying grease.Refer to Section 2-2-4 for applying grease to the plate spring.

7-73HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Removal

1. Moving the S3 tape guideRotate the manual eject gear (A) counter-clock-wise until the S3 tape guide is located at thespecified position as shown.


Remove the S-tension regulator band assemblythat is connected to the S-tension regulatorassembly.(Refer to Section 7-8.)

3. Removing the end sensor assemblyRemove the precision screw and the end sensorassembly.(Refer to Section 7-15.)

4. Removing the S-tension regulatorassembly

Remove the two precision screws and S-tensionregulator assembly in the direction of the arrow.nApply grease to the leaf spring of the S-tensionregulator assembly as required.(Refer to Section 2-2-4.)

Precision screwsM1.4 x 3.5

S-tension regulator assembly

S3 tape guide

7-74 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Installation

5. Installing the S-tension regulatorassembly

Insert the bearing holder block of the new S-tension regulator assembly into the reference holeand fix it with the two precision screws in the orderstarting from 1 then 2.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N. m (1.0 kgf.cm)


Install the S-tension regulator band assembly.(Refer to Section 7-8.)

7. Installing the end sensor assemblyFix the end sensor assembly with screw.(Refer to Section 7-15.)

8. Cleaning of tape guide of S-tensionregulator arm (S5)

Clean the S-tension regulator arm (S5) tape guideusing a cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.After cleaning, be sure to wipe the cleaning fluidoff the cleaned portions using a dry cleaning cloth.

9. Moving the S3 tape guideRotate the manual eject gear (A) clockwise untilthe S3 tape guide returns to the original position.


10. S-tension regulator operating positionadjustment





Precision screwsM1.4 x 3.5

Reference hole

S-tension regulator assemblyS5 tape guide (cleaning)

Bearing holder block

S3 tape guide

1

2

7-75HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-22. T-Tension Regulator Assembly Replacement


Removing the T-tension regulator band assemblyRemoving the T-tension regulator assemblyInstalling the T-tension regulator assemblyInstalling the T-tension regulator band assemblyCleaning of tape guide of T-tension regulator arm (T5)

Adjustments after replacementFWD back tension adjustmentTape run adjustmentCapstan add-on recording adjustment

Preparations


nThe stop washer is used to fix the T-tension regulator assembly.Prepare two new stop washers (3-559-408-11) when replacing it.

Tools





. Oil : 7-661-018-18

7-76 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Removal


(1) Remove the extension spring from the T-tension regulator arm.

(2) Remove the stop washer and remove the T-tension regulator band assembly passingunderneath the T-tension regulator arm.

2. Removing the T-tension regulatorassembly

(1) Remove the stop washer and remove the T-tension regulator assembly.m. The release plate comes off at the same

time. Be careful not to lose it.. Depending on the time of production at the

factory, there are sets that have no releaseplate.

T-tensionregulator assembly

Stop washer

Release plate

Stop washer

T-tension regulator arm

Extension spring

T-tension regulatorband assembly

T5 tape guide

7-77HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Installation

3. Installing the T-tension regulatorassembly

(1) Clean the mount shaft.(2) Install the release plate in the new T-tension

regulator assembly as follows.1. Insert the protruded portion of the release

plate into the hole of the T-tensionregulator assembly. Then rotate it in thedirection of A.

2. Align the hole of the release plate with thetop of the shaft. (Fig.1)

(3) Install the new T-tension regulator assemblyto the mount shaft with the new stop washer.

(4) Install the extension spring that is removed instep 1 (1) of “Removal”.

4. Installing the T-tension regulator bandassembly

Engage the hook of the T-tension regulator bandassembly on the T-tension regulator arm shaftpassing underneath the T-tension regulator arm.

m. When installing the stop washer, do not apply

excessive force to the T-tension regulator arm.. When installing it, be careful not to bend the T-

tension regulator band assembly that results indamage.

. Do not touch the felt surface of the T-tensionregulator band assembly with hands. Alsonever attach oil on the felt surface.

5. Cleaning of tape guide of T-tensionregulator arm (T5)

Clean the T-tension regulator arm (T5) and tapeguide using a cleaning cloth moistened withcleaning fluid.






A

Fig1

Extension spring

T5 tape guide (cleaning)T-tension regulator

assembly

T-tension regulator assembly

Stop washer

Mount shaft (coat it with oil after cleaning)

Stop washer

Hole of the T-tension regulator arm

Hook

Shaft of the T-tension regulator arm

Release plate

Hole

Hole

Protrusion of therelease plate

T-tension regulatorband assembly

Top of the shaft

7-78 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-23. Cassette Stopper Replacement

Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the following procedure.)

Removing the full top sensor assemblyRemoving the cassette stopperInstalling the cassette stopperInstalling the full top sensor assembly

Note

Be careful not to touch the drum, tape guides and stationary heads all through the replacement work.

Preparations


nThe cassette stopper can be replaced when the cassette compartment attaches to the unit.

Tools



7-79HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Removal


(Refer to Section 7-16.)

2. Removing the cassette stopper(1) Rotate the worm wheel with a phillips

screwdriver clockwise until the screw underthe threading arm assembly becomes visible.

Worm wheel

(2) Remove the two precision screws andremove the cassette stopper.

Threading arm assembly

Cassette stopper


Installation

3. Installing the cassette stopperInstall the cassette stopper with two precisionscrews.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)

4. Installing the full top sensor assembly(Refer to Section 7-16.) Cassette stopper

Pinch roller assemblyPrecision screwsP1.4 x 3.5

7-80 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-24. Gear Block Assembly Replacement


Checking phaseRemoving the cleaning assemblyRemoving the gear block assemblyInstalling the gear block assemblyOperation checkInstalling the cleaning assembly

Preparations


Tools



Removal

1. Checking phase(1) Check that the claw of the gear mount plate

of the gear block (B) is aligned with thetriangle mark of the cam gear assembly.(Fig. 1)

(2) Check that the entire horizontal bar mark ofgear (C) is visible from the gear mount plate(B) of the gear block assembly. (Fig. 2)

Fig 1

Fig 2Gear mount plate (B) of the gear block assembly

Cam gear assembly

Triangle mark of the cam gear assembly

Claw of the gear mount plate of the gear block (B)

Horizontal bar mark of Gear (C)

7-81HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

2. Removing the cleaning assemblyRemove the precision screw and cleaning assem-bly.(Refer to Section 7-6.)

3. Removing the gear block assemblyRemove the three precision screws. Whileremoving the gear block assembly, disconnect theharness from the connector (CN501) on theMDC-13G board.




Connector (CN501) on the MDC-13G board

Gear block assembly

7-82 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Installation

4. Installing the gear block assembly (1) Check that the claw of the gear mount plate

of the gear block (B) is aligned with thetriangle mark of the cam gear assembly.(Fig. 1)

(2) Check that the hole of the press cam gear isaligned with the hole of the mechanical deckassembly. (Fig. 2)

(3) Check that the round mark of the gear(cleaning) is facing toward the manual ejectgear (A)’s mount shaft. (Fig. 3)

(4) Check that the entire horizontal bar mark ongear (C) is visible from the gear mount plate(B) of the new gear block assembly. (Fig. 4)

(5) Connect the connector of the gear blockassembly to the connector (CN501) on theMDC-13G board and fix the three precisionscrews.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)

5. Operation checkRotate the manual eject gear (A) (red gear) andcheck that the threading and the unthreadingoperations are performed smoothly.

nDo not rotate the manual eject gear (A) more thannecessary. If rotated excessively, it results indamage of the unit.

6. Installing the cleaning assemblyInstall the cleaning assembly with the precisionscrew.(Refer to Section 7-6.)



Connector


Fig.4

Fig.3

Fig.2

Fig.1

Gear mount plate (B) of the gear block assembly

Horizontal bar mark of Gear (C)

Mount shaft of manual eject gear (A) Gear (cleaning)

Hole

Gear block assembly

Hole of press cam gear(This hole must be aligned with the corresponding hole in the mechanical deck assembly underneath.)

Cam gear assembly

Triangle mark of the cam gear assembly Claw of the gear

mount plate of the gear block (B)

Press cam gear

7-83HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-25. S Reel Table Replacement and T Reel Table Replacement

Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the following procedure.)

Removing the S-tension regulator band assembly (Only when S reel table assembly is replaced)Removing the T-tension regulator band assembly (Only when T reel table assembly is replaced)Removing the reel tableCleaning the reel shaftCleaning the reel tableInstalling the reel table (1)Reel table height adjustmentInstalling the reel table (2)Installing the S-tension regulator band assembly (Only when S reel table assembly is replaced)Installing the T-tension regulator band assembly (Only when T reel table assembly is replaced)Operation check

Adjustments after replacementFWD back tension adjustment (Only when S reel table assembly is replaced)REV back tension adjustment (Only when T reel table assembly is replaced)Tape run adjustmentS tension regulator operating position adjustment (Only when S reel table assembly is replaced)T tension regulator operating position adjustment (Only when T reel table assembly is replaced)Capstan add-on recording adjustment

Note

Height of reel tables becomes the reference of the entire tape running system. When reel table is replaced,be sure to perform the reel table height adjustment.

Preparations


m. The stop washer is used to fix the S and T reel tables respectively.

Prepare a new stop washer (3-559-408-11) when replacing them.. The three poly-washers are used under and above the S and T reel tables. The poly-washer (t 0.13 : 3-

303-961-01) that is attached above a reel table is reserved as the spare poly-washer in case of need afterreel table is replaced. Be careful not to lose or damage the poly-washers.

Tools



. Reel table height gauge : J-6324-150-A

. Cassette reference plate : J-7032-610-C



7-84 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Removal

1. Removing the S-tension regulatorband assembly (Only when S reeltable assembly is replaced)


2. Removing the T-tension regulatorband assembly (Only when T reeltable assembly is replaced)


3. Removing the reel table(1) Remove the stop washer fixing the reel table

with a pair of tweezers.(2) Remove the poly-washer(s) (1 or 2 washers).(3) While pressing the soft brakes out of their

positions with finger, remove the reel table.

nThere are cases that the poly-washer that is placedunderneath the reel table comes with the reel tablewhen it is removed. In such case, be sure to returnall of the poly-washer to the reel table.

T soft brake

Stop washer

Stop washer

Poly-washer (1 or 2 washers)



T reel table assembly

S soft brake

7-85HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Installation

4. Cleaning the reel shaftClean the reel shaft using a cleaning clothmoistened with cleaning fluid.

5. Cleaning the reel table(1) Clean the surface of a reel table, that contacts

the tension regulator band assembly using acleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.

(2) Wipe the bottom surface of the reel table withdry cloth.

6. Installing the reel table (1)While pressing the soft brake arm out of theirposition with finger, install the reel table to thereel shaft.

7. Reel table height adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-1.)

8. Installing the reel table (2)(1) Install the poly-washers that are not used in

step 7 (becoming extra poly-washers), to thereel shaft.

(2) Fix the reel table with the new stop washer.(3) Move the reel table up and down to confirm

that there is a play. If there is no play, removea single piece of poly-washer from the top ofthe reel table.

9. Installing the S-tension regulator bandassembly (Only when S reel tableassembly is replaced)


10. Installing the T-tension regulator bandassembly (Only when T reel tableassembly is replaced)


11. Operation checkWhile pressing the soft brake out of their positionwith finger, rotate the reel to confirm that the reeltable and the S/T idler assemblies rotate smooth-ly.

Stop washer

Stop washer




Bottom surface (wipe with dry cloth.)

Contact surface (cleaning). S reel table

assembly

Reel shaft (cleaning)

Reel shaft (cleaning)

S soft brake

Poly-washer

S idler assembly

T idler assemblyT soft brake

Poly-washer


7-86 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Adjustments after replacement

12. FWD back tension adjustment(Only when S reel table assembly isreplaced.)(Refer to Section 8-1-3.)

13. REV back tension adjustment(Only when T reel table assembly isreplaced)(Refer to Section 8-1-4.)



(Only when S reel table assembly isreplaced)(Refer to Section 8-1-2.)

16. T tension regulator operating positionadjustment

(Only when T reel table assembly isreplaced)(Refer to sect 8-1-6.)


7-87HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-26. Reel Drive Gear Assembly Replacement


Removing the FG magnet coverRemoving the timing beltRemoving the reel drive gear assemblyInstalling the reel drive gear assemblyInstalling the timing beltInstalling the FG magnet cover

Adjustments after replacementTiming belt tension adjustmentCapstan add-on recording adjustment

Preparations

1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Open the inside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-5.)4. Removing the plug-in boards (Refer to Section 1-7.)5. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)6. Removing the SS-92G board (Refer to Section 6-20.)

nReel drive gear assembly replacement can be performed in the state that mechanicaldeck assembly is being installed in the unit.

Tools




7-88 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Removal

1. Removing the FG magnet cover(Refer to Section 7-10.)

2. Removing the timing belt(Refer to Section 7-10.)

3. Removing the reel drive gearassembly

Remove the three precision screws and removethe reel drive gear assembly.





7-89HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Installation

4. Installing the reel drive gear assemblyInstall the new reel drive gear assembly withthree precision screws.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)

m. Check that the shaft of the one way base

assembly has entered the slot of the link (S)assembly.

. Check that the shaft of the gear base assemblyhas entered the groove of the mechanical deckassembly. Check also that the pin of themechanical deck assembly has entered the holeof the gear base assembly.

5. Installing the timing belt(Refer to Section 7-10.)

6. Installing the FG magnet cover(Refer to Section 7-10.)




Groove of mechanical deck assembly

Hole of gear base assembly

One way base assembly


Shaft of gear base assembly

Pin of mechanicaldeck assembly

Hole of link (S) assembly




7-90 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-27. Holder Assembly Sensor (ID) Replacement


Removing the full top sensor assemblyRemoving the cassette stopperRemoving the holder assembly sensor (ID)Installing the holder assembly sensor (ID)Operation checkInstalling the cassette stopperInstalling the full top sensor assembly

Preparations

1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)

nHolder assembly sensor (ID) can be replaced when the cassette compartmentattaches to the unit.

Removal



2. Removing the cassette stopper(Refer to Section 7-23.)

3. Removing the holder assembly sensor(ID)

While pressing the claws at the three locationswith a pair of tweezers, remove the holderassembly sensor (ID) by pulling it up.

Claws

Claw

Holder assembly sensor (ID)

7-91HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Installation

4. Installing the holder assembly sensor(ID)

Install the new holder assembly sensor (ID) byinserting the bosses and claws into the five holeson the MDC-13G board.

5. Operation checkCheck that the detection pin moves up and downsmoothly and also returns to the original position.

6. Installing the cassette stopper(Refer to Section 7-23.)

7. Installing the full top sensor assembly(Refer to Section 7-16.)

MDC-13G board

Detection pins Detection pins

Boss

Boss

Claws

Claw

Holder assembly sensor (ID)

Holes

Holes

Hole

7-92 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-28. Top Sensor Assembly Replacement


Removing the cleaning assemblyRemoving the gear block assemblyRemoving the top sensor assemblyInstalling the top sensor assemblyInstalling the gear block assemblyInstalling the cleaning assembly

Preparations


Tools



Removal

1. Removing the cleaning assembly(Refer to Section 7-6.)

2. Removing the gear block assembly(Refer to Section 7-24.)

3. Removing the top sensor assemblyRemove the two precision screws. While removing the connector (CN508) on theMDC-13G board, remove the top sensor assembly.

7-93HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Installation

4. Installing the top sensor assembly(1) Align the position-setting pin of the new top

sensor assembly with the reference hole. Atthe same time while holding the lower flangeof the T4 tape guide as shown, connect theconnector of the top sensor to the connector(CN508) on the MDC-13G board.

(2) Install the top sensor with precision screw.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)

5. Installing the gear block assembly(Refer to Section 7-24.)

6. Installing the cleaning assembly(Refer to Section 7-6.)



Top sensor assembly


Connector

Top sensor holder

T4 tape guide

T4 tape guideReference hole

7-94 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-29. Pinch Arm Assembly Replacement


Removing the T-tension regulator assemblyRemoving the pinch arm assemblyCleaning the mount shaftApplying oil to the mount shaftInstalling the pinch arm assemblyInstalling the T-tension regulator assemblyCleaning the pinch roller assembly

Adjustments after replacementTape run adjustmentCapstan add-on recording adjustment

Preparations


nThe stop washer is used to fix the pinch arm assembly.Prepare a new stop washer (3-559-408-11) when replacing it.

Tools




. Oil : 7-661-018-18

7-95HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Removal


Remove the stop washer and remove T-tensionregulator assembly.(Refer to Section 7-22.)

2. Removing the pinch arm assembly(1) Rotate the manual eject gear (A) using

phillips screwdriver counter-clockwise untilthe pinch roller assembly is completelydisengaged from the rib of the cassettestopper.

(2) Remove the stop washer with a pair oftweezers and remove the pinch arm assembly.

Stop washer

Pinch arm assembly

Rib of cassette stopper

7-96 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Installation

3. Cleaning the mount shaftClean the mount shaft and bearing using acleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.

4. Applying oil to the mount shaftApply a 1/2 drop of oil to the mount shaft andbearing respectively.

5. Installing the pinch arm assembly(1) While running the cam groove of the arm

assembly through the bearing, install themount shaft to the pinch arm assembly mountshaft.

(2) Fix the new stop washer.


Fix the T-tension regulator assembly with thenew stop washer. (Refer to Section 7-22.)

7. Cleaning the pinch roller assembly(1) After installing it, clean the pinch roller

assembly surface using a cleaning clothmoistened with cleaning fluid.

(2) Rotate the manual eject gear (A) usingphillips screwdriver clockwise until theunthreading-end state is established.

Bearing of F link assembly (Apply oil after cleaning)

Pinch roller assembly (Cleaning after installation)

Pinch arm assembly

Stop washer

Cam groove of arm assembly

Mount shaft (Apply oil after cleaning)




7-97HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-30. Threading Arm Assembly Replacement


Removing the S-tension regulator band assemblyRemoving the S-tension regulator assemblyRemoving the threading arm assemblyCleaning the mount shaftApplying oil to the mount shaftInstalling the threading arm assemblyInstalling the S-tension regulator assemblyInstalling the S-tension regulator band assemblyCleaning the guide of the S-tension regulator (S5)Cleaning the guide of the threading arm assembly (S4)

Adjustments after replacementS3 guide height adjustmentS-Tension regulator operating position adjustmentFWD back tension adjustmentTape run adjustment

Note

Height of S3 guides becomes the reference of the entire tape running system.When threading arm assembly is replaced, be sure to adjust the S3 guide height.

Preparations


nThe stop washer is used to fix the threading arm assembly.Prepare a new stop washer (3-559-408-11) when replacing it.

Tools



. S3 guide height check tool : J-6531-270-A





. Oil : 7-661-018-18

7-98 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Removal





3. Removing the threading arm assemblyRemove the stop washer and remove threadingarm assembly.

nBe careful not to lose the S arm spring because itjumps out when the threading arm is removed.

Installation

4. Cleaning the mount shaftClean the mount shaft and the bearing using acleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.

5. Applying oil to the mount shaftApply a 1/2 drop of oil to the mount shaft andbearing respectively.

Threading arm assemblyStop washer

Drawer S rink assembly

S arm spring

S3 tapeguide

Roller

S cam assembly

7-99HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6. Installing the threading arm assembly(1) Pass the “A” portion of the S arm spring

through the hole of the new threading armassembly and hook it on the shaft. Then hookthe “B” portion of the S arm spring on thespring stay.

Shaft


Spring stayHole

A portion

B portionS arm spring

S3 tapeguide(cleaning)

S4 tape guide(cleaning)

Stop washer


B portion of S arm spring

Spring stay of mechanical deckassembly

Groove of the S cam assembly

Roller of S link drawer assembly (Apply oil after cleaning)

Mount shaft (Apply oil after cleaning)

(2) Pass the groove of the S cam assembly on thethreading arm assembly through the rollerand hook it on the mount shaft. Then removethe “B” portion of the S arm spring from thespring stay and re-hook it on the spring stayof the mechanical deck assembly.

(3) Fix the threading arm assembly with the newstop washer.

7-100 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7. Installing the S-tension regulator assembly(Refer to Section 7-21.)

8. Installing the S-tension regulator band assembly(Refer to Section 7-8.)

9. Cleaning the guide of the S-tension regulator arm (S5)(Refer to Section 7-21.)

10. Cleaning the threading arm assembly (S4)Clean the guides of the threading assembly (S3, S4) using a cleaning cloth moist-ened with cleaning fluid.nAfter cleaning, be sure to wipe the cleaning fluid off the cleaned portions using a drycleaning cloth.


11. S3 guide height adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-7.)

12. S-Tension regulator operating position adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-2.)



7-101HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-31. CUE/TC Head Assembly Replacement


Removing the cleaning assemblyRemoving the gear block assemblyRemoving the guide plate assemblyRemoving the CUE/TC head assemblyCUE/TC head replacementInstalling the CUE/TC head assemblyInstalling the guide plate assemblyInstalling the gear block assemblyInstalling the cleaning assemblyCleaning the CUE/TC head assembly

Adjustments after replacementTape run adjustmentVideo tracking adjustmentCUE/TC head height adjustmentCTL head position adjustmentCUE/TC head position adjustmentAudio system alignment

Preparations


Tools




. Hexagon bit (across 1.5) : J-6326-120-A



7-102 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Removal

nNever loosen nor tighten the screws that are notspecified below when replacing the CUE/TC headassembly. Doing to gives adverse effect on CUE/TC head azimuth and zenith that results inadverse effect on tape running condition andvideo tracking adjustment.

1. Removing the cleaning assemblyRemove the precision screw and cleaning assem-bly.(Refer to Section 7-6.)

2. Removing the gear block assemblyRemove the three precision screws and removethe gear block assembly.(Refer to Section 7-24.)

3. Removing the guide plate assemblyRemove the two precision screws and remove theguide plate assembly .

4. Removing the CUE/TC head assembly(1) Remove the connector (CN506) on the MDC-


remove the CUE/TC head assembly.


Guide plateassembly


Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5 Precision screw

P1.4 x 3.5


CUE/TC head assembly

7-103HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

5. CUE/TC head replacement(1) Remove the screw (PSW2 x 4) and hexagon

socket bolt (2 x 4) and remove the CUE/TChead from shield case.

(2) Remove soldering of the four wires that areconnected to the CUE/TC head printedwiring board and connect the wires to thenew head by soldering.

nDo not make mistake of soldering positionsof the wires.

PSW2 x 4

Hexagon socket 2 x 4 bolt

Shield case CUE/TC head

Soldering

Soldering

WHT

RED

GRY

BLK

PSW2 x 4

Head assembly


Shield case

CUE/TC head

Harness

(3) Install the CUE/TC head in a shield case.Pass the harness through the head assemblyand fix it with the screw (PSW2 x 4) andhexagon socket bolt (2 x 4).The standard tightening torque value :20 x 10_2 N.m (2 kgf.cm) (PSW2 x 4)30 x 10_2 N.m (3 kgf.cm)(hexagon socket 2 x 4 bolt)

7-104 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Installation

6. Installing the CUE/TC head assembly(1) Insert the position-setting pins of the TC head

assembly and the mechanical deck assemblyinto the reference holes and fix them with thethree precision screws.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)

(2) Connect the connector of the CUE/TC headassembly to the connector (CN506) on theMDC-13G board.

(3) While removing extra play of harness in thedirection of the arrow, route the harnessalong with the groove of mechanical deckassembly.

7. Installing the guide plate assemblyInstall the guide plate assembly with the twoprecision screws.nWhen installing the guide plate assembly, becareful not to pinch the harness between the guideplate assembly and mechanical deck assembly.

8. Installing the gear block assemblyInstall the gear block assembly with the threeprecision screws.(Refer to Section 7-24.)

9. Installing the cleaning assemblyInstall the cleaning assembly with the precisionscrew.(Refer to Section 7-6.)

10. Cleaning the CUE/TC head assemblyClean the CUE/TC head using a cleaning clothmoistened with cleaning fluid.nAfter cleaning, be sure to wipe the cleaning fluidoff the cleaned portions using a dry cleaningcloth.

CN506

CN506

MDC-13G board

Connector



Harness

Guide plateassembly

Harness

Top view




Reference hole

Referencehole



Groove of mechanical deck assembly

7-105HDW-F900R/V1 (E)




13. CUE/TC head height adjustment (Refer to Section 8-2-5.)

14. CTL head position adjustment (Refer to Section 8-2-4.)

15. CUE/TC head position adjustment (Refer to Section 8-2-8.)

16. Audio system alignment(Refer to Section 10-2.)

7-106 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-32. S Slider Assembly Replacement


Removing the full top sensor assemblyRemoving the S-tension regulator band assemblyRemoving the S-tension regulator assemblyRemoving the threading arm assemblyRemoving the cassette stopperRemoving the S railRemoving the S slider assemblyInstalling the S slider assemblyInstalling the S railGear chain phase adjustmentInstalling the cassette stopperInstalling the threading arm assemblyInstalling the S-tension regulator assembly replacementInstalling the S-tension regulator band assemblyInstalling the full top sensor assemblyOperation checkCleaning the heads and tape running surface

Adjustments after replacementS-Tension regulator arm operating position adjustmentFWD back tension adjustmentTape run adjustment

Note

Be careful not to touch the drum, tape guides and stationary heads all through thereplacement work.

Preparations


nThe stop washer is used to fix the S slider assembly.Prepare three new stop washers (3-559-408-11) when replacing it.

7-107HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Tools







Removal


Remove the precision screw and full top sensorassembly.(Refer to Section 7-16.)


Remove the stop washer and remove the S-tension regulator band assembly.(Refer to Section 7-8.)


Remove the two precision screws and S-tensionregulator assembly.(Refer to Section 7-21.)

4. Removing the threading arm assemblyRemove the stop washer and the threading armassembly.(Refer to Section 7-30.)

5. Removing the cassette stopperRemove the two precision screws and remove thecassette stopper.(Refer to Section 7-23.)

6. Removing the S rail(1) Remove the six precision screws and remove

the stop washer.(2) Raise the front of the S rail in the direction of

arrow A first, and then remove the S railtogether with the S slider assembly in thedirection of arrow B.nWhen removing the stop washer, do notapply excessive force to the S gear assembly.

A

B





S slider assemblyStop washer

S gear assembly

S rail

7-108 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7. Removing the S slider assemblySlide the S slider back toward rear and removethe S slider assembly from the S rail.

S slider assembly

S rail

S2 tape guide

Pin 1

Pin 2Pin 3

Pin 4Pin 5

S2 tape guide (plastic roller)

S1 tape guide

S slider assembly

S rail

Holder

Installation

8. Installing the S slider assemblyInsert the pins of the new S slider assembly intothe groove of the S rail in the order starting frompin 1 through pin 5 until the S slider assembly isinserted in the S rail holder.

m. Do not make mistake of the order of pins when

inserting the them. (The tape guide S2 must belocated before the tape guide S1.)

. Do not apply excessive force to the S sliderassembly and to the S rail.

. After they are installed, check that the pinheads have not come out off the S rail groove.

7-109HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9. Installing the S rail(1) Insert the claw on the rear of the S rail to the

bottom of the S plate assembly and lower thefront of the S rail in the direction of A.

(2) Insert the pin of the S gear assembly into thehole of the S link assembly and fix it with thenew stop washer.nDo not apply excessive force to the S gearassembly when installing the stop washer.

(3) Install the S rail with the six precision screws.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)

10. Gear chain phase adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-8.)

11. Installing the cassette stopperInstall the cassette stopper with the precisionscrew.(Refer to Section 7-23.)

12. Installing the threading arm assemblyInstall the threading arm assembly with the newstop washer.(Refer to Section 7-30.)

13. Installing the S-tension regulatorassembly replacement

Install the S-tension regulator assembly with thetwo precision screws.(Refer to Section 7-21.)


Install the S-tension regulator band assembly withthe new stop washer.(Refer to Section 7-8.)

15. Installing the full top sensor assemblyInstall the full top sensor assembly with theprecision screw.(Refer to Section 7-16.)

A





S slider assemblyStop washer

Hole of S link assembly

S rail

Pin of S gear assembly

S plate assembly

Claw of S rail

7-110 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

16. Operation checkRotate the worm wheel of the gear block assembly with a phillips screwdriver andcheck that the threading and unthreading operations are performed smoothly.(Refer to Section 7-1-4.)

nDo not rotate the worm wheel more than necessary. Otherwise it may damage theunit.

17. Cleaning the heads and tape running surfaceClean the following places using a cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.. Video head (Refer to Section 2-1-2.). Upper drum tape running surface (Refer to Section 2-1-2.). Lower drum rabbet guide and tape running surface (Refer to Section 2-1-3.). All tape guides and pinch roller assembly (Refer to Section 2-1-5.)

nAfter cleaning, be sure to wipe the cleaning fluid off the cleaned portions using a drycleaning cloth.


18. S-tension regulator arm operating position adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-2.)



7-111HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-33. T Slider Assembly Replacement


Removing the full top sensor assemblyRemoving the T-Tension regulator assemblyRemoving the pinch arm assemblyRemoving the cassette stopperRemoving the T railRemoving the T slider assemblyInstalling the T slider assemblyInstalling the T railGear chain phase adjustmentInstalling the cassette stopperInstalling the pinch arm assemblyInstalling the T-tension regulator assemblyInstalling the full top sensor assemblyOperation checkCleaning the heads and tape running surface

Adjustment after replacementTape run adjustment

Note

Be careful not to touch the drum, tape guides and stationary heads all through thereplacement work.

Preparations


nThe stop washer is used to fix the T slider assembly.Prepare a new stop washer (3-559-408-11) when replacing it.

Tools







7-112 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Removal


Remove the precision screw and full top sensorassembly.(Refer to Section 7-16.)


Remove the stop washer and remove the T-tension regulator assembly.(Refer to Section 7-22.)

3. Removing the pinch arm assemblyRemove the stop washer and remove the pincharm assembly.(Refer to Section 7-29.)

4. Removing the cassette stopperRemove the two precision screws and remove thecassette stopper.(Refer to Section 7-23.)

5. Removing the T rail(1) Remove the T soft brake.(2) Remove the six precision screws and remove

the washer.(3) Raise the front of the T rail in the direction of

arrow A first, and then remove the T railtogether with the T slider assembly in thedirection of arrow B.nWhen removing the stop washer, do notapply excessive force to the T gear assembly.

A

B





T gear assembly

T slider assembly

T rail

Brake spring of T soft brake

Stop washer

7-113HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6. Removing the T slider assemblySlide the T slider assembly in the direction of thearrow and remove it from the T rail.

T rail

T slider assembly

Tape guide T2

Installation

7. Installing the T slider assemblyInsert the pins of the new T slider assembly intothe groove of the T rail in the order starting frompin 1 through pin 4 until the T slider assembly isinserted in the T rail holder.m. Do not make mistake of the order when insert-

ing the pins. (The tape guide T2 must belocated before the tape guide T1.)

. Do not apply excessive force to the T sliderassembly and to the T rail.

. After they are installed, check that the pinheads have not come out off the rail groove.

Tape guide T1

Tape guide T2

Pin 4

Pin 3

T rail

Pin 1

Pin 2

T slider assembly

7-114 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

8. Installing the T rail(1) Insert the claw on the rear of the T rail to the

bottom of the T plate assembly and lower thefront of the T rail in the direction of A.

(2) Insert the pin of the T gear assembly into thehole of the T link assembly and fix it with thenew stop washer.nDo not apply excessive force to the T gearassembly when installing the stop washer.

(3) Install the T rail with six screws.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)

(4) Install the spring of the T soft brake.

9. Gear chain phase adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-8.)

10. Installing the cassette stopperInstall the cassette stopper with two precisionscrews.(Refer to Section 7-23.)

11. Installing the pinch arm assemblyInstall the pinch arm assembly with the new stopwasher.(Refer to Section 7-29.)


Install the T-tension regulator assembly with thenew stop washer.(Refer to Section 7-22.)

13. Installing the full top sensor assemblyInstall the full top sensor assembly precisionscrew.(Refer to Section 7-16.)

A





T rail

Stop washer

T slider assembly

Hole of T link assembly

T plate assembly

Drum

Brake spring of T soft brake

Pin of T gear assembly

7-115HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

14. Operation checkRotate the worm wheel of the gear block assembly with a phillips screwdriver andcheck that the threading and unthreading operations are performed smoothly.(Refer to Section 7-1-4.)nDo not rotate the worm wheel more than necessary. Otherwise it may damage theunit.

15. Cleaning the heads and tape running surfaceClean the following places using a cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.. Video head (Refer to Section 2-1-2.). Tape running surface of upper drum (Refer to Section 2-1-2.). Rabbet guide and tape running surface of lower drum

(Refer to Section 2-1-3.). All tape guides and pinch roller assembly. (Refer to Section 2-1-5.)

nAfter cleaning, be sure to wipe the cleaning fluid off the cleaned portions using a drycleaning cloth.



7-116 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-34. Cam Gear Assembly Replacement


Removing the cleaning assemblyRemoving the gear block assemblyRemoving the full top sensor assemblyRemoving the cassette stopperRemoving the drum assemblyRemoving the T-tension regulator band assemblyRemoving the T-tension regulator assemblyRemoving the pinch arm assemblyRemoving the CUE/TC head assemblyRemoving the T sliderRemoving the F link assemblyRemoving the eject link assembly (A)Removing the eject link assembly (B)Removing the cam gear assemblyCleaning the mount shaft of the cam gear assemblyApplying oil to the mount shaftInstalling the cam gear assemblyCleaning the mount shaft of eject link assemblyApplying grease to the mount shaftApplying oil to the joint blockInstalling the eject link assembly (B)Installing the eject link assembly (A)Cleaning the mount shaft of the F link assemblyApplying oil to the rollerInstalling the F link assemblyInstalling the T slider assemblyInstalling the CUE/TC head assemblyInstalling the pinch arm assemblyInstalling the T-tension regulator assemblyInstalling the T-tension regulator band assemblyInstalling the drum assemblyInstalling the cassette stopperInstalling the full top sensor assemblyInstalling the gear block assemblyInstalling the cleaning assembly

7-117HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Preparations

1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)4. Check that the machine is in the unthreading-end state.

nThe stop washer is used to fix the cam gear assembly.Prepare the 10 new stop washers (3-559-408-11) when replacing it.

nCam gear assembly can be replaced when the mechanical deck assembly attaches tothe unit..

Tools




. Oil : 7-661-018-18

. Grease (SGL-601) : 7-651-000-10

. Grease (SGL-801) : 7-651-000-11

Removal

1. Removing the cleaning assemblyRemove the precision screw and cleaning assembly.(Refer to Section 7-6.)

2. Removing the gear block assemblyRemove the three precision screws and remove the gear block assembly.(Refer to Section 7-24.)

3. Removing the full top sensor assemblyRemove the precision screw and remove the full top sensor assembly.(Refer to Section 7-16.)

4. Removing the cassette stopperRemove the two precision screws and remove the cassette stopper.(Refer to Section 7-23.)

5. Removing the drum assemblyRemove the two screws and remove the drum assembly.(Refer to Section 7-3.)

7-118 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)


Remove the two stop washers and remove the T-tension regulator band assembly.(Refer to Section 7-9.)


Remove the stop washer and remove the T-tension regulator assembly.(Refer to Section 7-22.)

8. Removing the pinch arm assemblyRemove the stop washer and remove the pincharm assembly.(Refer to Section 7-29.)

9. Removing the CUE/TC head assemblyRemove the three precision screws and removethe CUE/TC head assembly.(Refer to Section 7-31.)

10. Removing the T slider assemblyRemove the stop washer and remove the sixprecision screws. Remove the T slider assembly.(Refer to Section 7-33.)

11. Removing the F link assemblyRemove the stop washer and remove the F linkassembly.

12. Removing the eject link assembly (A)Remove the stop washer and remove the ejectlink assembly (A).

13. Removing the eject link assembly (B)Remove the two stop washers and remove theeject link assembly (B).

14. Removing the cam gear assemblyRemove the stop washer and remove the cam gearassembly.

Cam gear assembly

Eject link assembly (A)

Eject link assembly (B)F link assembly

Stop washer

Stop washer

Stop washers

7-119HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Installation

15. Cleaning the mount shaft of the camgear assembly

Clean the mount shaft using a cleaning clothmoistened with cleaning fluid.nAfter cleaning, be sure to wipe the cleaning fluidoff the cleaned portions using a dry cleaningcloth.

16. Applying oil to the mount shaftApply a 1/4 drop of oil to the mount shaft of thecam gear assembly.

17. Installing the cam gear assembly(1) Rotate the ST gear arm pin of the T gear

assembly counter-clockwise until top of thearm is positioned just on top of the boss ofthe mechanical deck assembly.

(2) Remove the protection sheet from the newcam gear assembly.nBe careful not to attach the dust and scar onthe seal of the cam gear assembly.

(3) While aligning the triangle mark of the camgear assembly with the claw of the gear block(B) assembly, install it to the shaft of themechanical deck assembly.

(4) Install the new stop washer.(5) Apply grease to the area (shaded area )

of the cam gear assembly.

Mount shaft (cleaning)

Cam gear assembly

Stop washer

Apply grease here

Triangle mark of cam gear assembly

ST arm pin of T gear assembly

Claw of gear block (B) assembly

Boss of mechanical deck assembly

7-120 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

18. Cleaning the mount shaft of eject linkassembly


19. Applying grease to the mount shaftApply grease to the mount shaft of the eject linkassembly.

20. Applying oil to the joint blockApply a 1/4 drop of oil to the joint block of theeject link assembly.

21. Installing the eject link assembly (B)(1) While inserting the brake link shaft of the

eject link assembly into the groove of thecam gear assembly as shown, install it to thetwo shafts of the mechanical deck assembly.

(2) Install the two new stop washers.

22. Installing the eject link assembly (A)(1) While aligning the link shaft of the eject link

assembly (A) with the shaft mechanical deckassembly, install it.


23. Cleaning the mount shaft of the F linkassembly


24. Applying oil to the rollerApply a 1/4 drop of oil to the roller of the F linkassembly.

25. Installing the F link assembly(1) While inserting the link (A) shaft of the F

link assembly with the groove of the camgear assembly as shown, install it to theframe shaft.


Joints of eject link assembly (B) (Apply oil)

Stop washer

Stop washer

Stop washer

Stop washer

Brake link shaft of F link assembly (B)

Roller of F link assembly (Apply oil)

Link shaft of eject link assembly (B)

Shaft of mechanical deck assembly

Eject link assembly (A)

Mount shaft (Apply grease after cleaning)

Mount shaft (Apply grease after cleaning)

Link (A) shaft of F link assembly

7-121HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

26. Installing the T slider assemblyInstall the T slider assembly with six precision screws.(Refer to Section 7-33.)

27. Installing the CUE/TC head assemblyInstall the CUE/TC head assembly with three precision screws.(Refer to Section 7-31.)

28. Installing the pinch arm assemblyInstall the pinch arm assembly with new stop washer.(Refer to Section 7-29.)

29. Installing the T-tension regulator assemblyInstall the T-tension regulator assembly with new stop washer.(Refer to Section 7-22.)

30. Installing the T-tension regulator band assemblyInstall the T-tension regulator band assembly with new stop washer.(Refer to Section 7-9.)

31. Installing the drum assemblyInstall the drum assembly with the two screws.(Refer to Section 7-3.)

32. Installing the cassette stopperInstall the cassette stopper with two precision screws.(Refer to Section 7-23.)

33. Installing the full top sensor assemblyInstall the full top sensor assembly with precision screw.(Refer to Section 7-16.)

34. Installing the gear block assemblyInstall the gear block assembly with the three precision screws.(Refer to Section 7-24.)

35. Installing the cleaning assemblyInstall the cleaning assembly with the precision screw.(Refer to Section 7-6.)

7-122 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-35. Mechanical Deck Assembly Removal/Installation


Removing the mechanical deck assemblyInstalling the mechanical deck assembly

Adjustment after installationTape Run Adjustment

Preparations

1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Open the inside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-5.)4. Removing the plug-in boards (Refer to Section 1-7.)5. Removing the SS-92G board (Refer to Section 6-20.)

nRemoval and installation of mechanical deck assembly can be performed in the statethat the cassette compartment is being installed in the unit.

Tools

. Hexagon bit (across 1.5 m) : J-6326-120-A


Removal

1. Removing the mechanical deckassembly

(1) Remove the flexible card wire from theconnector (CN4) on the MDR-14G board andthe connector (CN101) on the MB-1096board.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantlyshortened if it is folded. Be very careful notto fold the flexible card wire.

MB-1096 board

MDR-14G board

CN101

CN4

Flexible card wires

7-123HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

(2) Remove the FL-283 printed wiring boardfrom the connector (CN1) on the CCM-45Gboard.nLife of the FL-283 printed wiring board issignificantly shortened if folded. Be carefulnot to fold it.

(3) While removing the cable retainer 2 from thenotch, remove the FL-283 printed wiringboard and remove it.

CCM-45G board

CN1


Cable retainer 2

Notch

Hexagon hole bolt (M2 x 8) (with drop safe)


Hexagon hole bolts (M2 x 8) (with drop safe)


(4) Loosen the five hexagon hole bolts (withdrop-safe) completely with hexagon bit.

7-124 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

(5) Hold the cassette stopper and cassettecompartment arm, and lift up the mechanicaldeck assembly gently.

nIf the cassette compartment assembly isalready removed, hold the cassette stopperand cassette guide pin to lift it up.


Cassette guide pins




7-125HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Installation

2. Installing the mechanical deckassembly

(1) Align the position-setting hole with theposition-setting pin of the mechanical deckassembly, and install it.

(2) Fix the five hexagon hole bolts (with drop-safe) using the hexagon bit.The standard tightening torque value :30 x 10_2 N.m (3 kgf.cm)

(3) Install it by reversing the steps of removal.
















Adjustment after Installation

3. Tape run adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2.)

7-126 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-36. MDC-13G Board Replacement


Removing the mechanical deck assemblyRemoving the full top sensor assemblyRemoving the end sensor assemblyRemoving the cleaning assemblyRemoving the gear block assemblyRemoving the top sensor assemblyRemoving the FG magnet coverRemoving the timing beltRemoving the MDR-14G boardRemoving the MDC-13G boardInstalling the MDC-13G boardInstalling the MDR-14G boardInstalling the timing beltInstalling the FG magnet coverInstalling the top sensor assemblyInstalling the gear block assemblyInstalling the cleaning assemblyInstalling the end sensor assemblyInstalling the full top sensor assemblyInstalling the mechanical deck assembly

Adjustments after replacementAudio system alignmentServo system adjustment data initializationCapstan FG duty ratio adjustmentCapstan add-on recording adjustmentDrum phase adjustment

Preparations

1. Perform steps 1 and 2 of “11-3-8. A91 : MDC-13 BOARD CHANGE”.2. Turn off the main power.3. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)4. Open the inside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-5.)5. Removing the plug-in boards (Refer to Section 1-7.)6. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)7. Removing the SS-92G board (Refer to Section 6-20.)

Tools




7-127HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Removal

1. Removing the mechanical deck assemblyLoosen the five screws and remove the mechanical deckassembly. (Refer to Section 7-35.)

2. Removing the full top sensor assemblyRemove the precision screw and remove the full top sensorassembly. (Refer to Section 7-16.)

3. Removing the end sensor assemblyRemove the precision screw and remove the end sensorassembly. (Refer to Section 7-15.)

4. Removing the cleaning assemblyRemove the precision screw and remove the cleaningassembly. (Refer to Section 7-6.)

5. Removing the gear block assemblyRemove the three precision screws and remove the gearblock assembly. (Refer to Section 7-24.)

6. Removing the top sensor assemblyRemove the precision screw and remove the top sensorassembly. (Refer to Section 7-28.)

7. Removing the FG magnet coverRemove the precision screw and the step screw 2, andremove the FG magnet cover.

8. Removing the timing beltRemoving the timing belt.(Refer to Section 7-10.)

9. Removing the MDR-14G board(1) Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector

(CN3) of the MDR-14G board.m. Life of flexible card wire will be significantly

shortened if it is folded. Be very careful not to foldthe flexible card wire.

. When the removal work is performed with themechanical deck assembly removed, place a protec-tion sheet under the mechanical deck assembly.

(2) Remove the screws (two step screws, one precisionscrew). While removing the connector from the drumassembly, remove the MDR-14G board.

(3) Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN504) ofthe MDC-13G board.

Stepscrews

Connectors on drum assembly

Protection sheet


CN3

MDR-14G board

Connectors on theMDC-13G board (CN504)


Step screws 2

FG magnetcover

7-128 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

10. Removing the MDC-13G board(1) Disconnect the harness from the connectors

(CN505, CN506, CN507, CN510, CN511) onthe MDC-13G board.

MDC-13G board

Connector on the MDC-13G board (CN511)

Connector onthe MDC-13G board (CN506)

CN505

CN507

CN510

MDC-13G board


Precision screwsP1.4 x 3.5 Precision screws

P1.4 x 3.5

Connector gard(2) Remove the connector gard.

nDepending on the time of production at thefactory, there are sets that have no connectorgard.

(3) Remove the 13 precision screws and removethe MDC-13G board.

7-129HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Installation

11. Installing the MDC-13G board(1) Align the position-setting hole of the new MDC-13G

board with the position-setting pin of the mechanicaldeck assembly and install it with the 13 precisionscrews.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)

(2) Install the connector gard. (Fig.1)

12. Installing the MDR-14G boardInstall the MDR-14G board by reversing the steps ofremoval.

13. Installing the timing beltInstall the timing belt.(Refer to Section 7-10.)

14. Installing the FG magnet coverInstall the FG magnet cover by reversing the steps ofremoval.15. Installing the top sensor assemblyInstall the top sensor assembly with the precision screw.(Refer to Section 7-28.)

16. Installing the gear block assemblyInstall the gear block assembly with the three precisionscrews.(Refer to Section 7-24.)


18. Installing the end sensor assemblyInstall the end sensor with precision screw. (Refer to Section 7-15.)

19. Installing the full top sensor assemblyInstall the full top sensor assembly with precision screw.(Refer to Section 7-16.)

20. Installing the mechanical deck assemblyInstall the mechanical deck assembly with five screws.(Refer to Section 7-35.)






MDC-13Gboard

MDC-13G board

MDC-13Gboard

Connectorgard

Connectorgard

Fig1Shaft of mechanical deck assembly



View from the side

7-130 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)


21. Audio system alignment(Refer to Section 10-2.)

22. Servo system adjustment datainitialization


23. Capstan FG duty ratio adjustment(Refer to Section 10-5-2.)



nPerform the adjustments in the order starting from“23. Capstan FG duty ratio adjustment” and “24.Capstan add-on recording adjustment”.

7-131HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7-37. Capstan Motor Replacement


Removing the mechanical deck assemblyRemoving the cleaning assemblyRemoving the gear block assemblyRemoving the FG magnet coverRemoving the timing beltRemoving the capstan motorInstalling the capstan motorCleaning the capstan motor shaftInstalling the timing beltInstalling the FG magnet coverInstalling the gear block assemblyInstalling the cleaning assemblyInstalling the mechanical deck assemblyOperation check of the manual eject gear (A)

Adjustments after replacementTiming belt tension adjustmentCapstan FG duty ratio adjustmentTape run adjustmentCapstan add-on recording adjustment

Preparations

1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Open the inside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-5.)4. Removing the Plug-in Boards (Refer to Section 1-7.)5. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)6. Removing the SS-92G Board (Refer to Section 6-20.)

Tools






7-132 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Removal

1. Removing the mechanical deckassembly

Loosen the five screws and remove the mechani-cal deck assembly.(Refer to Section 7-35.)

2. Removing the cleaning assemblyRemove the screw and remove the cleaningassembly.(Refer to Section 7-6.)

3. Removing the gear block assemblyRemove the three precision screws and removethe gear block assembly.(Refer to Section 7-24.)

4. Removing the timing beltRemove the timing belt.(Refer to Section 7-10.)

5. Removing the FG magnet coverRemove the precision screw and step screw 2,and remove the FG magnet cover.(Refer to Section 7-36.)

6. Removing the capstan motor(1) Remove the connector from the capstan

printed wiring board.nWhen the capstan motor removal is per-formed with the mechanical deck assemblyremoved, place a protection sheet under themechanical deck assembly.

Protection sheet

Connector on the capstan motor board

7-133HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

(2) While holding the capstan motor with hands,remove the two screws from the mechanicaldeck assembly and remove the capstan motorfrom the mechanical deck assembly.nBe careful not to drop the capstan motor.

PS2 x 5

Capstan motor

Installation

7. Installing the capstan motor(1) Install the new capstan motor by reversing

the steps of removal.The standard tightening torque value :20 x 10_2 N.m (2 kgf.cm)

nWhen inserting the capstan motor through thehole of mechanical deck assembly, be carefulnot to touch the capstan motor shaft againstthe mechanical deck assembly. Doing soresults in damage to the capstan.

(2) Connect the connector to the capstan printedwiring board that is removed in step 6 (1).

nConnection of the connector is easy to forget.Be careful that the connector is re-connected.

7-134 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

8. Cleaning the capstan motor shaftClean the capstan motor shaft using a cleaning clothmoistened with cleaning fluid.nAfter cleaning, be sure to wipe the cleaning fluid off thecleaned portions using a dry cleaning cloth.

9. Installing the timing beltInstall the timing belt. (Refer to Section 7-10.)

10. Installing the FG magnet coverInstall the FG magnet cover with the precision screw andthe step screw 2. (Refer to Section 7-36.)

11. Installing the gear block assemblyInstall the gear block assembly with the three precisionscrews. (Refer to Section 7-24.)


13. Installing the mechanical deck assemblyInstalling the mechanical deck assembly with five screws.(Refer to Section 7-25.)

14. Operation check of the manual eject gear (A)Rotate the manual eject gear (A) of the gear block assem-bly with a phillips screwdriver and check that the threadingand unthreading operations are performed smoothly. (Referto Section 7-1-4.)nDo not rotate the manual eject gear (A) more than neces-sary. Otherwise it may damage the unit.



16. Capstan FG duty ratio adjustment(Refer to Section 10-5-2.)

17. Tape run adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2.)

18. Capstan add-on recording adjustment(Refer to Section 10-5-3.)nPerform the above adjustments in the order starting from“16. Capstan FG duty ratio adjustment” , “17.Tape run adjustment ” and “18. Capstan add-on record-ing adjustment ”

Capstan motor shaft (cleaning)

8-1HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Section 8Mechanical Adjustment

8-1. Mechanical Adjustment

1. Automatic adjustment of mechanismThis unit has the automatic adjustment function as the mechanism adjustment menu in addition to theother adjustment menus and self-diagnosis.The respective menus of the automatic adjustment are shown on viewfinder and the video monitor whichis connected to the TEST OUT connector.The mechanical adjustment consists of the menu and submenus. It has the following structure.

Menu Submenu Adjustment item

A4 : MECHANISM ADJUST A40 : PATH MODE SEL x1 REV SEARCH

REC HEAD PB

SLACK MUTE

CASSE ID MUTE

A41 : DRUM PHASE

8-2 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

2. Mechanism adjustment mode(A4 : MECHANISM ADJUST)

This menu sets the items that are required for mechanism adjustment.

nImplement this menu item before starting the mechanism adjustment.

Operating procedure1. Let the display show the top menu of VTR MAINTE menu.

(Refer to Section 11-2-2.)2. Press the rotary encoder. (When a cassette tape is inserted, it is

ejected automatically.)3. Select A4 : MECHANISM ADJUST and press the rotary encoder.

The message “ MECHANISM ADJUST MENU” appears.

MECHANISM ADJUST MENU

A40:PATH MODE SEL A41:DRUM PHASE

A40 : PATH MODE SEL

Contents of this menu item are all saved even after the VTR mainte-nance menu is set to OFF. However, the contents return to OFF whenthe main power is turned off.1. Select “A40 : PATH MODE SEL” on the MECHANISM AD-

JUST MENU display and press the rotary encoder.2. Select the desired item to change its setting and press the rotary

encoder.

MECHANISM ADJUST MENUA40:PATH MODE SEL

X1 REV SEARCH : OFF REC HEAD PB : OFF SLACK MUTE : OFF CASSE. ID MUTE : OFF

3. The question mark (?) appears in the left of the ON/OFF.4. Rotate the rotary encoder to switch ON/OFF. Press the rotary

encoder to set ON/OFF.Setting contents of each menu itemx1 REV SEARCH OFF : _4 times speed (normal SEARCH speed)

ON : _1 time speedREC HEAD PB OFF : Normal playback

ON : Playback from the recording headSLACK MUTE OFF : When an error occurs, an error code

appears in the display window and theunit stops its operation.

ON : When an error occurs, an error code isnot displayed and the unit does notstop its operation.

CASSE. ID MUTE OFF : Only the HD cassette tape and acleaning cassette tape can be accepted.

ON : Any types of cassette tape can beaccepted.

A41 : DRUM PHASE

This menu item is exactly same as those of “11-3-4. SERVO SystemAdjustment Mode (A003 : DRUM PHASE)”. Refer to Section 11-3-4.


X1 REV SEARCH : OFF REC HEAD PB : ?OFF SLACK MUTE : ON CASSE. ID MUTE : OFF

8-3HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

8-1-1. Reel Table Height Adjustment

Notes

. Height of reel tables becomes the reference of the entire tape running system.When reel table is replaced, be sure to perform the reel table height adjustment.

. The three polywashers are used under and above the S and T reel tables.The polywasher that is attached above a reel table is reserved as the spare poly-washer in case of need after reel table is replaced.Be careful not to lose or damage the polywashers.Polywasher t0.25 (1 piece) : 3-303-961-11Polywasher t0.13 (2 pieces) : 3-303-961-01

. For the S and T reel table replacement, refer to Section 7-25.

Preparations

1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)

Tools

. Reel table height gauge : J-6324-150-A

. Cassette reference plate : J-7032-610-C

8-4 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Adjustment Procedure

1. Installing the cassette reference plateInstall the cassette reference plate to fit thecassette poles (2 poles).Rotate the adjustment screws of the cassettereference plate until the cassette reference platehas no play.

2. Reel table height checkMove the reel table height gauge at every about120 degrees on the flange surface of the S and Treel table assemblies. Check to see that thespecification is satisfied.If the specification is not satisfied, adjust it byperforming step 3.

3. Reel table height adjustmentAdjust the reel table height by increasing/decreas-ing the number of polywashers under the reeltable.. If height of reel table is lower than the specifi-

cations :Remove the polywasher above the reel tableand insert it under the reel table.

. If height of reel table is higher than the specifi-cations :Remove the polywasher under the reel tableand insert it above the reel table.

Confirm again that the specification is satisfied.

Adjustment screw

Cassette pole

Reel table height gauge

Cassette pole



Cassette reference plate

Specifications :

. Height difference between the blocking surface and passing surface : 0.2 mm

Cassette reference plate

Flange surface

S/T reel table assembly

Passing surface

Blocking surface

Reel table height gauge

The reel table height gauge must pass the passing surface and must be blocked by the blocking surface.

8-5HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

8-1-2. S Tension Regulator Operating Position Adjustment

Note

When the S-tension regulator band assembly and the S reel table assembly isreplaced, be sure to perform the S tension regulator operating position adjustment.

Preparations

1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)

Tools



Check Procedure

1. Setting up the modeRotate the manual eject gear (A) counter-clockwise until the unit reaches thethreading-end state.(Refer to Section 7-1-4.)

8-6 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

2. S Tension Regulator OperatingPosition Check

Confirm that the round hole of the S tensionregulator assembly can be viewed through thesquare hole of the end sensor holder.nCheck that the round hole is not damaged whenviewed from the top.

If the specification is not satisfied, performadjustment as described in step 3.



(1) Loosen the adjustment screw of the link (S)assembly by 1/2 turn.

(2) Insert the 3 mm flat head screwdriver tip intothe adjustment hole of the link (S) assemblyand adjust position of the link (S) assemblyuntil the specification is satisfied.

(3) While maintaining the screwdriver setup asstep (2), tighten the adjustment screw of thelink (S) assembly.Standard tightening torque :20 x 10_2 N.m (2.0 kgf.cm)

(4) Confirm that the operating position of thetension regulator satisfies the specifications,following step (2).

4. Releasing the modeRotate the manual eject gear (A) clockwise untilthe unit reaches the unthreading-end state.(Refer to Section 7-1-4.)

5. S5 tape guide height check(Refer to Section 8-2-1.)


Adjustment screw(PSW2 x 5)

Adjustment hole


Link (S) assembly

End sensor holder

Square hole of the end sensor holder


Round hole of the S-tension regulator assembly

8-7HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

8-1-3. FWD Back Tension Adjustment

Note

When the S-tension regulator band assembly or the S reel table assembly is replaced,or when the S tension regulator operating position adjustment is performed, be sureto perform the FWD back tension adjustment.

Preparations

Remove the front lid and the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)

nThis adjustment is recommended to be performed with the cassette compartmentinstalled.If the cassette compartment is not installed, the photo interrupter (cassette compart-ment lock switch) on the MDC-13G board must be covered by a piece of blackpaper to interrupt the incoming light to establish the cassette-lock state. At the sametime, place a weight on top of cassette tape so that the cassette tape will not be raisedout of position for this adjustment.For the cassette compartment lock switch, refer to “7-1-3. Threading-End State/Unthreading-End State”.

Tool

Torque cassette (FWD back tension) : J-6323-890-A

8-8 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Check Procedure

Set the CASSE. ID MUTE to ON using the VTRmaintenance menu, A40 : PATH MODE SEL.(Refer to Section 11-3-7.)

1. Enter the REC state(1) Turn on the main power.(2) Insert the torque cassette (FWD back tension)

and press the REC button to enter the RECstate.

2. FWD back tension checkCheck that the supply side meter reading of thetorque cassette (FWD back tension) satisfies thespecifications.

Specification: 0.0044 ±0.0004 N.m (44 ±4g f.cm)

If the specification is not satisfied, check whetherthe value is larger or small than the specifiedvalue and then go to step 3.

Adjustment Procedure3. Enter the EJECT state(1) Press the REC button to release the REC

state.(2) Press the EJECT button and remove the

torque cassette (FWD back tension).

4. Back tension adjustmentChange the hook position to which the spring(lock lever) (coil) (ST) of the S-tension regulatorassembly is engaged.

Adjustment point. When the tension is larger than the specified

value, change the hook position in the directionof [_] to which the spring (lock lever) (coil)(ST) is engaged.

. When the tension is smaller than the specifiedvalue, change the hook position in the directionof [+] to which the spring (lock lever) (coil)(ST) is engaged.

5. FWD back tension check afteradjustment

Perform steps 1 and 2 of the check procedure andconfirm that the specification is satisfied.

MW

– 389

+ _

Torque Cassette (FWD back tension)

Cassette compartment assembly

Specifications : 0.0044 ±0.0004 N.m (44 ±4 gf.cm)

Supply side meter

Spring (lock lever) (coil) (ST)


8-9HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

8-1-4. REV Back Tension Adjustment

Note

When the T-tension regulator band assembly or the T reel table assembly isreplaced, or when the T tension regulator operating position adjustment is per-formed, be sure to perform the REV back tension adjustment.

Preparations

Remove the front lid and the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)

nThis adjustment is recommended to be performed with the cassette compartmentinstalled.If the cassette compartment is not installed, the photo interrupter (cassette compart-ment lock switch) on the MDC-13G board must be covered by a piece of blackpaper to interrupt the incoming light to establish the cassette-lock state. At the sametime, place a weight on top of cassette tape so that the cassette tape will not be raisedout of position for this adjustment.For the cassette compartment lock switch, refer to “7-1-3. Threading-End State/Unthreading-End State”.

Tool

Torque cassette (FWD back tension) : J-6323-890-A

8-10 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Check Procedure

Set the CASSE. ID MUTE to ON using the VTRmaintenance menu, A40 : PATH MODE SEL.(Refer to Section 11-3-7.)

1. Enter the REV xxxxx 1 state(1) Turn on the main power.(2) Insert the torque cassette (FWD back tension).(3) Set the x 1 REV SEARCH to ON using the

VTR maintenance menu, A40 : PATHMODE SEL.

(4) After pressing the PLAY button, press theREW button.(Both the PLAY and REW buttons on thekeyboard turn on.)By doing this, the unit enters the REV x 1 state.

2. REV back tensionCheck that the take-up side meter reading of thetorque cassette (FWD back tension) satisfies thespecifications.

Specification: 0.0049 ±0.001 N.m (50 ±10 gf.cm)

The value should be kept within the specificationeven with a fluctuation.

If the specification is not satisfied, check whetherthe value is larger or small than the specifiedvalue and then go to step 3.


3. Enter the EJECT state(1) Press the STOP button to exit the REV x 1 state.(2) Press the EJECT button to remove the torque

cassette (FWD back tension).

4. Back tension adjustmentChange the hook position to which the adjustmentspring of the T-tension regulator assembly isengaged.

Adjustment point. When the tension is larger than the specified

value, change the hook position in the directionof [_] to which the spring is engaged.

. When the tension is smaller than the specifiedvalue, change the hook position in the directionof [+] to which the spring is engaged.

5. REV back tension check after theadjustment

Perform steps 1 and 2 of the check procedure andconfirm that the specification is satisfied.

MW

– 389

Cassette compartment assembly

Torque Cassette (FWD back tension)S idler assembly

T-tension regulator arm assemblyTake-up side meter

Specifications : 0.0049 ±0.001 N.m (50 ±10 gf.cm)

+

_


T5 tape guide

8-11HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

8-1-5. Timing Belt Tension Adjustment

Note

When the reel drive gear assembly, capstan motor or timing belt is replaced, be sureto adjust the belt tension.

Preparations

1. Confirm that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.2. Remove the front lid and the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)

Tools




1. Timing belt tension adjustmentnBelt tension is automatically determined bythe tension coil spring for belt tension 1 inthe illustration.

(1) Disengage the tension coil spring from thehook as shown 2 in the illustration.

(2) Loosen the adjustment screw of the reel drivegear assembly by 1/2 turn to 1 turn.

(3) Push the pulley base assembly in the direc-tion of the arrow. While holding the pulleybase assembly with hands so as not to beraised from the position that is returned bythe spring force, tighten the adjustmentscrew.Standard tightening torque :10 x 10_2 N.m (1.0 kgf.cm)

1

Disengage the spring

Pulley base assembly

Pulley base assembly

Adjustment screw

Screwdriver

Adjustment screw

Tension coil spring for belt tension

Tension coil springfor S one-way

Tension coil spring for belt tension

2 Tension coil springfor S one-way

8-12 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

8-1-6. T Tension Regulator Operating Position Adjustment

Note

When the T-tension regulator band assembly and the T reel table assembly isreplaced, be sure to perform the T tension regulator operating position adjustment.

Preparations

1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)4. Confirm that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.

Tools



Check Procedure

1. Setting up the modeRotate the manual eject gear (A) counter-clock-wise until the unit reaches the threading-end state.(Refer to Section 7-1-3.)

2. T tension regulator operating positioncheck

Specifications :The round hole of the pinch arm assembly can beviewed through the square hole of the T tensionregulator assembly.

m. Check that the round hole is not damaged when

viewed from the top.. If the specification is not satisfied, perform

adjustment as described in step 3.


T-Tension regulator band assembly

Pinch arm assembly

Round hole of pinch arm assembly

Eject link assembly (B)

Square hole of T-tension regulator assembly


Adjustment screw

Hole for adjustment

8-13HDW-F900R/V1 (E)


3. T tension regulator operating position adjustment(1) Loosen the adjustment screw of the eject link assembly (B) by 1/2 turn.(2) Insert the 3 mm flat head screwdriver tip into the adjustment hole of the eject

link assembly (B) and adjust position of the eject link assembly (B) until thespecification is satisfied.

(3) While maintaining the screwdriver setup as step (2), tighten the adjustmentscrew of the eject link assembly (B).Standard tightening torque : 20 x 10_2 N.m (2.0 kgf.cm)

(4) Confirm that the operating position of the T tension regulator satisfies thespecifications.

4. Releasing the modeRotate the manual eject gear (A) clockwise until the unit reaches the unthreading-end state. (Refer to Section 7-1-4.)

5. REV back tension adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-4.)

8-14 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

8-1-7. S3 Guide Height Adjustment

Note

Height of S3 guides becomes the reference of the entire tape running system.When threading arm assembly is replaced, be sure to perform the S3 guide heightadjustment.

Preparations

1. Confirm that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.2. Turn off the main power.3. Remove the front lid and the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)

Tools

. S3 guide height check tool : J-6325-380-A

. Tape guide adjustment screwdriver : J-6325-380-A

. Mirror (small oval type) : J-6080-840-A


1. Remove the FE/CTL head assembly.(Refer to Section 7-12.)

2. Attach the S3 guide height check tool untilthe following two requirements are satisfied.. Align the cut-out of the S3 guide height

check tool with the installation positionsetting pin.

. Insert the S3 guide height check tool intothe installation reference hole.

nAdjust both of the “O” side and the “X” sideuntil the specifications are satisfied. Eitherside can be used for this adjustment bysetting it against the S3 guide.

S3 guide of the threadingarm assembly S3 guide height check tool

Cut-out

Installation position setting pin

Mechanical deck assemblyInstallation reference hole

Pin

8-15HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

3. Confirm, using a small dental mirror, that theclearance between the lower flange of the S3guide and the S3 guide height adjustment toolsatisfies the specification 1 and 2.

If the specification is not satisfied, turn the S3guide with the tape guide adjustment screw-driver to adjust height of the S3 guide.. To lower the height : Turn clockwise.. To raise the height : Turn counterclockwise.

cWhen checking height of the S3 guide, neverpush down or push up the S3 guide.

S3 guide

S3 guide

Clearance must exist here.

Clearance must exist here.

S3 guide height check tool

S3 guide height check tool

X mark

O mark

Lower flange

Lower flange

Specification 1 :The X mark side of the S3 guide height adjustment tool has clearance between the specified side of the S3 guide and the S3 guide height adjustment tool as shown in theillustration.

Specification 2 :The O mark side of the S3 guide height adjustment toolhas clearance between the lower flange top and the S3guide height adjustment tool as shown in the illustration.

5 mm to 10 mmManual eject gear (A)

Threading arm

Stopper shaft

4. Upon completion of adjustment, remove theS3 guide height check tool.

5. Turn the manual eject gear (A) with Philips(+) head screwdriver.

6. After moving the threading arm away fromthe stopper shaft by 5 to 10 mm, set themachine into the threading-end state again.

7. Perform steps 1 to 3 of the adjustmentprocedure and confirm that the specification1 and 2 is satisfied.nPerform the adjustment until the specificationis satisfied.

8. Reattach the FE/CTL head assembly.(Refer to Section 7-12.)

9. Confirm height of the CTL head.(Refer to Section 8-2-3.)

10. Confirm position of the CTL head.(Refer to Section 8-2-4.)

11. Clean the FE/CTL head assembly.(Refer to Section 2-1-4.)

8-16 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Specification1 : The trapezoidal hole of the sub cam gear and the round hole of the S gear assembly must be facing each other.

Specification 2 :The round hole of the inter-mittent gear and the round holeof the T gear assembly must befacing each other.


Cam gear assemblyT slider assembly

HoleHoleS slider assembly

Roundhole

Round hole

Round hole

Trapezoidalhole

Sub cam gear S gear assembly

T gear assembly

Intermittentgear

8-1-8. Gear Chain Phase Adjustment

NoteThe gear chain phase serves as the reference of the entire tape running system.When the S gear assembly and the T gear assembly are out of phase each other, thegear chain phase adjustment must be executed.

Preparations1. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)2. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)

nWhen adjusting the T gear assembly, prepare the two new stop washers (3-559-408-11).

Tools


. Parallel pin (d = 2.0 mm) : 3-703-358-04

Check procedure

1. Establish the threading-end state ofmechanism as follows :

. When replacing the S slider assembly :(1) Rotate the manual eject gear (A) counter-

clockwise.(2) Check to see that the mechanism has

entered the state that is described “3. SGear Assembly Adjustment, step (2)”.

. When replacing the T slider assembly :(1) Rotate the manual eject gear (A) counter-

clockwise.(2) Check to see that the mechanism has

entered the state that is described “4. TGear Assembly Adjustment, step (2)”.

. When replacing the cam gear assembly :(1) Rotate the cam gear assembly clockwise.(2) Check to see that the mechanism has

entered the state that is described “4. TGear Assembly Adjustment, step (2)”.

2. Confirm the gear chain phase asfollows :

. When replacing the S slider assembly :Confirm that the specification 1 is satisfied.If the specification 1 is not satisfied, go to “3. Sgear assembly adjustment”.

. When replacing the T slider assembly or camgear assembly :Confirm that the specification 2 is satisfied.If the specification 2 is not satisfied, go to “4. Tgear assembly adjustment”.

8-17HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

S

T slider Manual eject gear (A)

T slider assemblyT gear assembly

Intermittent gear (the white gear that can be seenfrom the clearance of the T slider assembly)

Open


3. S gear assembly adjustment(1) Remove the S slider assembly.

(Refer to Section 7-32.)(2) Rotate the manual eject gear (A) counter-

clockwise until the mechanism reaches thethreading-end state.(Confirm that the intermittent gear stopsrotating and the specified portion of the Tgear assembly shown in the illustration, hasfully opened.)

cDo not rotate the intermittent gear after themechanism has reached the threading endstate. If the intermittent gear is kept rotating,it will damage the mechanical parts.

(3) To adjust coupling between the gears, slip offand on the S gear assembly until the roundhole of the S gear assembly faces rightopposite to the trapezoidal hole of the subcam gear. (Fig. 1)

(4) Insert the parallel pin (d = 2.0 mm) into thehole of the S gear assembly and the hole ofthe mechanism frame. (Fig. 2)Confirm that the round hole of the S gearassembly faces right opposite to thetrapezoidal hole of the sub cam gear. (Fig. 1)

(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) until the mechanismstate described in step (4) is obtained.

(6) When the adjustment is complete, remove theparallel pin and attach the S slider assembly.(Refer to Section 7-32.)

S

S

S

S gearassembly

Sub cam gear

Fig. 1 Fig. 2Round hole

Trapezoidalhole

Sub cam gear S gearassembly

Parallel pin(d = 2.0 mm) S gear

assembly

Hole Hole of mechanismframe

8-18 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

4. T gear assembly adjustment

(1) Remove the T slider assembly.(Refer to Section 7-33.).

(2) Enter the unit in the threading-end state.(Confirm that the intermittent gear stopsrotating and the specified portion of the Sgear assembly shown in the illustration, hasfully opened.). When replacing the T slider assembly :

Rotate the manual eject gear (A) counter-clockwise.

. When replacing the cam gear assembly :Rotate the cam gear assembly clockwise.

cDo not rotate the intermittent gear after themechanism has reached the threading endstate. If the intermittent gear is kept rotating,it will damage the mechanical parts.

T


Cam gear assembly

S slider

Open

S gear assembly Intermittent gear

T

T

T

Parallel pin(d = 2.0 mm)Hole of the S slider

assembly

Hole of mechanismframe

Hole of theS gear assembly

Fig. 1

Fig. 2 Fig. 3

T gear assembly

T gear assembly

T gear assembly

Intermittent gear

Intermittentgear

Intermittentgear

Roundhole

Round hole

Stop washer

(3) Fix the gear chain by inserting the parallelpin (d = 2.0 mm) from the hole of the S sliderassembly through the S gear assembly’s holeuntil it is inserted into the hole of themechanism frame. (Fig. 1)

(4) Remove the cam gear. (Refer to Section 7-34.)(5) Remove the stop washer and remove the

intermittent gear. (Fig. 2)(6) To adjust coupling between the gears, slip off

and on the T gear assembly or intermittentgear until the round hole of the T gearassembly faces right opposite to the roundhole of the intermittent gear. (Fig. 3)

(7) Attach the intermittent gear using the newstop washer.

(8) Attach the cam gear assembly using the newstop washer. (Refer to Section 7-34.)

(9) When the adjustment is complete, remove theparallel pin and attach the T slider assembly.(Refer to Section 7-33.)

8-19HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

8-2. Tape Run System Adjustment

Index

1. Identifying the parts of the tape run system

Drum entrance side (Unthreaded end state)

Drum exit side (Unthreaded end state)

CUE/TC head

S plate assemblyCapstan

Top sensor assembly

T4 tape guide

T3 tape guide(Pinch arm assembly)

T2 tape guide(T slider assembly)T1 tape guide

(T slider assembly)

Pinch roller assembly(Pinch arm assembly)

Rabbet guideVideo heads

T5 tape guide(T-tension regulator assembly)

Video heads

FE head block

T plate assembly

Cleaning blade

CTL head

Drum assembly

Rabbet guide


S1 tape guide(S slider assembly)

S4 tape guide(Threading arm assembly)

S3 tape guide(Threading arm assembly)

S5 tape guide(S-tension regulator assembly)

End sensor assembly

S2 tape guide(S slider assembly)

8-20 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

2. NotePerform the tape run system adjustment with the cassette compartment installed inthe unit.

3. Preparations(1) Set the POWER switch to OFF.(2) Remove the front lid and the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)(3) Clean the following portions with a cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.

(Refer to Sections 2-1-2, 2-1-3, 2-1-4, 2-1-5, 7-7 and 7-37.). Video heads. Upper drum tape running surface. Lower drum tape running surface and rabbet guide. Stationary heads. Cleaning blade. All tape guides. Capstan shaft. Pinch roller. S/T plate assembly. S/T slider foot assembly

4. Tools/measuring equipment. Screwdriver (tool) TG adjustment (45) : J-6322-420-B. Too, 0.89 bit (for repairing) (45) : J-6322-420-3. Hexagon bit (for torque screwdriver) (S : 1.5) : J-6326-120-A. HN-255 assembly : A-8315-553-A. Mirror (small oval type) : J-6080-840-A. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01. Blank tape (BCT-40HD) : Commercially available on market. Oscilloscope. Locking compound : 7-432-114-11. Skewer. Alignment tape HR2-1A : 8-960-076-11Contents of recording

*1 : Any segment of the alignment tape can be used for the CTL head height adjustment.

Timemin. : sec.

Video/AudioTrack

CTL Track

CTL 1 kHz, 0 VU

12 kHz, 0 VU

5.875 MHz(A ch only)

23.5 MHz(All ch)

A, C ch-5.875 MHz

A, C chFirst harf : 5.875 MHzLatter harf : 23.5 MHz

B, D chFirst harf : 23.5 MHzLatter harf : 5.875 MHz

. Video tracking adjustment

. CTL head position adjustment

. CUE head height adjustment

. CUE/TC head position adjustment

. CUE/TC head azimuth adjustment

. CUE/TC head tape-to-head contact adjustment

CUE Track Used in*1

00 : 00

15 : 00

20 : 00

25 : 00

30 : 00

(CTL Pulse)

8-21HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

8-2-1. Tape Run Adjustment

Perform the tape run adjustment only when the S1 tape guide or T1 tape guide or T3tape guide or other tape guide assemblies (S2 to S5, T2, T5) is replaced or when theparts such as stationary head in the tape run system are replaced.

Notes

. When the tape run adjustment is going to be started after parts of the tape runsystem are replaced, check first the tape running status and adjust its system usinga cassette tape BCT-40HD that is commercially available, to confirm that a tapecan run safe without damage.If a tape that does not have the CTL signal recording yet, is used, there can be acase that the tension regulator oscillates in the PLAY mode that makes the checkand adjustment works difficult. In such a case, use of a tape that has the CTLsignal recording, is recommended.Upon completion of the above check and adjustment, start the tape run check andfine adjustment using the alignment tape HR2-1A.

. In the following check and adjustment procedures, all procedures are premised onthe use of the alignment tape unless specific cassette tape is specified.

. Tighten the set screw on top of tape guide with the following tightening torque. 10 x 10_2 N.m (1.0 kgf.cm)

. When the adjustment is attempted, be sure to check the video tracking.Upon completion of the video tracking check, apply the locking compound on theset screw on top of tape guide.

Tools

. Screwdriver (Tool) TG adjustment (45) : J-6322-420-B

. Too, 0.89 bit (for repairing) (45) : J-6322-420-3


. Alignment tape HR2-1A : 8-960-076-11

. Cassette tape BCT-40HD : Commercially available on market

. Locking compound (1401B) : 7-432-114-11

Preparations

1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Turn ON the main power.

8-22 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Drum entrance side

Check Procedure

1. PLAY state (tape top portion)Enter the PLAY state using a tape top (from 01 :00 to 05 : 00) of the cassette tape BCT-40HD.Check to see that tape runs while satisfying thespecification 1.If the specification 1 is not satisfied, perform step7 and higher.

2. F FWD state (tape top portion)Enter the F FWD state using a tape top (from 01 :00 to 05 : 00) of the cassette tape BCT-40HD.Check to see that tape runs while satisfying thespecification 1.If the specification 1 is not satisfied, perform step7 and higher.

3. REW state (tape top portion)Enter the REW state using a tape top (from 01 :00 to 05 : 00) of the cassette tape BCT-40HD.Check to see that tape runs while satisfying thespecification 1.If the specification 1 is not satisfied, perform step7 and higher.

4. PLAY state (tape end portion)Enter the PLAY state using a tape end (from 35 :00 to 40 : 00) of the cassette tape BCT-40HD.Check to see that tape runs while satisfying thespecification 1.If the specification 1 is not satisfied, perform step7 and higher.

5. F FWD state (tape end portion)Enter the F FWD state using a tape end (from 35 :00 to 40 : 00) of the cassette tape BCT-40HD.Check to see that tape runs while satisfying thespecification 1.If the specification 1 is not satisfied, perform step7 and higher.

6. REW state (tape end portion)Enter the REW state using a tape end (from 35 :00 to 40 : 00) of the cassette tape BCT-40HD.Check to see that tape runs while satisfying thespecification 1.If the specification 1 is not satisfied, perform step7 and higher.

Specifications 1 :(A) S5 tape guide

Tape curl must not exist either upper flange and lower flange.Clearance must exist between tape and the upper flange during REW.

(B) S3 tape guideAmount of tape curl at the upper or lower flange must be smaller thanthe allowable limits.Amount of tape curl must be less than 1/10 of tape width.

(C) S2 tape guideAmount of tape curl at the upper or lower flange must be smaller thanthe allowable limits.Amount of tape curl must be less than 1/10 of tape width.

(D) S1 tape guideTape runs while keeping contact with the upper flange.Amount of tape curl at the upper or lower flange must be smaller thanthe allowable limits.Amount of tape curl must be less than 1/10 of tape width.

(E) Drum rabbet guideTape runs while keeping contact with the drum rabbet guide andmust not have any curl.

Drum assembly

S1 tape guide

S2 tape guide

CTL headFE head assembly

S3 tape guide

S4 tape guide

S5 tape guideEnd sensor assembly


Drum rabbet guideVideo heads

Tape runs while keeping contact with the upper flange.

S5 S4 S2 S1

FE head CTL head

Cleaning blade

Drum

Tape runs while keeping contact with the lower flange.


Tape Lower flange

Curl

Upper flange

Amount of tape curl must be less than 1/10 of tape width.

Drum rabbet guide. Allowance of tape curl

S3

Clearance must exist between tape and the upper flange during REW.

8-23HDW-F900R/V1 (E)


7. Tape guide height adjustment(1) Enter the PLAY state using the cassette tape

BCT-40HD.(2) Loosen the set screw on top of the guide with

the screwdriver (tool) TG adjustment, rotatethe upper flange until the specification 1 issatisfied.

nDo not rotate the upper flange clockwiseduring the S3 tape guide height adjustment.Only when the threading arm is replaced,make adjustment for the S3 tape guide heightby rotating the upper flange clockwise in therange of 1/2 turn.

(3) Tighten the set screw on top of the guideStandard tightening torque :10 x 10_2 N.m (1.0 kgf.cm)

nThe tape guides S2, S3 and S5 do not havethe set screw on the tape guides. Adjustheight by rotating the upper flange.

8. Tape running recheck at drumentrance side

Perform steps 1 to 6 of the check procedure andrecheck that the specification is satisfied.If the specification is not still satisfied, performstep 7 again.

9. Tape running check at drum exit sideCheck the tape running at the drum exit side asdescribed on the following pages.

When the Adjustment is Performed

10. Video tracking check(Refer to Section 8-2-2.)

11. CTL head height check(Refer to Section 8-2-3.)

12. CTL head position check(Refer to Section 8-2-4.)

13. CUE/TC head position check(Refer to Section 8-2-8.)

Tape guide adjustment screwdriver

Tape guide

Set screw

Upper flange

8-24 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Drum exit side

Check Procedure

1. PLAY state (tape top portion)Enter the PLAY state using a tape top (from 01 :00 to 05 : 00) of the cassette tape BCT-40HD.Check to see that tape runs while satisfying thespecification 2.If the specification 2 is not satisfied, perform step8 and higher.

2. F FWD state (tape top portion)Enter the F FWD state using a tape top (from 01 :00 to 05 : 00) of the cassette tape BCT-40HD.Check to see that tape runs while satisfying thespecification 2.If the specification 2 is not satisfied, perform step8 and higher.

3. REW state (tape top portion)Enter the REW state using a tape top (from 01 :00 to 05 : 00) of the cassette tape BCT-40HD.Check to see that tape runs while satisfying thespecification 2.If the specification 2 is not satisfied, perform step8 and higher.

4. PLAY state (tape end portion)Enter the PLAY state using a tape end (from 35 :00 to 40 : 00) of the cassette tape BCT-40HD.Check to see that tape runs while satisfying thespecification 2.If the specification 2 is not satisfied, perform step8 and higher.

5. F FWD state (tape end portion)Enter the F FWD state using a tape end (from 35 :00 to 40 : 00) of the cassette tape BCT-40HD.Check to see that tape runs while satisfying thespecification 2.If the specification 2 is not satisfied, perform step8 and higher.

6. REW state (tape end portion)Enter the REW state using a tape end (from 35 :00 to 40 : 00) of the cassette tape BCT-40HD.Check to see that tape runs while satisfying thespecification 2.If the specification 2 is not satisfied, perform step8 and higher.

T2 tape guideT1 tape guide

CUE/TC head

Capstan

T3 tape guide

Pinch roller assembly

T4 tape guide

T5 tape guide

Drum assembly

Drum rabbet guides

Drum

Drum rabbet guides

Capstan

Pinch roller assemblyTape runs while keeping contact with the upper flange.

Upper flangeAmount of tape curl must be less than 1/10 of tape width.

Tape Lower flange

Curl

. Allowance of tape curl

T3 T4 T5T2T1

Gap must exist


Specification 2 :(A) T3 tape guide

Gap must exist in between the upper flange and the tape guide.(B) T2 tape guide

Amount of tape curl at the upper or lower flange must be smaller thanthe allowable limits.Amount of tape curl must be less than 1/10 of tape width.

(C) T1 tape guideTape runs while keeping contact with the upper flange.Amount of tape curl at the upper flange must be smaller than theallowable limits.Amount of tape curl must be less than 1/10 of tape width.

(D) Drum rabbet guideTape runs while keeping contact with the drum rabbet guide and mustnot have any curl.

8-25HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7. Tape run check at around the capstanshaft

(1) Enter the REW state using a tape top (from01 : 00 to 05 : 00) of the cassette tape BCT-40HD for a few seconds then switch themode from REW to PLAY state.When the mode is switched, check to see thattape running must satisfy the specification 3in the followings.. Between the CUE/TC head and capstan

shaft.. Between the T3 tape guide and capstan

shaft.Repeat the above operation a few times andthen confirm that the specification 3 issatisfied. If the specification 3 is not satisfied,perform step 8 to 15.

(2) Repeat the following switching of modes afew times.. Enter the F FWD state and then switch the

mode to the PLAY state in a few seconds.. Enter the REV x 1 state and then switch

the mode to the PLAY state in a fewseconds.

At the time, check to see that tape runningmust satisfy the specification 3 in the follow-ings.. Between the CUE/TC head and capstan

shaft.. Between the T3 tape guide and capstan

shaft.If the specification 3 is not satisfied, performstep 8 to 15.

How to enter the REV xxxxx 1 mode(1) Set the x 1 REV SEARCH to ON using the


(2) After pressing the PLAY button, press theREW button. (Both the PLAY and REWbuttons on the keyboard turn on.)

CUE/TC head

Capstan

T3 tape guide

Specification 3 :Tape must not be damaged such as wrinkled due to uneven pressure ofpinch roller against capstan. At the same time, there must not existuneven tension in vertical (up/down) direction of tape between the CUE/TC head and capstan shaft and between the capstan shaft and the T3tape guide.

8-26 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)


8. Tape guide height adjustment

(1) Enter the PLAY state using the cassette tape BCT-40HD.

(2) Loosen the set screw on top of the T3 tape guide withthe screwdriver (tool) TG adjustment, rotate the flangefrom the position in which the upper flange contactswith the tape, by 1/4 turn in order to create a gapbetween the upper flange and the tape.

(3) Tighten the set screw on top of the guide.Standard tightening torque :10 x 10_2 N.m (1.0 kgf.cm)m. The tape guide T4 is fixed and cannot be adjusted.

Do not rotate the upper flange excessively.. The tape guides T2 and T5 do not have the set

screw on the tape guides. Adjust height by rotatingthe upper flange.

(4) Check the tape running between the capstan shaft andthe T3 tape guide. The tape running must satisfy thefollowing conditions.. Tape must run in the state that the tape surface runs

flat as if it is a flat surface of a mirror.. If tape speed deviation exists in the upper or lower

portion of a tape, the tape surface will be distorted.The tape speed deviation must not exist.

nIf the conditions mentioned in (4) are not satisfied, adjustthe T5 tape guide height.. When tape tension is small at the upper portion of a tape :

Move down the T5 tape guide.. When tape tension is small at the lower portion of a tape :

Raise the T5 tape guide.Note that the maximum allowable range of rotation of theT5 tape guide is within one rotation when adjusting the T5tape guide height.

9. Tape running recheck at drum exit sidePerform steps 1 to 7 of the check procedure and recheckthat the specification is satisfied.If the specification is not still satisfied, perform step 8again.

10. Tape running recheck at drum entrance SideRecheck the tape running at the drum entrance side asdescribed on the former pages.


11. Video tracking check(Refer to Section 8-2-2.)

12. CUE/TC head height check(Refer to Section 8-2-5.)



15. CUE/TC output level check(Refer to Section 8-2-9.)

Tape guide adjustment screwdriver

Tape guide

Set screw

Upper flange

8-27HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

8-2-2. Video Tracking Adjustment

Notes

. Tighten the set screw on top of tape guide with the following tightening torque.10 x 10_2 N.m (1.0 kgf.cm)

. When the video tracking is adjusted, be sure to check the tape running state.Upon completion of the video tracking check, apply the locking compound on theset screw on top of tape guide.

Tools

. Screwdriver (tool) TG adjustment (45) : J-6322-420-B

. HN-255 assembly : A-8315-553-A



Preparations

1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and the outside panel

assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Loosen the two screws (with drop-safe) and

remove the shoulder pad.4. Remove the two screws (P2 x 4) and remove

the plate.5. Connect the HN-255 assembly to the MDC-

13G board.. 5-pin connector on the HN-255 assembly :

CN902/MDC-13G board. 8-pin connector on the HN-255 assembly :

CN903/MDC-13G board6. Connect an oscilloscope.

CH-1 : REC A PB/Circuit board on the HN-255 assemblyTRIG : SERVO CF/Circuit board on the HN-255 assembly

7. Turn on the main power.8. Enter the REC-head playback mode using the

maintenance menu.9. Insert the alignment tape HR2-1A.

P2 x 4

Plate

Shoulder pad


8-28 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Check Procedure

1. Video tracking check(1) Set the switch S402/MDC-13G board (side

B) to ON.Then D404 turns on and operation of theTRACKING control knob is enabled.

(2) Play back the alignment tape HR2-1A (from00 : 00 to 15 : 00).

(3) Check that the amplitude at the entrance andexit does not become greater than the ampli-tude at the center of envelope waveformwhen the TRACKING control (RV401)/MDC-13G board is rotated.The amplitude at the entrance and exit becomegreater than the amplitude at the center, per-form the adjustment (drum entrance side ordrum exit side) of step 5 and higher.

(4) Rotate the TRACKING control so that the RFenvelope waveform is reduced to about 80%of the maximum amplitude. Check at this timethat the RF waveform meets the specifications1 to 3. If it does not meet the specifications of 1to 3, perform the adjustment (drum entranceside or drum exit side) of step 3 and higher.

2. Video tracking check at the respectivemodes

(1) Raise the unit from the horizontal posture tothe upright posture. Check that the RFwaveform meets the specifications 1 to 3when the unit is raised from the horizontalposture to the upright posture.If it does not meet the specifications of 1 to 3,perform the adjustment (drum entrance sideor drum exit side) of step 3 and higher.

(2) Return the unit to the horizontal posture.Repeat switching of mode from EJECT stateto the PLAY state a few times. Check that theRF waveform remains unchanged from theamplitude in the PLAY state and also it meetsthe specifications 1 to 3 when the unit isreturned from upright to horizontal posture. Ifthe RF waveform changes or it does not meetthe specifications of 1 to 3, perform theadjustment (drum entrance side or drum exitside) of step 3 and higher.

(3) Repeat the following switching of modes afew times and then confirm that the specifica-tions 1 to 3 are satisfied.. Mode is switched from the REV x 3 state

to the PLAY state.. Mode is switched from the STOP state to

the PLAY state.If the RF waveform changes or it does notmeet the specifications of 1 to 3, perform theadjustment (drum entrance side or drum exitside) of step 3 and higher.

How to enter the REV xxxxx 3 modeAfter pressing the PLAY button, press theREW button.(Both the PLAY and REW buttons on thekeyboard turn on.)

1234

MDC-13G board (side B)

S402

D404:Flashing

ON

S40

3

RV401

A

B

RF max 100%

RF max 100%

Off the track to 80 %.

Off the track to 80 %.

Specification 1 :Amplitude fluctuation of the entire waveform must be as follows when the maximum amplitude of the RF waveform is taken as 100%.A < 20% (RF max = 100%)When replacing the drum assembly of the main unitA < 30% (RF max = 100%)When replacing the upper drum assembly

Specification 2 :Amplitude fluctuation of each portion of the RF waveform must be 10% or less when the maximum amplitude of the RF waveform is taken as 100%.B < 10% (RF max = 100%)

Specification 3 :Tape must run while keeping contact with the upper flange of the S1 and T1 tape guides.Amount of tape curl must be less than 1/10 of tape width.

8-29HDW-F900R/V1 (E)


Drum entrance side

3. Tracking adjustment at drum entranceside

(1) Set the switch S402/MDC-13G board (sideB) to OFF.

(2) Play back HR2-1A (from 15 : 00 to 20 : 00).(3) Loosen the set screw on top of the S1 guide

with the screwdriver (tool) TG adjustment.(4) Rotate the upper flange of the S1 guide using

the screwdriver (tool) TG adjustment untilthe 1 to 2 peaks are created in the RF wave-form as shown.Check the followings at this time.. There does not exist clearance between the

upper flange of the S1 guide and the tapeedge.

. There exists clearance between the upperflange of the S2 guide and lower edge oftape.

(5) Rotate the upper flange of the S1 guideclockwise until the RF waveform becomesalmost flat.

(6) Set the switch S402/MDC-13G board to ON.Then D404 turns on and operation of theTRACKING control knob is enabled.

(7) Play back HR2-1A (from 01 : 00 to 15 : 00 ).(8) Rotate the TRACKING control (RV401) so

that the center of the RF waveform is reducedto about 80% of the maximum amplitude.

(9) Rotate the upper flange of the S1 guide forfine adjustment until the specifications 1 to 3are satisfied.

(10)Tighten the set screw on top of the S1 guide.Standard tightening torque :10 x 10_2 N.m (1.0 kgf.cm)


Tape runs while keeping contact with the upper flange.

S5 S4 S3 S2 S1

FE head CTL head

Cleaning blade

Drum



Drum rabbet guide

RF waveform

REC A PB(ch 1)

(Flattering at top) 1 to 2 peaks

8-30 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

4. Video tracking recheckRecheck the video tracking by performing steps 1and 2 of the check procedure.

5. Tape run checkCheck the tape running status (drum entranceside) following Section 8-2-1.

Drum exit side

6. Tracking adjustment at drum exit side(1) Play back HR2-1A (from 15 : 00 to 20 : 00).(2) Loosen the set screw on top of the T1 guide

with the screwdriver (tool) TG adjustment.(3) Rotate the upper flange of the T1 guide

counter-clockwise using the screwdriver(tool) TG adjustment until the 1 to 2 peaksare created in the RF waveform as shown.Check the followings at this time.. There does not exist clearance between the

upper flange of the T1 guide and the topedge of tape.

. There exists clearance between the lowerflange of the T2 guide and lower edge oftape.

(4) Rotate the upper flange of the T1 guideclockwise until the RF waveform becomesalmost flat.

(5) Set the switch S402/MDC-13G board (sideB) to ON.Then D404 turns on and operation of theTRACKING control knob is enabled.

(6) Play back HR2-1A (from 15 : 00 to 20 : 00).(7) Rotate the TRACKING control (RV401) so

that the center of the RF waveform is reducedto about 80% of the maximum amplitude.

(8) Rotate the upper flange of the T1 guide forfine adjustment until the specifications 1 to 3are satisfied.

(9) Tighten the set screw on top of the T1 guide.Standard tightening torque :10 x 10_2 N.m (1.0 kgf.cm)

RF waveform

REC A PB(ch 1)

(Flattering at top) 1 to 2 peaks

Drum

Drum rabbet guides

Capstan

Pinch roller assemblyTape runs while keeping contact with the upper flange.

T3 T4 T5T2T1

Gap must exist


8-31HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

7. Video Tracking RecheckRecheck the video tracking by performing steps 1and 2 of the check procedure.

8. Tape Run CheckCheck the tape running status (at drum exit side)referring to Section 8-2-1.


9. CTL head height check(Refer to Section 8-2-3.)




8-32 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

8-2-3. CTL Head Height Adjustment

Tools

. HN-255 assembly : A-8315-553-B


. Nut driver (for across : 4.5 mm) : 7-700-751-01

. Oscilloscope

. Skewer

Preparations

1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the shoulder pad and the plate.4. Connect the HN-255 assembly to the MDC-




CH-1 : PB CTL/Circuit board on the HN-255assemblyTRIG : SERVO CF/Circuit board on the HN-255 assembly

6. Turn on the main power.7. Insert the alignment tape HR2-1A.

P2 x 4

Plate

Shoulder pad


8-33HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Check Procedure

1. Alignment tape playbackPlay back the alignment tape HR2-1A (from 01 :00 to 15 : 00).

2. CTL head height check(1) Check that the level decreases when the

portion A of the tape is pushed down byskewer.If the level increases, perform step 3.

(2) Check in the same manner that the leveldecreases when the portion B of the tape ispushed up by skewer.If the level increases, perform step 3.


3. CTL head height adjustment. If the level increases when you push down the tape :

Rotate the height adjustment nut counter-clockwise until the maximum output waveformis obtained.

. If the level increases when you push up the tape :Rotate the height adjustment nut in clockwiseuntil the maximum output waveform is ob-tained.

4. CTL head height recheckRecheck the CTL head height following steps 1and 2.

A

B

CTL headHeight adjustment nut

A

B

FE head CTL head

Cleaning blade

Wav

efor

m le

vel

Wav

efor

m le

vel

Level decreases.

Specifications : Level must decrease when tape is raised up and pushed down by hand.




8-34 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

8-2-4. CTL Head Position Adjustment

Notes

. The CTL head position adjustment is closely related with the TC head positionadjustment.

. When the CTL head position adjustment is performed, be sure to perform the TChead position adjustment.

Tools

. HN-255 assembly : A-8315-553-B


. Nut driver (for across : 4.5 mm) : 7-700-751-01

. Oscilloscope

Preparations

1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the shoulder pad and the plate.

4. Connect the HN-255 assembly to the MDC-13G board.. 5-pin connector on the HN-255 assembly :



CH-1 : REC A PB/Circuit board onthe HN-255 assemblyCH-2 (TRIG) : SERVO CF/Circuit board onthe HN-255 assembly


P2 x 4

Plate

Shoulder pad


8-35HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Check Procedure


2. CTL head position check(1) Set the switch S402/MDC-13G board (side

B) to ON.Then D404 turns on and operation of theTRACKING control knob is enabled.

(2) Rotate the TRACKING control (RV401)/MDC-13G board until the center of the RFenvelope waveform becomes maximum.Check at this time that the marker is output atthe specified position with respect to SERVOCF (TRIG) on the envelope waveform asshown.

(3) Set the switch S402/MDC-13G board to OFFand set the TRACKING control to the FIXposition.Check at this time that the output level of theenvelope waveform remains unchanged assame level as in step (2).If the specification is not satisfied, performstep 3 and the subsequent steps.


3. CTL head position adjustmentAdjust the CTL head position adjustment nut witha nut driver until the marker position of the RFenvelope waveform satisfies the specification andat the same time the output level of the center ofthe RF envelope waveform becomes maximum.

4. CTL head position recheckRecheck the CTL head position following thesteps 1 and 2.

When the adjustment is performed


CTL head

Position adjustment nutAlignment tape HR2-1A

1234

S403

1234

S403

MDC-13G board (side B)

S402 D404 : Flashing

RV401

S402 D404 : Flashing

TRACKING volume control (RV401)

CH1 REC A PB ENV

CH2 SERVO CF

Marker

Specification : Adjust the CTL head position until the following two requirements are met. First, the marker in the envelope waveform must be located in the specified position with reference to the SERVO CF signal. Second, amplitude of the center of the envelope waveform must be maximum.

8-36 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

8-2-5. CUE/TC Head Height Adjustment

Notes

. The CUE head height adjustment is closely related to the azimuth adjustment,tape-to-head adjustment and position adjustment.

. When the CUE head height adjustment is performed, be sure to perform therelated other adjustments (or checks).

Tools


. HN-255 assembly : A-8315-553-B

. Nut driver

. Oscilloscope

Preparations

1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the shoulder pad and the plate.3. Connect the HN-255 assembly to the MDC-




CH-1 : PB CUE/Circuit board on the HN-255assembly


P2 x 4

Plate

Shoulder pad


8-37HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Check Procedure


2. CUE /TC head height check(1) When the portion A of the tape as shown in

illustration is pushed down, check that thelevel decreases.If the level increases, perform step 3.

(2) When the portion B of the tape as shown inillustration is pushed up, check that the leveldecreases in the same manner.If the level increases, perform step 3.

(3) Repeat changing the mode from the EJECTstate to the PLAY state a few times and checkthat the output level remains unchanged fromthe previous level.If the level changes, perform step 3.

(4) Repeat changing the mode from REV x 3 toPLAY a few times and check that the outputlevel remains unchanged from the previouslevel.If the level changes, perform step 3.

How to enter the REV xxxxx 3 modeAfter pressing the PLAY button, press the REWbutton. (Both the PLAY and REW buttons on thekeyboard turn on.)

A

B

Specifications :

A

B

Height adjustment nut


CUE/TC head

CUE/TC head

Level must decrease when tape is raised up and pushed down by hand.

8-38 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)


3. CUE/TC head height adjustment. If the level increases when you push down the tape :

Rotate the height adjustment nut in counter-clockwise until the maximum output waveformis obtained.

. If the level increases when you push up the tape :Rotate the height adjustment nut in clockwiseuntil the maximum output waveform is ob-tained.

4. CUE/TC head azimuth adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-6.)

5. CUE/TC head tape-to-head contactcheck



7. CUE/TC head height checkRecheck it following step 2.

8-39HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

8-2-6. CUE/TC Head Azimuth Adjustment

Notes

. Judgment if the CUE head azimuth is correctly adjusted or not is very difficult asfar as the tape running system is concerned.Therefore, perform the CUE head azimuth adjustment without making judgment ifit is adjusted correctly or not.

. The CUE head azimuth adjustment is closely related to the position adjustmentand the height adjustment.

. When the CUE head azimuth adjustment is performed, be sure to perform therelated other adjustments (or checks).

Tools


. HN-255 assembly : A-8315-553-B

. Oscilloscope

Preparations





CH-1 : PB CUE/Circuit board on the HN-255assembly


P2 x 4

Plate

Shoulder pad


8-40 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)



2. CUE Head azimuth adjustment(1) Rotate the azimuth adjustment screw either in

clockwise or counter-clockwise directionuntil the maximum output waveform isobtained.

(2) Repeat changing the mode from the EJECTstate to the PLAY state a few times andconfirm that the output level remains un-changed and the same as that in step (1).

(3) Repeat changing the mode from REV x 3 toPLAY a few times and confirm that theoutput level remains unchanged and the sameas that in step (1).

How to enter the REV xxxxx 3 modeAfter pressing the PLAY button, press theREW button. (Both the PLAY and REWbuttons on the keyboard turn on.)






Azimuth adjustment screw

Maximum the amplitude.

8-41HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

8-2-7. CUE/TC Head Tape-to-Head Contact Adjustment

Notes

. The CUE/TC head tape-to-head contact adjustment is closely related to the heightadjustment, azimuth adjustment and position adjustment.

. When the CUE/TC head position adjustment is performed, be sure to perform therelated other adjustments (or checks).

Tools




. HN-255 assembly : A-8315-553-B

. Oscilloscope

. Hexagon bit (for torque screwdriver) (for across : 1.5) : J-6326-120-A

Preparations





CH-1 : PB CUE/Circuit board on the HN-255 assemblyTRIG : CH-1


P2 x 4

Plate

Shoulder pad


8-42 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Check Procedure


2. CUE head tape-to-head contact check(1) Push the portions A and B of the tape as

shown in illustration.(2) At this moment, check that amount of

increase in the output level satisfies thespecifications.

Specifications :Amount of increase in the output level is lessthan 5%.

If the specification is not satisfied, performstep 3 and the subsequent steps.


3. CUE head tape-to-head contact check(1) Loosen the hexagon socket 2 x 4 bolt by 1/4

to 1/2 turn.(2) Insert a flat head (_) 2 mm screwdriver tip

into the notch of the gooseneck adjustmentplate.

(3) Adjust the CUE head position by a screw-driver until the maximum output level isobtained.

(4) While maintaining the screwdriver setup asstep (3), tighten the bolt.Standard tightening torque :30 x 10_2 N.m (3.0 kgf.cm)

4. CUE/TC head tape-to-head contactrecheck

Recheck it following steps 1 and 2.




A

B


Notch of gooseneck adjustment plate

Tape

B A

Specifications : x 100 < 5 %A

B _ A

8-43HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

8-2-8. CUE/TC Head Position Adjustment

Notes

. Be sure to complete the CTL head position adjustment before starting this adjust-ment. The CUE/TC head position adjustment is adjusted using the CTL headposition as the reference of the adjustment.

. The CUE/TC head position adjustment is closely related to the CUE head heightadjustment, azimuth adjustment and tape-to-head adjustment.

. When the CUE/TC head position adjustment is performed, be sure to perform therelated other adjustments (or checks).

Tools




. HN-255 assembly : A-8315-553-B

. Oscilloscope

Preparations





CH-1 : SHAPED CTL/Circuit board on theHN-255 assemblyCH-2 : TC/Circuit board on the HN-255assemblyTRIG : SV REF CF/Circuit board on the HN-255 assembly


P2 x 4

Plate

Shoulder pad


8-44 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Check Procedure


2. CUE/TC head position check(1) Confirm that the relationship between the

CTL pulse fall-down edge and the TC signalrise-up edge satisfies the specifications.


(2) Repeat changing the mode from the EJECTstate to the PLAY state a few times andconfirm that the specification is satisfied.


(3) Repeat changing the mode from REV x 3 toPLAY a few times and confirm that thespecification is satisfied.


How to enter the REV xxxxx 3 modeAfter pressing the PLAY button, press theREW button. (Both the PLAY and REWbuttons on the keyboard turn on.)


3. CUE/TC head position adjustment(1) Loosen the fixing screw of the CUE head

mounting plate by 1/4 to 1/2 turn.(2) Insert a flat head (_) screwdriver tip into the

notch of the CUE head mounting plate .(3) Adjust the CUE/TC head position with

screwdriver until the specification is satisfied.(4) While maintaining the screwdriver setup as

step (3), tighten the screw.Standard tightening torque :10 x 10_2 N.m (1.0 kgf.cm)

4. CUE/TC head position recheckRecheck it following steps 1 and 2.

50

65 35 50 50 50

65 35 50 50

PB CTLwaveform(CH-1)

PB TC waveform(CH-2)

Specification : A=0 ±400 us

Fixing screw Notch

CUE/TC head mounting plate

0 ±400 usec

8-45HDW-F900R/V1 (E)





8. CUE/TC head position recheckCheck it following the steps 1 and 2.

8-46 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

8-2-9. CUE/TC Output Level Check

Tools


. HN-255 assembly : A-8315-553-B

. Oscilloscope

A B

Specifications 1 : x 100 < 5 % (fluctuation)A

B _ A

Specifications 2 : x 100 > 70 % CD

Preparations





CH-1 : PB CUE/Circuit board on the HN-255assemblyTRIG : CH-1


Check Procedure

1. CUE output level check(1) Play back the alignment tape HR2-1A (from

15 : 00 to 25 : 00).(2) Confirm that fluctuation of the CUE output

level satisfies the specification 1.(3) Play back the alignment tape HR2-1A (from

00 : 00 to 15 : 00) in PLAY state.(4) Take note of the CUE output level. (Level at

this state is named C.)(5) Enter the REV x 1 state.(6) Confirm that fluctuation of the CUE output

level (level at this state is named D) satisfiesspecification 2.

(7) When specification 2 is not satisfied :Perform the T3 and T5 tape guide heightadjustment again.

How to enter the REV xxxxx 1 mode(1) Set the x 1 REV SEARCH to ON using the


(2) After pressing the PLAY button, press theREW button. (Both the PLAY and REWbuttons on the keyboard turn on.)

P2 x 4

Plate

Shoulder pad


9-1HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Section 9Electrical Alignment of Camera System

9-1. General Information on ElectricalAlignment

This section describes all of the electrical adjustmentprocedures that are required upon completion of repair andcircuit board replacement.

9-1-1. Notes on Electrical Alignment

Allow the unit to warm-up for about 10 minutes beforestarting adjustment by turning on the main power and bysetting the VTR to the “SAVE” position.When you want to extend a circuit board, first turn off themain power of the unit.

Bar Indication in the Top Right of the Setup Menu Display

A bar appears in the top right of the setup menu display onVF in some adjustment procedures that use the setupmenu. This bar indicates the adjustable range and the setvalue of the currently-selected menu item.

9-1-2. Required Equipment, Fixtures and Tools

. OscilloscopeTektronix 2465 or equivalent

. HD analog waveform monitorTektronix 1735HD or equivalent

. HD digital waveform monitorTektronix WFM1125 or equivalent

. Frequency counterAdvantest TR5821AK or equivalent

. Digital voltmeterAdvantest TR6845 or equivalent

. B/W monitor (with horizontal resolution of 900 lines ormore, supporting HD SDI)Sony BVM-D20F1J or equivalent

. HD D/A Converter BoardSony HKPF-102

. HD Digital Video Interface UnitSony PFM-HD300/HD50A

. Pattern box (PTB-500 90-240 Vac)J-6029-140-B

. Gray-scale chart (16 : 9)Transparent-type : J-6394-080-A

. DR extension assemblyA-8327-707-A

. Blank tape (Recordable tape on which all of the previousrecordings are erased)

. HD color monitorHDM-20E1U/14E1U/14E5U

9-1-3. Initial Position of Switches duringAdjustment

Some adjustments require the unit to be put into the servicemode of the setup menu. Enter the service mode whenrequired as follows. For the details of the setup menu, referto Section 4, “Setup Menu”.

1. Turn off the main power.2. Set the switch S1-1/AT-172 board to the ON position.3. Turn on the main power.4. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch on the inside panel to

the ON position.

nWhen any adjustment is performed using the service mode,the value of the adjusted item in the User Mode returns to 0.

Initial Position of SwitchesThe following switches need to be returned their initialpositions as shown below before starting the electricaladjustments. In the same manner, when the various GAINswitches are set in any position other than the defaultposition when shipped from the factory, return theseswitches to their default positions referring to the Opera-tion Manual before starting the electrical adjustments.

Inside pane :VTR SAVE/STBY switch → STBYGAIN switch → L (0 dB)OUTPUT/DCC switch → CAM/OFFMENU ON/OFF switch → OFFWHITE BAL switch → PRST

Front panel :SHUTTER switch → OFFFilter knob → 1B

Lens :LENS → MANUIRIS → C (CLOSE)

Setup menu (OPERATION menu) :. 01*OUTPUT SEL

HD SDI OUT → ONTEST OUT SELECT → SD

. 10*GAIN SWGAIN LOW → 0 dBGAIN MID → 6 dBGAIN HIGH → 12 dB

9-2 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Setup menu (PAINT menu) :. 01* SW STATUS

GAMMA → ONBLACK GAMMA → OFFMATRIX → OFFKNEE → ONWHITE CLIP → ONDETAIL → ONAPERTURE → ONTEST SAW → OFF

. 03* BLACKOUTPUT SELECT → Y

. 06* KNEE 1KNEE SATURATION → ONKNEE SAT LEVEL → 0

. 10* SKIN DETAILSKIN DETAIL ALL → OFF

Setup menu (MAINTENANCE menu) :. 14* FUNCTION 3

WHT FILTER INH → OFFCOLOR BAR SEL → 100%

. 15* GENLOCKGENLOCK → ONRETURN VIDEO → OFF

9-1-4. Gray-Scale Chart and its Maintenance

Use of a reflective-type gray-scale chart (with reflectanceof 89.9%) is recommended for the PA Gain adjustment. Ifa reflective-type gray-scale chart is not available, use atransparent-type gray-scale chart with a well-maintainedpattern box.Calibrate illuminance (or luminance) on the surface of thegray-scale chart to the specified value as follows. Also,calibrate the color temperature to exactly 3200K byadjusting the illumination.

Reflective-Type Gray-Scale Chart (16 : 9)

Availability of reflective-type gray-scale chartThe reflective-type gray-scale chart (16 : 9) is commercial-ly available.

Name : Reflective-type gray-scale chart inwooden case (GS-HD of MurakamiColor Research Lab. Inc. or equivalent)

Available from : Murakami Color Research Lab. Inc.

Address : 3-11-3 Kachidoki, Chuo-ku,Tokyo 104-0054

TEL : (Japan) 03-3532-3011FAX : (Japan) 03-3532-2056

Notes on handling. Do not touch the chart surface with bare hands.. Do not rub or stain the chart surface.. Do not expose or use the chart under direct sunlight for a

long time.. Do not leave or store the chart in a place that is very

humid or contains toxic gas.. Do not place anything on top of the chart surface.. When a chart is stored for a long time without using it,

open the wooden case and leave the chart to dry for 30minutes or 1 hour once or twice every month.

Guideline of replacing the chart when used as thereference chartThe reflective characteristics of the reflective-type gray-scale chart can easily deteriorate over time. As a guideline,the chart should be replaced every 2 years, but the replace-ment interval depends on the storage conditions of thechart.

9-3HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Luxmeter Light source

Chart

Setting Illuminance (In case of using reflective-type chart)

Measuring equipment : Luxmeter (pre-calibrated)

1. Turn on the light source that illuminates the chart andallow it to warm-up for about 30 minutes.

2. Fix a luxmeter in front of the reflective-type chart.Obtain an illuminance of 2000 lx uniformly over theentire surface of the chart by adjusting the position andangle of the illuminations.nPlace the light source at the same height and directionof the camera that shoots the chart surface.

Setting Luminance (In case of using transparent-type chart)

Measuring equipment : Photometer (Minolta LS-110 orequivalent, pre-calibrated)

1. Turn on the pattern box and allow it to warm-up forabout 30 minutes.

2. Place the pattern box such that direct light does not fallon the chart surface.(Alternatively, place a cover the inside of which ispainted with unglazed black, around the entire chart.)

3. Fix a photometer 1 m in front of the chart in thepattern box.

4. Obtain the luminance of 573 ±6 cd/m2 at the center ofthe chart by adjusting the BRIGHTNESS control ofthe pattern box.nAdjusting luminance of 573 ±6 cd/m2 creates the sameilluminance of 2000 lx on the reflective-type gray-scale chart with reflection of 89.9%.

Chart

Photometer

1 m

9-4 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9-3. TEST OUT Level Adjustment

Preparation

. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → BARS

. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setup menu.MENU : OPERATIONPAGE : 01*OUTPUT SELITEM : TEST OUT SELECT → HD


1. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.Adjustment point : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 03*LEVEL ADJITEM : Y LEVELSpecifications : A = 700 ±5 mV

TP

HDW-F900R

CH2IN

CH2OUT

Frequency counterOscilloscope

A

9-2. VCO Frequency Adjustment

NoteAllow the unit to warm-up for about 10 minutes beforestarting adjustment

Preparation

Complete the equipment connection as shown below.


1. Equipment : Frequency counter, oscilloscopeMeasurement point : .TP1 (C-2)/DCP-43 board :

(when DC-110A board is notinstalled)

.TP1 (A-2)/DC-110A board :(A side)(when DC-110A board isinstalled)

Adjustment point : MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 05*DCP ADJUSTITEM : VCO CONT

Specifications : 74.175824 ±100 MHz(59.94i mode)74.249865 ±100 MHz (50i mode)

9-5HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9-4. VF DC Level Adjustment

Preparation



1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.Equipment : OscilloscopeMeasurement point : CN4 pin-10 (A-1)/DCP-43 boardMENU : SERVICEPAGE : 05*DCP ADJUSTITEM : VF Y DC LEVELSpecifications : A = 0.0 ±0.1 V

AGND

1

2

3

4

A B C D E

CN4

TP1

RV700

DCP-43 board (A side)

TP201TP200

TP400

TP601

TP202

TP1

TP600

1

2

3

4

A B C D

DC-110A board (A side)

9-6 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9-5. VA Gain Adjustment

Notes. Start this adjustment upon completion of the adjustment

“9-3. TEST OUT Level Adjustment”.. When the AD LEVEL setup value is modified, wait 1 to

2 seconds and then measure the waveform amplitudeafter the waveform is stabilized.

Preparation

. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/OFF

. WHITE BAL switch (inside panel) → PRST

. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : OPERATIONPAGE : 01*OUTPUT SELITEM : TEST OUT SELECT → HD

MENU : PAINTPAGE : 06*KNEE 1ITEM : KNEE → OFF

MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : TEST SAW → ANALOG


Equipment : HD analog waveform monitorMeasurement point : TEST OUT connector (outside panel)

1. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → R

2. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : R AD LEVELSpecifications : A = 700 ±5 mV

3. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → G

4. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : G AD LEVELSpecifications : B = 700 ±5 mV

5. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → B

6. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : B AD LEVELSpecifications : C = 700 ±5 mV

Setting upon Completion of Adjustment

Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 06*KNEE 1ITEM : KNEE → ON

MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : TEST SAW → OFFITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → Y

A, B, C

9-7HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

B, D, F

A, C, E

9-6. Black Offset Adjustment

Preparation

. Lens iris → CLOSE

. GAIN switch → H

. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : OPERATIONPAGE : 01*OUTPUT SELITEM : TEST OUT SELECT → HD

MENU : OPERATIONPAGE : 10*GAIN SWITEM : GAIN HIGH → 30 dB

MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 06*RP DC OFFSETITEM : DC ADJ MODE → ON


Equipment : B/W monitor, OscilloscopeMeasurement point : TEST OUT connector (outside panel)

1. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 06*RP DC OFFSETITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → R

2. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 06*RP DC OFFSETITEM : R DC OFFSET 180Specification : The two white vertical lines (A) appear

on the right end of monitor displaywhen the rotary encoder is turned toincrease the value in the menu in thepositive (+) direction. The two whitevertical lines (B) appear below A whenthe rotary encoder is turned to increasethe value in the menu in the negative(_) direction. The two lines of A and Bshould have unity brightness.

nRecord the value generated through the adjustmentof step 2. This will be used in steps 4, 8, 12.

m. Do not change the setting of the R DC OFFSET 0.. If the lines A and B are difficult to view on the

screen, open the lens iris a little. It facilitatesviewing of the lines of A and B.

3. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : OPERATIONPAGE : 10*GAIN SWITEM : GAIN HIGH → 12 dB

4. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 06*RP DC OFFSETITEM : R DC OFFSETSpecification : Minimize A.

If the level does not change even aftermoving the offset by ±5, return theoffset value that is obtained at the endof step 2, and finish the adjustment.

5. Complete the setting of the following two items byusing the setup menu.


MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 06*RP DC OFFSETITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → G

A

9-8 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

6. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 06*RP DC OFFSETITEM : G DC OFFSET 180Specification : The two white vertical lines (C)

appear on the right end of monitordisplay when the rotary encoder isturned to increase the value in themenu in the positive (+) direction.The two white vertical lines (D)appear below C when the rotaryencoder is turned to increase the valuein the menu in the negative (_)direction. The two lines of C and Dshould have unity brightness.

m. Do not change the setting of the G DC OFFSET 0.. If the lines C and D are difficult to view on the

screen, open the lens iris a little. It facilitatesviewing of the lines of C and D.


8. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 06*RP DC OFFSETITEM : G DC OFFSETSpecification : Minimize A.


9. Complete the setting of the following two items byusing the setup menu.


MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 06*RP DC OFFSETITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → B

10. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 06*RP DC OFFSETITEM : B DC OFFSET 180Specification : The two white vertical lines (E)

appear on the right end of monitordisplay when the rotary encoder isturned to increase the value in themenu in the positive (+) direction.The two white vertical lines (F)appear below E when the rotaryencoder is turned to increase the valuein the menu in the negative (_)direction. The two lines of E and Fshould have unity brightness.

m. Do not change the setting of the B DC OFFSET 0.. If the lines E and F are difficult to view on the

screen, open the lens iris a little. It facilitatesviewing of the lines of E and F.


12. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 06*RP DC OFFSETITEM : B DC OFFSETSpecification : Minimize A.



Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.

MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 06*RP DC OFFSETITEM : DC ADJ MODE → OFF

9-9HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9-7. VSUB Adjustment

Preparation

. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/ON

. Shoot an all white chart with a high illumination to fillthe entire screen of the under-scanned picture frame.

. Lens iris → Open


1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.Measurement point : TP2/EX-776 board

(DR extension assembly)MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 04*CCD ADJUSTITEM : R VSUBSpecifications : 3.2 ±0.1 V


(DR extension assembly)MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 04*CCD ADJUSTITEM : G VSUBSpecifications : 3.2 ±0.1 V


(DR extension assembly)MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 04*CCD ADJUSTITEM : B VSUBSpecifications : 2.4 ±0.1 V

9-10 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9-8. PA Gain Adjustment

Preparation



. Shoot the gray scale chart to fill the entire screen of theunder-scanned picture frame.

. Lens iris → F10

. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 06*KNEE 1ITEM : KNEE → OFFMENU : PAINTPAGE : 01*SW STATUSITEM : GAMMA → OFF


1. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 04*CCD ADJUSTITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → R

2. Equipment 1 : HD analog waveform monitorMeasurement point 1 : TEST OUT connector

(outside panel)Equipment 2 : OscilloscopeMeasurement point 2 : TP2/EX-776 board

(DR extension assembly)Adjustment point : 1RV402 (E-1)/PA-340 board

(B side)Adjustment point : 1RV403 (E-1)/PA-340 board

(B side)Specifications : A = 700 ±14 mV

B = Minimize the carrier leak.

B

A

Waveform on WFM

Waveform on oscilloscope1H

1H

3. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 04*CCD ADJUSTITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → G

4. Equipment 1 : HD analog waveform monitorMeasurement point 1 : HD SDI connector (outside panel)Equipment 2 : OscilloscopeMeasurement point 2 : TP4/EX-776 board (DR

extension assembly)Adjustment point : 1RV502 (C-2)/PA-340 board

(B side)Adjustment point : 1RV503 (D-2)/PA-340 board



5. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 04*CCD ADJUSTITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → B

6. Equipment 1 : HD analog waveform monitorMeasurement point 1 : TEST OUT connector (outside panel)Equipment 2 : OscilloscopeMeasurement point 2 : TP6/EX-776 board (DR

extension assembly)Adjustment point : 1RV602 (B-2)/PA-340 board

(B side)Adjustment point : 1RV603 (C-2)/PA-340 board




Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 04*CCD ADJUSTITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → YMENU : PAINTPAGE : 06*KNEE 1ITEM : KNEE → ONMENU : PAINTPAGE : 01*SW STATUSITEM : GAMMA → ON

PA-340 board (B side)

ABCDE

1

2

3

RV402 RV403

RV502RV503

RV602RV603

9-11HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9-9. Pre Knee Adjustment

Preparation



. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 01*SW STATUSITEM : GAMMA → OFFITEM : TEST SAW → ANALOG



1. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → RITEM : PREKNEE ADJ MODE → ON

2. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : R PRE KNEESpecifications : A = 700 ±5 mV


4. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : G PRE KNEESpecifications : B = 700 ±5 mV


6. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : B PRE KNEESpecifications C = 700 ±5 mV


Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 01*SW STATUSITEM : GAMMA → ONITEM : TEST SAW → OFF

MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : PREKNEE ADJ MODE → OFF

A, B, C

9-12 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9-10. DCC Pre Knee Adjustment

Preparation



. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 01*SW STATUSITEM : GAMMA → OFFITEM : TEST SAW → ANALOG



1. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → RITEM : PREKNEE ADJ MODE → ON

2. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : R PRE KNEE DCCSpecifications : A = 700 ±5 mV


4. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : G PRE KNEE DCCSpecifications : B = 700 ±5 mV


6. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : B PRE KNEE DCCSpecifications: : C = 700 ±5 mV


Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 01*SW STATUSITEM : GAMMA → ONITEM : TEST SAW → OFF

MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : PREKNEE ADJ MODE → OFF

A, B, C

9-13HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9-11. Black Shading Adjustment

Preparation


. Lens iris → CLOSE

. Set the waveform monitor as follows:LUM modeVOLT FULL SCALE range → 0.5



1. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 02*BLK SHADINGITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → R

2. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 02*BLK SHADINGITEM : R BLACK H SAWITEM : R BLACK H PARAITEM : R BLACK V SAWITEM : R BLACK V PARASpecifications : Make the waveform flat.

3. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 02*BLK SHADINGITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → G

4. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 02*BLK SHADINGITEM : G BLACK H SAWITEM : G BLACK H PARAITEM : G BLACK V SAWITEM : G BLACK V PARASpecifications : Make the waveform flat.

5. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 02*BLK SHADINGITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → B

6. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 02*BLK SHADINGITEM : B BLACK H SAWITEM : B BLACK H PARAITEM : B BLACK V SAWITEM : B BLACK V PARASpecifications : Make the waveform flat.

(H SAW) (H PARA) (V SAW) (V PARA)

9-14 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9-12. White Shading Adjustment

NoteBe careful of the following point. Unless a chart is freefrom non-uniformity, illumination is correct, lens iris is setin the specified position and the lens zoom is set in thespecified ratio, the white shading adjustment will result inpoor performance.

Preparation


. Lens iris → AUTO

. Shoot a white pattern to fill the entire screen of theunder-scanned picture frame.

. Set the waveform monitor as follows:LUM modeVOLT FULL SCALE range → 0.5



1. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 01*WHT SHADINGITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → R

2. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 01*WHT SHADINGITEM : R WHITE H SAWITEM : R WHITE H PARAITEM : R WHITE V SAWITEM : R WHITE V PARASpecifications : Make the waveform flat.

3. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 01*WHT SHADINGITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → G

4. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 01*WHT SHADINGITEM : G WHITE H SAWITEM : G WHITE H PARAITEM : G WHITE V SAWITEM : G WHITE V PARASpecifications : Make the waveform flat.

5. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 01*WHT SHADINGITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → B

6. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 01*WHT SHADINGITEM : B WHITE H SAWITEM : B WHITE H PARAITEM : B WHITE V SAWITEM : B WHITE V PARASpecifications : Make the waveform flat.

7. Switch the lens to the EXTENDER.

8. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 01*WHT SHADINGITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → R


9-15HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 01*WHT SHADINGITEM : R WHITE H SAW EXITEM : R WHITE H PARA EXITEM : R WHITE V SAW EXITEM : R WHITE V PARA EXSpecifications : Make the waveform flat.

10. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 01*WHT SHADINGITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → G

11. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 01*WHT SHADINGITEM : G WHITE H SAW EXITEM : G WHITE H PARA EXITEM : G WHITE V SAW EXITEM : G WHITE V PARA EXSpecifications : Make the waveform flat.

12. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 01*WHT SHADINGITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → B

13. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 01*WHT SHADINGITEM : B WHITE H SAW EXITEM : B WHITE H PARA EXITEM : B WHITE V SAW EXITEM : B WHITE V PARA EXSpecifications : Make the waveform flat.


9-16 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9-13. Flare Adjustment

Preparation

. Lens iris → MAN


. WHITE BAL switch (inside panel) → A

. Shoot a gray-scale chart to fill the entire screen of theunder-scanned picture frame and execute AWB.Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (outside panel)Adjustment point : Open the lens iris by 1 F-stop

from the reference value(A = 700 ±14 mV).


Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (outside panel)

1. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 03*BLACKITEM : G FLARE → 0

2. Select a horizontal scanning line in the portion B onthe waveform monitor using the LINE SELECTfunction.

3. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 03*BLACKITEM : R FLARESpecifications : Minimize the color difference level at

the portion C.

4. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 03*BLACKITEM : B FLARESpecifications : Minimize the color difference level at

the portion C.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 several times.

A

B

C

9-17HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9-14. Gamma Correction Adjustment

Preparation

. Lens iris → MAN


. WHITE BAL switch (inside panel) → A

. Shoot a gray-scale chart to fill the entire screen of theunder-scanned picture frame and execute AWB.Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (outside panel)Adjustment point : Open the lens iris to obtain the

white level of A = 700 ±14 mV.


Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (outside panel)

1. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 01*GAMMAITEM : TEST SAW → DIGITALSelect a horizontal scanning line in the portion B onthe waveform monitor using the LINE SELECTfunction.

2. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 04*GAMMAITEM : R GAMMASpecifications : Minimize the color difference level at

the portion C.

3. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 04*GAMMAITEM : B GAMMASpecifications : Minimize the color difference level at

the portion C.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 several times until the carrier leakis removed at “C”.

A

B

C

9-18 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9-15. Knee and White Clip Adjustment

Preparation



. GAIN switch (inside panel) → M (6 dB)

. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 01*SW STATUSITEM : TEST SAW → ON

. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 06*KNEE 1ITEM : KNEE → OFFITEM : WHITE CLIP → OFF



1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 06*KNEE 1ITEM : KNEE POINTSpecifications : A = 665 ±14 mV

2. Set the GAIN switch (inside panel) → H (12 dB)

3. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 06*KNEE 1ITEM : WHITE CLIP → ON

4. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 06*KNEE 1ITEM : WHITE CLIP LEVELSpecifications : B = 763 ±14 mV

5. Set the GAIN switch (inside panel) → M (6 dB)

6. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 06*KNEE 1ITEM : WHITE CLIP → OFF

7. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 06*KNEE 1ITEM : KNEE SLOPESpecifications : C = 763 ±14 mV

nThe above value is the adjustment value on the premisethat the white clip level is set to 763 mV. When the whiteclip level is set to any value other than 763 mV, set theKNEE SLOPE adjustment value to the same value as theWHITE CLIP LEVEL adjustment value.

A

B

C

9-19HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9-16. DCC Knee Adjustment

NotePerform this adjustment as needed by the customer.

Preparation



. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 12*DCC ADJUSTITEM : DCC POINT → 0ITEM : DCC GAIN → 0


. AUTO W/B BAL switch (inside panel) → WHT(Execute the auto white balance adjustment.)Equipment : HD analog waveform monitorMeasurement point : TEST OUT connector

(outside panel)Adjustment point : 1lens irisSpecifications : Open the lens iris by 2.5 F-stops

from the reference iris position(A = 700 ± 14 mV).



1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 12*DCC ADJUSTITEM : DCC RANGE (Default value when

shipped from the factory : 600%)Specifications : Adjust the DCC range for the

customer’s preference.

2. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 12*DCC ADJUSTITEM : DCC POINT (Default value when

shipped from the factory : 0)Specifications : Adjust the KNEE characteristics for

the customer’s preference.

3. Select the lens EXTENDER and shoot the gray scalechart to fill the entire screen of the under-scannedpicture frame.

4. Return the EXTENDER to the original position.

5. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 12*DCC ADJUSTITEM : DCC GAIN (Default value when

shipped from the factory : 0)Specifications : Adjust the KNEE characteristics for

the customer’s preference.

AStandard

(600 %)

MIN

(300 %)

9-20 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9-17. Crispening Adjustment

Preparation

. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 08*DETAIL1ITEM : DETAIL → ON


. Shoot the gray scale chart to fill the entire screen of theunder-scanned picture frame.Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (rear panel)Adjustment point : 1lens irisSpecifications : A = 700 ±14 mV.


Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (rear panel)

1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 08*DETAIL1ITEM : CRISPENINGSpecifications : Adjust the crispening level such that

the noise is not significant on the grayscale.

9-18. Level Depend Adjustment

Preparation

. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 08*DETAIL1ITEM : DETAIL → ONITEM : LEVEL DEPEND → ON





1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 08*DETAIL1ITEM : LEVEL DEPENDSpecifications : Decrease the details signal amplitude

of the portion B to the level that doesnot affect the detail signal level at theportion A.

NoteUpon completion of this adjustment, be sure to perform thefollowing two adjustments : “9-20. H/V Ratio Adjustment”and “9-21. Detail Signal Level Adjustment”.

A

A

BB A

9-21HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9-19. Detail Signal FrequencyAdjustment


Preparation




. Select a horizontal scanning line in the bottom of thewhite area in the center of the waveform monitor usingthe LINE SELECT function.



1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 08*DETAIL1ITEM : DETAIL FREQ.Specifications : Adjust the edge width of the B portion

for the customer’s preference.

NoteUpon completion of this adjustment, be sure to perform thefollowing two adjustments : “9-20. H/V Ratio Adjustment”and “9-21. Detail Signal Level Adjustment”.

A

B

9-22 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9-20. H/V Ratio Adjustment

Preparation





Equipment : B/W monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (rear panel)

1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 08*DETAIL1ITEM : DETAIL H/V RATIOSpecifications : Adjust the ratio of the detail signal

(white peak) in the horizontal direc-tion and that in the vertical directionfor unity.

9-21. Detail Signal Level Adjustment


Preparation






1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 08*DETAIL1ITEM : DETAIL LEVEL (Default value when

shipped from the factory : 0)Specifications : Adjust the amplitude of the detail

signal that is added to the steps of thegray-scale signal for the customer’spreference.

A

A

H

V

9-23HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9-22. Knee Aperture Adjustment


Preparation

. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 09*DETAIL2ITEM : KNEE APERTURE → ON


. Shoot the gray scale chart to fill the entire screen of theunder-scanned picture frame.Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (rear panel)Adjustment point : 1 lens irisSpecifications : Open the lens iris by 2 F-stops from

the iris position to createA = 700 ±14 mV.



1. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 09*DETAIL2ITEM : KNEE APT LEVELSpecifications : Adjust the amplitude of the B portion

(p-p value of the spikes on the 3rd stepfrom peak white) for the customer’spreference. (Reference value : 40 mV)

9-23. H. Detail Black Clip Adjustment


Preparation


. Shoot the gray scale chart to fill the entire screen of theunder-scanned picture frame.Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (rear panel)Adjustment point : 1 lens irisSpecifications : Open the lens iris by 1 F-stop from

the iris position to createA = 700 ± 14 mV.




1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 09*DETAIL2ITEM : DETAIL BLK LIMIT

(Default setting when shipped fromthe factory: 0)

Specifications : Adjust the amplitude of the B portionfor the customer’s preference.

A

B

Line select

B

9-24 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9-24. V. Detail Black Clip Adjustment


Preparation


. Shoot the gray scale chart to fill the entire screen of theunder-scanned picture frame.Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (rear panel)Adjustment point : 1 lens irisSpecifications : Open the lens iris by 1 F-stop

from the reference iris position(A = 700 ±14 mV).




1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 09*DETAIL2ITEM : DETAIL V-BLK LIMIT

(Default setting when shipped fromthe factory: 0)

Specifications : Adjust the amplitude of the B portionfor the customer’s preference.

B

9-25HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9-25. Skin Tone Adjustment


Preparation

. Complete the setup as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 10*SKIN DETAILITEM : SKIN DETAIL ALL → ONITEM : SKIN AREA IND → ONITEM : SKIN DTL SELECT →

Select as desired by customer.ITEM : SKIN DETAIL → ON

. Shoot face of human being.


Equipment : Either color monitor or view finder orHD analog waveform monitor

Measurement point : TEST OUT connector or HD SDIconnector (rear panel)

1. Shoot face of human being in the window at the centerof VF screen.

2. Complete the setup as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 10*SKIN DETAILITEM : SKIN DETECT → EXEC

(Automatic color detection is performed.)

3. Press the rotary encoder. (The detection range isshown by the zebra pattern.)

4. Perform the following procedures as needed bycustomer.Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 10*SKIN DETAILITEM : SKIN DTL SAT. (Signal component in the

direction of saturation)SKIN DTL HUE (HUE)SKIN DTL WIDTH (Signal component inthe direction of color phase HUE)

The range in which the SKIN DETAIL is effective, isshown by the zebra pattern on viewfinder. Adjust theabove items such that the zebra zone is not excessive norinsufficient showing the effective range.

5. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 10*SKIN DETAILITEM : SKIN DETAIL LVLSpecifications : Adjust the detail signal level for the

customer’s preference.


. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 10*SKIN DETAILITEM : SKIN DETAIL ALL → OFFITEM : SKIN DETECT → OFFITEM : SKIN AREA IND → OFFITEM : SKIN DETAIL → OFF

SATURATION

HUE

R-Y

B-Y

WIDTH

9-26 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9-26. Zebra Adjustment

Preparation

. Complete the setup as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 01*SW STATUSITEM : GAMMA → OFFITEM : KNEE → OFFITEM : WHITE CLIP → OFFITEM : TEST SAW → ANALOG

MENU : OPERATIONPAGE : 11*VF SETTINGITEM : ZEBRA 1 DET.LVL → 70%ITEM : ZEBRA 2 DET.LVL → 100%




Equipment : OscilloscopeMeasurement point : TEST OUT connector (outside panel)

1. Complete the setup as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : OPERATIONPAGE : 11*VF SETTINGITEM : ZEBRA SELECT → 1

2. Complete the setup as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 05*DCP ADJUSTITEM : VF ZEBRA 1 OFFSETSpecifications : A = 490 ±5 mV

3. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : OPERATIONPAGE : 11*VF SETTINGITEM : ZEBRA SELECT → 2

4. Set the GAIN switch (inside panel) → M (6 dB)

5. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 11*VF SETTINGITEM : ZEBRA SELECT → 1Specifications : B = 700 ±5 mV


. Set the GAIN switch (inside panel) → L (0 dB)

. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : OPERATIONPAGE : 11*VF SETTINGITEM : ZEBRA SELECT → 1

MENU : PAINTPAGE : 01*SW STATUSITEM : GAMMA → ONITEM : KNEE → ONITEM : WHITE CLIP → ONITEM : TEST SAW → OFF

Bottom of the zebra area level

B

Center of the zebra area levelA

9-27HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9-27. Auto Iris Adjustment

Preparation



. Lens iris : AUTO



1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 13*AUTO IRIS 2ITEM : IRIS APL RATIOSpecifications : Adjust the auto iris in accordance with

the application of customer.(It determines at which signal level the auto iriscontrol starts operating.)IRIS APL RATIO = _99 (peak value operation)IRIS APL RATIO = 99 (average value operation)

2. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 13*AUTO IRIS 2ITEM : IRIS LEVELSpecifications : A = 700 ±14 mV.

3. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 13*AUTO IRIS 2ITEM : IRIS SPEED (Default value when

shipped from the factory : 2)Specifications : Adjust the operating speed of auto iris

control of the lens as desired.

4. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 13*AUTO IRIS 2ITEM : CLIP HIGH LIGHT → ON or OFFSpecifications : Adjust the operating speed of auto iris

control of the lens for the customer’spreference.

9-28. Adjustment upon Replacement ofFilter Disc Unit

Whenever a filter disc unit is replaced, the white balancecorrection is required. Perform the white balance correc-tion as follows.

Preparation

. WHITE BAL switch (inside panel) → A or B

. Shoot a all white chart to fill the entire screen of theunder-scanned picture frame.

. Lens iris → AUTO

. Connect a B/W monitor to the TEST OUT connector ofthis unit.


Equipment : B/W monitor

1. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 16*ND COMPITEM : ND OFFSET ADJUST → ONITEM : CLEAR ND OFFSET → EXEC

2. Set the filter knob to 1B.

3. Set the WHITE BAL switch (inside panel) → WHT(Execute auto white balance adjustment.)nConfirm that a message “ND1 DET = OK!” appearson monitor.

4. Select the filter knob to 2B then 3B then 4B andexecute step 3 at every filter position.nConfirm that a message “COMPLETE!” appears onmonitor when all the adjustments of 1B to 4B arecompleted normally. The ND OFFSET ADJUSTsetting returns to the OFF position.

A

9-28 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9-29. SD VCO Adjustment

Perform this adjustment only when the HKDW-702 (DC-110A board) is installed.

Preparation

. Allow warm-up of about 10 minutes.

. Complete setup with the use of the setup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 09*SD ADJUSTITEM : SD SDI LOCK/FREE → FREE

. Complete the equipment connection as shown below.


1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.Measurement point : TP400 (B-3)/DC-110A board

(A side)MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 09*SD ADJUSTITEM : SD SDI VCO FREQ.Specifications : 27.0 ±0.1 MHz


Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 09*SD ADJUSTITEM : SD SDI LOCK/FREE → LOCK

9-30. SD Y Level Adjustment


Preparation


. Complete setup with the use of the setup menu.MENU : OPERATIONPAGE : 01*OUTPUT SELITEM : REAR BNC OUTSEL → VBS

DOWN CON MODE → LETTR


1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.Equipment : SD waveform monitor or

oscilloscopeMeasurement point : TEST OUT connector

(outside panel)MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 09*SD ADJUSTITEM : SD VBS LEVELSpecifications : A = 714 ±5 mV (For NTSC)

A = 700 ±5 mV (For PAL)

TP

HDW-F900R

CH2IN

CH2OUT

Frequency counterOscilloscope

A

TP201TP200

TP400

TP601

TP202

TP1

TP600

1

2

3

4

A B C D


9-29HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9-31. SD ZEBRA Clamp Level Adjustment


Preparation

OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → BARS


1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.Equipment : OscilloscopeMeasurement point : TP201 (B-4)/DC-110A board

(A side)MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 09*SD ADJUSTITEM : SD ZEBRA Y OFSTSpecifications : A = 0 ±10 mV dc

9-32. SD ZEBRA Y Level Adjustment


Preparation

OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → BARS


1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.Equipment : OscilloscopeMeasurement point : TP201 (B-4)/DC-110A board

(A side)MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 09*SD ADJUSTITEM : SD ZEBRA Y LEVELSpecifications : A = 714 ±5 mV (For NTSC)

A = 700±5 mV (For PAL)

A

DC 0V A

TP201TP200

TP400

TP601

TP202

TP1

TP600

1

2

3

4

A B C D


9-30 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9-33. RPN Concealment

RPN (Residual Point Noise) on CCD is automaticallycorrected (APR) during ABB (Auto Black Balance Adjust-ment) operation. For the RPN which cannot be correctedby APR, perform the manual RPN concealment by follow-ing Section 9-33-1.When there remains the RPN which cannot be concealedeven after completion of the adjustment shown in Section9-33-1, follow the flowchart shown in Section 9-33-4.

9-33-1. Manual RPN Concealment

Use the SERVICE menu for the manual RPN concealment.Refer to Section 4-1-2 for how to display the SERVICEmenu.

Preparation

. Adjust the black balance automatically. (Refer to theSection 4-1 in operation manual of HDW-F900R.)

. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : OPERATIONPAGE : OUTPUT SELITEM : TEST OUT SELECT → HD

MENU : SERVICEPAGE : MANUAL RPNITEM : FIELD/FRAME → FRAME

. When the RPN recognition is difficult since the RPNhides behind the character on a screen or is very close tothe character :ITEM : TEST OUT MENU → OFF

. Connect the HD color monitor to the TEST OUTconnector (on the outside panel).

? 07OMANUAL RPN OUTPUT SELECT : Y RPN CURSOR : OFF TEST OUT MENU : OFF CURSOR H POS. : 0 CURSOR V POS. : 0 CURSOR JUMP : CURR RECORD RPN : EXEC DELETE RPN : EXEC FIELD/FRAME : FIELD

Adjustment Procedures

nThe points adjacent to the already corrected RPN in the up,down, right, and left directions cannot be corrected.

1. Select the channel (R, G, or B) to be corrected.ITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → R, G, B

2. Adjust the values of H and V so that the center of thecross cursor is aligned just over the RPN.The RPN is concealed when the cursor is aligned withthe pixel.nThe RPN may appear to be concealed even when thecursor is aligned with the pixel one line or one pixeloff from the RPN. Before proceeding to step 3, movethe cursor one line or one pixel to confirm that thecursor is aligned with the correct pixel.

ITEM : RPN CURSOR → ONITEM : CURSOR H POS.ITEM : CURSOR V POS.nOne full rotation of the rotary encoder is equivalent tothe movement by one-pixel. Since the cursor occupiesthe area equivalent to two pixels, the cursor moveswith two rotations of the rotary encoder.

3. Press the rotary encoder to record the RPN data(concealed value).ITEM: RECORD RPN → EXEC

4. “RECORD DATA OK? YES → NO” is displayed.After confirming that the RPN is corrected, rotate therotary encoder until “YES” blinks.

5. Press the rotary encoder. “COMPLETE!” is displayed,and concealment will be performed.nMake sure that RPN is corrected before executing theRPN concealment.

6. If the RPN concealment is going to be executed foranother RPN, repeat steps 2 to 5.nWhen there exists an RPN that cannot be correctedwith this adjustment, follow the flowchart of theSection 9-33-4.

Setting after Adjustment

ITEM : RPN CURSOR → OFFITEM : FIELD/FRAME → FIELD

9-31HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9-33-2. When RPN Concealment Does NotSucceed

If the RPN is still present even after manual RPN conceal-ment, the following causes may exist:. The concealment was performed on an adjacent pixel.. Another RPN point prevented concealment.

Checking the pixel to conceal1. Set RPN CURSOR to ON.2. Use the CURSOR JUMP function to check that no

pixel has been concealed near the pixel you want toconceal.nIt is effective to move the cursor to the place near thepixel you want to conceal beforehand by using CUR-SOR H POS. or CURSOR V POS.

When the pixel you want to conceal is above thecursor positionITEM : CURSOR JUMP → PREVWhen the pixel you want to conceal is below thecursor positionITEM : CURSOR JUMP → NEXT

3. When the cursor jumps to a pixel near the pixel youwant to conceal

(1) Delete the data recorded for concealing the RPN wherethe cursor is aligned.ITEM : DELETE RPN → EXEC

(2) “DELETE DATA OK? TEST → NO” is displayed.Select YES with the rotary encoder, and press therotary encoder.nIf RPN appears next (above, below, right, or left) tothe pixel you want to conceal, it means that RPN existsadjacent to that pixel. In such a case, RPN conceal-ment is not possible, and the CCD or the CCD blockmust be replaced. Contact your local Sony SalesOffice/Service Center.

(3) If nothing changes, change the concealment point.Move the cursor horizontally to check if the RPN canbe concealed.

(4) When the RPN is successfully concealed, record thatdata.ITEM : RECORD RPN → EXEC

(5) “RECORD DATA OK? YES → NO” is displayed.Select OK and press the rotary encoder.

(6) “COMPLETE!” is displayed, and the data will berecorded.

(7) Other RPN points may not have been automaticallyrecognized due to the RPN that has not been concealedsuccessfully. Perform the auto RPN concealment.<Basic idea of the RPN concealment>. Basically, perform concealment using the auto RPN

recognition.. If auto RPN recognition does not succeed, perform

manual RPN concealment. Be sure to perform autoRPN recognition every time an RPN point isconcealed.

. If concealment still does not succeed, clear the RPNconcealment data resulted from the manual RPNconcealment, and manually conceal the RPN.

4. To conceal other RPN points, repeat steps 2 and 3.

9-33-3. Effectively Performing Auto RPNRecognition

1. Open the RPN MANAGE page of the SERVICEmenu.

2. Perform only auto RPN concealment.ITEM : AUTO CONCEAL → EXEC

nBe sure to set IRIS to the CLOSE position.Be sure to set BARS SW to the OFF position.Be sure to set SHUTTER SW to the OFF position.If AUTO CONCEAL is performed with a wrong switchconfiguration, clear all the data stored. The RPN conceal-ment data returns to the factory default settings.

ITEM : RPN ALL PRESET → EXEC

9-32 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

9-33-4. RPN Concealment Flowchart

If there remains an RPN that cannot be corrected with the manual RPN concealment, follow the flowchartshown below.

ProcedureThere remains an RPN that cannot be corrected

by the manual RPN concealment.(Refer to Section 9-33-1.)

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Does RPN disapper?

Is RPN level lowered?

Push the SHUTTER switch at the front to set the shutter to 1/2000.

Correction works.

Can the adjustment beperformed correctly?

Check the connectors used betweenDR-614 and TG-256 boards, andalso TG-256 and PA-340 boards.

Replace flexible wire cable used betweenDR-614 and DCP-43 boards.

Perform RPN adjustment once again.

One or more of DCP-43, RP-131, DR-614, TG-256, PA-340 boards are defective. Replace one board at a time to identify

the defective board.

Correction works.

Is RPN corrected?

Correction works.

RPN cannot be corrected due to adjacent RPN.

Replace CCD block.

As a result of the adjustment, does

RPN disappear?

Perform manual RPN concealment.(Refer to Section 9-33-1.)

If RPN remains still visible, perform AUTO BLACK BALANCE adjustment

(keep pressing AUTO W/B BAL switch to BLK position), or perform manual RPN concealment

once again. (Refer to Section 9-33-1.)

Perform NVRAM adjustment.RP-131 board : Refer to Section 1-17-16.

Perform AUTO BLACK BALANCE adjustment(keep pressing AUTO W/B BAL switch to

BLK position) six times.

Can the adjustment beperformed correctly?

Perform RPN adjustment.RP-131 board : Perform BLACK OFFSET

adjustment. (Refer to Section 9-6.)

10-1HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Section 10Electrical Alignment of VTR System

10-1. Preparation

Required Equipment. Audio analyzer

Tektronix AA501A (OP.2) or equivalent. Generator

Tektronix SG-5010 or equivalent. Oscilloscope

Tektronix TDS460A or equivalent. Digital voltmeter

Advantest TR6845 or equivalent. Standard playback machine

Fixtures and Tools. Alignment tape (HR5-1A: 8-960-076-01). Working tapenPrepare a working tape for electrical adjustment that hasbeen used as few times as possible. A recorded tape canalso be used, but an internal signal will be recorded on it.

PrecautionsBefore starting adjustment of this section, check theproduct destination that is indicated on the SS-92G boardand the setting of the model selection switches (S101-6, 7 :IMX/HDCAM/D-B, S101-8 : NTSC/PAL) on the sameboard. (Refer to “1-10. On-Board Switch Description”)

Initial Position of SwitchesInside panel :

AUDIO IN selector switch CH1, CH2 → REAROUTPUT/DCC switch → CAM/ON

Rear panel :AUDIO IN selector switch CH1, CH2 → LINE

Setup menu (MAINTENANCE menu) :. AUDIO-2

AU REC EMPHASIS → OFFCUE REC → ONAU REF LEVEL → _20 dBAU REF OUT → 0 dBAU AGC SPEC → _6 dB

0 10

Alignment tape (HR5-1A)The same CUE signal is recorded on the alignment tape(HR5-1A) every 5 minutes.If a recorded position specified by this document becomesworn-out, use different recorded positions of the CUE signal.Example : The CUE signal of 3 kHz at _20 VU is recorded

in the following positions in addition to theposition 00 : 02 : 30 : 00 to 00 : 02 : 55 : 00.. 00 : 07 : 30 : 00 to 00 : 07 : 55 : 00. 00 : 12 : 30 : 00 to 00 : 12 : 55 : 00. 00 : 17 : 30 : 00 to 00 : 17 : 55 : 00

AUDIO LEVEL CH1, CH2 Control KnobsReference PositionSet the control knobs to the invertedtriangle ( ) (2 o’clock position).

10-2 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

10-2. Audio System Alignment

The audio system adjustment is performed in the factory atthe time of shipment, and the adjustment values are savedin the EEPROM (IC819) on the FP-152 board.When replacing the EEPROM (IC819) or the FP-152board, perform the audio system adjustment.Also, when replacing the volume control RV2 or RV3 onthe FP-152 board, perform “AUDIO LEVEL VolumeControl (Inside Panel) Adjustment”.In Audio System Alignment, adjustments are performedusing the SERVICE menu.

10-2-1. Audio A/D Error Adjustment

Equipment/Tools. Generator

Adjustment Procedure1. Set the AUDIO SELECT switch (CH1, CH2) to “AUTO”.2. Input a +4dBu, 1kHz sine wave to the AUDIO IN

CH1 connector and CH2 connector at the rear.3. Perform AUDIO A/D ADJUST from the VTR MAIN-

TENANCE page in the SERVICE menu.

S12OVTR MAINTE TOP C0: SERVO CHECK C1: RF CHECK C2: AUDIO CHECK A0: SERVO ADJUST A1: RF ADJUST→A2: AUDIO ADJUST A4:MECHANISM ADJUST A9: OTHERS ADJUST

AUDIO ADJUST MODE

A20:AUDIO A/D ADJ A21:AUDIO D/A ADJ→A22:AUDIO SIDE VOL ADJ

AUDIO ADJUST MODEA20:AUDIO A/D ADJ

ADJUST START →YES NO

SET BOTH OF THE LINE/AES/EBU/MIC SWITCHESTO "LINE". INPUT THE SINE WAVE OF+4dBU OF 1KHZ TO THE AUCH1&CH2 XLR ON THE REAR

4. Turn the MENU knob to select “YES”, and press theMENU knob.The auto adjustment starts. The following screen isdisplayed during the auto adjustment.

Screen during the CH1 adjustment

Screen during the CH2 adjustment after the CH1 adjustment

Screen when the adjustments for both CHs are complete

5. When the adjustment is complete, press down theMENU ESCAPE switch.

m. If “TIME OVER ERR” appears in the adjustment screen,

check the input signal etc and perform the adjustmentagain.

. If “INPUT OVER ERR” appears in the adjustmentscreen, check the signal level since the level of the signalbeing input may be too large.

. If “INPUT UNDER ERR” appears in the adjustmentscreen, check the signal level since the level of the signalbeing input may be too small.

. If “NO INPUT ERR” appears in the adjustment screen,check the input signal since the signal may not be inputcorrectly.

AUDIO ADJUST MODEA20:AUDIO A/D ADJUST

CH1:ADJUSTING CH2: CH3: CH4:


CH1:COMPLETE CH2:ADJUSTING CH3: CH4:


CH1:COMPLETE CH2:COMPLETE CH3:COMPLETE CH4:COMPLETE

10-3HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

10-2-2. Audio D/A Error Adjustment

Equipment/Tools. Audio analyzer

Adjustment Procedure1. Perform AUDIO D/A ADJUST from the VTR MAIN-

TENANCE page in the SERVICE menu.

2. Turn the MENU knob to select “YES”, and press theMENU knob.

3. Turn the CH-1 AUDIO LEVEL knob so that the CH-1output level becomes 0 dBm ±0.05 dB.

4. Turn the CH-2 AUDIO LEVEL knob so that the CH-2output level becomes 0 dBm ±0.05 dB.

5. Turn the MENU knob to select “YES”, and press theMENU knob.nIf “NO” is selected, the data adjusted this time be-comes invalid, and the previously adjusted databecomes valid.


10-2-3. AUDIO LEVEL Volume Control(Inside Panel) Adjustment

Adjustment Procedure1. Turn the LEVEL knobs of CH1 and CH2 to the

position one scale away to the left from the centerposition.

2. Perform AUDIO SIDE VOL ADJ from the VTRMAINTENANCE page in the SERVICE menu.

3. Turn the MENU knob to select “YES”, and press theMENU knob.


nIf “NG” is being displayed in the adjustment result screen,perform the adjustment from Step 2. If “NG” appearsagain, replace the volume control (RV2 or RV3 on the FP-152 board) of the LEVEL knob.

AUDIO ADJUST MODEA21:AUDIO D/A ADJUST

ADJUST START YES →NO


COMPLETE ADJUSTING? YES →NO

TURN CH1 AND CH2 AU LEVEL KNOBS SO THAT CH1 AND CH2 OUTPUT LEVELS BECOME 0dBm +-0.05dB

AUDIO ADJUST MODEA22:AUDIO SIDE VOL ADJ

ADJUST START →YES NO

BEFORE ADJUST START,ALIGN CH1&CH2 AU KNOBSTO THE POS ONE SCALELEFT OF MECHA CENTER POS


CH1:OK DATA:0380 CH2:OK DATA:0280

ADJUST COMPLETE

10-4 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

10-3. CUE Audio Alignment

10-3-1. Bias Trap Adjustment

Preparation

Remove the DCP-43 board, DVP-41 board and mechanismdeck dust protection sheet.


1. Insert a working tape and enter the REC mode.

2. Equipment : OscilloscopeMeasurement point : TP602 (D-6)/MDC-13G boardGND : E501 (C-5)/MDC-13G boardAdjustment point : 1LV601 (C-6)/MDC-13G boardSpecifications : A = minimum

(Reference value : 2.5 Vp-p or less)

3. Eject the working tape.

10-3-2. CUE Playback Level Adjustment

Preparation

. S502 (C-4)/FP-152 board (B side) → CUE

. DISPLAY CTL/TC/DATA switch/inside panel → TC

. 1RV603 (D-6) /MDC-13G board (B side)→ Mechanical center

. 1RV604 (D-6) /MDC-13G board (B side)→ Mechanical center


1. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A) and play back the1 kHz, 0 VU signal segment (TIME; 00 : 00 : 00 : 00to 00 : 01 : 25 : 00).Equipment : Audio analyzerMeasurement point : AUDIO OUT connector/

rear panelCH1 (X) : Pin-2CH1 (Y) : Pin-3GND : Pin-1

Adjustment point : 1RV605 (D-6)/MDC-13G board(B side)

Specifications : 0.0 ±0.1 dBm (600 Z)

2. Play back the 1 kHz, _20 VU signal segment (TIME ;00 : 01 : 30 : 00 to 00 : 02 : 25 : 00).Equipment : Audio analyzerMeasurement point : AUDIO OUT connector/


Measure the playback signal level, and take notes ofthe values of the level.

3. Play back the 7 kHz, _20 VU signal segment (TIME ;00 : 03 : 00 : 00 to 00 : 03 : 25 : 00).Equipment : Audio analyzerMeasurement point : AUDIO OUT connector/



Specifications : Within ±0.2 dB with referenceto the 1 kHz playback level

A

10-5HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

4. Play back the 12 kHz, _20 VU signal segment (TIME ;00 : 04 : 00 : 00 to 00 : 04 : 25 : 00).Equipment : Audio analyzerMeasurement point: AUDIO OUT connector/



Specifications : Within ±0.2 dB with reference tothe 1 kHz playback level

5. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A) and play back the1 kHz, 0 VU signal segment (TIME ; 00 : 00 : 00 : 00to 00 : 01 : 25 : 00).Equipment : Audio analyzerMeasurement point : AUDIO OUT connector/



Specifications : 0.0 ±0.1 dBm (600 Z)

10-3-3. CUE Recording Bias PresetAdjustment

Preparation

. If any cable is connected to the AUDIO IN connector/rear panel, remove it.

. Remove the DCP-43 board, DVP-41 board and mecha-nism deck dust protection sheet.


1. Insert a working tape and enter the REC mode.

2. Equipment : Digital voltmeterMeasurement point : TP603 (D-6)/MDC-13G boardGND : TP604 (D-6)/MDC-13G boardAdjustment point : 1RV602 (D-6)/MDC-13G board

(B-5)Specifications : 18.5 ±1.0 mV (rms)

G F E D

C

1

2

3

4

5

6

B

A

S501

S502EECUE

(Factory set)

HG

FED

C

B

A

1

2

3

4

5

6

TP606

E501

LV601TP602

TP603

TP604

TP601

TP605

TP

202

TP

201

TP

301

TP

203

TP

204

TP

101

TP

102

TP

302

H G

F E D

C

B

A

1

2

3

4

5

6

S403

S401S402

RV401

RV605

RV603

RV604RV602

FP-152 board (B side) MDC-13G board (B side)

MDC-13G board (A side)

10-6 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

10-3-4. CUE Record Level Adjustment-1

Preparation

. AUDIO SELECT switch CH1/inside panel → AUTO

. CUE IN SELECT switch/inside panel → CH1

. Connect sine wave of 1 kHz at +4 dBu to AUDIO CH1IN connector/rear panel.


1. Insert a working tape and enter the REC mode.(Record a working tape for about 20 seconds.)

2. Play back the recorded segment of a working tape.

3. Equipment : Audio analyzerMeasurement point : AUDIO OUT connector/


Confirm that the audio level “A” is 0.4 ±0.2 dBm (600 Z).If the audio level “A” is outside the range of 0.4 ±0.2dBm (600 Z), take notes of the values the audio level“A” and proceed to step 4.

4. Rewind a working tape and play back the recordedsegment of a working tape again.

5. Equipment : Audio analyzerMeasurement point : TP501 (B-3)/FP-152 board

(B side)GND : E501 (B-3)/FP-152 board

(B side)Measure the audio level “B”.

6. Compensate the amount of deviation of the playbacksignal from the specifications.Equipment : Audio analyzerMeasurement point : TP501 (B-3)/FP-152 board

(B side)GND : E501 (B-3)/FP-152 board

(B side)Adjustment point : 1RV503 (B-3)/FP-152 board

(B side)Specifications : B_ (A_0.4) ±0.2 dBu

7. Enter the REC mode. (Record a working tape for about20 seconds.)




Confirm that the audio level is 0.4 ±0.2 dBm (600 Z).If the audio level does not meet the specifications,repeat the procedure starting from step 3 again.

G F E D

C

1

2

3

4

5

6

B

A

E501TP501

RV503

FP-152 board (B side)

10-7HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

10-3-5. CUE Record Level Adjustment-2

Preparation

. AUDIO SELECT switch CH1/inside panel → AUTO

. CUE IN SELECT switch/inside panel → CH1

. Connect sine wave of 10 kHz at +4 dBu to AUDIO INCH1 connector/rear panel.


1. Insert a working tape and enter the REC mode.(Record a working tape for about 10 seconds.)



rear panelConfirm that the audio level “A” is 0.4 ±1.5 dBm (600Z).nThe audio level “A” is the signal level when 1 kHz isinput at step 3 in “10-3-4. CUE Record Level Adjust-ment-1”.

4. If the audio signal level “A” does not meet the specifi-cations, adjust 1RV602 (D-6)/MDC-13G board (Bside) as follows.If the measured level is larger than the specifications:

Turn RV602 slightly clockwise.If the measured level is smaller than the specifications:

Turn RV602 slightly counter-clockwise.

5. If RV602 is adjusted in step 4, repeat the adjustmentstarting from step 1.


Return the switch S502 (C-4)/FP-152 board (B side) to theoriginal position (default setting when shipped from thefactory).

H G

F E D

C

B

A

1

2

3

4

5

6

S403

S401S402

RV401

RV605

RV603

RV604RV602


10-8 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

10-4. System Control Alignment

10-4-1. Battery Voltage CorrectionAdjustment

This adjustment supplies accurate +12 V power voltage tothe DC IN connector. The Battery Voltage CorrectionAdjustment is required when the FP-152 board is replaced.


1. Set the switch S1-1/AT-172 board to the ON position.2. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch on the inside panel to

the ON position to start up the maintenance mode.3. Select “A90 : BATTERY CORRECTION”. The

message “FEED ACCURATE DC +12V, PUSH RETO ADJUST” appears.

4. Press the rotary encoder to start adjustment.5. When adjustment is complete, the message “COM-

PLETE” appears. Then press the rotary encoder.

10-4-2. Antenna Tuning FrequencyAdjustment (Tele-File)


m. The adjustment frequency is 13.56 MHz.. Set the oscilloscope Filter and Bandwidth Limiter, etc to

OFF. Check that the oscilloscope probe is alreadycalibrated.

1. Insert a cassette on which the memory label is at-tached.

2. Connect TP103 with the frame chassis (metallic part)of the unit with a shorting clip.

3. Equipment : OscilloscopeMeasurement point : TP101 (A-2)/CCM-45G boardAdjustment point : CT101 (A-2)/CCM-45G boardSpecifications : A = Maximum amplitude

(9 Vp-p or more)

4 Equipment : OscilloscopeMeasurement point : TP102 (A-2)/CCM-45G boardSpecifications : A > 9 Vp-p

B

A

1 2 3 4

CT101

TP101TP102

TP103

A

CCM-45G board (A side)

10-9HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

10-5. Servo System Alignment

All adjustments of the servo system are performed usingthe adjustment menu of the maintenance mode.The data obtained by adjustment is automatically saved inthe servo system EEPROM (IC403/MDC-13G board).nBefore starting the servo system adjustment, be sure to setthe VTR SAVE/STBY switch on the inside panel to theSTBY position.

When an adjustment failsWhen an adjustment fails, the message “INCOMPLETE”appears on the menu display. The following two causes arepossible.. The adjustment itself has not been completed to its end.. The adjustment ended successfully but the data failed to

be saved in the servo system EEPROM.To determine which of the above two causes applies,execute “A000 : NV-RAM INITIALIZE”. If this endswith the message “INCOMPLETE”, communicationwith the servo system EEPROM may have an error.For details of how to execute “A000 : NV-RAMINITIALIZE”, refer to Section 10-5-1.

Adjustment items Menu display

10-5-1. Servo System A000 : NV-RAM INITIALIZEAdjustment DataInitialization

10-5-2. Capstan FG Duty Ratio A001 : CAPSTAN FG DUTYAdjustment

10-5-3. Capstan Add-On A002 : CAPSTAN DELAYRecording Adjustment

10-5-4. Drum Phase Adjustment A003 : DRUM PHASE

nFor the procedure of starting up the maintenance mode,refer to Section 11-2-2.

10-5-1. Servo System Adjustment DataInitialization

When the servo system EEPROM (IC403/MDC-13Gboard) is replaced, the servo adjustment data must beinitialized as follows.nBe sure to turn off the main power upon completion of theservo system adjustment data initialization. Then turn themain power back on and perform all of the adjustmentsshown in Sections 10-5-2 through 10-5-4.



the ON position to start up the maintenance mode.3. Select “A000 : NV-RAM INITIALIZE”. The message

“PUSH RE TO INITIALIZE” appears.4. Press the rotary encoder to start initialization.

The message “NOW INITIALIZING ...” appearswhile the initialization is in progress.

5. When initialization ends successfully, the message“COMPLETE” appears.

6. Turn off the main power once.

When the adjustment failsWhen the initialization fails, the message “INCOM-PLETE” appears.Check the following possible causes.. IC403/MDC-13G board is defective.. Communication between the MDC-13G board and the

SS-92G board is defective.

10-10 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

10-5-2. Capstan FG Duty Ratio Adjustment



the ON position to start up the maintenance mode.3. Select “A001 : CAPSTAN FG DUTY”. The message

“PUSH RE TO ADJUST” appears.4. Press the rotary encoder to start adjustment.

The message “NOW ADJUSTING ...” appears whilethe adjustment is in progress.

5. When adjustment ends successfully, the message“COMPLETE” appears. The adjustment data isautomatically saved in the servo system EEPROM(IC403/MDC-13G board).

When the adjustment failsWhen the adjustment fails, the message “INCOMPLETE”appears.Check the following possible causes.. MDC-13G board capstan FG amplifier or capstan motor

driver circuit is defective.. SS-92G board capstan drive output signal or duty ratio

adjustment output signal is abnormal.. Capstan motor is defective.

10-5-3. Capstan Add-On RecordingAdjustment

Adjust it by 59.94i format. A working tape is required forthe adjustment. Use the center position, which is at about20 to 25 minutes of a BCT-40HD cassette tape.nYou can check that a working tape is at about the 20-minute position as follows:. The 4 black square indicators “ ” turn on in the

remaining tape indication area on the display window/inside panel.

. The message “20-15” appears in the remaining tapeindication area on VF.


1. Cue up a working tape to about the 20-minute position.2. Eject the working tape.3. Set the switch S1-1/AT-172 board to the ON position.4. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch on the inside panel to

the ON position to start up the maintenance mode.5. Select “A002: CAPSTAN DELAY”. The message

“INSERT WORK TAPE” appears.6. Insert a working tape (that has already been cued up to

about the 20-minute position.)7. When the working tape is inserted, the adjustment

starts automatically.The message “NOW ADJUSTING ...” appears whilethe adjustment is in progress.


9. The working tape is ejected automatically.

When the adjustment failsWhen the adjustment fails, the message “INCOMPLETE”appears and the working tape is ejected automatically.Check the following possible causes and repeat thisadjustment again.. Tape run is abnormal or the tape is damaged.. Tension of the timing belt needs adjustment.nRefer to the following sections for adjusting the tension ofthe timing belt.8-1-3. FWD Holdback Tension Adjustment8-1-4. REV Holdback Tension Adjustment8-1-5. Timing Belt Tension Adjustment

10-11HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

10-5-4. Drum Phase Adjustment

The alignment tape (HR2-1A : Part No. 8-960-076-11) isrequired for this adjustment. The alignment tape (HR2-1A)is used at the position of 00 : 01 : 00 : 00 to 00 : 10 : 00 : 00.nBe sure to use the specified alignment tape. If any tapeother than the specified alignment tape is used for thisadjustment, the correct drum phase cannot be obtainedeven though “COMPLETE” appears upon completion ofadjustment.


1. Cue up the alignment tape (HR2-1A ) to the positionof 00 : 01 : 00 : 00.

2. Eject the alignment tape.3. Set the switch S1-1/AT-172 board to the ON position.4. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch on the inside panel to

the ON position to start up the maintenance mode.5. Select “A003 : DRUM PHASE”.

The message “PUSH RE TO ADJUST” appears.6. Press the rotary encoder.

The message “INSERT HR2-1A” appears.7. Insert the alignment tape (HR2-1A ) that has been

already cued up to the position of 00 : 01 : 00 : 00.8. When the alignment tape is inserted, the adjustment

starts automatically.The message “NOW ADJUSTING ...” appears whilethe adjustment is in progress.


10. The alignment tape is ejected automatically.

When the adjustment failsWhen the adjustment fails, the message “INCOMPLETE”appears and the alignment tape is ejected automatically.Check the following possible causes and repeat thisadjustment again.. The alignment tape (HR2-1A ) is not cued up to the

correct position of 00 : 01 : 00 : 00.. Tape running is abnormal during playback mode.. IC303/MDC-13G board is defective.. Signal circuit between the MDC-13G board and the SS-

92G board is defective.. Signal circuit between the EQ-88G board and the MDR-

14G board is defective.. Signal circuit between the MDC-13G board and the

MDR-14G board is defective.. Drum motor unit is defective.

10-6. RF System Alignment

All adjustments of the RF system are performed using theadjustment menu of the maintenance mode.nIt is necessary to adjust each 59.94i/50i/23.98PsF frequen-cy of the frame.

Adjustment items Menu display

10-6-1. RF System Continuous A17 : A11 - A16 ALL ADJUSTAutomatic Adjustment

10-6-2. Saving the RF System A1F : NV-RAM CONTROLAdjustment Data

10-6-3. PB Channel Condition C11 : PB CH CONDITIONCheck

10-6-4. REC Channel Condition C12 : REC CH CONDITIONCheck

10-6-1. RF System Continuous AutomaticAdjustment

When this adjustment is once initiated, the followingadjustments are performed automatically in the ordershown below.1. Playback PLL circuit VCO free-run frequency adjust-

ment during playback mode (A13 : PLAY PLL)2. RF signal A/D conversion gain adjustment (A16 : A/D

GAIN)3. Playback level of PB heads and playback equalizer

circuit gain/phase adjustment (A11 : EQUALIZER)4. Playback PLL circuit VCO free-run frequency adjust-

ment in FWD mode (A14 : FWD PLL)5. Playback PLL circuit VCO free-run frequency adjust-

ment in REV mode (A15 : REV PLL)6. Record current/record frequency response adjustment

of recording heads (A12 : REC CURRENT)

nFor the above adjustment items 1 through 5, be sure to usethe alignment tape (HR5-1A : Part No. 8-960-076-01).For the adjustment item 6, use a working tape (BCT-40HD).The correct adjustment cannot be executed if a tape otherthan the specified tape is used for adjustment.

10-12 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)


1. Set the switch S1-1/AT-172 board to the ON position.2. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A) and rewind the

alignment tape to the tape top.3. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch on the inside panel to

the ON position to start up the maintenance mode.4. Select “A17 : A11-A16 ALL ADJUST”. The message

“PUSH RE TO ADJUST” appears.5. Press the rotary encoder and the playback system

adjustment is started automatically.The message “NOW ADJUSTING ...” appears whilethe adjustment is in progress.

6. When playback system adjustment ends successfully,the message “SET WORK TAPE FOR REC CUR-RENT ADJUSTMENT” appears. The alignment tapeis ejected automatically.nThe playback system alignment takes about 3 to 4 min-utes.

7. When a working tape is inserted, the record systemadjustment starts automatically.

8. When the record system adjustment ends with success,the message “AUTO ADJUST COMPLETE” appears.The recording system adjustment takes about 4 to 5minutes.

When the adjustment failsWhen the adjustment fails, the message “INCOMPLETE”appears and the alignment is halted automatically at theinstant when an error occurs. The subsequent adjustmentitems are not executed.When the adjustment fails, check the followings in theorder shown below.1. Check whether the alignment tape is HR5-1A or not.2. If the unit is not cleaned, perform cleaning as de-

scribed below and perform the adjustment again.a) Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning tape and

repeat the above adjustment again.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of

the adjustment.b) Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning tape again

and repeat the above adjustment.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of

the adjustment.

c) Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning cloth(refer to Section 2-1) and repeat the above adjustmentagain.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of

the adjustment.If the adjustment fails still, check the followingpossible causes.. Defective adjustment of the servo system, or servo

circuit is defective.. The playback heads inside the drum assembly were

worn out.. Defective adjustment of tape run system, or part

mounting is defective.. The EQ-88G board is defective.. Drum assembly is defective.. Brush/slip ring assembly or its mounting or connec-

tion is defective.. Connection of the flexible board (between the MDR-

14G board and the EQ-88G board) is defective.

10-6-2. Saving the RF System AdjustmentData

nIf the automatic adjustment does not end with success, donot save the adjustment data.

Procedure

1. Select “A1F : NV-RAM CONTROL”.2. Rotate the rotary encoder to move the cursor to

“SAVE ALL ADJUSTMENT DATA”.3. Press the rotary encoder to start saving the data. The

message “NOW SAVING ....” appears while saving isin progress.

4. When saving the data ends successfully, the message“COMPLETE” appears.

10-13HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

10-6-3. PB Channel Condition Check

This check requires the alignment tape (HR5-1A : Part No.8-960-076-01).Use the segment of the alignment tape that has the continu-ous recording of 2 minutes or longer.

Check Procedure

1. Set the switch S1-1/AT-172 board to the ON position.2. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A).3. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch on the inside panel to

the ON position to start up the maintenance mode.4. Select “C11 : PB CH CONDITION”. The message

“PUSH RE TO ADJUST” appears.5. Move the cursor to “ALL” and press the rotary

encoder to start checking.The message “NOW CHECKING ...” appears whilethe checking is in progress.

6. All channels are checked starting from A-CH in order.7. When the check ends successfully, the message

“GRN” appears in the right of “ALL”.

When the check failsWhen the check fails, the message “CONDITION NG” appears.When the check fails, perform the check again in thefollowing order shown below.1. Change the playback position of the alignment and

perform the check again.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of

the check.2. Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning tape and

repeat the above check.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of

the check.3. Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning tape again

and repeat the above check.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of

the check.4. Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning cloth

(refer to Section 2-1) and perform the above checkagain.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of

the check.If the check fails still, check the following possible causes.. Defective adjustment of the servo system, or servo

circuit is defective.. Defective adjustment of the RF playback system.. The playback heads inside the drum assembly were


mounting is defective.. The EQ-88G board is defective.. Drum assembly is defective.

10-6-4. REC Channel Condition Check

This check requires a working tape (BCT-40HD).

Check Procedure

1. Set the switch S1-1/AT-172 board to the ON position.2. Insert a working tape.3. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch on the inside panel to

the ON position to start up the maintenance mode.4. Select “C12 : REC CH CONDITION”. The message

“PUSH RE TO ADJUST” appears.5. Move the cursor to “ALL” and press the rotary

encoder to start checking.The message “NOW CHECKING ...” appears whilethe checking is in progress.

6. All channels are checked starting from A-CH in order.7. When the check ends successfully, the message

“GRN” appears in the right of “ALL”.

When the check failsWhen the check fails, the message “CONDITION NG”appears.When the check fails, perform the check again in thefollowing order shown below.1. Perform PB Channel Condition Check using the

alignment tape (HR5-1A). (Refer to Section 10-6-3.)If any abnormality is found, follow the instructionsdescribed in “When the check fails” of Section 10-6-3.When no abnormality is found, proceed to step 2.

2. Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning tape andrepeat Section 10-6-4 using a working tape.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of

the check.3. Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning tape again

and repeat the above check.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of

the check.4. Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning cloth (refer

to Section 2-1) and repeat the above check again.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of

the check.If the check fails still, check the following possiblecauses.. Defective adjustment of the servo system, or servo

circuit is defective.. The playback heads inside the drum assembly were


mounting is defective.. The EQ-88G board is defective.. Drum assembly is defective.

11-1HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Section 11VTR Maintenance Mode

11-1. Introduction

The VTR maintenance mode of the HDW-F900R is for maintenance and diagnosis, and consists of thetop menu and submenus. The menu structure of the VTR maintenance mode is shown below.The respective menu contents are displayed on the viewfinder of this unit and on the video monitorconnected to the TEST OUT connector of the unit.

Menu Structure of VTR Maintenance Mode

S13 : VTR MAINTE

C0 : SERVO CHECK

C00-03 : SERVO CHECK

C00 : INPUT CHECK

C000 : CASSETTE SW C001 : CASSETTE COMP. SWC002 : TAPE T/E SENSORC003 : HUMID SENSORC004 : DRUM/CAP MOTOR STSC005 : FUNCTION CAM POS

C1 : RF CHECK

A000 : NV-RAM INITIALIZEA001 : CAPSTAN FG DUTYA002 : CAPSTAN DELAYA003 : DRUM PHASE

C11 : PB CH CONDITIONC12 : REC CH CONDITION

C2 : AUDIO CHECK

C20 : AUDIO A/D CHKC21 : AUDIO D/A CHKC22 : AUDIO SIDE VOL CHK

A2 : AUDIO ADJUST

A20 : AUDIO A/D ADJA21 : AUDIO D/A ADJA22 : AUDIO SIDE VOL ADJ

A0 : SERVO ADJUST

A00 : SERVO ADJUST

A1 : RF ADJUST

A11 : EQUALIZERA12 : REC CURRENTA13 : PLAY PLLA14 : FWD PLLA15 : REV PLLA16 : A/D GAINA17 : A11-A16 ALL ADJUSTA1F : NV-RAM CONTROL

A4 : MECHANISM ADJUST

A40 : PATH MODE SELA41 : DRUM PHASE

A9 : OTHERS ADJUST

A90 : BATTERY CORRECTIONA91 : MDC-13 BOARD CHANGE

C01 : FUNCTION CAM CHECK C02 : MOTOR SERVO & FG CHECKC03 : SLACK CHECK

11-2 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

11-2. Operation Procedure

11-2-1. Identifying Switches

MENU ON/OFF switchUse this switch to turn the VTR maintenance menu on and off. When the lid is closed, the switch is set inthe OFF position.ON : The VTR maintenance menu is shown on the display.OFF : The VTR maintenance menu is not shown on the display.

ESCAPE switchUse this switch to return to the previous display.

Rotary encoderRotate : Rotate the rotary encoder to move the cursor in the direction of the arrow (→) to select the

desired item.Press : Press the rotary encoder to set the selected item.

11-2-2. How to Enter VTR Maintenance Mode

1. Set the switch S1-1/AT-172 board to the ON position.2. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch on the inside panel to the ON position to start up the maintenance

mode.3. The TOP MENU display appears.4. Select SERVICE and press the rotary encoder.

Rotary encoder

CANCEL/PRSTOFF

ONESCAPE

MENU

ON/SEL

OFFSTATUS

MENU ON/OFF switch

ESCAPE switch

S <TOP MENU>

USER USER MENU CUSTOMIZE ALL OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE DIAGNOSIS SERVICE →

.

.

.

.

.

11-3HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

5. The SERVICE display appears.

6. Select S13 VTR MAINTE and press the rotary encoder.7. The top menu of the VTR MAINTE appears.

nAlternatively, the VTR Maintenance mode can be started as follows instead of steps 6 and 7.

6. Select S00. CONTENTS and press the rotary encoder.(The arrow mark (→) appears next to the submenu.)

7. Rotate the rotary encoder to move the arrow mark (→) to 13. VTR MAINTE and press the rotaryencoder.

11-2-3. How to Exit VTR Maintenance Mode

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch on the inside panel to the OFF position. (Closing the lid turns off theMENU ON/OFF switch automatically.)

11-2-4. Tips on Operations

. The function buttons for inserting a cassette tape, shooting, recording and playing back can be operatedfrom the displays on which the black square box ( ) appears at the top right. Note that operation maynot work as expected when the function buttons are operated while CHECK/ADJUST is in progress.Note that the function buttons for inserting a cassette tape and other functions cannot be operated on thedisplays without the black square box ( ) displayed at the top right.

. There is no specific order of operation in the respective menu items; each menu item can be operatedindependently. However, by performing all of the menu items in numerical order of menu number, theunit can be thoroughly checked and adjusted by the built-in CHECK/ADJUST functions.

. Be sure to use the specified alignment tape and/or working tape in the CHECK/ADJUST items thatrequire a cassette tape to be used.

S00.CONTENTS TOP 01.MENU SET 02.SP FUNC 03.VA ADJUST 04.CCD ADJUST 05.DCP ADJUST 06.RP DC OFFSET 07.MANUAL RPN 08.SD ADJUST 09.DR ADJUST 10.VTR MODE-7

VTR MAINTENANCE MENU

C0 : SERVO CHECK C1 : RF CHECK C2 : AUDIO CHECK A0 : SERVO ADJUST A1 : RF ADJUST A2 : AUDIO ADJUST A4 : MECHANISM ADJUST A9 : OTHERS ADJUST

11-4 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

11-3. Contents of Menus

11-3-1. Servo System Self-Diagnosis Mode(C0 : SERVO CHECK)

This mode self-diagnoses the servo system automatically or manually.nTo self-diagnose the servo system manually, the outside panel needsto be removed.

Operation procedure1. Let the display show the top menu of VTR MAINTE menu.

(Refer to Section 11-2-2.)2. Press the rotary encoder.3. Select C0 : SERVO CHECK and press the rotary encoder.

(If a cassette tape is inserted, it is ejected automatically.)The message “C00-03 : SERVO CHECK” appears.

SERVO CHECK MENU

C00-03:SERVO CHECK

SERVO CHECK MENU C0 :SERVO CHECK C00:INPUT CHECK C01:FUNCTION CAM CHECK C02:MOTOR SERVO & FG CHECK C03:SLACK CHECK

4. Press the rotary encoder. The SERVO CHECK MENU displayappears.

C00 : INPUT CHECK

Checks the sensor operations automatically or manually.1. From the SERVO CHECK MENU display, select “C00 : INPUT

CHECK” and press the rotary encoder.2. Select the desired item to be checked and press the rotary encoder.3. The selected item is checked.4. Press the ESCAPE switch to return to the INPUT CHECK

display.

SERVO CHECK MENU C00:INPUT CHECK C000:CASSETTE SW C001:CASSETTE COMP. SW C002:TAPE T/E SENSOR C003:HUMID SENSOR C004:DRUM/CAP MOTOR STS C005:FUNCTION CAM POS

11-5HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

Sensor locations

nThe numbers that are put to the sensors in the illustration correspond to the menu item numbers of theINPUT CHECK in Section 11.

2 Cassette- in sensor

1 REC INHIBIT sensor

3 Tape-end sensor 3 Full-top sensor

4 Humid sensor

4 Humid sensor

3 Tape-top sensor6 Function cam sensors

2 Cassette lock sensor

1 Cassette ID sensor

ID-1

ID-2

ID-3

ID-4

ID-5

ID-6

11-6 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

11111 C000 : CASSETTE SWChecks the functions of the cassette ID sensor and the REC INHIBITsensor.

1. Select “C000 : CASSETTE SW” and press the rotary encoder.2. Press the cassette ID sensor and the REC INHIBIT sensor with a

fingertip. Alternatively, insert a cassette tape so that the abovesensors are pressed down.

3. Check that the bit corresponding to the pressed sensor changes to“1” on the display. (The bit corresponding to the un-pressedsensor remains “0”.)(For details of the respective sensors, refer to Section 1-1-3,“Sensor Layout Diagram and Function Description”.)mIf the bit that corresponds to the pressed sensor does not change to“1”, or does not return to “0” when released, check the following.For the cassette ID sensor. The corresponding cassette ID sensor (Refer to the table below.). Signal path between the MDC-13G board and the SS-92G

boardFor the REC INHIBIT sensor. REC INHIBIT sensor (Refer to the table below.). Signal path between the SE-613 board and the MDC-13G board. Signal path between the MDC-13G board and the SS-92G

board

Sensor correspondence tableCassette ID sensor

ID ID-1 ID-2 ID-3 ID-4 ID-5 ID-6

Ref./ S308 S304 S305 S303 S301 S302MDC-13G board

REC INHIBIT sensor

ID B

Ref./ S1SE-613 board

SERVO CHECK MENU C000:CASSETTE SW 3:ID-3 1:ID-1 2:ID-2 5:ID-5 4:ID-4 6:ID-6

B:S REC INH

B 312 SW B654321 5 4 0000000 6

11-7HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

22222 C001 : CASSETTE COMP. SWChecks functions of the sensors used in the cassette compartmentblock.

1. Select “C001 : CASSETTE COMP. SW” and press the rotaryencoder.

2. Check to see that the sensor of the cassette compartment changesits status on the monitor from “OFF” → “DET” → “OFF” whenthe cassette lid is opened, and a cassette tape is inserted gently andthen the cassette is pushed in until the clicking sound is heard.

3. Check that the cassette-in sensor changes its status on the monitorfrom “OUT” to “IN”.

4. Check that the status returns from “IN” to “OUT” when theEJECT button is pressed. (The status of the cassette-lock sensoron the monitor changes from “OFF” → “DET” → “OFF” eitherwhen the cassette lid is closed and when the EJECT button ispressed.)mIf status of the cassette-in sensor does not change its status to“IN” or does not return to “OUT”, or if status of the cassette-locksensor does not return to “OFF”, check the followings.For the cassette-in sensor. Cassette-in sensor (S2/SE-613 board). Signal path between the SE-613 board and the MDC-13G board. Signal path between the MDC-13G board and the SS-92G

boardFor the cassette-lock sensor. Cassette-lock sensor (PH307/ MDC-13G board). Cassette lock detector circuit (Q307 and others/MDC-13G

board and IC1 and others/SS-92G board). Signal path between the MDC-13G board and the SS-92G

board

nFunction of the cassette-in sensor can be checked by pressing thecassette-in sensor with finger. However, if it is pressed by finger, theunit judges that a cassette tape is inserted and SLACK-342 occurs.

SERVO CHECK MENU C001:CASSETTE COMP. SW

CASSETTE IN SW:OUT

CASS-COM LOCK :OFF

11-8 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

33333 C002 : TAPE T/E SENSORChecks functions of the tape-top sensor, tape-end sensor and full-topsensor.

1. Select “C002 : TAPE T/E SENSOR” and press the rotary encoder.2. Bring a piece of metal (such as screwdriver tip) closer to the full-

top sensor. Check that status of the full-top sensor on the monitorchanges from “OFF” to “DET”. Check also that status returnsfrom “DET” to “OFF” when a piece of metal is removed from thesensor.

3. Insert a cassette tape and rewind it to the tape top. Check to seethat status of the top-sensor changes to “DET” at the tape top andthen returns to “OFF”.At the same time, the tape is advanced in fast-forward (or play).Check to see that status of the end-sensor change to “DET” at thetape end and then returns to “OFF”.mIf “DET” is not displayed at the specified position or status doesnot return to “OFF”, check the followings.. Tape position detector circuit (IC304 and others/MDC-13G

board and IC1 and others/SS-92G board). Signal path between the respective sensors and the MDC-13G

board (CN508, CN509, CN512). Signal path between the MDC-13G board and the SS-92G

board

mThis unit monitors the following sensors.. When a cassette tape is running in the FWD direction :

Tape-end sensor. When a cassette tape is running in the REW direction :

Tape-top sensor. When a cassette tape is not inserted : Full-top sensor

SERVO CHECK MENU C002:TAPE T/E SENSOR

FULL TOP SENSOR:OFF

TOP SENSOR:OFF

END SENSOR:OFF

11-9HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

44444 C003 : HUMID SENSORChecks operation of the humid sensor.

1. Select “C003 : HUMID SENSOR” and press the rotary encoder.2. Touch the humid sensor (2 locations) with a cotton swab moist-

ened with water.3. Check to see that “DRY” changes to “WET” when the humid

sensor is moistened.n“WET” appears even only one of the two sensors is moistenedand detects humidity. Therefore, check the two sensors respec-tively.

4. Check that the monitor display changes to “DRY” when thehumid sensor is dried as it is wiped with a dry cotton swab or asthe water content is evaporated by blowing air with a blower.mIf the monitor display does not change from “DRY” to “WET”when the humid sensor is moistened or if the monitor display doesnot return from “WET” to “DRY” when the humid sensor isdried, check the followings.. Humid sensor. Humid detector circuit (IC303 and others/MDC-13G board, IC1

and others/SS-92G board). Signal path between the respective sensors and the MDC-13G

board (CN510, CN511). Signal path between the MDC-13G board and the SS-92G

boardnThe TALLY lamp keeps turning on for about 60 seconds after thedisplay returned from “WET” to “DRY” and the HUMID displayappears on the display window.(For the details of the warning system, refer to “8-3. OperationWarnings” of the Operation Manual.)

SERVO CHECK MENU C003:HUMID SENSOR

HUMID SENSOR : DRY

11-10 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

55555 C004 : DRUM/CAP MOTOR STSIndicates the operating status of drum motor and capstan motor.

nIn order to let the capstan motor enter the “LOCK” state, a cassettetape on which the CTL signal is already recorded, must be playedback.Playback an appropriate cassette tape on which the CTL signal isalready recorded, or playback the alignment HR2-1A (Part No. 8-960-076-11) or HR5-1A (Part No. 8-960-076-01).

1. Select “C004 : DRUM/CAP MOTOR STS” and press the rotaryencoder.

2. The operating status of drum motor and capstan motor aredisplayed on display.<Status of each motor>When stopped : STOPWhen rotating (non-locked) : ROTATEWhen rotating (locked) : LOCK

mIf a motor does not rotate, or if the monitor display does notchange even if the motor is rotating, check the followings.. Drum motor and the motor driver circuit (IC1 and others/MDR-

14G board). Drum FG/PG detector circuit (IC4 and others/MDR-14G board,

IC1 and others/SS-92G board). Reference signal (DVP_REF_FRM/CF) (DVP-41 board). Capstan motor and the motor driver circuit (IC102 and others/

MDC-13G board). Capstan FG detector circuit (IC201 and others/MDC-13G

board, IC1 and others/SS-92G board). Signal path between and the MDR-14G board and the MDC-

13G board. Signal path between the MDC-13G board and the SS-92G

board

SERVO CHECK MENU C004:DRUM/CAP MOTOR STS

DRUM MOTOR : STOP

CAPSTAN MOTOR : STOP

11-11HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

nThe display on monitor changes in accordance with thestatus of the function cam sensor as shown in the FunctionCam Code Transition Table.The status of each sensor can be checked by either one ofthe following two methods.

1. Observe the check-land (CL301 to CL304/MDC-13Gboard) with an oscilloscope. The SS-92G board musthave been removed earlier to connect an oscilloscopeto the check-land. As the function cam can be movedof its position by hand, the sensor status also changes.Move the function cam by hand as follows and checkthat the sensor status changes accordingly as shown inthe table.. While pushing the manual eject gear with a flat-head

screwdriver tip, rotate the manual eject gear in theclockwise direction (unloading direction) or counter-clockwise direction (loading direction). (Refer toSection 1-11.)

nIf the front lid has been opened, never rotate the gearin the clockwise direction.

2. Connect the SS-92G board connector (CN201) and theMDC-13G board connector (CN201) with the use ofthe EX-764 board and the two flexible card wires (45pins). Check the function cam sensor status with anoscilloscope referring to the function cam codetransition table.In this case, the function cam is controlled of itsposition automatically by the SS-92G board. There-fore, check that the function cam sensor status matcheswith the monitor display as shown in the FunctionCam Code Transition table.

Function Cam Code Transition Table

Detecting Sensor status (MDC-13G board)position

Monitor CL304 CL303 CL302 CL301

display (CN201-39) (CN201-40) (CN201-41) (CN201-42)

B0 H L L L

EJECT H L L H

B1 H L H H

STBY H L H L

B2 H H H L

LOAD1 H H H H

LOAD2 H H L H

LOAD H H L L

LIMIT L H L L

B3 L H L H

STOP L H H H

B4 L H H L

RUN L L H L

B5 L L H H

CL L L L H

B6 L L L L

MDC-13G board (A side)

66666 C005 : FUNCTION CAM POSIndicates the detecting position of the function gear.

1. Select “C005: FUNCTION CAM POS” and press the rotaryencoder.

2. Insert a working tape (blank tape: BCT-40HD that is commercial-ly available) and check to see that the arrow mark (→) moves.

3. Check to see that the arrow mark (→) moves when the tapeEJECT button is pressed.mIf the arrow mark (→) does not move even when the tape isinserted or ejected, check the followings.. Function cam sensor (PH301 to PH304/MDC-13G board). Cam position detector circuit (Q301 and others/MDC-13G

board, IC1 and others/SS-92G board). Signal path between the MDC-13G board and the SS-92G boardIf the function cam does not operate correctly, the SLACK erroroccurs. Take an appropriate measure in accordance with the corre-sponding error code referring to Section “3. Error Diagnostics”.

CL3

04

CL3

03

CL3

02

CL3

01

SERVO CHECK MENU C005:FUNCTION CAM POS

1.B0 9.LIMIT 2.EJECT 10.B3 3.B1 11.STOP 4.STBY 12.B4 5.B2 13.RUN 6.LOAD1 14.B5 7.LOAD2 15.CL 8.LOAD 16.B6

→

11-12 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

C01 : FUNCTION CAM CHECK

Checks operation of the function cam automatically.1. Select “C01: FUNCTION CAM CHECK” on the SERVO

CHECK MENU display and press the rotary encoder.

SERVO CHECK MENU C01:FUNCTION CAM CHECK

PUSH RE TO CHECK


NOW CHECKING......


COMPLETE

2. Press the rotary encoder again, then the self-diagnosis starts.

3. The self-diagnosis ends and the result of the self-diagnosis isdisplay.When the self-diagnosis ends successfully :The message “COMPLETE” appears.When the self-diagnosis fails :The message “INCOMPLETE” appears.

4. Press the ESCAPE switch to return to the SERVO CHECKMENU display.mIf the message “INCOMPLETE” appears (the SLACK indicationdoes not appear), perform the following.1) Press the ESCAPE switch to return to the SERVO CHECK

MENU display.2) Let the display show C01: INPUT CHECK → C005 : FUNC-

TION CAM. POS and check the faulty positions. (The arrowmark (→) stops at the position where error occurs.)

3) Investigate the cause of the trouble by following Error Code61 and Error Code 62 in Section “3. Error Diagnostics”.

11-13HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

C02 : MOTOR SERVO & FG CHECK

Checks operation of the servo system motor automatically.1. Select “C02 : MOTOR SERVO & FG CHECK” on the SERVO

CHECK MENU display and press the rotary encoder.

SERVO CHECK MENU C02:MOTOR SERVO & FG CHECK

PUSH RE TO CHECK


NOW CHECKING......


COMPLETE

SERVO CHECK MENU C03:SLACK CHECK

SLACK CODE DATE TIME1.0000 00/00 00:002.0000 00/00 00:003.0000 00/00 00:004.0000 00/00 00:005.0000 00/00 00:006.0000 00/00 00:007.0000 00/00 00:008.0000 00/00 00:00

2. Check that a cassette tape is not inserted, and press the rotaryencoder. The self-diagnosis starts.

3. The self-diagnosis ends and the result of the self-diagnosis isdisplay.When the self-diagnosis ends successfully :The message “COMPLETE” appears.When the self-diagnosis fails :The message “INCOMPLETE” appears.

4. Press the ESCAPE switch to return to the SERVO CHECKMENU display.nWhen the message “INCOMPLETE” appears, perform thefollowing.The TALLY lamp flashes and an error code appears in thetimecode position on the display window.(For the details of the warning system, refer to “3-1-2. Details ofError Codes”.)

C03 : SLACK CHECK

Displays the history of the eight slack detections that have occurred inthe past.1. Select “C03 : SLACK CHECK” on the SERVO CHECK MENU

display and press the rotary encoder.2. The SLACK information in the past is displayed as follows.

1 : Newest information8 : Oldest informationFor details of the SLACK information, refer to “3. Error Diagnostics”.

3. Press the ESCAPE switch to return to the SERVO CHECKMENU display.

11-14 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

11-3-2. RF System Self-Diagnosis Mode(C1 : RF CHECK)

Checks the error conditions of the RF system during recording andplayback. Result of the self-diagnosis is displayed in 3 steps (GRN,YEL and RED).


(Refer to Section 11-2-2.)2. Press the rotary encoder. (If a cassette tape is inserted, it is ejected

automatically.)3. Select “C1 : RF CHECK” and press the rotary encoder. The RF

CHECK MENU display appears.

RF CHECK MENU C11:PB CH CONDITION

C12:REC CH CONDITION


PUSH RE TO CHECK

CH RSLT CH RSLT A B C D E F G H ALL


NOW CHECKING...

CH RSLT CH RSLT A GRN B GRN C YEL D GRN E F G H ALL

C11 : PB CH CONDITION

1. Select “C11: PB CH CONDITION” on the RF CHECK MENUdisplay and press the rotary encoder.

11111 To diagnose all channels1. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A : Part No. 8-960-076-01).

nSelect the portion of the alignment tape that has 2 minutes ofcontinuous recording.

2. Select ALL and press the rotary encoder.3. The self-diagnosis starts from channel A.

If the alignment tape is not inserted, the message “INSERT HR5-1A” appears and the cassette lid opens. When the alignment tapeis inserted, “WAITING ...” appears and then the self-diagnosisstarts.

11-15HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

4. The adjustment results of all channels are displayed.When the adjustment ends normally :“GRN” is displayed in the ALL column.

nWhen the adjustment fails: “CONDITION NG” is displayed, checkthe followings in the order as shown below again.

1. Change the playback position of the alignment and perform thecheck again.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of the check.

2. Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning tape and repeat theabove check.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of the check.

3. Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning tape again and repeatthe above check.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of the check.

4. Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning cloth (referring toSection 2-1) and repeat the above adjustment again.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of the check.If the check fails still, check the following possible causes.. Defective adjustment of the servo system, or servo circuit is

defective.. Defective adjustment of the RF playback system.. The playback heads inside the drum assembly were worn out.. Defective adjustment of tape run system, or part mounting is

defective.. EQ-88G board is defective.. Drum assembly is defective

22222 To check the desired channel only1. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A: Part No. 8-960-076-01).

nSelect the portion of the alignment tape that has 30 seconds ofcontinuous recording.

2. Select the desired channel to check and press the rotary encoder.3. The check result appears in the selected channel only. (It is not

displayed in the ALL column.)

When the adjustment fails :“CONDITION NG” is displayed. The worst result isdisplayed in the ALL column.


COMPLETE

CH RSLT CH RSLT A GRN B GRN C GRN D GRN E GRN F GRN G GRN H GRN→ALL GRN


CONDITION NG

CH RSLT CH RSLT A GRN B GRN C YEL D RED E GRN F GRN G GRN H GRN ALL RED→


COMPLETE

CH RSLT CH RSLT A B C D E GRN F G H ALL

→

11-16 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

C12 : REC CH CONDITION

1. Select “C12 : REC CH CONDITION” on the RF CHECK MENUdisplay and press the rotary encoder.

RF CHECK MENU C12:REC CH CONDITION

PUSH RE TO CHECK



NOW CHECKING...

CH RSLT CH RSLT A GRN B GRN C YEL D GRN E F G H ALL


COMPLETE

CH RSLT CH RSLT A GRN B GRN C GRN D GRN E GRN F GRN G GRN H GRN→ALL GRN


CONDITION NG

CH RSLT CH RSLT A GRN B GRN C YEL D RED E GRN F GRN G GRN H GRN ALL RED→

11111 To diagnose all channels1. Insert a working tape (blank tape: BCT-40HD that is commercial-

ly available).2. Select ALL and press the rotary encoder.3. The self-diagnosis starts from channel A.

If a working tape is not inserted, the message “INSERT WORKTAPE” appears and the cassette lid opens. When a working tapeis inserted, the self-diagnosis starts.

4. The self-diagnosis results of all channels are displayed.

When the self-diagnosis ends normally :“GRN” is displayed in the ALL column.

When the self-diagnosis fails : “CONDITION NG” isdisplayed. The worst result is displayed in the ALLcolumn.

11-17HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

nWhen the adjustment fails and “CONDITION NG” is displayed,check the followings in the order as shown below.

1. Perform C11 : PB CH CONDITION check again using thealignment tape (HR5-1A).

2. If any abnormality is found, check the possible causes referring ton of C11 : PB CH CONDITION.

If abnormality cannot be found in the above check, perform the checkagain in the following order shown below.1. Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning tape and check the

“REC Channel Condition Check” using a working tape.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of the check.

2. Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning tape again and repeatthe above check.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of the check.

3. Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning cloth (referring toSection 2-1) and repeat the above adjustment again.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of the check.If the check fails still, check the following possible causes.. Defective adjustment of the servo system, or servo circuit is

defective.. The playback heads inside the drum assembly were worn out.. Defective adjustment of tape run system, or part mounting is

defective.. EQ-88G board is defective.. Drum assembly is defective.

22222 To check the desired channel only1. Insert a working tape (blank tape: BCT-40HD that is commercial-

ly available).2. Select the desired channel to check and press the rotary encoder.3. The check result appears in the selected channel only. (It is not

displayed in the ALL column.)


COMPLETE

CH RSLT CH RSLT A B C D E GRN F G H ALL

→

11-18 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

11-3-3. Audio System Adjustment Value Check Mode(C2 : AUDIO CHECK)

This mode checks the audio system adjustment values stored in theunit.


(Refer to Section 11-2-2.)2. Press the rotary encoder.3. Select “C2 : AUDIO CHECK”, and press the rotary encoder.

C2 : The AUDIO CHECK MODE display appears.

C20 : AUDIO A/D CHECK

1. Select “C20 : AUDIO A/D CHK” on the AUDIO CHECK MODEdisplay, and press the rotary encoder. Results of all the channelsappears.

C21 : AUDIO D/A CHECK

1. Select “C21 : AUDIO D/A CHK” on the AUDIO CHECK MODEdisplay, and press the rotary encoder. Results of all the channelsappears.

C22 : AUDIO SIDE VOL CHK

1. Select “C22 : AUDIO SIDE VOL CHK” on the AUDIO CHECKMODE display, and press the rotary encoder. Results for the CH1and CH2 appears.

AUDIO CHECK MODE

C20:AUDIO A/D CHK C21:AUDIO D/A CHK C22:AUDIO SIDE VOL CHK

AUDIO CHECK MODEC20:AUDIO A/D CHECK

CH1 A/D DATA:1DF0 CH2 A/D DATA:1DE2 CH3 A/D DATA:1DA1 CH4 A/D DATA:1DBB

AUDIO CHECK MODEC21:AUDIO D/A CHECK

CH1 D/A DATA:1EDC CH2 D/A DATA:1F58 CH3 D/A DATA:1EDC CH4 D/A DATA:1F58

AUDIO CHECK MODEC22:AUDIO SIDE VOL CHK

CH1 DATA:0280 CH2 DATA:03C0

11-19HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

11-3-4. SERVO System Adjustment Mode(A0 : SERVO ADJUST)

This mode adjusts the servo system automatically.The adjustment data obtained by this adjustment is automaticallysaved in the servo system EEPROM (IC403/MDC-13G board) uponcompletion of this adjustment.n. Before starting the servo system adjustment, be sure to set the VTR

SAVE/STBY switch on the inside panel to the STBY position.. When an adjustment fails, the message “INCOMPLETE” appears

on the menu display. The following two causes are possible.1. The adjustment itself has not completed to its end.2. The adjustment ended successfully but the data failed to be

saved in the servo system EEPROM.To determine which of the above two causes applies, execute “A000: NV-RAM INITIALIZE” to check if communication with the servosystem EEPROM is faulty or not. If “A000 : NV-RAM INITIAL-IZE” ends with the message “INCOMPLETE”, communication withthe servo system EEPROM may have an error and the data savingoperation has ended with fail.

The SERVO system adjustment is required when the following boardsand the parts are replaced.When the following boards or parts are replaced, execute the corre-sponding adjustment item as shown below.

nWhen both A001 : CAPSTAN FG DUTY and A002 : CAPSTAN DE-LAY must be executed, execute them in the order of A001 → A002.

Replaced board/part Adjustment item to be executed

MDR-14G board A003 : DRUM PHASE

Upper drum assembly A003 : DRUM PHASE

Drum assembly A003 : DRUM PHASE

S-tension regulator band assembly A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY

T-tension regulator band assembly A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY

Timing belt A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY

S/T idler assembly A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY

S-soft-brake assembly A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY

T-soft brake arm A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY

S-tension regulator assembly A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY

T-tension regulator assembly A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY

Reel table A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY

Reel drive gear assembly A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY

Pinch arm assembly A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY

MDC-13G board A001 : CAPSTAN FG DUTY

A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY

A003 : DRUM PHASE

Capstan motor A001 : CAPSTAN FG DUTY


11-20 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)


(Refer to Section 11-2-2.)2. Press the rotary encoder.3. Select “A0 : SERVO ADJUST” and press the rotary encoder.

The A00 : SERVO ADJUST appears.4. Press the rotary encoder. (If a cassette tape is inserted, it is ejected

automatically.)SERVO ADJUST MENU display appears.

A000 : NV-RAM INITIALIZE

When the servo system EEPROM (IC403/MDC-13G board) isreplaced, the servo system adjustment data is initialized.m. Turn off the main power of this unit when adjustment is completed.. Turn on the main power again, then be sure to implement the

following servo adjustments.A001 : CAPSTAN FG DUTYA002 : CAPSTAN DELAYA003 : DRUM PHASE

1. Select “A000 : NV-RAM INITIALIZE” on the SERVO ADJUSTMENU display and press the rotary encoder.

2. Press the rotary encoder again, then the initialization starts.

SERVO ADJUST MENU

A00:SERVO ADJUST

SERVO ADJUST MENU

A000:NV-RAM INITIALIZE A001:CAPSTAN FG DUTY A002:CAPSTAN DELAY A003:DRUM PHASE

SERVO ADJUST MENUA000:NV-RAM INITIALIZE

COMPLETE

3. Initialization ends.When the initialization ends successfully :The message “COMPLETE” appears.When the initialization fails :The message “INCOMPLETE” appears.mWhen the initialization fails and the message “INCOMPLETE”appears, check the following possible causes.. IC403/MDC-13G board is defective.. Communication between the MDC-13G board and the SS-92G

board is defective.

11-21HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

A001 : CAPSTAN FG DUTY

Adjusts the duty ratio of the capstan FG signal.1. Select “A001 : CAPSTAN FG DUTY” on the SERVO ADJUST

MENU display and press the rotary encoder.2. Press the rotary encoder again to start adjustment.

SERVO ADJUST MENU


SERVO ADJUST MENUA001:CAPSTAN FG DUTY

COMPLETE

3. The adjustment ends. (The adjustment data is automatically savedin the servo system EEPROM (IC403/MDC-13G board)).When adjustment ends successfully :The message “COMPLETE” appears.When the adjustment fails :The message “INCOMPLETE” appears.mWhen the adjustment fails, the message “INCOMPLETE”appears, check the following possible causes.. MDC-13G board capstan FG amplifier or capstan motor driver

circuit is defective.. SS-92G board capstan drive output signal or duty ratio adjust-

ment output signal is abnormal.. Capstan motor is defective.

11-22 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)


Adjusts the capstan add-on recording.Perform this adjustment in the 59.94i format. A working tape isrequired for this adjustment. Use the center position, which is at about20 to 25 minute position of a BCT-40HD cassette tape.nYou can check that a working tape is at about the 20-minute positionas follows:. The 4 black square indicators “ ” turn on in the remaining tape

indication area on the display window/inside panel.. The message “20-15” appears in the remaining tape indication area

on VF.

1. Select “A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY” on the SERVO ADJUSTMENU display and press the rotary encoder.

2. Press the rotary encoder again. The cassette lid opens automatical-ly.

3. When a working tape is inserted, the adjustment starts automati-cally.

SERVO ADJUST MENU


SERVO ADJUST MENUA002:CAPSTAN DELAY

INSERT WORK TAPE

SERVO ADJUST MENUA002:CAPSTAN DELAY

COMPLETE

4. The adjustment ends. (The adjustment data is automatically savedin the servo system EEPROM (IC403/MDC-13G board)). Aworking tape is ejected automatically.When adjustment ends successfully :The message “COMPLETE” appears.When the adjustment fails :The message “INCOMPLETE” appears.mWhen the adjustment fails, the message “INCOMPLETE”appears, check the following possible causes and then performA002 : CAPSAN DELAY adjustment again.. Tape run is abnormal or the tape is damaged.. Tension of the timing belt needs adjustment.Refer to the following sections for adjusting the tension of thetiming belt.8-1-3. FWD Holdback Tension Adjustment8-1-4. REV Holdback Tension Adjustment8-1-5. Timing Belt Tension Adjustment

11-23HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

A003 : DRUM PHASE

Adjusts the drum phase.The alignment tape (HR2-1A : Part No. 8-960-076-11) is required forthis adjustment. The alignment tape (HR2-1A) is used at the positionof 00 : 01 : 00 : 00 to 00 : 10 : 00 : 00.Contents of this adjustment is same as that of “11-3-7. MechanismAdjustment Mode (A4 : MECHANISM ADJUST), A41 : DRUMPHASE (Adjusts the drum phase)”.

1. Select “A003: DRUM PHASE” on the SERVO ADJUST MENUdisplay and press the rotary encoder.

SERVO ADJUST MENUA003:DRUM PHASE

PUSH RE TO ADJUST


INSERT HR2-1A


COMPLETE

2 Press the rotary encoder again. The cassette lid opens automatical-ly.

3. When the alignment tape (HR2-1A : Part No. 8-960-076-11) isinserted, the adjustment starts automatically.nBe sure to use the specified alignment tape. If any tape other thanthe specified alignment tape is used for this adjustment, thecorrect drum phase cannot be obtained even though “COM-PLETE” appears upon completion of adjustment.

4. The adjustment ends. (The adjustment data is automatically savedin the servo system EEPROM (IC403/MDC-13G board)). Thealignment tape is ejected automatically.When adjustment ends successfully :The message “COMPLETE” appears.When the adjustment fails :The message “INCOMPLETE” appears.mWhen the adjustment fails, the message “INCOMPLETE”appears, check the following possible causes and then performA003 : DRUM PHASE adjustment again.. The alignment tape is not cued up to the correct position of 00 :

01 : 00 : 00.. Tape running is abnormal during playback mode.. IC303/MDC-13G board is defective.. Signal circuit between MDC-13G board and the SS-92G board

is defective.. Signal circuit between EQ-88G board and the MDR-14G board

is defective.. Signal circuit between MDC-13G board and the MDR-14G

board is defective.. Drum motor unit is defective.

11-24 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

11-3-5. RF System Adjustment Mode(A1 : RF ADJUST)

This item adjusts the RF system automatically.The data display appears while the STOP button is being pressed. It isnot displayed while the adjustment is in progress.



ejected automatically.)3. Select “A1 : RF ADJUST” and press the rotary encoder. The RF

ADJUST MENU display appears.nIn order to save the respective adjustment data, select A1F : NV-RAM CONTROL and execute “SAVE ALL ADJUSTMENTDATA”.To return the adjustment data to the original data before startingadjustment, execute “RESTORE PREVIOUS DATA” on theA1F : NV-RAM CONTROL.

nIf the message “INCOMPLETE” is displayed in the automaticadjustment, do not save the adjustment data in the NV-RAM(IC1104/EQ-88G board).

A11 : EQUALIZER

Adjusts the playback level (VC) of the PB heads, and the gain (FQ)and the phase (PH) of the playback equalizer circuit.1. Select “A11: EQUALIZER” on the RF ADJUST MENU display


RF ADJUST MENU

A11:EQUALIZER A12:REC CURRENT A13:PLAY PLL A14:FWD PLL A15:REV PLL A16:A/D GAIN A17:A11-A16 ALL ADJUST A1F:NV-RAM CONTROL

RF ADJUST MENUA11:EQUALIZER

PUSH RE TO ADJUST



PUSH RE TO ADJUST

ch VC FQ PH ch VC FQ PH A XX YY ZZ B XX YY ZZ C XX YY ZZ D XX YY ZZ E XX YY ZZ F XX YY ZZ G XX YY ZZ H XX YY ZZ ALL

When the STOP button is pressed at this timing, the adjustmentdata as of this timing is displayed.(XX, YY and ZZ are the 1-byte data.)

11-25HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

11111 To adjust all channels1. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A : Part No. 8-960-076-01).

nBe sure to use the specified alignment tape. If any tape other thanthe specified alignment tape is used, the adjustment cannot beperformed correctly.

2. Select ALL and press the rotary encoder.3. The adjustment starts from channel A.

If the alignment tape is not inserted, the message “INSERT HR5-1A” appears and the cassette lid opens. When the alignment tapeis inserted, “WAITING ...” appears and then the adjustment starts.nIf the message “WAITING ...” keeps appearing even though theautomatic adjustment is started, the un-recorded segment mighthave been played back. In such a case, change the playbackposition of the alignment tape.

4. The adjustment results of all channels are displayed.When STOP is pressed, data as of this timing is displayed.


NOW ADJUSTING... CH RSLT CH RSLT A OK B OK C OK D OK E F G H ALL


AUTO ADJUST COMPLETE RETURN TO A1F TO SAVE CH RSLT CH RSLT A OK B OK C OK D OK E OK F OK G OK H OK ALL OK


INCOMPLETE

CH RSLT CH RSLT A OK B NG C OK D OK E OK F OK G OK H OK ALL NG

When the adjustment ends normally :OK is displayed in all channels and in the ALLcolumn.

When the adjustment fails :NG is displayed in the channel in which an erroroccurs and in the ALL column.

nWhen the message “INCOMPLETE” is displayed inboth cases of 1 and 2, refer to the item “If themessage “INCOMPLETE” is displayed” in Section11-3-5.

22222 To adjust the desired channel only1. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A : Part No. 8-960-076-01).2. Select the channel to adjust and press the rotary encoder.3. Result of adjustment appears for the selected channel only. (OK/

NG is not displayed in the ALL column.)When STOP is pressed, data as of this timing is displayed.When the adjustment ends normally : OK is displayed.When the adjustment fails : NG is displayed.

11-26 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

RF ADJUST MENUA12:REC CURRENT

PUSH RE TO ADJUST



PUSH RE TO ADJUST

CH I EQ CH I EQ A XX YY B XX YY C XX YY D XX YY E XX YY F XX YY G XX YY H XX YY ALL




NOW ADJUSTING...

CH RSLT CH RSLT A OK B OK C OK D OK E F G H ALL


INCOMPLETE




nWhen the message “INCOMPLETE” is displayed inboth cases of 1 and 2, refer to the item “If themessage “INCOMPLETE” is displayed” in Section11-3-5.22222 To adjust the desired channel only

1. Insert a working tape (blank tape : BCT-40HD that is commer-cially available).

2. Select the channel to adjust and press the rotary encoder.3. Result of adjustment appears for the selected channel only. (OK/


A12 : REC CURRENT

Adjusts the recording current and recording frequency responsecharacteristics of the record heads automatically.1. Select “A12 : REC CURRENT” on the RF ADJUST MENU

display and press the rotary encoder.

When the STOP button is pressed at this timing, the adjustmentdata as of this timing is displayed.(XX and YY are the 1-byte data.)

11111 To adjust all channels1. Insert a working tape (blank tape: BCT-40HD that is commercial-

ly available).2. Select ALL and press the rotary encoder.3. The adjustment starts from channel A.

If a working tape is not inserted, the message “INSERT WORKTAPE” appears and the cassette lid opens. When a working tapeis inserted, and then the adjustment starts.

4. The adjustment results of all channels are displayed. When STOPis pressed, data as of this timing is displayed.

11-27HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

A13 : PLAY PLL

Adjusts the VCO free-running frequency of the playback PLL circuitthat is used in the PLAY mode automatically.1. Select “A13 : PLAY PLL” on the RF ADJUST MENU display


RF ADJUST MENUA13:PLAY PLL

PUSH RE TO ADJUST



PUSH RE TO ADJUST

CH VR CH VR A XX B XX C XX D XX E XX F XX G XX H XX ALL


NOW ADJUSTING...





INCOMPLETE


When the STOP button is pressed at this timing, the adjustmentdata as of this timing is displayed.(XX is the 1-byte data.)

11111 To adjust all channels1. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A : Part No. 8-960-076-01).2. Select ALL and press the rotary encoder.3. The adjustment starts.

If the alignment tape is not inserted, the message “INSERT HR5-1A” appears and the cassette lid opens. When the alignment tapeis inserted, and then the adjustment starts.nIf the message “WAITING ...” keeps appearing even though theautomatic adjustment is started, the un-recorded segment mighthave been played back. In such a case, change the playbackposition of the alignment tape.





11-28 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

22222 To adjust the desired channel only1. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A: Part No. 8-960-076-01).2. Select the channel to adjust and press the rotary encoder.3. Result of adjustment appears for the selected channel only. (OK/


11-29HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

A14 : FWD PLL

Adjusts the VCO free-running frequency of the playback PLL circuitthat is used in the FWD mode automatically.1. Select “A14 : FWD PLL” on the RF ADJUST MENU display and

press the rotary encoder.

RF ADJUST MENUA14:FWD PLL

PUSH RE TO ADJUST



PUSH RE TO ADJUST



NOW ADJUSTING...





INCOMPLETE









11-30 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)



11-31HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

A15 : REV PLL

Adjusts the VCO free-running frequency of the playback PLL circuitthat is used in the REV mode automatically.1. Select “A15 : REV PLL” on the RF ADJUST MENU display and

press the rotary encoder.

RF ADJUST MENUA15:REV PLL

PUSH RE TO ADJUST



PUSH RE TO ADJUST



NOW ADJUSTING...





INCOMPLETE



11111 To adjust all channels1. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A: Part No. 8-960-076-01).2. Select ALL and press the rotary encoder.3. The adjustment starts.






11-32 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)



11-33HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

A16 : A/D GAIN

Adjusts gain of the A/D converter that is used to A/D convert theplayback RF signal automatically.1. Select “A16 : A/D GAIN” on the RF ADJUST MENU display


RF ADJUST MENUA16:A/D GAIN

PUSH RE TO ADJUST



PUSH RE TO ADJUST



NOW ADJUSTING...





INCOMPLETE









11-34 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

22222 To adjust the desired channel only1. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A : Part No. 8-960-076-01).2. Select the channel to adjust and press the rotary encoder.3. Result of adjustment appears for the selected channel only. (OK/


11-35HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

A17 : A11-A16 ALL ADJUST

Adjusts all of the items of A11 to A16 in this order.1. Select “A17 : A11-A16 ALL ADJUST” on the RF ADJUST

MENU display and press the rotary encoder.2. Insert alignment tape (HR5-1A : Part No. 8-960-076-01).

nBe sure to use the alignment tape (HR5-1A : Part No. 8-960-076-01).If a tape other than the specified tape is used for adjustment, thecorrect adjustment cannot be executed.

3. The adjustment starts.If the alignment tape is not inserted, the message “INSERT HR5-1A” appears and the cassette lid opens. When the alignment tapeis inserted, “WAITING ...” appears and then the adjustment starts.

4. The adjustments are performed in the order starting from A13 :PLAY PLL, A16 : A/D GAIN, A11 : EQUALIZER, A14 : FWDPLL and A15 : REV PLL. (It takes about 3 to 4 minutes.)nWhen an error occurs in the middle of the adjustment, the adjust-ment is stopped at the timing when an error occurs. The subse-quent adjustments will not be performed.

5. When the A15 : REV PLL adjustment is complete, the alignmenttape is ejected automatically.

6. Replace the alignment tape and insert a working tape (BCT-40HD) instead.

RF ADJUST MENUA17:A11-A16 ALL ADJUST PUSH RE TO ADJUST

RF ADJUST MENUA17:A11-A16 ALL ADJUSTA13:PLAY PLL NOW ADJUSTING...


RF ADJUST MENUA17:A11-A16 ALL ADJUST

SET A WORK TAPE FOR

REC CURRENT ADJUSTMENT

RF ADJUST MENUA17:A11-A16 ALL ADJUSTA12:REC CURRENT NOW ADJUSTING...

CH RSLT CH RSLT A OK B OK C D E F G H ALL

RF ADJUST MENUA17:A11-A16 ALL ADJUST

AUTO ADJUST COMPLETE

RETURN TO A1F TO SAVE

7. The A12 : REC CURRENT adjustment starts automatically.(It takes about 4 to 5 minutes.)

8. The adjustment results of all items are displayed. The tape isejected automatically.When adjustment ends successfully, the message “COMPLETE”appears.When the adjustment fails, the message “INCOMPLETE” appearson the display of the item and the adjustment is stopped at thetiming when an error occurs. The subsequent adjustments will notbe performed.nWhen the adjustment fails and the message “INCOMPLETE” ap-pears, refer to the corresponding item that is described in this Section.

11-36 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

A1F : NV-RAM CONTROL

This is the menu that is prepared to save the RF system adjustmentdata in the NV-RAM (IC1104/EQ-88G board).Executing this menu saves all of the RF system adjustment data in theNV-RAM at once. All of the RF system adjustment data can bereturned to the original status before starting the adjustment byexecuting “RESTORE PREVIOUS DATA” if the data is not saved yetin the NV-RAM.nIf the message “INCOMPLETE” is displayed in the automatic adjust-ment, do not save the adjustment data in the NV-RAM (IC1104/EQ-88G board).

1. Select “A1F : NV-RAM CONTROL” on the RF ADJUST MENUdisplay and press the rotary encoder.

RF ADJUST MENUA1F:NV-RAM CONTROL

NO OPERATION SAVE(ALL)NEW DATA RESTORE PREVIOUS DATA

PUSH RE TO EXECUTE


NOW SAVING......


COMPLETE


NOW LOADING......


COMPLETE

11111 To save the data1. Select “SAVE (ALL) NEW DATA” and press the

rotary encoder.

2. Saving is complete.

22222 To load the data1. Select “RESTORE PREVIOUS DATA” and press the

rotary encoder.

2. Loading is complete.

11-37HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

If the message “INCOMPLETE” is displayedIf the message “INCOMPLETE” is displayed while the respectiveadjustment menus are in progress from A11 to A17, check the follow-ing items in order.. When the alignment tape is used, check if it is the specified (HR5-

1A Part No. 8-960-076-01) or not.→ If it is not the specified tape, use the specified tape and imple-

ment the adjustment.. Perform drum (video head) cleaning referring to n of

Section 11-2-2 C11: PB CH CONDITION and n of C12 :REC CH CONDITION. When cleaning is already implemented, it isnot necessary.

. If the message “INCOMPLETE” is displayed while executing anymenu other than A17, implement the automatic adjustment using theA17 menu.

If the message “INCOMPLETE” is displayed even after the aboveadjustments are performed, check the following possible causes.. Defective adjustment of the servo system, or servo circuit is defec-

tive.→ Servo System Re-Alignment (A0 : SERVO ADJUST)→ Servo System check (C0 : SERVO CHECK)

. The playback heads inside the drum assembly were worn out.→ If required, replace the upper drum assembly or drum assembly.

. Defective adjustment of tape run system, or part mounting isdefective.→ Re-adjustment or re-installation

. EQ-88G board is defective.

. Drum assembly is defective.

. Brush/slip ring assembly is defective or its mounting is defective.→ Replacement or re-installation

. Connection of the flexible board (between the MDR-14G board andthe EQ-88G board) is defective.

11-38 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

11-3-6. Audio System Adjustment Mode(A2 : AUDIO ADJUST)

This mode adjusts the audio system.


(Refer to Section 11-2-2.)2. Press the rotary encoder.3. Select “A2 : AUDIO ADJUST”, and press the rotary encoder.

The AUDIO ADJUST MODE display appears.

A20 : AUDIO A/D ADJUST

Adjusts the audio A/D error correction value by inputting the refer-ence signal through LINE.

1. Select “A20 : AUDIO A/D ADJ” on the AUDIO ADJUSTMODE display, and press the rotary encoder.

2. Set the AUDIO SELECT switch (CH1, CH2) to “AUTO”.Set the LINE/AES/EBU/MIC switch to “LINE”, and input a+4dBu, 1kHz sine wave to the AUDIO IN CH1 connector andCH2 connector at the rear.

3. Select “YES” for ADJUST START, and press the rotary encoder.

4. The auto adjustment starts from CH1.

AUDIO ADJUST MODE

A20:AUDIO A/D ADJ A21:AUDIO D/A ADJ A22:AUDIO SIDE VOL ADJ



SET BOTH OF THE LINE/AES/EBU/MIC SWITCHESTO "LINE". INPUT THE SINE WAVE OF+4dBU OF 1KHZ TO THE AUCH1&CH2 XLR ON THE REAR


CH1:ADJUSTING CH2: CH3: CH4:

11-39HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

5. The results for the all the channels are displayed.When the adjustment ends successfully :The message “COMPLETE” appears for all the channels.When the adjustment fails :The message “ERR” appears for the channel with an error.m. If “TIME OVER ERR” appears, check the input signal and

perform the adjustment again.. If “INPUT OVER ERR” appears, check the signal level since

the level of the signal being input may be too large.. If “INPUT UNDER ERR” appears, check the signal level since

the level of the signal being input may be too small.. If “NO INPUT ERR” appears, check the input signal since the

signal may not be input correctly.

A21 : AUDIO D/A ADJUST

Adjusts the audio D/A error correction value with reference to theinternal SG.

1. Select “A21 : AUDIO D/A ADJ” on the AUDIO ADJUSTMODE display, and press the rotary encoder.

2. Select “YES” for ADJUST START, and press the rotary encoder.3. Turn the CH-1 AUDIO LEVEL knob so that the CH-1 output

level becomes 0 dBm ±0.05 dB.4. Turn the CH-2 AUDIO LEVEL knob so that the CH-2 output

level becomes 0 dBm ±0.05 dB.

5. Select “YES” for COMPLETE ADJUSTING?, and press therotary encoder.When the adjustment ends successfully :The message “COMPLETE” appears.nIf “NO” is selected, the data adjusted this time becomes invalid,and the previously adjusted data becomes valid.


CH1:COMPLETE CH2:COMPLETE CH3:COMPLETE CH4:COMPLETE




COMPLETE ADJUSTING? YES →NO

TURN CH1 AND CH2 AU LEVEL KNOBS SO THAT CH1 AND CH2 OUTPUT LEVELS BECOME 0dBm +-0.05dB


COMPLETE →YES NO

11-40 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

A22 : AUDIO SIDE VOL ADJ

Adjusts the correction value of the AUDIO LEVEL volume control(inside panel).

1. Select “A22 : AUDIO SIDE VOL ADJ” on the AUDIO ADJUSTMODE display, and press the rotary encoder.

2. Turn the LEVEL knobs of CH1 and CH2 to the position one scaleaway to the left from the center position.

3. Select “YES” for ADJUST START, and press the rotary encoder.4. The auto adjustment starts from CH1.

5. The results for CH1 and CH2 are displayed.When the adjustment ends successfully :The message “OK” appears for CH1 and CH2, and “ADJUSTCOMPLETE” appears.When the adjustment fails :The message “ERR” appears for the channel with an error.nIf “TIME OVER ERR” is displayed, perform the adjustmentagain. If “TIME OVER ERR” appears again, replace the volumecontrol (RV2 or RV3 on the FP-152 board) of the LEVEL knob.



BEFORE ADJUST START,ALIGN CH1&CH2 AU KNOBSTO THE POS ONE SCALELEFT OF MECHA CENTER POS


CH1:ADJUSTING CH2:


CH1:OK DATA:0380 CH2:OK DATA:0280

ADJUST COMPLETE

11-41HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

11-3-7. Mechanism Adjustment Mode(A4 : MECHANISM ADJUST)

This menu sets the items that are required for mechanism adjustment.

nImplement this menu item before starting the mechanism adjustment.



ejected automatically.)3. Select “A4 : MECHANISM ADJUST” and press the rotary

encoder.The message MECHANISM ADJUST MENU appears.

MECHANISM ADJUST MENU

A40:PATH MODE SEL A41:DRUM PHASE


X1 REV SEARCH : OFF REC HEAD PB : OFF SLACK MUTE : OFF CASSE. ID MUTE : OFF


X1 REV SEARCH : OFF REC HEAD PB : ?OFF SLACK MUTE : ON CASSE. ID MUTE : OFF

A40 : PATH MODE SEL

Contents of this menu item are all saved even after the VTR mainte-nance menu is set to OFF. However, the contents return to OFF whenthe main power is turned off.1. Select “A40 : PATH MODE SEL” on the MECHANISM AD-

JUST MENU display and press the rotary encoder.2. Select the desired item to change its setting and press the rotary

encoder.

3. The question mark (?) appears in the left of the ON/OFF.4. Rotate the rotary encoder to switch ON/OFF. Press the rotary

encoder to set ON/OFF.Setting contents of each menu itemx1 REV SEARCH OFF : _4 times speed (normal SEARCH speed)

ON: _1 time speedREC HEAD PB OFF : Normal playback

ON: Playback from the recording headSLACK MUTE OFF : When an error occurs, an error code

appears in the display window and theunit stops its operation.

ON : When an error occurs, an error code isnot displayed and the unit does notstop its operation.

CASSE. ID MUTE OFF : Only the HD cassette tape and acleaning cassette tape can be accepted.

ON: Any types of cassette tape can be accepted.

A41 : DRUM PHASE

This menu item is exactly same as those of Section 11-3-4. SERVO Sys-tem Adjustment Mode (A003 : DRUM PHASE). Refer to Section 11-3-4.

11-42 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

11-3-8. Other Adjustments (A9 : OTHERS ADJUST)

Implement this menu item only when the voltage drop due to internalcircuit is going to be corrected and when the MDC-13G board is goingto be replaced.


(Refer to Section 11-2-2.)2. Confirm that a cassette tape is not inserted and press the rotary

encoder.3. Select “A9 : OTHERS” and press the rotary encoder.

The message OTHERS ADJUST MENU appears.

A90 : BATTERY CORRECTION

This item applies the exact +12 V voltage from outside to correct thevoltage drop in the internal circuit.1. Select “A90 : BATTERY CORRECTION” and press the rotary

encoder.

OTHERS ADJUST MENU

A90:BATTERY CORRECTION A91:MDC-13 BOARD CHANGE

OTHERS ADJUST MENUA90:BATTERY CORRECTION

FEED ACCURATE DC+12V

PUSH RE TO ADJUST

OTHERS ADJUST MENUA90:BATTERY CORRECTION

COMPLETE

2. Press the rotary encoder again. The adjustment ends.

11-43HDW-F900R/V1 (E)

A91 : MDC-13 BOARD CHANGE

This item performs the setting that enables saving the contents of thebackup RAM into the EEPROM (IC403) of the new replacementMDC-13G board when the MDC-13G board is going to be replaced.

nPerform this setting immediately before replacing the MDC-13Gboard.When this setting is performed, the contents of the backup RAM aresaved in the EEPROM at the first power-on after the MDC-13G boardis replaced.

1. Select “A91 : MDC-13 BOARD CHANGE “ and press the rotaryencoder.

OTHERS ADJUST MENUA91:MDC-13 BOARD CHANGE

CHANGE : NO

OTHERS ADJUST MENUA91:MDC-13 BOARD CHANGE

CHANGE : YES

TURN OFF POWER

2. When the rotary encoder is rotated, NO changes to YES.

3. When the YES message appears, turn off the main power once.4. Replace the MDC-13G board.5. Turn on the main power.

nFor the replacement procedure of the MDC-13G board, refer to“7-36. MDC-13G Board Replacement”.

Printed in Japan

Sony Corporation 2006. 6 16

©2006

HDW-F900R (SY) E

9-968-281-01

Documents

HD CAMCORDER HDW-F900Rcar.france3.mars.free.fr/Formation INA HD... · Extending the DVP Board Assembly (When you want to check the B side or a part of A side of the SS-92G board).....1-41